JP6919617B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Gaming machine having a container for accommodating the contained object is that known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-205029

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is room for improvement in the operation of the operating means arranged on the object to be contained. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the operating means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with an accommodating body that accommodates the contained object and is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to a predetermined frame member. An operating means that is arranged and operable, and a notification means that can notify information about the operation of the operating means toward the front side of the game machine and is arranged on the front side of the game machine, and a first electric Corresponds to the arrangement position of the control means connected to the contained object by the connecting line and controlling the notification means, the power supply means connected to the contained object by the second electrical connecting line, and the operating means. The object to be contained includes the first electrical connection line, the second electrical connection line, and one or more other electrical connection lines. Connected, at least the first electrical connection line and the second electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines are connected to the inclusion, and at least one other electrical connection line is non-existent. In the connected state, information regarding the operation of the operating means is configured to be broadcastable, and the first electrical connection line and the second electrical connection line are transmitted from the back side of the gaming machine to the contained object. Connected, the operating means is configured to be operable on the operating direction side of the operating means rather than the end of the forming portion on the side opposite to the operating direction of the operating means, and the accommodating body is the front surface of the gaming machine. The operating means can be relatively displaced with respect to the predetermined frame member to a position where the operating means does not overlap with the predetermined frame member visually, and the notification means is the first electrical connection line and the second electrical. In a state where the connecting line and the other electrical connecting line are connected to the contained object, information on the game can be notified.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operating means can be suitably operated.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in the line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and an operating unit in the XIV-XIV line of FIG. (A) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulation device. (A) is a rear view of the contact member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operating member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board and an operation unit in the line XXIa-XXIa of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and a firing effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a firing effect unit. (A) is a side view of the first light irradiating device in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiating device in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 25. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the launching unit in line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an injection device. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line of FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. 35 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (C) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line of FIG. 36 (b). (A) is a plan view of the front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, a contact member, and a front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of a rear transmission member, a transmission arm member, and a lid member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a plan view of the injection device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of. It is a front perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an effect member. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an effect member. It is a front view of the functional plate part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of the functional plate part. It is a front view of the functional plate part. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the effect member. It is a rear view of the production member. (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction of arrow LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a). (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction of arrow LXXVb of FIG. 75 (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect member in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75. It is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. It is a perspective view of the wiring arm member. It is a perspective view of the path forming member of a wiring guide member. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIb-LXXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the line LXXXXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. It is a partial front view enlarged view of the 1st decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit in the third embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member due to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member with the rotation of the front side transmission member and the rear side transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of a columnar protrusion. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and a launching unit according to a sixth embodiment in a line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the substrate box in 7th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a board box. (A) is a front view of the board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a rear perspective view of a box cover. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover in the direction of arrow CXa of FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover in the direction of arrow CXb of FIG. 109. (A) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (A) is a front perspective view of the main control device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device. FIG. 112 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in the partial CXIII. (A) is a front view of the main control device in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), and (b) is a side view of the main control device in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114 (a). (C) is a side view of the main control device in the direction view of the arrow CXIVc of FIG. 114 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box when the key is operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box when the key is operated to the on position. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box in the direction of arrow CXVIa of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box in the direction of arrow CXVIa of FIG. 115 (b). be. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115 (a). It is a figure. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box at the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box at the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of FIG. 115 (a). It is a figure. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. It is a figure. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the cutting line CXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 121 (a). (A) is a front view of the substrate box according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the substrate box according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in eleventh embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the CXXXI-CXXXX line of FIG. 130. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a partially front enlarged view of the variable winning device in the range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in line CXXXIII-CXXXIII of FIG. 132 (a). It is a top view of the variable winning device. It is a top view of the variable winning device. It is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a top view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa of FIG. 137 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 137 (a). It is a front view of the variable winning device. (A) and (b) are front schematic views of a rolling surface, an inclined surface arranged on the upper right side, and an inclined surface arranged on the upper left side, which schematically show the movement locus of a ball rolling in the range before entering the ball. It is a partial front enlarged view of the game board which shows the vicinity of a variable winning device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the first operation pattern, (b). Is a diagram showing the opening / closing patterns of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening corresponding to the rounds, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the second operation pattern, and FIG. It is a figure which showed the opening and closing pattern of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening corresponding to a round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of 3 operation patterns. It is a front view of the game board in the twelfth embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow CLb of FIG. 150 (a), and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device of FIG. 150 (b). It is a rear view of the variable winning device in the direction view of arrow CLc. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device in the direction of the arrow CLIb of FIG. 151 (a), and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device of FIG. 151 (b). It is a rear view of the variable winning device in the arrow CLIc direction view. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow CLIIIb of FIG. 152 (a), and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device of FIG. 152 (b). It is a rear view of the variable winning device in the direction view of arrow CLIIC. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device on the CLIIIa-CLIIIa line of FIG. 150 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device on the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line of FIG. 150 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device on the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. 151 (a), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device on the CLIIId-CLIIId line of FIG. 152 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device on the CLIVA-CLIVa line of FIG. 151 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device on the CLIVb-CLIVb line of FIG. (C) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the CLIVc-CLIVc line of FIG. 151 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the CLVa-CLVa line of FIG. 152 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the CLVb-CLVb line of FIG. 152 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 152 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the variable winning device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance of the variable winning apparatus in the 1st control example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is a top view of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd rotating member and a transmission member. (A) and (b) are right side views of the second rotating member and the transmitting member in the direction of arrow CLXIa in FIG. 158. (A) to (c) are front views of the pre-entry range in the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158. It is a front view of the game board in 14th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the variable winning device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the variable winning apparatus in the CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa line of FIG. 173. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line of FIG. 172, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line of FIG. 172. Yes, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line of FIG. 172. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line of FIG. 172, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line of FIG. 172. Yes, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line of FIG. 172. It is a front view of the game board and the variable winning device in 16th Embodiment. It is a top view of the variable winning apparatus in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the transmission rotating body, (b) is a side view of the transmission rotating body in the direction of the arrow CLXXIXb of FIG. 179 (a), and (c) is the circumference of the transmission rotating body. It is a developed view which developed the surface, and (d) is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the relationship between the rotation direction of a transmission rotating body, and the state of the 1st guide plate and the 2nd guide plate. It is a front view of the variable winning device. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first guide plate and the second guide plate in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is the first guide plate and the second guide plate in the fifth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus in 19th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the variable winning device in the 20th embodiment in the range corresponding to the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158, and (c) is the direction view of the arrow CLXXXIIIc of FIG. 183 (a). It is a partial top view of the variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the game board in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device according to the 22nd embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the CLXXXVb-CLXXXVb line of FIG. 185 (a), and FIG. It is a partial side view of the variable winning apparatus in the direction view of the arrow CLXXXVc of 185 (b). It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of ROM in the MPU of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example in 22nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st guide plate and the 2nd guide plate in a small hit A, and the time change of the 1st guide plate and the 2nd guide plate in a small hit B. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the specific winning opening in the eighth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the timed change of the specific winning opening in the ninth operation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. (A) and (b) are top views of the variable winning apparatus according to the 23rd embodiment. It is a right side view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device. It is a top view of the transmission hole of a 1st guide plate, a linear motion member, and a rotary member. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a partially top view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow CXCVIIIb of FIG. 198 (a), and (c) is a partially top view of the variable winning device. It is a front view, (d) is a partial top surface enlarged view of the variable winning apparatus in the direction view of arrow CXCVIIId of FIG. 198 (c). (A) is a developed view of the circumferential surface of the transmission rotating body according to the 24th embodiment, (b) is a partially developed view of the first effect section B24760, and (c) is a second effect. It is a partial development view of the section B24770. (A) and (b) are right side views of the electric accessory according to the 25th embodiment. (A) is a right side view of the transmission member in which the transmission member is visually recognized from the direction of the rotation axis, and (b) is a front view of the transmission member in the direction of arrow CCIb of FIG. 201 (a). (A) to (c) are front views of the electric accessory and the second winning opening. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus in 26th Embodiment. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 28th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the lower frame. It is a rear perspective view of the lower frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. It is a top view of the lower frame. It is a front view of the lower frame. It is a rear view of the lower frame. (A) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXIIIa of FIG. 211, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXIIIb of FIG. 211. It is sectional drawing of the lower frame in the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210. It is sectional drawing of the lower frame in the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210. It is sectional drawing of the lower frame in the CCXVI-CCXVI line of FIG. 211. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the CCXVIIa portion of FIG. 214, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the CCXVIIb-CCXVIIb line of FIG. 210. It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame which shows the transition of the sphere distribution operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section in the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210. It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame which shows the transition of the sphere distribution operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section in the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210. It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame which shows the transition of the sphere distribution operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section in the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210. It is a front perspective view of the lower frame in 29th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the lower frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. It is a top view of the lower frame. It is a front view of the lower frame. It is a rear view of the lower frame. (A) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIa of FIG. 226, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIb of FIG. 226. It is sectional drawing of the lower frame in the CCXXIX-CCXXIX line of FIG. 225. It is sectional drawing of the lower frame in the CCXXIX-CCXXIX line of FIG. 225. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the CCXXXI-CCXXXX line of FIG. 227. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the CCXXXII-CCXXXII line of FIG. 227. It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame which shows the transition of the sphere distribution operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section in the CCXXIX-CCXXIX line of FIG. 225. It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame which shows the transition of the sphere distribution operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section in the CCXXIX-CCXXIX line of FIG. 225. It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame which shows the transition of the sphere distribution operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section in the CCXXIX-CCXXIX line of FIG. 225. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in the CCXXXVI-CCXXXVI line of FIG. 235 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in 30th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the lower frame. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in 30th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the lower frame. (A) is a top view of the dish member according to the 31st embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member in the CCXLIb-CCXLIb line of FIG. 241 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the dish member in the CCXLIc-CCXLIc line of a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 32nd embodiment, corresponding to the cross section in the CCXXXII-CCXXXII line of FIG. 227, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 33rd embodiment. , Corresponds to the cross section of the CCXXXII-CCXXXII line of FIG. 227.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper surface will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface will be described as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. It is attached to the back surface side (or front surface side) of (see 1).

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate which is provided with a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate is the game area and the first. By closing the space between the two winning openings 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second symbol is displayed. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) that can be visually recognized through the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing with the variable display of the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). Three symbol rows, middle and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 may be performed during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, left or right or below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 in the front view, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the front view of the first winning opening 64, or may be on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the game area.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while making the state.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second by "left-handed". You can also aim for the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured so that the first winning opening 64 cannot be aimed at by "right-handed", and the ball launched by "left-handed" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow by adding a game property that changes the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. For example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing drive and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. ..

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5 and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. In FIGS. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 511 and the outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The back case 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that is projected toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 513b in which fastening screws to be fastened to the above can be inserted.

By fitting the positioning convex portion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b, and the fastening screw is screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also rectangular correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and rails 61 and 62. , General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 composed of a shape, a ball flow unit 150 formed so that a ball discharged from a game area can flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) are launched toward the front side of a third symbol display device 81. It is configured by assembling a firing effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that its peripheral edge portion is arranged and fixed facing the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the player can easily see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure arranged on the back surface side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even when the ball flow-down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so that the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 can be visually recognized. .. In the present embodiment, the ball flow unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect of the visually recognized ball, but the details will be described later.

If there is a part that the player does not want to see, a seal member having low light transmission (or light transmission) may be attached.

The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The firing effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partition member 310 for partitioning the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is centered. It is possible to fire toward the inside of 86. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86 can effectively visually recognize the granular member 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 arranged symmetrically on the inner left and right portions of the rear case 510. To be equipped.

Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged at the left and right positions of the opening 511a on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, respectively. First, an outline of the operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. Note that FIG. 7 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 8 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the overhanging state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state. In FIG. 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the enlarged state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state are shown.

Further, in FIG. 10, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the effect standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect upper end state are shown. In FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state, and the displacement rotation on the right side. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of the effect.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes state from the effect standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state can be executably controlled on condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the displacement rotation unit 800 can be controlled. By controlling the state change from the effect standby state executably on the condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 overlap in a front view. Can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved (the front-rear positions can be allowed to overlap).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be capable of downward displacement with the effect members 700 collectively arranged at one location, and is in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after the downward displacement. The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the above direction, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognized in the front view is large (see FIG. 9).

After that, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), are displaced ascending and displaced in a state of being collectively arranged at one place, and returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG.

The state change shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced from the effect standby state in a direction having not only a vertical component but also a horizontal component.

In the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along the path curve S1 set by the mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc portion S1a having an arc shape centered on each center point C1 and an advancing / retreating path portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common arc portion S1a to the left, right, outside, and downward.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right lateral slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left lateral slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, while the right side. The lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

Therefore, when the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is controlled to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 11, the lateral slide member 840 is as if the third symbol display device 81. The player can visually recognize the player as if the player is rotationally displaced about the center point C1 arranged near the center.

That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotation effect body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom of the effect of the effect using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 7, and FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are shown in FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 on the line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 on the line XIV-XIV of FIG.

Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the state in which the game board 13 is assembled to the front side of the operation unit 500 is shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 (see FIG. 2).

Further, FIGS. 12 (a) and 13 (a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12 (b) and 13 (b), the granular member 320 is launched and scattered. An example of the state is illustrated.

In the effect standby state shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the central portion of the collective arrangement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged above the partition member 310 of the launch effect unit 300, and the partition member 700. Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is made visible through 310.

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the effect member 700 is arranged close to the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is invisible and shielded.

Since the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 does not interfere with the partition member 310, the launch effect unit 300 is set so as to execute the operation effect of firing the granular member 320 on the partition member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is launched by a path that ascends and inclines toward the front. , It is struck against the front wall portion of the partition member 310, and rises while bouncing within the range formed by the partition member 310.

As a result, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it were approaching his / her own side, so that the attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

Further, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the constituent members arranged in the game area such as the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) can be arranged. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, as the standby position of the granular member 320 to be launched toward the partition member 310 of the present embodiment, a position directly below the partition member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted. However, in this case, since the firing effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the guide path for flowing the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64. It becomes difficult, and there is a possibility that it is necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partition member 310 is arranged at the foremost position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged diagonally rearward, so that a space on the back side of the first winning opening 64 can be secured. The guide path of the ball can be arranged without any problem, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first winning opening 64 cannot be freely arranged.

When the control for firing the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 12 (a), as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the granular member 320 and the third symbol display device 81 scattered inside the partition member 310. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. As a result, the player can visually recognize the combination of the two-dimensional display and the movement of the granular member 320 that is three-dimensionally displaced.

When the control for firing the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13 (a), as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the granular member 320 is scattered inside the partition member 310 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in a state. It can be shown to the player in combination with the changes. In this case, for example, by matching the timing of scattering of the granular member 320 with the timing of displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 is on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 whose state changes. It is possible to visually recognize how the elements are scattered, and it is possible to enhance the power of the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

Here, as a method of producing the effect together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be considered.

However, as in the present embodiment, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is considered that it is difficult to show the display and it is difficult to effectively produce the display.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the partition member 310 that forms a range in which the granular member 320 that produces an operation in accordance with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is scattered is provided on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult to show the granular member 320 to the player.

Further, by forming the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from becoming difficult to see as compared with the case where the granular member 320 is made of a large member.

Therefore, even when most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be improved.

Further, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

That is, the displacement rotation unit 800 is in a state in which the lateral slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and is arranged in the same manner as the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (effect standby state, see FIG. 7) and laterally. Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed depending on the state in which the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower end state of the effect, the upper end state of the effect, see FIGS. 10 and 11), the state can be changed according to the state. , The effect of combining the scattered granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 for visual recognition, and the effect of combining the scattered granular member 320 and the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 for visual recognition are executed. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can effectively produce the effect by scattering the granular member 320 according to the displacement of the mode in which the effect member 700 is dispersed, but the displacement rotation unit 800 can rotate. By scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the rotation of the pinnate member 854 arranged in the pinnate member 854, an air flow is generated by the rotation of the pinnate member 854 (the pinnate member 854 is so large that the air flow is generated). It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at high speed), and the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing it in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. Can also be used for.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the firing effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit There is a possibility of collision with 800.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advance / retreat path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid the collision between the launch effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing / retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through the gap provided in the oblique direction between the injection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 can be set. In addition to being able to improve the degree of freedom of setting, it is configured so that it can be displaced upward beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement width of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. ..

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the space between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 is arranged to such an extent that a space can be secured between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310. Not considered. Therefore, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range during transportation and regulate the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 so that they are not arranged close to each other.

It will be described back to FIG. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510. The displacement regulating device 180 is configured so that the state can be changed by manual operation from the back surface of the rear case 510, and regulates that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is downwardly displaced from the effect standby state in the regulated state.

By adopting the displacement regulating device 180, even when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped and transported.

More specifically, conventionally, the cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) is packed in the displacement range of the movable accessory to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. As a result, it may be possible to prevent the movable accessory from being displaced at the time of shipment or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no penetration point for pulling out the cushioning material, so that the game board 13 and the back case 510 If the and is not disassembled, the cushioning material cannot be removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure, the displacement forming device 180 is adopted in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between the regulated state that regulates the vertical displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the regulated release state in which the regulation is released without releasing the fixing of the game board 13 and the rear case 510. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

15 (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15 (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15 (c) is a front perspective of the displacement regulating device 180. It is a figure.

In addition, FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B show the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state, and FIG. 15C shows the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state. As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c), the displacement regulating device 180 can switch between the regulated state and the deregulated state when the cylindrical portion 183d appears and disappears from the contact member 181. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d projects to the inside of the back case 510 and is configured to be engaged with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, which will be described in detail later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18A is a rear view of the contact member 181. 18 (b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18 (c) is a front view of the operation member 183.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 has a contact member 181 arranged in contact with the back case 510 (see FIG. 6) and a contact member arranged on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operation member 183 whose displacement is guided by the guide member 182, and an arrangement between the operation member 183 and the contact member 181. It is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 that is provided and is configured to be able to apply a urging force toward the back side to the operating member 181.

As the operating member 183 is formed from the elongated substantially elliptical shape on the left and right in the rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 accommodating the operating member 183 also have the elongated substantially elliptical shape on the left and right in the rear view. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right when viewed from the rear.

The contact member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and for holding the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the back side. The wall portion is extended, and the insertion hole 181a is formed at the left and right ends and the fastening portion protruding from the rear case 510 is inserted, and the coil spring 184 is a double tubular shape that can be arranged in the gap. A tubular holding portion 181b projecting to the side and an engaged portion 181c which constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engaged with the operating member 183 are provided.

The guide member 182 is a screw through which a main body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction in an elliptical ring shape along the outer circumference of the contact member 181 and a fastening screw screwed into a fastening portion inserted into the insertion hole 181a are inserted. The insertion portion 182b, the fastening portion 182c into which the fastening screw to be inserted into the contact member 181 is screwed, the retaining portion 182d protruding inward in the radial direction at the rear end of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. It is provided with a ridge 182e projecting inward in the radial direction in the upper and lower inner portions in the front-rear direction.

From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 and can be held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the situation in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled is limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side (the side covered by the back case 510) of the contact member 182. Therefore, when the displacement regulating device 180 is assembled to the rear case 510, the fastening screw cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the rear case 510.

Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the back case 510 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). ) Can be easily touched, making it easy to remove the displacement regulating device 180 from the rear case 510.

The operation member 183 has a main body portion 183a formed in an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 and formed in a cup shape in which the rear view outer shape is formed and the front side is opened, and the front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. A flange portion 183b projecting outward in the radial direction, a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b, a cylindrical portion 183d projecting from the center of the bottom portion of the main body portion 183a to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and a cylinder thereof. A position where the arc-shaped ridge portion 183e, which has an arc shape larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 and is projected on the front side with the portion 183d as the center, can be engaged with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. It is provided with an engaging portion 183f which is projected from the above and is capable of forming a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An oval-shaped sticker is attached to the back surface of the plate of the operating member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed on one end in the lateral direction (see FIG. 15 (a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent mistakes in vertical posture during assembly. can do.

By making the main body portion 183a oval, it is possible to easily prevent the operating member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182.

The flange portion 183b is formed to be larger in rear view than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, whereby the operating member 183 can be prevented from falling out of the guide member 182. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the abutting member 181 and the guide member 182.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the ridge 182e of the guide member 182, and has a role of smoothly performing the front-rear displacement of the operation member 183. In the present embodiment, the ridges 182e are formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side, and the groove portions 183c are also formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side. This makes it possible to prevent erroneous assembly of the operating member 183 by mistakenly raising and lowering it.

The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion to be inserted into the winding center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be insertable into the central opening of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. When the cylindrical portion 183d projects from the central opening of the contact member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to regulate the vertical displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be shared by both the portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is arranged to face the large diameter side tubular portion of the tubular holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped ridge portion 183e and the tubular holding portion 181b come into contact with each other prior to the other portions, so that the load generation area can be increased and the load generation area can be increased locally. It is possible to prevent a load from being generated.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is formed not in a circular shape but in an arc shape in which the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is arranged at the interrupted position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 183f from being too far apart from the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184.

The state change of the operating member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is urged to the back side by a coil spring 184, and when the operating member 183 is pushed toward the front side against this urging force, it is composed of an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. The latch mechanism is activated, and each time the latch mechanism is pushed in at least the minimum stroke on which the latch mechanism acts, the above-mentioned restricted state and the restricted release state are alternately switched.

As described above, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operating member 183 becomes the minimum described above by applying a large external force to the pachinko machine 10 not only when the operating member 183 is intentionally operated. If it is displaced by the stroke, the displacement regulating device 180 may unintentionally change its state.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is unintentionally changed due to an impact at the time of shipment or vibration during transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state (effect member 700). Is placed at the upper displacement end). When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is placed close to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13) and receives an impact at the time of shipment or vibration during transportation, the effect member 700 causes the effect member 700 to launch the partition member of the effect unit 300. There is a risk of collision with the 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is arranged at a position (eccentric to the right) away from the position (center position) where the urging force is applied to the operating member 183, and the operating member The gap between the groove 183c of the 183 and the ridge 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintaining ability of the operating member 183 is intentionally lowered.

As a result, the posture of the operating member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be tilted in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operating member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement in which the operating member 183 is displaced in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operating unit 500 will be described. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, which are FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). Is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the XXIa-XXIa line of FIG. 20.

Note that FIG. 21 (a) shows the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 21 (b) shows the deregulated state of the displacement regulating device 180.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the opening / closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and the operator can reach out by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is configured to be touched. Since this position is on the opposite side of the side (opening / closing tip side, right side) where the worker who works by opening the inner frame 12 enters, the worker unintentionally displaces the displacement regulating device when the inner frame 12 is opened. It is possible to avoid touching 180.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the above-mentioned latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load pushing the operating member 183 is used for moving the operating member 183 back and forth, but also for changing the posture of the operating member 183.

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side portion moves back and forth sufficiently, the posture of the operating member 183 may change and the left side portion may not be sufficiently pushed in.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement regulating device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to push the forming portion of the latch mechanism with a pinpoint to cause the displacement required for the displacement regulating device 180, and the displacement is displaced. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulating device 180.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to restrict the displacement. Since the device 180 is operated, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform the operation of pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism with a pinpoint.

Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed occurs in a mode in which the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed to the pushing side. Therefore, as the pushing amount increases, the pushing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operating member 183.

In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to regulate the displacement of the transmission gear 650. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotational direction centered on the front-rear axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (front-rear direction) are orthogonal to each other, the operation member 183 applies a load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. It can be prevented from receiving. As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated even if the forming portion of the latch mechanism is not made rigid.

As described above, by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state, the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained. Therefore, the use of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to the time of transportation. For example, after installation in a game machine store, maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily by maintaining the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 with the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state at the time of maintenance.

That is, when the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 during the maintenance work of the displacement rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the displacement regulating device 180 can maintain the state (arrangement) of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, so that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented from colliding with each other. Can be done.

If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched to the deregulated state by pushing the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180. (See FIG. 21 (b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement regulating device 180 is released from the regulation by looking into the open tip side (right side). It will be described that it is configured so that it can be confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the operating member 183 is arranged on the front side of the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that it is viewed from the right side. The operation member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the deregulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the operating member 183 is arranged so as to project from the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 to the rear side. In the directional view looking from the right side, the operating member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

Therefore, as a confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator does not have to fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, but slightly opens the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. It can be confirmed that the displacement regulating device 180 is in the deregulated state by visually recognizing that the operating member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 in the direction view when the displacement regulating device 183 is opened and viewed from the right side.

In the present embodiment, since the back case 510 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and the operating member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, the visibility of the operating member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case where the power is turned on with the cylindrical portion 183d inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A) will be described. .. In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) indicates that the scaling unit 600 does not change its state during the operation when the power is introduced. The position detection error display associated with this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

By showing this position detection error display to the clerk of the gaming machine store, it is possible to notice that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not be changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of a state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and does not detect the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued by using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement / reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. Can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, the operating member 183 is configured so as not to be pushed in while the power is turned on, and it is required to turn off the power once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation member 183 may be operated even while the power is turned on.

Further, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the pushing operation may be disabled due to the friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operating member 183, or a large diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the back surface of the plate of the transmission gear 650 and the large diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged in the front-rear direction to limit the displacement of the operating member 183.

As a different situation, an example will be described in which the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in during maintenance at a gaming machine store. In the present embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 coincides with the cylindrical portion 183d in the front-rear direction.

For example, even when the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 8) during maintenance, the displacement regulating device 180 changes to the regulated state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, when a driving force is generated after the maintenance is completed and the transmission gear 650 is displaced, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. Limited to.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by displaying an error (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. It is possible to notify the clerk of the gaming machine store that this is the case, but the details will be described later.

Thereby, even if a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is not separately provided, the device for detecting the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be diverted to determine the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

The operation of the displacement regulating device 180 can be executed before or after assembling the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12 but also to open the back pack 92 to the inner frame 12, so if possible, displacement regulation is required before assembling to the inner frame 12. It is preferable to operate the device 180.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. These effect devices will be described in order from the launch effect unit 300.

FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the assembled state of the firing effect unit 300, the partition member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

Since the partition member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can visually recognize the range surrounded by the center frame 86. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular member 320 are overlapped and visually recognized.

FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. In FIGS. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 includes a partition member 310 arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forming a box shape with an open lower side, and a partition thereof. A plurality of granular members 320 that are displaceably arranged inside the member 310, an injection device 400 that is arranged so as to close the lower open portion so that the granular member 320 does not fall off from the partition member 310, and a partition member. A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of the 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

The partition member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a front plate portion 311 which is a plate-shaped portion arranged on the foremost surface and a curved plate portion 312 integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And, the bottom plate portion parallel to the front plate portion 311 is arranged to face the back side of the front plate portion 311 and has a closing wall extending from the left and right and the upper portion of the bottom plate portion to the front side so as to close the gap. The back compartment 313 and the interior space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) which is integrally formed below the back compartment 313 and is formed between the front plate 311 and the back compartment 313 are communicated with each other. It includes a back surface compartment lower part 314 that can form a path between the curved plate portion 312 and a modified penetrating portion 315 that is formed through the back surface compartment lower part 314.

The size of the partition member 310 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 is about the same as the size of the front view of the partition member 310. It is formed so as to be. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed so as to have substantially the same shape.

As a result, the constituent member for hiding the edge portion of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for the purpose of hiding the edge portion of the partition member 310. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not required, and the edge of the partition member 310 is visually recognized so as to overlap the display by the third symbol display device 81 while reducing the number of members. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the third symbol display device 81 is divided, the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular members 320 can scatter, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 are scattered too much, and the number of the granular members 320 is very large for a powerful effect. There will be a need for more. Therefore, if the space is formed as a narrow space to some extent, a powerful effect can be performed by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, the granular member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is secured to be about the same as the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear compartment lower portion 314. Therefore, as compared with the case where the front-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and sudden deceleration at the time of injection.

Further, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the lower part 314 of the rear compartment than the left and right central portions 312b, the left and right portions 312b are compared with the movement path of the granular member 320 in the vicinity of the left and right central portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 in the above can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is ejected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement paths of the granular member 320 can be concentrated in the vicinity of the left and right central portions 312b, and the granular member 320 is the internal space IE1. It is possible to easily reach the vicinity of the central part. This makes it easier for the player to see the granular member 320.

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize the granular member 320 as if the granular member 320 explodes and scatters in all directions from the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, so that the operation effect of the granular member 320 is powerful. Can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side and downward and inclined toward the center of the left and right sides.

As a result, regardless of where the granular member 320 is arranged in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 that is downwardly displaced by its own weight can be displaced downward on the back surface side while being moved toward the left and right center side.

Further, the degree of downward inclination of the curved plate portion 312 in the left and right portions 312a is configured so that the downward inclination toward the left and right center side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the back surface side. As a result, as a tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320, the displacement toward the left-right center side can be generated in preference to the displacement toward the back surface side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400 described later, the granular members 320 try to be displaced to the back side all at once at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of the downward displacement. Can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination of the curved plate portion 312 toward the left-right central portion 312b is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left-right central side of the left-right portion 312a of the curved plate portion 312. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from being densely packed in the middle of the flow.

On the other hand, in the rear compartment lower part 314, the plate portions arranged to face the back side of the curved plate portion 312 are approximately the same as the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with an inclination angle of a mode in which the distance from the left and right central portions 312b becomes slightly wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large).

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the lower portion 314 of the back surface section with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (slightly larger) the inclination angle of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320 with respect to the vertical direction in the displacement direction.

Therefore, the incident angle of the granular member 320 with respect to the lower surface compartment 314 is the same regardless of the injection direction of the granular member 320 that can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given to the granular member 320 from the lower rear compartment 314 is substantially uniform. can do.

The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which a lid member 480 can be inserted, and includes a short portion extending vertically at both left and right ends and a long portion extending vertically curved in a manner of connecting the upper ends of the short portions. To be equipped. The penetrating direction is formed so as to be inclined diagonally upward from the back side to the front side with respect to the plate surface of the lower portion 314 of the back section (see FIG. 12A). As a result, the acute-angled portion (in FIG. 12A, the lower portion of the deformed penetrating portion 315) of the lower back section 314 constituting the deformed penetrating portion 315 is not arranged to face the injection direction of the granular member 320.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with the acute-angled portion when the granular member 320 is ejected, so that it is possible to prevent a local load from being generated on the granular member 320 and the lower portion 314 of the back surface, and the granular member 320 can be prevented from being subjected to a local load. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the lower portion 314 of the back section from being cracked or chipped.

The granular member 320 has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons) from a resin material that is relatively flexible (at least more flexible than the resin material that forms the partition member 310), as shown enlarged in FIGS. 24 and 25. A non-penetrating recess 321 formed into a quasi-regular polyhedron) and having a non-penetrating recess along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

The non-penetrating recess 321 makes it possible to reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and to deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the shape center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased to the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. ..

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, since the load from the injection device 400 can be received on the surface (see FIG. 25) on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, it is possible to easily avoid damage or chipping of the granular member 320. .. Further, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed to the injection direction side when the load is received from the injection device 400 and the injection is performed, the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed is made to collide with the front plate portion 311. Can be done. As a result, the load at the time of collision with the front plate portion 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixing plate portion 331 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the back partition portion 313, an illuminated substrate 332 that is fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the illuminated substrate 332. A lid portion 333, which is arranged on the right side and is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 and formed so as to accommodate the illumination substrate 332, is provided between the fixing plate portion 331 and the fixing plate portion 331.

The illumination substrate 332 is provided with light irradiation units 332a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides, and light having an optical axis is emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmission, and through holes 331a and 333a are bored at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. As a result, the light can be visually recognized as being divided into granules.

Of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 332, the light emitted to the right side illuminates the right path (right-handed channel) of the game area in which the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. It serves as one purpose. The light emitted to the left side will be described later.

The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmission (or light impermeability), and through holes 331a and 333a are bored at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a can be visually recognized as the light divided into granules, and the illuminated substrate 332 has the fixed plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 332a. It is shielded by the above and can be avoided from being visually recognized.

The second light irradiation unit 340 is a fixed plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back compartment portion 313, an illuminated substrate 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate portion 341, and the illuminated substrate 342. It is provided with a lid portion 343 that is arranged on the left side and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 341 so that the illuminated substrate 342 can be accommodated between the fixed plate portion 341 and the fixed plate portion 341.

The fixing plate portion 341 is formed of a resin material having low (or light-impermeable) light transmission, while the lid portion 343 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the illuminated substrate 342 can be seen when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side portion of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is long protruding to the left. As a result, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and it is possible to avoid seeing the left side surface of the illuminated substrate 342 in front view.

As a result, light can be emitted through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding the visible illumination substrate 342.

The illuminated substrate 342 is provided with light irradiation units 342a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides. Light having an optical axis pointing in the forward direction is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side portion of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left side path of the game area.

Here, it is the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (normally, that is different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the illumination substrate 332 on the right side is positively directed to the game area. The game is played with a left-handed hit, and the game is played with a right-handed hit during probabilistic changes, short hours, and jackpot games). This will be described below.

In the game area of the pachinko machine 10, the degree of freedom of the flow path of the ball on the left side of the game area is high. Therefore, during the normal game, the firing intensity of the ball is adjusted so that the ball flows down on the desired path. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity in the left side portion of the game area is set too high, the visibility of the ball deteriorates, which hinders the adjustment of the firing intensity of the ball, which may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, when launching a ball to the right side of the game area, the player basically launches the ball with the maximum firing intensity. The momentum of the launched ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom in selecting the flow path of the ball on the downstream side thereof is remarkably reduced, so that the launched ball follows the same path exclusively.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed with a width through which one ball passes on the downstream side of the second winning opening 640, and enters the second winning opening 640. All the balls that did not ball pass through the guide path DL1 and head toward the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

In this way, since there is little need to adjust the firing intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball deteriorates in the right side of the game area (particularly, the place where the guide path DL1 is formed), the game is hindered. Since it is unlikely to occur, it is possible to perform an effect with high emission intensity in this range.

Under these circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the illuminated substrate 332 arranged on the right side, the light irradiation unit 332a is arranged so as to direct the light to the game area, while the illuminated substrate 342 arranged on the left side. In the above, the light irradiation unit 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective light emission effect while suppressing the occurrence of dissatisfaction of the player.

Light having an optical axis pointing to the right is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side surface. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixing plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as the light divided into granules, and the illumination substrate 342 is shielded by the fixing plate portion 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. It can be avoided to be visually recognized. The object illuminated by the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side surface will be described later.

26 (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, and FIG. 26 (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 25. It is a figure. In FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the light irradiation unit 332a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 illuminates the LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310 and the back side of the partition member 310. It includes an LED through which the shaft passes.

As a result, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310, but also the light is emitted to other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is possible to execute the effect of irradiating.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 does not have an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and the back side of the partition member 310 is used. It is composed only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the intensity of light emission to the inside of the partition member 310, the intensity of light irradiation toward other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 or displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 is increased. Can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, the comfort of the game in the normal state can be improved by suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310. That is, in the game in the normal state, the line of sight of the player is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning opening 64. Often you are looking at the area from the center to the left side of the game area.

In this case, when the inside of the partition member 310 is irradiated with light from the second irradiation device 340, it shines at a position as close to the front as the game area, so that it is backlit for the player who visually recognizes the left side of the game area. Therefore, there is a risk that the visibility of the game area will deteriorate for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is moved to the back side and the game area and the light irradiation unit 342a are separated from each other, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a Can reduce the degree of influence on the visibility of the game area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 reduces the degree to which the game area is illuminated, and at the same time, emits light that illuminates the inside of the center frame 86 in front view with high intensity. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect of illuminating the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without lowering the visibility of the game area.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 on the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Further, the direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 is schematically shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the back side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding the vertical substrate unit 167 that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light, which will be described later. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the light irradiation unit 342a from being incident on the light guide plate 161 and to perform the light emission effect. Therefore, the light effect performed by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a and the light guide plate 161 are made to shine. It can be separated from the production.

When the light guide plate 161 is adopted as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the light irradiation path, which may reduce the effect of the effect. In particular, since the light emitted around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) easily illuminates the light guide plate 161, it may be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which causes a decrease in the degree of freedom in production. Was there.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to avoid the light guide plate 161 and travel, the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the light emitting effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 24 and 25. The injection device 400 is a device that is arranged below the partition member 310 and on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310 rides on the injection device 400.

28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. In addition, FIG. 28 and FIG. 31 show the configuration of the injection device 400 as an outline, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the front side. 30 and 33 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the back surface side. Further, in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 is fastened and fixed to a partition member 310 (see FIG. 24) as a member to be fixed, and a fixing member 350 to be fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between the fixing member 350, and an electric wiring or transmission arm member 470 to be fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360, which will be described later. It is provided with a limiting member 370 that limits the displacement in the front-rear direction, and an intermediate member 401 that is arranged between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 formed in the central portion.

The fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partition member 310 is inserted into the partition member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove the fastening screw with a screwdriver, but the game board 13 and the launching unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). The base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350 so that the screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, as a preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, the firing unit 300 can be removed from the game board 13. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fixing member 350 is accidentally removed from the partition member 310 and the granular member 320 is discharged from the fixing member 310 while the launching unit 300 is attached to the game board 13. be able to.

The injection device 400 is configured so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front surface side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably arranged between the intermediate member 401 and the fixing member 350 so that the injection device 400 can be displaced linearly. The linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 which is arranged above the linear motion member 410 and is displaceably supported along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410 and has an arch-shaped collision surface at the upper part. A contact member 430, which is arranged below the moving member 410 and is configured so that the state can be changed between a state in which contact is possible and a state in which contact is not possible in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410, is provided.

The injection device 400 is formed so that a load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 as a member displaceably arranged between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and can be rotated by the space forming member 360. A drive that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 that is pivotally supported by the front transmission member 440 and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface and is fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and that meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. It includes a gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 that is arranged on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and is fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

The injection device 400 is rotatably supported by a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 as a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and is pivotally supported from the rear transmission member 460. It includes a transmission arm member 470 that is displaceable by action, and a lid member 480 that is pivotally supported and displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 with a straight line pointing in the left-right direction as a rotation axis.

The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the arrangement range of the constituent members is divided into three by the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360. Within the arrangement range divided in this way, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the middle range in which the drive gear 450 that rotates by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is generated in the front side range and the rear side. By transmitting to each of the ranges of, displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

Based on such a design concept, openings for transmitting driving force are bored in the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, respectively. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (substantially elliptical shape).

Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the range on the front side of the intermediate portion 401 and the range on the rear side of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described below in the order of the front side range and the rear side range. , The details of the configuration of the intermediate range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

First, the front range will be focused on. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-mentioned opening 402, a plurality of columnar protrusions 403 projecting from the upper end to the front side in a columnar shape, and the columnar protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 having an upper end portion supported therein, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged at symmetrical positions so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 can be fixed, and a columnar protrusion toward the front side near the lower end portion. The support column portion 405 is provided, and the lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claw portions 411 formed on the lower end portion of the linear motion member 410.

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed so as to be shorter than the distance between the columnar protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always urged by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the urging force before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is arranged diagonally below the linear motion member 410, with the aim of concentrating the urging force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular member 320 tends to accumulate.

The linear motion member 410 includes the above-mentioned claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted, and a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 projecting from the upper end portion at the center of the left and right in a trapezoidal shape. A linear ridge 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower ridge formed as a ridge shorter than the ridge 414 on the lower side of the ridge 414. 415 and a displacement regulating portion 416 projecting from the lower end portion at the center of the left and right toward the front side are provided.

The trapezoidal projecting portion 413 is formed so as to be in contact with the collision member 420 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed so that only the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 is not in contact with the collision member 420. NS.

The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive a load from other constituent members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The displacement regulating portion 416 is a portion that comes into contact with the cushioning member 352 of the fixing member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by this contact (the ascending side displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 is a flat plate extending parallel to a curved plate portion 421 forming an arch-shaped collision surface and a plane on which the linear motion member 410 is displaced from the rear end portion of the curved plate portion 421. The plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in an elongated hole shape extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422, and the displacement direction of the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 at the lower ends of the left and right central portions of the plate portion 422. It is provided with a cushioning member 424 which is fixed at a position where it is arranged to face each other and is arranged so as to be in contact with the trapezoidal projecting portion 413.

A columnar protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423. That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is also used as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 may be damaged or chipped. It can be suppressed.

The abutting member 430 is formed in the shape of a substantially triangular long plate, and has a support hole 431 formed at one end of the long plate as a circular opening through which a support pillar portion 405 can be inserted, and the other end of the long plate. The projecting portion 432 projecting to the back surface side with a circular cross section, and the hook-shaped projecting portion 433 projecting to the front side in a hook shape at a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting portion 432. Be prepared.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support column portion 405 so as to be rotationally displaceable.

The projecting portion 432 and the hook-shaped projecting portion 433 are portions that receive a load from other constituent members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The fixing member 350 can accept the motor fixing portion 351 in which the above-mentioned drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, the cushioning member 352 arranged so as to be in contact with the displacement regulating portion 416, and the tip of the circular protrusion 403. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses and having a fastening screw inserted into a through hole inside the recess from the front side and screwed into a female screw formed in the circular protrusion 403 to be fastened and fixed. It is provided with a guide portion 354 that guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24), which is composed of an inclined surface that is recessed from the front side and three directions on the left and right.

The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement regulating portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and damage or chipping of the displacement regulating portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 abuts at the displacement end in the urging direction. As a result, as will be described later, even in a displacement mode in which the linear motion member 410 is displaced ascending at high speed due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load received by the linear motion member 410 at the time of sudden stop is achieved. Can be absorbed by deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release the connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted into the connecting recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). It is configured so that it cannot be done.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fastening screw is accidentally loosened and the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 are loosened while the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled. Can be done.

Next, the description will be given focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-mentioned opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a columnar shape from a substantially central position of the back plate portion toward the front side, and a back. Upper end position of the face plate portion A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending to the front side at the left and right end portions, and arranged below the left and right inner sides of the guide inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right projecting support portions 364 projecting from the back plate portion to the front side and a lid member 480 formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right ends and arranged on the same line are formed in a size capable of axially supporting the lid member 480. A plurality of support column portions 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the support column portion 364 on the left side and generates an urging force toward the side where the lid member 480 is retracted, and a columnar protrusion on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361. It is provided with a columnar protrusion 366 to be formed.

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. Along with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 extends from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. This wall portion can cover the internal front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured so that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner surface of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the flowing granular member 320 is placed on the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided toward.

The protrusion support portion 364 is formed so that the tip of the protrusion is in contact with the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. On the flush surface, the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 are supported in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

The shape of the support pillar portion 365 is different on the left and right. That is, on the right side, it is formed in a small-diameter tubular shape that protrudes outward to the left and right, and on the left side, it is formed in a tubular shape having an inner diameter that can accept the tubular portion of the left cover member 489.

The columnar protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted through the transmission arm 470. By fixing a screw having a large diameter at the head to a female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 366, the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is a long member formed in a substantially rectangular shape in appearance, and is a support that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 366 and through which the columnar protrusion 366 is inserted. The hole 471, the columnar protrusion 472 projecting parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 471 from one end in the elongated direction toward the front side, and the axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the elongated direction are orthogonal to each other. It is provided with a transmission protrusion 473 that is projected in a columnar shape along a plane.

The columnar protrusion 472 passes through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and projects toward the front side, and is formed so as to be engaged with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 changes as the posture of the rear transmission member 460 changes, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes. Details will be described later.

A limiting member 370 is arranged on the back surface side of the columnar protrusion 472. That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and presses the covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the columnar protrusion 472 from the back surface side and the electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The lining plate portion 371 is arranged close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and regulates the displacement of the columnar protrusion 472 to the back side (the back side of the transmission arm member 470 in the rotation axis direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, and thus it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from being disengaged from the rear transmission member 460. can.

The pressing claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the back side plate of the space forming member 360. As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the electric wiring from fluctuating (for example, the arrangement of the electric wiring is changed due to vibration or the like), and it is possible to secure an entry path for other constituent members. The lateral slide member 840 and the pinnate member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced by a path including a position close to the device 400.

The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted through the lid member 480 and transmits a driving force to the lid member 480.

The lid member 480 is a member that can move forward and backward in and out of the partition member 310 through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310, and is a member that can advance and retreat in and out of the partition member 310, and is formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extension plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from the left and right end portions of the advancing / retreating portion 481, and a plurality of extending plate portions 485 that are received coaxially with the support column portion 365 at the extension end portion. 486, a transmission hole 487 formed in a curved elongated hole shape in the extension plate portion 485 on the left side, and a transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted into the transmission hole 487, and a tubular shape surrounding the reception portion 486 on the right side. It is formed in the shape of a disk having a portion, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 can be inserted while surrounding the receiving portion 486. It includes a right cover member 488 that is prevented from coming off, a tubular portion that is inserted into the receiving portion 486 on the left side, and a left cover member 489 that has an elongated hole-shaped portion that is continuously connected to the transmission hole 487.

The left cover member 489 is not bored like a drill hole along the axial direction, but is formed with functionally formed contact surfaces 489a to 489c, which will be described in detail later.

The cross-sectional shape of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load given from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured to go toward the axis, it is not simply a shape in which the pipe is divided, but the radius of the arc and the formation length are changed according to the left and right positions. This design intent will be described.

First, the advancing / retreating portion 481 includes an overhanging portion 482 that travels to the approach side at the center position on the left and right. The overhanging portion 482 is formed so that the overhanging width becomes shorter toward the left-right outer side, and the end face on the approach side is formed so as to be inclined toward the left-right outer side. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another constituent member (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, a load directed to the left and right outward with respect to the constituent member. Can be given, and the constituent members can be driven to the left and right outside.

Secondly, as described above, the advancing / retreating portion 481 is configured so as to be able to enter the partition member 310 through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, and the overhanging portion 482 precedes the partition. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is shortened at the left and right center positions where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

As a result, the positional deviation that may occur at the position where the deformed penetrating portion 315 starts to enter (the center of the left and right of the overhanging portion 482) can be suppressed to a small extent, so that the advancing / retreating portion 481 cannot enter the deformed penetrating portion 315. Can be suppressed.

Thirdly, the arc radius is lengthened in the vicinity of the left and right outer sides of the advancing / retreating portion 481 as opposed to the left / right center position of the overhanging portion 482. The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays closer to the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

This way of staying is not completely uniform on the left and right, and may be non-uniform on the left and right. For example, an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, the unevenly stayed granular members 320 may collide with the advancing / retreating portion 481. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is lengthened in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where many granular members 320 tend to stay. As a result, the distance between the advancing / retreating portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 can be secured sufficiently long in advance, so that even if the way of staying the granular member 320 becomes non-uniform, the granular member 320 and the advancing / retreating portion 481 You can avoid collisions.

Other design concepts will be explained. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end face on the approach side is formed recessed toward the retract side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the extension plate portion 485 from colliding with the stagnant granular member 320.

In addition, even when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the approach side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 is still formed by the recessed forming portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the curvature of the partition member 310. The granular member 320 can be collected on the upper part of the collision member 420 by being configured to be large enough to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

The receiving portion 486 has a different shape on the left and right. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular tubular shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half pipe shape), which is designed in consideration of assembly.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 28 and 31. Since the support pillar portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction particularly on the right side, the lid member 480 is supported when both the receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular tubular shape. It is necessary to divide the advancing / retreating portion 481 in order to assemble it to the pillar portion 365.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured so that the lid member 480 can be moved back and forth on the partition member 310, while the granular member 320 can be prevented from being discharged from the partition member 310. That is, the deformed penetrating portion 315 cannot be increased indefinitely, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed penetrating portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 collapses to the extent that it cannot pass through the deformed penetrating portion 315, advance / retreat displacement becomes impossible, so accuracy is required for the shape. On the other hand, when the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed by connecting a plurality of members, the shape may be deformed due to factors such as an assembly error.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is different on the left and right so that the advance / retreat portion 481 does not need to be divided. In the assembly process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the lateral side (left side) of the support pillar portion 365, and the tubular portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving portion 486a while being inserted into the support pillar portion 365. As a result, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support pillar portion 365.

At this time, in the right receiving portion 486b, the support pillar portion 365 is arranged to face each other on the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extension plate portion 485 by inserting a fastening screw through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing it into the extension plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

After that, if the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction and the cover member 480 is supported by the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support pillar portion 365 so as not to fall off, the lid member 480 is spaced. It can be rotatably supported with respect to the forming member 360.

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In FIGS. 34 to 36, the displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are shown in chronological order.

34 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 34 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 34 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line of FIG. 34 (b).

35 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. 35 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 35 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b).

36 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXIVa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 36 (b) is a transmission arm member in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). It is a side view of the 470 and the lid member 480, and FIG. 36 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line of FIG. 36 (b).

In FIGS. 35 and 36, a process is shown in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side. In detail, FIG. 36 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the approach side end within the displacement range, and FIG. 34 shows the lid member 480 at the retract side end within the displacement range. The arranged state is illustrated, and in FIG. 35, the state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at an intermediate position of the displacement range is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel to each other. More specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (the plane shown in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (the plane shown in FIG. 34B). ) Is orthogonal.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 that comes into contact with the left cover member 489 changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the elongated direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34 (a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 comes into contact with the left cover member 489 at a position closer to the right (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts over the width direction of the left cover member 489. Be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 35 (c) and 36 (c), the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponds to the posture change of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed so that the left cover member 489 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can come into contact with each other in the left-right width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 is compared with the first contact surface 489a that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a thereof. The second contact surface 489b, which is formed to have a small inclination in the left-right direction, is formed to have a small inclination in the left-right direction as compared with the second contact surface 489b, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. A third contact surface 489c that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in the state is provided.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left cover member 489 in the shape of the upper side surface of the opening in the left-right direction is gradually reduced as it approaches the rotation axis of the lid member 480, with the first contact surface 489a as the maximum. Designed to.

More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination of the left cover member 489 at the contact position with the upper side surface of the opening is designed to be an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

As a result, in the contact state between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be secured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is in the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489) at the timing when a large load is generated, that is, the timing when the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity. Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area responsible for the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the approach side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489), so that the transmission protrusion In addition to reducing the contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, which may cause an overload on the transmission protrusion 473. be.

As a countermeasure for this, in the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the ratio of the load on the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced in the weight of the lid member 480. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the advancing / retreating portion 481 that occupies most of the own weight of the lid member 480 is the rotation shaft of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacement of the lid member 480 toward the approach side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the urging force of the torsion spring SP2, at least the urging force is at least. A part can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is compared with the case where most of the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. Can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation shaft O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, the distance between the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the retracted side position to the approaching side position is the lid. It is configured to be the longest when the member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracted side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 so as to be an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to follow (the inclination angle becomes smaller), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can be generated along an arc.

As a result, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes longer, so that the load required to rotate the lid member 480 is reduced. can do.

As an ingenuity in the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove portion 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove portion 473a along the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side to the back side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 35 (b) and 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right sides. Will be done. Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing / retreating portion 481 and the overhanging portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center side in the left-right direction.

The radius of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the left and right center positions is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotating shaft O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overhanging portion 482 having the maximum approach width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the lid member 480 slightly over-rotates (to the extent that it is caused by a design error for each member). In this case, it is possible to prevent the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 from colliding with each other and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, the description will be given focusing on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, the front transmission member 440 and the rear side are connected with the rotation of the drive gear 450. The transmission member 460 is integrally rotated around the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction in the front view (front view of the transmission member 440 side view) will be described as a forward rotation.

The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are configured to secure relative positions and rigidity with respect to each other on the sides facing each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite surfaces. The shape portion is formed. Details of the shaped portion used for this driving force transmission will be described below.

37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28. .. The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front transmission member 440 projects axially from the substantially disk-shaped main body plate portion 441 and the edge portion of the main body plate portion 441, and has a groove inside the main body plate portion 441. A groove forming portion 442 to be recessed, a support hole 443 which is a circular opening formed in a center portion of the main body plate portion 441 so as to allow a shaft portion 362 to be inserted, and a gear formed in the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 that is overlaid on the teeth, a portion to be detected 445 that extends radially outward from the flange portion 444 and is formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and a groove formation. A transmission protrusion 446 projecting parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric with respect to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442 is provided.

In the groove forming portion 442, a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding portion 432 is recessed so that the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is such that the front transmission member 440 rotates in the forward direction in a state where the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 are arranged in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove portion 442b to which the projecting portion 432 is guided and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a diameter larger than the reference arc of the first groove portion 442a. A third groove portion 442c formed along the above, and a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a are provided.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 442d has a smaller formation angle range than the second groove portion 442b, and the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 changes sharply with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440. Designed to be.

The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove portion 446a formed linearly along the protrusion direction connecting a central portion and a point on the outer diameter side. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction orthogonal to the straight line that serves as a reference for the groove portion 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear transmission member 460 has a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disk shape with a diameter similar to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and the main body plate portion 461 thereof. A groove forming portion 462 in which a groove is recessed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 462, and a shaft portion 362 formed at the center of the main body plate portion 461 with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the base side outer diameter of the shaft portion 362. It is provided with a non-contact opening portion 463 formed so as to avoid contact with the above.

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is formed so as to expand in the radial direction in a range in which the groove portion to be recessed is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjusting portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced from the rotation axis.

In the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, is calculated, and the weight portion 461a is arranged and corrected for the purpose of correcting the center of gravity in the shape of a rotation axis. The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be aligned with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. ..

The groove forming portion 462 is provided with a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the columnar protrusion 472 so that the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is formed by the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the first groove portion 462a formed along the first arc shape and the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 are arranged in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove portion 462b in which the columnar protrusion 472 is guided by rotating in the forward direction (rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear) and a first groove portion 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 462a with respect to the second groove portion 462b. It includes a third groove portion 462c formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove portion 462d connecting the third groove portion 462c and the first groove portion 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 462d has a significantly larger formation angle range (about 180 degrees) than the second groove portion 462b, and the groove and the non-contact opening portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460. It is designed so that the change in distance between them is slow.

Hereinafter, an example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. In FIGS. 38, 39, 40, and 41, the fixing member 350 is omitted from the drawing, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. Further, for easy understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated by an imaginary line as a schematic diagram to the extent that the change in length can be grasped.

In FIGS. 38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows a production standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. 40 shows an injection. The launch standby state, which is the state of waiting for the launch timing of the device 400, is illustrated, and FIG. 41 shows the launch state, which is the state immediately after the injection device 400 executes the launch effect. Note that FIG. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420, but immediately after this, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the linear motion member 410, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of the displacement on the approach side will be described as an effect standby state (see FIG. 39) of the injection device 400.

In the effect standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be lowered, so that the player's eyes can be taken away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 arranged below the granular member 320.

In the launch standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended so that the columnar protrusion 403 comes into contact with the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. .. In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the columnar protrusion 403 is a guide hole. It stops at a position where it comes into contact with the lower inner surface of 423. After that, the collision member 420 is displaced downward due to its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG. 38.

The flow of the granular member 320 that is bounced off and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided to the collision member 420 side after being brought to the left and right center side by the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See the arrow schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward, so that the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixing member 350 and the collision member 420 The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the above is set to be shallow.

Therefore, in terms of shape, it may not be possible to receive the plurality of granular members 320 in a biased manner. In the present embodiment, the partition member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be unbalancedly received.

As a result, for example, even if a large number of granular members 320 start to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular member 320 returns after that, the granular member 320 that has returned earlier causes the collision member 420 to return. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed on the right side portion, the granular member 320 that has returned later flows to the left side along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner of flowing on the granular member 320.

As a result, the left-right bias of the granular member 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, so that the bias (difference in scattering mode) of the arrangement of the granular member 320 in each firing effect is reduced. can do.

Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged at a position in the middle of the displacement section, and the lower linear motion member 410 is one point with the trapezoidal projecting portion 413. It is just in contact with. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the columnar protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. That is, it is permissible to change the posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one columnar protrusion 403.

As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420 in a biased manner, the posture of the collision member 420 changes in such a manner that the right side portion is lowered as compared with the left side portion. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right side.

Therefore, it becomes easy to guide the granular member 320 that flows down near the left and right center positions of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 coincide with each other in the front view, and the furnishing left-right center position of the guide portion 354 is set. It is considered that whether the flowing granular member 320 flows down to the left or right is substantially uniformly distributed to the left or right depending on the difference in the contact points between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its posture, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left-right center position of the guide portion 354, and flows down the furnishing left-right center position of the guide portion 354. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left side along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421. As a result, it becomes easy for the granular member 320 that has returned later to flow down to the side where the amount of the retained granular member 320 is small, so that the granular member 320 can be easily distributed substantially evenly to the left and right.

It should be noted that the attitude change of the collision member 420 is not always allowed as well. For example, in the launch standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), columnar protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper ends of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), columnar protrusions 403 are arranged at the lower ends of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Since the displacement of the collision member 420 is regulated, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is an urging force generated by a pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in a direction parallel to the elongated direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easy to stabilize.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the collision member 420 from the launch standby state to the launch state. As a result, when the retention state of the granular member 320 (the number of grains is biased to the left and right) is the same, it is possible to stabilize the scattering method of the granular member 320 which is scattered by receiving a load from the collision member 420.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular member 320 scatters and then flows down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. It returns to the upper surface of, and returns to the production standby state again. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for making this state change feasible will be described in detail below.

42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the front transmission member in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. It is a plan view of 440.

In addition, in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outer shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the outer shapes are shown. Except for the parts related to mutual load transmission, the ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 of the linear motion member 410, the cushioning member 424 of the collision member 420, the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430, and the uncinate process. The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown. Is illustrated without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each constituent member” in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) accompanying the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440. ) Arrangement changes are shown in chronological order. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

In FIG. 42A, the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 is shown. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected by the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting the change from the state in which the unit 445 is not arranged to the state in which the detected unit 445 is inserted, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

FIG. 42B shows the arrangement of each component member in a state where the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the protrusion 414 of the linear movement member 410 and starts pushing down the linear movement member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42B, the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, between FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, the direct load transmission between the members is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 vibrates slightly, the vibration or load is directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. Is configured to be shut off.

FIG. 42 (c) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally lowered and displaced. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , Can indirectly transmit to the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear motion member 410, which is a transmission point where the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the transmission member 440. It is a direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotation displacement of the transmission member 440.

The effect on the forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, an effect that causes the speed that is driven and controlled as a rotational displacement to differ from the actual speed, and an effect that hinders the rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat are exemplified.

In FIG. 42D, the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 starts to tilt is shown. Will be done.

The contact member 430 is a member whose posture changes according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442 without being subjected to an urging force by other urging means. From FIG. 42 (d), the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, but the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is the direction of displacement by its own weight. Therefore, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 has little change from the state before FIG. 42 (d) in which only the linear motion member 410 is displaced.

In FIG. 42 (e), the arrangement of each constituent member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42 (e), in the state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 The load required for the posture change can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

In FIG. 42 (f), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 finishes tilting is shown. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 42 (f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is used. Is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (posture change is prevented).

Therefore, with respect to the subsequent contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 has a speed in the direction in which they face each other. The aspect can be softened.

In FIG. 43 (a), a diagram in the same state as in FIG. 42 (f) is shown for ease of understanding. In FIG. 43 (b), as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear motion member 410 is displaced ascendingly, and the lower projection portion 415 of the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the contact member. The arrangement of each component member in a state where the 430 hook-shaped protrusion 433 starts to come into contact with the hook-shaped protrusion 433 is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the launch standby state (see, for example, FIG. 40).

The lower ridge portion 415 and the hook-shaped ridge portion 433 are provided with an overhanging portion that projects toward the side facing each other at the tip portions on the sides facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent slippage from occurring at the contact position between the lower ridge portion 415 and the uncinate ridge 433, and the lower ridge 415 and the hook-shaped ridge 433 can be stably contacted with each other. Can be touched.

In the state shown in FIG. 43B, the terminal position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43B, the detected unit 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and the switching of this state is switched to the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). It is output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected by the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the forward rotation. Control to determine that the injection device 400 has shifted to the launch standby state by detecting the switch from the state in which the unit 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected unit 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43B, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by the contact member 430. An urging force is generated in the linear motion member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load in the direction of erecting the contact member 430 is applied to the contact member 430, but the displacement of the contact member 430 is a bump. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is regulated by being hindered by the groove forming portion 442.

The contact between the projecting portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is a contact between a circularly curved surface (outer surface of the projecting portion 432) and an arcuate surface (inner surface of the third groove portion 442c). The load generated at that time is directed toward the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43B, the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is generated toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load given from the protrusion 432 is on the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and it is possible to regulate the displacement of the projecting portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

Therefore, in the launch standby state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) can be maintained even after the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. As a result, for example, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must always be energized in the launch standby state, so that the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. Can be improved.

This is, for example, a limitation on the setting of the length of the display effect from the launch standby state to the launch state when the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect in the third symbol display device 81. Is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

In FIG. 43 (c), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 starts to stand up is shown. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that comes into contact with the protruding portion 432 changes from the third groove forming portion 442c, so that the direction of the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is transmitted to the front side. It will deviate from the rotation axis of the member 440.

Therefore, in order to de-energize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the launch standby state, the drive motor MT1 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is necessary to de-energize.

In FIG. 43 (d), the uncinate process 433 of the contact member 430 retracts from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410, so that the restriction on the ascending displacement of the linear motion member 410 is lifted. , The arrangement of each component member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is upwardly displaced by the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is bounced upward is shown. The state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force thereof is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). .. On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not regulated by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410. The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the abutting member 430 in the upright direction.

In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are both. Since they are configured in the same direction in the standing direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a manner of assisting each other.

In FIG. 43 (e), the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the terminal position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component member in a state where the contact member 430 finishes standing is shown. Will be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that comes into contact with the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protrusion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed to the front transmission member 440. The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, since the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d), FIG. 43 (d). It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is erected in the subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement of the contact member 430 in an upright position may hinder the rotation of the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a, and from the contact member 430 via the projecting portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is configured to be directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being hindered by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing upright.

When the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 43 (e) and it is detected that the detected unit 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state, and the state changes shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of emission effects. The control program (see FIG. 4) is designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the injection device 400, the launch execution control for rotating the front transmission member 440 once in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described. In the firing execution control, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 that rises due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 in the firing state, and the granular member 320 is scattered.

In this production, the granular member 320 is scattered in the player's field of view, so that the player's attention can be improved in a flashy manner. At the timing near the end of the following long reach, if it is a big hit, the player can improve the interest of the player by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular member 320 to produce the effect.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (if it is off), executing the effect of scattering the granular member 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a big hit, which is not preferable.

Further, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the state does not shift to the firing state (in the case of disengagement), the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 will result in a long reach during execution, resulting in a big hit. This means that the player can grasp whether or not the player is out of the game, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of disconnection, after the injection device 400 is put into the launch standby state, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction to control the injection device 400. It is configured to be able to return to the effect standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, by driving and controlling the drive motor MT1 in the direction of rotating (clockwise) the front transmission member 440 from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), each component is displaced in the reverse direction of the above time series. Can be made to.

In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the upright direction (see FIG. 42 (e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 into contact with the contact member 430. (See FIG. 42 (f)), it is possible to prevent rubbing from occurring when releasing the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430.

Further, after FIG. 42 (e), the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission protrusion 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the rotation of the front transmission protrusion 440. Since it works in the auxiliary direction, the magnitude of the driving force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

In this case, the ascending displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not a momentary one based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the linear motion member 410 from bouncing off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is placed in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42 (a)) without performing the effect of scattering the granular member 320. Can be restored to.

In order to obtain the state shown in FIG. 42A after the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, the detection sensor SC4 The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction until it is detected that the groove to be detected 445 has entered the detection groove again.

As a result, both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for not scattering the granular member 320 can be executed with the same preparatory operation associated with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to produce a big hit or a miss in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the winning / failing result due to the difference in the driving sound.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the launch standby state (see FIG. 43 (c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized to temporarily eliminate the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the opposite direction as compared with the case where the drive direction is switched from the state where the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven. ..

Therefore, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the hit / miss notification timing in the production, and even if a drive sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the drive direction. be able to.

As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the hit / miss notification timing without risking the player to grasp the hit / fail result by the drive sound, so that the drive motor MT1 in the launch standby state can be started. The stop timing can be varied. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in the state immediately before the launch state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in the state sufficiently before the launch state, the subsequent production is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates against control and unintentionally enters a firing state.

44 (a) to 44 (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 28.

In FIG. 44, the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component” in the description of FIG. 44) changes as the rear transmission member 460 rotates in the forward direction (clockwise). Illustrated in chronological order. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

In FIG. 44 (a), the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42 (a)) of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 44A, in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480. Is placed at the displacement end position on the approach side.

Since the lid member 480 receives an urging force from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) toward the retracted side, a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is applied. By being transmitted to the rear transmission member 460, there is a risk of affecting the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44A, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 comes into contact with the third groove portion 462c of the groove forming portion 462 and passes through the contact point. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the circular curved surface and the arcuate surface are in contact with each other, so that the load generated by the contact is directed toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 goes toward the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, so that the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 is rearward. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44 (b), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44 (c), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change drives the rear side transmission member 460 to rotate. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this urging force pushes the columnar protrusion 472 upward. Since it acts in the direction of displacement to, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the attitude change of the transmission arm member 470.

In the present embodiment, the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 given via the lid member 480 are set. Since both are configured to be the same in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a manner of assisting each other.

In FIG. 44 (d), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44 (d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged in a non-contact manner.

As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the lid member 480 to the approach side, and it is possible to alleviate the degree of accumulation of fatigue on the transmission arm member 470. ..

In FIG. 44 (e), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the first groove portion 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the above is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44 (e), a launch standby state (see FIG. 43 (b)) is configured. From the launch standby state to the launch state, the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side so as to avoid a collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

In FIG. 44 (f), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing the forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44F is the state after the firing effect is executed, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 (f). e) See). Therefore, the amount of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) distributed to the front transmission member 440 can be very small.

As a result, even when a large driving force is required because the displacement direction of the lid member 480 is a direction that opposes the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 Since most of the above can be used as a driving force for rotating other constituent members that come into contact with the rear transmission member 460, a sufficient driving force can be secured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28. In FIG. 45, the fixing member 350 is not shown, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described in FIGS. 42 and 43. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown. Is illustrated without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the ascending side (for example, in the effect standby state, see FIG. 42A), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction to transmit the front side. The state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 abuts on the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 from the lower side and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the limit is set in the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the drive in the forward rotation direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, whereas in the drive in the reverse rotation direction, the drive can be performed continuously. When the displacement angle exceeds the permissible angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is regulated by the linear motion member 410, and the continuous drive beyond that is regulated.

If the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven in a state where the displacement is regulated, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction is limited. Although damage to the drive motor MT1 is avoided by providing the above, details will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 46 does not show the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

Further, in FIG. 46, a guideline for the rotation angle of the forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42 (a) and 44 (a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (d), and so on. 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42 (f) and 43 (a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (c). 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (e).

Further, in FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (d). 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (e) and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angles of the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are described on the horizontal axis based on the effect standby state (the angle is 0 degrees), and the above-mentioned constituent members corresponding to the angles are shown on the horizontal axis. The state change in is described. The arrangement change of each configuration by the drive control in the forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the arrangement change of each configuration by the drive control in the reverse rotation is directed to the left in FIG. 46. Respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the reverse direction before the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) is determined. It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced ascendingly. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of the ascending displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

Since the collision member 420 has already risen after the firing state is exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted in the middle (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is suspected that the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees) when the power is turned on again. That is, when the detected unit 445 is not arranged on the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the forward rotation direction. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

By this rotation, the injection device 400 is configured to temporarily return to the effect standby state, and then perform execution control of each effect. This prevents the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 from being unintentionally restricted and the drive motor MT1 from generating heat after a situation where control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is performed from the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed that stabilizes.

For example, if the arrangement is stable in 2 seconds from the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds / rotation), so that the granules in the middle of the flow flow. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is bitten by the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

The rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at 4 times speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the approach side at a timing when the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the lid member 480 can be completely displaced before the granular member 320 is arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480.

In this state, by stopping the drive in the effect standby state, the granular member 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular member 320 is collected toward the left and right center side along the shape of the lid member 480. Can be done. After that, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retracted side, and the collision member 420 Get on top.

In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 so as to be different, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by forming the granular member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the granular member 320 to be launched (arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be changed. , The effect can be improved.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. Next, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 47 and 49 show the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the overhang state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes an effect member 700 that can move up and down and displace the center position in the left-right direction and can produce light emission, and hemispherical illumination that is fixedly arranged on the left and right sides of the effect member 700. A device 613 is provided.

By performing a light emitting effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, light is emitted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player to perform an effect of making the player visually recognize it brilliantly. be able to.

FIG. 51 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is shown in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611 in the assembled state, but in FIGS. 51 and 52, For convenience, it is arranged on the back side of the rear plate portion 611.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has a left-right long main body member 601 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and the front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 that is arranged on the side and has a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by a cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in an interlocking relationship, and an intermediate between the upper arm member 620 and the upper arm member 620. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by a portion and change their posture with the rotation of the upper arm member 620, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and drive gears and teeth of the drive motor MT2. The transmission gear 650, which is combined and rotatably engaged with the left upper arm member 620 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2 and is rotatably supported by the main body member 601 and the annular portion are assembled to the main body member 601. It includes a torsion spring SP3 that applies an ascending urging force to the upper arm member 620, and an effect member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630.

The main body member 601 is formed in the shape of a long plate on the left and right, and has a guide hole 602 which is a pair of long holes on the left and right arranged in a straight line on the left and right, and a pair of guide holes 602 projecting from a symmetrical position in a columnar shape in both front and rear directions. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as a central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side portion to the back surface side in a cylindrical shape. An arc-shaped hole 606 formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 on the back side in a posture toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side. It includes a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as an elongated hole for guiding the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630.

The portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes from the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620. The upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to fall off by screwing a screw having a large diameter at the head into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603.

The portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes to the back side is inserted into the winding main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by an overhanging portion 601a protruding from the back side of the main body member 601 in a dogleg shape, and the other arm is pressed by the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. Engage. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the applied portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is urged in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is upwardly displaced.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back surface side of the main body member 601. As a result, the applied portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engaged with each other.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. A screw having a large diameter at the head is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, so that the transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. The upper arm member 620 is irremovably supported by the transmission gear 650 by screwing a screw having a large diameter in the head into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650.

The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove through which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is arranged at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, or is arranged at another position. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is done.

The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member formed of a resin material having low light transmittance and fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. The front plate portion 612, which is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper ends, and is formed so as to project to the front side from the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 to enable light emission. The hemispherical lighting device 613 is provided.

The rear plate portion 611 is arranged on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visible. On the back side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, projecting to the back side with a dimension slightly longer than the front-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacting the main body member 601 in a surface. The overhanging contact portion 611a in contact is provided.

As a result, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 with respect to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in the space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. can. In other words, the posture change of the upper arm member 620 (for example, the posture change that bends with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. ..

The front plate portion 612 is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 so that the structural portion of these members is not visible to the player, and is a main body member 601. A pair of left and right sliding surfaces 612a formed as a plane parallel to the front plate portion of the above, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opened to the back side in the plate portion protruding from the upper left end portion toward the back surface. It is provided with a recess 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and the pressing member PC1 formed from its shape and material with low friction is configured as a slidable flat surface. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the long direction is a flat plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

The shape of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the state when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact is a point contact. It is configured to be. As a result, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side exceeds the permissible amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. NS.

In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side is set by the dimensional relationship between the back side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700. That is, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set so that the effect member 700 of the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partition member 310.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a comes into contact with the pressing member PC1 and limits the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side, so that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 becomes the partition member 310. It is possible to prevent contact.

The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although it is formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 needs to be formed in a plane shape, and the shape in other parts can be arbitrarily set. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed so as to be limited to the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portion projects to the back side (the design portion on the front side is). It may be configured so as to project to the back side due to the influence of being arranged closer to the back side), or the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may be configured to have the same planar shape as in the left side portion of the present embodiment. good.

The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, and the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the columnar protrusion 654. Forward displacement is regulated by the fastening screws that are fixed. That is, in addition to limiting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is also limited, so that it is possible to avoid a large load locally.

The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a passage for electrical wiring through which the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630 is passed. That is, the electrical wiring that has reached between the rear case 510 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring through recess 612b, through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the effect member 700.

In this way, by setting the insertion path of the electric wiring into the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction with the displacement. (In the present embodiment, even in the case of displacing a distance of about half the left-right width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the electrical wiring is loosened and hangs downward.

The hemispherical illumination device 613 is a device provided with a hemispherical lens member and for irradiating the light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back surface side thereof to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. .. In the present embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward on the central side in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier for the player to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 as compared with the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 points in the front-rear direction. can. For example, it is easy to put light into the field of view of the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or it is easy to notice the light by irradiating the effect member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state with light. Can be done.

The upper arm member 620 is formed in the shape of a long plate, and is formed as a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 to allow the cylindrical shaft portion 603 to be inserted into the support hole 621. , A gear portion 622 formed on an arc centered on the support hole 621 and formed to be meshed with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circular shape at an end portion in the elongated direction. As a long hole having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650, which is formed only on the connecting portion 623 formed so that the cylindrical protrusion 631 of the above can be inserted and the upper arm member 620 on the left side. A transmission hole 624 is formed, and an urged portion 625 that protrudes from the back surface side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip portion.

The transmission hole 624 has a margin extending continuously from one end of the transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. A unit 624b and the like.

The transmission unit 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the driving force transmission, which will be described in detail later.

The urging portion 625 is a portion where one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and the urging force in the direction of ascending and displacementing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the urging portion 625 is increased. The arm member 620 receives.

Further, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 to the front can be regulated by engaging the tip hook-shaped portion of the applied portion 625 with the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is formed substantially symmetrically from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path through which electrical wiring is passed, and is formed in a columnar shape from an intermediate position in the long direction to the back side. The columnar protrusion 631 and the columnar protrusion 632 projecting from the left and right outer positions to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631 and the columnar protrusion 631 in the front-rear direction at the left and right inner positions with respect to the columnar protrusion 631. A support hole 633 formed in a circular shape and a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 formed through a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw having a large diameter at the head is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is on the back side of the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632. By screwing a screw having a large diameter in the head, the lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off.

The support hole 633 and the arcuate hole 634 are used for connecting to the effect member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 described later, the wall thickness of the portion where the arcuate hole 634 is formed is thicker in the lower portion than in the upper portion. As a result, when the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at a thick portion, so that it is effective for the effect member 700 to change its posture to a forward leaning posture. Can be regulated to.

Further, the lower arm member 630 on the left side has an arrangement portion 635 formed open to the back side in order to form a space for passing electrical wiring over the long direction of the arm body, and the back surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin-walled lid portion 636, which is arranged on the side and functions as a lid of the arrangement portion 635, is provided.

The arrangement portion 635 includes a base end side through hole 635a formed in the front-rear direction at the end portion on the columnar protrusion 632 side.

The base end side through hole 635a is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side and is guided to the arrangement portion 635, and exits from the arrangement portion 635 to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630.

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the long direction of the lower arm member 630, and the lower meat portion 637 disposed below the boundary is formed deeply on the back side in the effect standby state. Will be done. In other words, the upper side is formed as a thin plate portion with the tangent line as the boundary.

The lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction in the lower arm member 630 on the right side. Further, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes an upper side wall portion of the arrangement portion 635 in the lower arm member 630 on the left side, is configured to be able to guide electrical wiring inside, and is arranged as a lid in the guide path. The thin-walled lid portion 636 is fastened and fixed to be reinforced.

Since the electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin-walled lid portion 636) and is guided to the effect member 700 side, the members arranged before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620) from coming into contact with the electrical wiring. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from being entangled or rubbed with these members and damaging the electrical wiring.

The lower arm member 630 includes a pressing member PC1 composed of the same member and assembled from the back side, in addition to the above-mentioned pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the front-rear direction via the pressing member PC1. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact with each other, but have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the back surface, they come into contact with each other to limit the displacement. It is the same as the case of the pressing member PC1 on the front side.

That is, since the lower arm member 630 is configured so that the pressing member PC1 is assembled on both front and rear sides and can come into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1, when the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the front-rear direction. It is possible to easily limit the displacement and reduce the resistance generated due to the vertical displacement when the displacement is limited.

The overhanging tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side to the back side is arranged closer to the back side than the back side end portion of the upper arm member 620. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced toward the back surface to the extent that it abuts on the main body member 601 it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from abutting on the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front-rear direction.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connecting position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are in the front-rear direction. Since the position is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower arm member 630 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 engraved in a gear shape on the radial outer side of the semicircular main body 651, and a semicircular main body. A support hole 653 is formed through the semicircular central axis of 651 as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted, and a cylindrical shape is projected from the outer diameter end of the semicircular main body 651 to the front side. A cylindrical protrusion 654, a plate-shaped portion to be detected 655 formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the peripheral end of the semicircular main body portion 651, and the plate portion to be detected. It includes a thickened portion 656 formed to be thickened between the 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position on the support hole 653 side of the thickened portion 656.

The gear portion 652 is arranged in a state of being meshed with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The columnar protrusion 654 passes through the arcuate hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the columnar protrusion 654. The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a fastening screw having a large diameter at the head is attached to the female screw portion formed at the tip of the protrusion of the columnar protrusion 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions that are configured to be engageable with the above-mentioned displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). By arranging the regulated hole 657 on the support hole 653 side (position closer to the support hole 653), the transmission gear 650 is changed to the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A). It is configured to reduce the transmitted load (moment).

Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickening portion 656 is set as a place where it is necessary to withstand the load generated by the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced by forming the portion where the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur with a thin wall.

FIG. 53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630 and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body 710. , A rotating plate 730 disposed between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-shaped main body 710 and supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the functional plate portion 720, and between the rotating plate 730 and the functional plate portion 720. The telescopic displacement member 740, which is arranged and configured to enable the same displacement as the magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and the drive gear MG3, which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720, are attached to the functional plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720 to execute a light emitting effect, and a light emitting effect device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the tips of a plurality of telescopic displacement members 740, respectively, and is in an effect standby state. A plurality of shielding design members 760 that are combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting effect device 750.

The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 projecting from symmetrical positions on the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions thereof. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 and a pair of cylindrical protrusions are projected from the arcuate position centered on 711 to the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630. A through hole 713 formed in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged under the through hole 713 and open only on the front side, and a pressing arranged on the back surface of the plate. A member PC1 is provided.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring DK1 guided to the tip end side of the lower arm member 630 between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin-walled lid portion 636 through the lower arm member 630 to the front side. .. In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 comes into contact with other members or is visually recognized by the player.

In addition to the function of guiding the electric wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed of an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the wiring guide member 714 is formed with the lower end portion of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. It also has a function to soften the contact of.

That is, when the upper side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced ascending, and the effect member 700 is displaced to the back side. Even so, when the wiring guide member 714 comes into contact with the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the ascending displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714.

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is slidably arranged with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in the present embodiment, in the process of ascending displacement of the effect member 700, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower end can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. By configuring the above, it is possible to divide the position where the load is generated for maintaining the posture of the effect member 700.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate portion 720. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate portion 720 is formed of a resin material in a substantially plate shape, and has a tubular portion 721 that is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the central portion and is formed through the inside of the cylinder, and a central shaft of the tubular portion 721. An arc-shaped hole 722 formed along a coaxial arc shape, a sensor arranging portion 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. With respect to the motor fixing portion 724 which has a large opening and is formed so that the drive motor MT3 can be fastened and fixed, the radial elongated hole 725a along the straight line passing through the central axis of the tubular portion 721, and the radial elongated hole 725a. A plurality of guide holes 725 (five sets in this embodiment) composed of a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b intersecting at right angles, and extending radially outward on an extension line of the radial elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (five locations in the present embodiment) extending plate portions 726 and both ends in the width direction of the extending plate portion 726 from the back side end portion of the flat surface portion arranged at the extending base end of the extending plate portion 726. A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, a pair for each of the extension plate portions 726) and a pair of columnar protrusions that are projected from the vicinity of the end portion in the outer diameter direction to the back surface side. 728 and.

The tubular portion 721 is arranged so that the rear end is in contact with the plate-shaped main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710 in a state where the internal through hole communicates with the through hole 713 of the plate-shaped main body 710. Will be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side of the plate-shaped main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the back side end portion of the tubular portion 721.

As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through the through hole. ..

The electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 which is fastened and fixed to the sensor arrangement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 which is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detected portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to project to the front side, and when the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7, the rotating plate 730 The posture can be determined.

The guide hole 725 is a group of through holes formed with a width in which the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 can be arranged, and is a group of through holes formed along a straight line extending in the radial direction from the central axis of the tubular portion 721. A long hole-shaped radial long hole 725a to be formed and a long hole shape along a straight line orthogonal to the reference straight line of the radial long hole 725a on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the radial long hole 725a. A pair of crossed elongated holes 725b formed in the above.

The radial elongated holes 725a and the crossed elongated holes 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusion 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement members 740 in the assembled arrangement state. It works, but the details will be described later.

The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured so that the tip on the back surface side can come into contact with the plate-shaped main body 710. In the abutting state, the female screw formed on the tip side of the columnar projecting portion 728 is screwed into the fastening screw inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side, so that the functional plate portion 720 becomes the plate-shaped main body. It is fastened and fixed to 710.

In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730. That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is also used as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-shaped main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotating plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 has a tubular portion 731 formed from a resin material in a substantially disk shape, projecting in a tubular shape toward the front side at the central portion, and penetrating the inside of the cylinder, and a central axis of the tubular portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 formed along a coaxial arc shape and long through holes are formed at positions on the outer diameter side of the tubular portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. A plurality of guide holes 733 (five locations in the present embodiment) and an extended claw portion 734 extending in a claw shape in the outer diameter direction at a position corresponding to the guide hole 733 are provided.

The tubular portion 731 is designed so that the inner diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the tubular portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 to detect the sensor SC7. 731a to be detected, which is formed so as to be able to enter the groove to be detected, and 731b, which is formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape capable of meshing with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can secure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at a little less than 120 degrees.

The guide holes 733 are each formed to have the same shape, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the tubular portion 731 and the center of the tubular portion 731 rather than the small-diameter arc portion 733a. It includes a large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the shaft, and a connecting portion 733c that connects the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a.

The mode of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the change in the length of the tubular portion 731 from the central axis per unit angle is formed so as to change according to the position. NS. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in the length of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle from the central axis in the vicinity of the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

As a result, the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the telescopic displacement member 740 can be reduced, and the effect of the effect can be improved by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that projects clockwise in the front view, is configured to be engaged with the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the back side in the thickness direction. The back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the back side claw portion 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b are separated at a substantially intermediate position of the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740. The front side claw portion 734b and the back side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b, which have different protrusion tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740 in the front-rear direction. It guides inward in the radial direction, but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the extension claw portion 734 has a longer extension length in the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side than in the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. Is formed in. In the present embodiment, the extension length is lengthened in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. This makes it possible to mitigate the effects of gravity.

That is, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 has the same shape, the relationship between the displaceable direction and the gravitational direction is different, so that the displacement caused by the action of gravity is different for each telescopic displacement member 740. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. The first guided protrusion 743b of the 740 may be arranged, and the extension claw portion 734 may fail to guide inward in the radial direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extended length of the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the telescopic displacement member 740. Guidance in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably executed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the upper side is displaced due to the influence of its own weight, the displacement is in the direction closer to the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730, so that the extension claw portion 734 is guided inward in the radial direction. Is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side should not be extended longer than necessary, but should be made shorter to reduce the material cost and reduce the size of the rotating plate 730. Can be done.

The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 58 (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59B is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), of the five sets of telescopic displacement members 740 and the shielding design member 760, one set arranged at the uppermost portion is shown in a state where they are collectively arranged. In 59 (a) and 59 (b), the same set is illustrated in the case of being discrete.

Since the telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members arranged in two front and rear layers, a plurality of the telescopic displacement members 740 arranged on the front side in the following description. The plane on which the long members of the above can be displaced is also referred to as a front layer plane, and the plane on which a plurality of long members arranged on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as a rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is pivotally supported by a pair of base end side members 741 arranged in two front and rear layers and pivotally supported at the lower end portion, and at the upper end portion of the base end side member 741. A pair of first long members 742, a pair of second long members 743 pivotally supported at the upper ends of the first long member 742, and an upper end of the second long member 742. A tip adjusting member 744 having a guide elongated hole 744a extending linearly so as to be guided is provided.

The base end side member 741, the first long member 742, and the second long member 743, which are composed of a pair of front and rear members, are designed so that the length and the support position in the long direction are the same as each other.

The base end side member 741 has a transmitted protrusion 741a projecting in a columnar shape from the lower end portion of the member on the rear plane side to the back surface side and a circle from the back surface to the front side from the back surface on which the columnar protrusion 741a projects. A guided protrusion 741b that is projected in a columnar shape and inserted into a member on the front surface plane side, and a lower end portion of a first long member 742 that is projected in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the rear layer plane side member to the front side. It is provided with a guided protrusion 741c which is inserted into a through hole formed in.

The transmitted protrusion 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotating plate 730 rotates.

The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate portion 725, and are guided in the elongated direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the crossed elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first long member 742 is pivotally supported on the front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the long direction, and is projected from the lower end of the member on the rear-layer plane side to the front side in a columnar shape on the front-layer plane. A guided protrusion 742a inserted through the upper end of the base end side member 741 on the side is provided.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the functional plate portion 725, and is guided in the elongated direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

The second long member 743 is pivotally supported on the front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the long direction, and is projected from the upper end of the member on the front plane side to the front side in a columnar shape. A pair of members projecting from the upper end of the member on the layer plane side to flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side with a diameter of about the width of the member, and projecting in a columnar shape from the protruding tip to the front side. A support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b projecting in a columnar shape from a substantially intermediate position of a member on the rear plane side to the back side are provided.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the back side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load inward in the radial direction by this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The tip adjusting member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side, and has a length extending along the linear direction with a width capable of inserting the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743. It includes a pair of guide elongated holes 744a formed in a hole shape, and a second guided protrusion 744b projecting in a columnar shape from a central position in the elongated direction toward the back surface side.

The protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b is arranged in front of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front side claw portion 734b of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730. This guidance receives a load inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 57).

The shape of the tip of the second guided protrusion 744b is not circular, and the rotating plate 730 having a rotation center on the side of the projected protrusion 741a is inclined to approach the second projected protrusion 744b as the rotating plate 730 is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. A surface (the surface on the left side of FIG. 59 (b)) facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) is provided with an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly displaced in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the rotating plate 730 at the time of contact with the extended claw portion 734 from becoming excessive. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged or dispersed, they are arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740. Support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer and inner ends of the guide elongated holes 744a of the tip adjusting member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the long direction) of the tip adjusting member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjusting member 744, extends to the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extended tip toward the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740. A member having a substantially triangular shape in front view having a shape portion that is inclined toward the extension and extends in parallel with the plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the extension tip. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to invisiblely shield the decorative member 752 on the back side by attaching colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets on the front and back surfaces, and at the right end portion, along the back surface of the member. An extension plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side is provided in a manner in which a plate surface is formed.

Similar to the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet attached to the front and back, and is arranged on the right side (clockwise direction) of the front view. It is arranged so as to face the back surface side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the back surface side, it comes into contact with the design member 760 so that the displacement can be suppressed.

The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be offset from the back surface side of the main body portion of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion and the extending plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the line.

This action becomes more remarkable as the arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is separated from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, but at least the dimensions allowed for the shielding design member 760 as the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extension plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 come into contact with each other along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

Further, the shape of the front surface of the extending plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface or may be formed as a flat surface having a normal line directed in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface in a mode in which the distance from the shielding design member 760 is closer to the back side.

As a result, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state where the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the uppermost shielding design member 760 is slightly displaced to the back side with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760. Even when displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, the position of the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the front view in the front-rear direction along the front inclination of the extension plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760. The deviation can be corrected. As a result, it is possible to easily align the relative positions of the shielding design members 760 adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58B, in the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760, a member that supports the right side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the rear layer plane. , The member supporting the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the intermediate portion of the pair of second long members 743 intersects in such a manner that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side portion becomes the right side portion. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily tilted in a posture arranged on the front side.

Since the configuration of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side portion is on the right side portion (the side on which the extension plate portion 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so that it is easy to tilt to the posture arranged on the front side.

Due to the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back surface side of the shielding design member 760 which is arranged to face the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) Can be avoided.

In the state where the five sets of the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are on the left side (next to the front counterclockwise direction). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses the displacement toward the back surface side.

According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is prevented from being displaced toward the front side by the extension plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shielding design member 760 on the right side (next to the clockwise direction in the front view). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of the shielding design members 760 so as to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of each of the five sets of the shielding design members 760 in the front-rear direction.

The interlocking of the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional plate portion 720. In FIGS. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an example of the arrangement of the outer shapes of the transmitted protrusion 741a and the guided protrusion 741b, 741c, 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is shown. NS.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58), and in FIG. 61, the rotating plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are dispersed. State (see FIG. 59) is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the transmitted protrusion 741a arranged in the guide hole 733 with the rotation of the rotating plate 730 is arranged in the rotating plate. By displacing the 730 in a direction closer to the rotation axis side, the state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes.

In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate portion 720, so that the shielding design member 760 is stretched toward the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it can be pulled out, but details will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54. The light emitting effect device 750 includes an illuminated substrate 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 disposed on the front side of the illuminated substrate 751 and formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Since an opening is formed in the central portion of the illuminated substrate 751 and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape protruding toward the front side, an arrangement area of the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

An opening 751a is formed in the central portion of the illuminated substrate 751. Inside the opening 751a, a drive motor MT3 and an electric wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring. However, since the arrangement area of the LED as the light emitting means is limited, the smaller the opening 751a is, the smaller the opening 751a is. desirable.

Since the LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 is assembled from the front side to the light transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material and the light transmitting member 752a, and the visible surface is mirror-shaped (for example, silver-plated coating is applied). Mirror surface member 752b and the like.

Since an opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a and the central portion of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at a position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in the front view. .. As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the player can visually recognize the reflected light due to the light irradiation from another direction (for example, the light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613). , It is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized in the dark.

The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. Note that in FIGS. 62 to 64, the front cover member 610 is not shown for ease of understanding.

FIG. 62 shows the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the descent state in which the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the overhang state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Illustrated.

The lower arm member 630 shown in FIG. 63 is shown as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary position between the transmission portion 624a and the margin portion 624b of the upper arm member 620. That is, the state in which the columnar protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission unit 624a and is arranged at a position where the downward displacement of the effect member 700 can be started is regarded as the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is downwardly displaced by, for example, the effect member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) arranged in the pachinko machine 10. It is in a state of being switched according to the execution of the effect to be performed, and before the suggestion effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin portion 624b side.

As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shaped portion that is continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and is an arc-shaped hole in the state shown in FIG. It is arranged at a position where it overlaps with 606 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 goes toward the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated regardless of the presence or absence of energization of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51), whereby the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630 connected to the upper arm member 620. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated.

Even if the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced is an effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. It is controlled to change the state to.

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in order to return the columnar protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

As a result, when an effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent effect related to the effect member 700 due to the difference in the drive sound of the drive motor MT2. ..

The margin portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction of raising the effect member 700. That is, in the driving mode in which the effect member 700 is raised, the effect member 700 is already arranged at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the subsequent displacement of the columnar protrusion 654 is a margin portion. The displacement is such that it slides along 624b.

Further, no matter where the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged in the margin portion 624b, there is no difference in the function of regulating the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, it is permissible that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar protrusion 654 becomes low, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately when the plate portion 655 to be detected enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when the effect member 700 is upwardly displaced can be set to be large without being limited to the speed. As a result, the ascending speed of the effect member 700 can be set large.

In addition, even if the ascending speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed toward the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the columnar protrusion 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated at the position where it comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654.

Further, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the ascending displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide holes 602 of the main body member 601) is changed from the effect standby state. Compared to the state in the middle of descent, the state from the state in the middle of descent to the overhanging state is set to be larger.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 due to the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to visually recognize the player as if the displacement speed of the effect member 700 is rapidly increasing, and the effect of the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 can be obtained. Can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, in order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 65 (b) is also shown as a diagram in which the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 are not shown.

In FIGS. 65A and 65B, the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown, in FIG. 66, the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and in FIG. 67, the effect member 700 is in the process of descending. The overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65A, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. That is, in the present embodiment, before the execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state where the detected plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. Therefore, the drive motor MT2 is driven and controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestion effect, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to the effect standby state.

On the contrary, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side where the effect member 700 is upwardly displaced, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. By controlling so as to release the transmission gear 650, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position where the columnar protrusion 654 is slightly entered into the margin 624b in the effect standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 can be stopped. , The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The position of the columnar protrusion 654 is controlled to stop the drive of the drive motor MT2 after a time delay of a sufficient time for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be arranged at the end of the margin portion 624b.

As a result, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to the position where the position of the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the end of the margin portion 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), so that the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position that is slightly rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), and is a cover shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is set at a position that partially overlaps the regulation hole 657.

Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in to bring the displacement regulating device 180 into the regulated state (see FIG. 15C), and then the transmission gear 650 is set. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction of upward displacement of the effect member 700 by drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) is not reached.

The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines the displacement defect of the transmission gear 650 because the plate portion 655 to be detected does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 is continuously driven. Can be done.

Based on this determination, an abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error display of a displacement defect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The store clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulating device 180 may remain in the regulated state.

Thereby, the notification such as the error display regarding the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be diverted, and the information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be transmitted to the clerk of the gaming machine store. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to be large. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the 700 is displaced ascending is excessive, the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, and the lower arm member 630 becomes the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the gravity direction (upward direction), a downward acceleration is always added to the lower arm member 630. This makes it possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65B, since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 Can increase the contact area when the vehicle collides with the upper arm member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large load from being locally generated on the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

As described above, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 when the effect member 700 is displaced ascending is excessive. Therefore, even if the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the lower arm is regulated by the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is regulated by the columnar protrusion 654 as described above. The ascending displacement of the member 630 can be regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 by the drive force of the drive motor MT2. Corresponds to the state.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 67, the effect member is similar to the state shown in FIG. The auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is arranged at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630.

Thereby, the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the degree to stabilize the posture) can be changed. That is, it is possible to increase the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 in the effect standby state or the overhang state as compared with the state in the middle of descent.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotation direction is not regulated (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 is centered on the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side in the rotation direction. Posture may change.

In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the columnar protrusion 711 on the left side, but in the direction of rotation about the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side. The displacement direction of the columnar protrusion 711 on the left side when the effect member 700 changes its posture is the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the effect member 700 may occur visibly without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the effect member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation about the right columnar protrusion 711 in the overhanging state is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. As a result, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be effectively restricted by the lower arm member 630, and the attitude change of the effect member 700 can be prevented to a discriminating degree.

In addition, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732 in the overhanging state, the right side is brought into contact with the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, centering on the columnar protrusion 711. As described above, the change in posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear is limited by the displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630.

Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, centering on the columnar protrusion 711. As described above, the change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is limited by the displacement direction of the columnar protrusion 711 on the right side along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 on the right side.

Further, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the posture of the effect member 700 in the rotation direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction), but also in the tilting direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress changes in posture and changes in posture in the horizontal swing direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are not connected only by a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but also of an auxiliary protrusion 712 or a cylindrical protrusion 711 arranged above the cylindrical protrusion 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right sides, the posture change of the effect member 700 in the tilting direction can be changed. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged on the upper side of the cylindrical protrusion 711 is arranged in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (on the root side of the arcuate hole 634), so that the effect member 700 is tilted. The long main body of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load generated by the change in posture in the direction.

Further, a pressing member PC1 is arranged on the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The displacement of the arm member 630 in the front-rear direction is regulated.

In this way, when the load due to the posture change of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the long direction, the lower arm member 630 By utilizing the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent the posture change of the effect member 700.

Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (lower) of the cylindrical protrusion 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 is lowered. It is possible to suppress the posture change of the arm member 630 in the lateral swing direction.

In the present embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700. In this embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the effect member 700 changes its posture in a manner of tilting forward around the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630, and also with the lower arm member 630. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 changes in such a manner that the effect member 700 tilts backward around the connecting portion.

That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes occur in the effect member 700, the displacement of the effect member 700 in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of which of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Since it can be used, it can respond to any change in posture.

As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) are arranged with a narrow front-rear distance, the effect member 700 may rub against or collide with the partition member 310. Since it can be avoided, it is possible to prevent damage to the effect member 700, deterioration of the design portion, damage to the partition member 310, deterioration of visibility due to scratches (decrease in transparency), and the like.

In the state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 comes into contact with the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotation direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the driving of the drive motor MT2 is continued, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced only by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

In the present embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from bouncing back and being displaced to the ascending side. I'm in control.

As a result, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 to be large (for example, a size that allows the effect member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when the effect member 700 is started to be displaced upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting the displacement to the upper side, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward by the urging force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the drive start of the drive motor MT2), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the displacement starts.

As a result, the load on the drive motor MT2 can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced ascendingly.

In FIGS. 65 to 67, the change in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the inner surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1 is shown by a hidden line. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the electric wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin-walled lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It is passed through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electric wiring DK1 which may be caused by the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electric wiring DK1 which is arranged in advance inside the wiring guide member 714. I try to do it. As a result, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed in the vicinity of the wiring guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed from an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load received by the electric wiring DK1 from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shaped portion of the lower arm member 630 where the arcuate hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is upwardly displaced from the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electric wiring with respect to the electric wiring DK1. The DK1 is arranged so that it can be pushed toward the wiring guide member 714.

As a result, the electrical wiring DK1 can be stably moved in and out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be stably generated.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged in the arcuate hole 634 arranged on the front side of the thin-walled lid portion 636 and largely hidden in the thin-walled lid portion 636 is in an overhanging state. Only is arranged in a position that can be seen from the rear view (see FIG. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arcuate hole 634, and at the same time, is a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, it is necessary to screw (or remove) the fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. As a result, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Further, as a result of assembling and maintaining the effect member 700 in a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at a halfway position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect member 700 and other constituent members are damaged.

Next, the displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 due to the state change will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of expansion / contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

FIG. 68 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 68 and 69, the front cover member 610 is not shown for ease of understanding.

In FIGS. 68 and 69, the descending state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the descending state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be expanded / displaced until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter, and the expansion / displacement member 700 is not controlled to the intermediate position. It is controlled to allow extended displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from becoming excessive in size when viewed from the front, and thus the amount of change in posture allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). Can be increased.

At a position in the middle of the expansion and displacement of the effect member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in the front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b includes the position covered by the effect member 700. The 752a is arranged at a position other than the visible position.

As a result, the visibility of the light emitted from the LED or the like arranged on the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a can be improved, and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a to provide a shielding design. By reflecting the light reflected on the back surface side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) is not irradiated with light, the mirror surface member 752b is exposed to the background color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment). Can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when irradiating light from the LED of the lighting substrate 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b and visually recognized is mixed with the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light radiated from the LED. Can be a different color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through a portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

The control mode is not limited in any way. For example, the shielding design member 760 may be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68 and then controlled to return to the collective arrangement state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching in small steps in the forward and reverse directions.

When the shielding design member 760 is controlled to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 is the position of the tip adjusting member in the state of the expanded displacement to the intermediate position. It is set to the intermediate position of the guide slot 744a of 744. As a result, the tip adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the elongated direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While such displacement can be achieved, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or when the shielding design members are displaced to the maximum in the radial direction, the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 Is arranged at both ends of the guide elongated holes 744a of the tip adjusting member 744, so that the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 in the circumferential direction can be returned (see FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b)). ).

Further, the intermediate position allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or a position slightly before the position where the maximum expansion displacement is performed.

Here, in a state of being expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extension plate portion 761 is visually recognized overlapping with the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other in the front view), the extension plate is present. Since the portion 761 plays a role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, the player can visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In the present embodiment, since the red reflective sheet is attached to the extending plate portion 761 as in the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, the red color of the extending plate portion 761 can be visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if this is the case, it is difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extension plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extension plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 that is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be made to stand out.

In the present embodiment, the case where the light transmitting member 752a is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extension plate portion 761 from the assembled arrangement state, the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 shields. Since it is visually recognized in red as in the design member 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the shielding design members 760 as if they are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when irradiating light from the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make it stand out. The effect of the production can be improved.

FIG. 70 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 70 and 71, the front cover member 610 is not shown for ease of understanding.

In FIGS. 70 and 71, the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlarged state of the effect member 700 are shown. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be expandable and displaceable until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in the front view is maximized, and the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). The device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 in a front view. Therefore, the mode in which the light is reflected on the mirror surface member 752b when the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) is irradiated can be changed from the case where the effect member 700 is arranged at the intermediate position of the expansion displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 so that the ground color of the mirror surface member 752b (silver in the present embodiment) can be easily seen by the player. Therefore, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized even in the control mode in which the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) continues to irradiate light of the same color. The color of the light to be visually recognized by the player can be changed in chronological order.

More specifically, for example, when irradiating white light from the illuminated substrate 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized in the vicinity of the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member is accompanied by the expansion displacement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the ground color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b becomes easily visible at the end position of the enlarged displacement. As a result, it is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player without changing the emission color.

It should be noted that the present embodiment is not a control mode in which the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 occur continuously, but in a state where the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. , It is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700.

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is executably controlled only when the effect member 700 is collectively arranged. This makes it possible to prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other constituent members such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering avoidance of collision with other constituent members and configuring so that the displacement does not cause a problem due to collision with other constituent members, the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced during the vertical displacement. It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduced displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 in the direction of arrow LXXIVb of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is an upper surface of the effect member 700 in the direction of arrow LXXVb of FIG. 75 (a). It is a figure.

In FIGS. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a), the plate-shaped main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding, and FIG. 72 is used as a reference. As shown, the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. Further, in FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), the drawing of the rotating plate 730b is omitted.

FIG. 72 (a) shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is separated at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72 (b) shows the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700. A state of being expanded and displaced to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is shown.

In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. 72 (b). The transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at an intermediate position of the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts to come into contact with the claw portion 734a on the back side of the rotating plate 730, and in FIG. 74, the first guided protrusion portion 743b is arranged on the lower side. The state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the claw portion 734a on the back side of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position immediately before the collective arrangement state is shown.

Since the influence of gravity is different between the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the upper side and the lower side. It differs depending on the member.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotating plate 730 side by their own weight, and the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side rotates by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to an extent permitted in the gap between the guide hole 733 and the projected protrusion 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the positions in the assembled arrangement state. Therefore, the timing at which the shielding design members 760 reach the collective arrangement state is five, not at the same time, and at least the upper three members are earlier than the lower two members.

As a result, the displacement of the effect member 700 to the collective arrangement state can be stably performed. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collective arrangement state vigorously, so that the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collective arrangement state. When it collides with the 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause premature damage.

On the other hand, when the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in the collective arrangement state as in the present embodiment. Is generated in a direction in which its own weight opposes the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, so that the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to the collision between the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacement member 740 is pushed off by the claw portion 734a on the back surface side, and is put into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjusting member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw portion 734b.

In FIG. 75, the collective arrangement state of the effect member 700 is shown. That is, the state in which the rotating plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear is shown up to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730.

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the assembled arrangement state of the effect member 700, the surface of the rear side claw portion 734a abuts on the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740 is large. Displacement outward in the direction is regulated.

In addition, the surface of the front side claw portion 734b on the central axis side abuts on the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 to the outside in the radial direction is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b come into contact with each other in the radial direction with a front-rear width in the protrusion direction, so that the second long member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744 are arranged and arranged. The posture can be stabilized.

Further, the front surface of the tip adjusting member 744 is slidably configured on the back surface of the extension plate portion 726. In this sliding process, the protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 comes into contact with the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collective arrangement state, the more it is inclined so as to project toward the front side). Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can give a load to the front side with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b.

As a result, in a configuration in which the tip adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, the tip of the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect member 700 approaches the collective arrangement state. The tip adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in a manner in which the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extending plate portion 726.

Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotating plate 730 from being excessively increased, the load sandwiched in the front-rear direction is gradually increased to the tip adjusting member 744, and the position and posture in the front-rear direction of the tip adjusting member 744 are provided. Since it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction, the shielding design member 760 can be closely arranged without a gap in the collective arrangement state.

With reference to FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), it will be described that the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configuration of the shielding design member 760 is common, and the configuration of the telescopic displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design member 760 is also common.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is on the side where the extension plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59 (a)) is formed in the width direction (in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost portion, the right side, FIG. 74). (See (b)) is configured to be easily tilted so that it is arranged on the rear side as compared with the opposite side.

This is due to the formation mode of the second long member 743, and this posture inclination also occurs in the tip adjusting member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the posture of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is rearward as compared with the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift to the clockwise direction side (in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost portion, the left side, see FIG. 74 (b)).

On the other hand, in the rotating plate 730, the extended claw portion 734 is arranged so as to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the rotating plate 730 is arranged in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. Rotationally displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, the inner diameter side surface of the front side claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) come into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, whereby the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise side when viewed from the rear, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). As a result, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position of the collective arrangement of the effect members 700.

The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. 75. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the effect member 700 shown in time series from FIGS. 72 to 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). The posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and then a posture change that eliminates (corrects) the attitude inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be generated.

That is, while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 come into contact with each other (collision). ), On the other hand, after the approach between the shielding design members 760 is completed, the attitude inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is eliminated (corrected), so that the shielding design member The plate portions arranged in the foremost surface of the 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and it is possible to easily produce a sense of unity of the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state.

The state shown in FIG. 74 (b) is shown as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. Further, the posture shift on the opposite side of the posture shift in FIG. 74 (b) is configured so as to be less likely to occur from the front-rear arrangement configuration of the second long member 743. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other.

Further, the auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the reduced side wall portion in the enlarged / reduced displacement of the tip adjusting member 744. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the extension plate portion 726, the tip adjusting member 744 is brought into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjusting member 744 that has reached the end on the reduced side of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

As a result, not only the posture is corrected by engaging with other shielding design members 760, but also the posture can be stabilized when the tip adjusting member 744 alone reaches the end on the reduced side of the displacement range. can.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned firing effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged as effect devices for enlivening the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

Since a pair of units of the displacement rotation unit 800 are arranged symmetrically and have a shape symmetrical with each other, the configuration of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the left side will be described below, and the displacement rotation unit 800 on the right side will be described. Omit. In the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78 show the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800.

FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIGS. 79 and 80, the horizontal slide member 840 is shown in the assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 has a base plate portion 810 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal that is fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A drive in which a rod MB2 and a metal rod MB2 are inserted and fixed to a vertical slide member 820 configured to be slidable and displaceable in the vertical direction, and fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820, and fastened and fixed to a base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 are inserted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The horizontal slide member 840 and the transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced in the vertical direction. A wiring arm member 870 that is rotationally displaceably fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position of the vertical slide member 820 on the metal rod MB2 side, and a wiring arm member 870 and a wiring guide member 880 that guides electrical wiring are provided. ..

The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the columnar protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. A drop-out prevention plate 814, which is arranged on the back side in order to prevent the drop-off of the metal, is provided.

The vertical slide member 820 is a circle from a substantially central position of a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge portion of the flat plate portion 821 to the back surface side, and a region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to the back surface side. In the columnar projecting portion 823 projecting in a columnar shape, the abbreviated portions 824a and 824b in which the formation of the wall portion is omitted with a size large enough to allow the connector portion of the electric wiring to be inserted, and the left end portion of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a tubular shape (or tubular members are arranged) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal metal rod MB3 capable of inserting the metal rod MB3 in the upper and lower center portions of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or tubular members are arranged) and the metal rod insertion portions 826 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the ends to prevent the metal rods MB3 from falling off. A fall-prevention member 827 that can be configured, a shaft support 828 that is formed so as to project in a columnar shape on the back side of the flat plate portion 821 so that the two-stage pinion 861 can be pivotally supported, and the left and right outside in the horizontal direction from the upper end ( It is provided with a support protrusion 829 that is projected in a cylindrical shape toward the left side of FIG. 79).

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring by forming a region in which the electrical wiring displaceable, which is arranged between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, can be displaced. The abbreviated portions 824a and 824b formed as the interrupted portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first abbreviated portion 824a formed as an opening and a second abbreviated portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the back surface side.

The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate shape on the back side in the upper portion thereof, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810, and the upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower side detection. A plate portion 825a to be detected is provided so as to be dispositionable in the detection groove of the sensor SC9.

The transmission member 830 has a main body 831 formed in a vertically long plate shape and a female screw formed at the tip of a columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body 831. An insertion hole 832 in which an opening is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into the screw can be inserted into the screw, and a plate portion through which the insertion hole 832 is formed. A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side and a linear gear portion 834 that linearly forms gear teeth in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which the fastening screw to be inserted into the above-mentioned insertion hole 832 is screwed in and a role as a winding center of the electric wiring as described later.

The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally driven and controlled, the transmission member 830 is vertically displaced in the vertical direction. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is displaced up and down.

FIG. 81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 has a main body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose displacement is restricted in the left-right direction, and the back surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side to form a guide path for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and is formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a circular member 847 thereof. An illuminated substrate 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841 and an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. A pinnate member 854 that is rotatably supported by the blade, and an intermediary member 857 that is fitted into the opening of the pinnate member 854 from the front side in order to match the central opening diameter of the pinnate member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. A central design member 858 having a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the central opening of the intermediary member 857 is provided on the back surface side.

In the main body plate member 841, the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed to the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the rod arrangement portion 842 on which the metal rod MB3 is arranged and the lower side of the rod arrangement portion 842. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction is provided.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the lateral displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed from a shape that bypasses the electric wiring. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, which will be described in detail later.

The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the pinnate member 854 and the drive gear MG5, which are formed so as to be toothed with each other, are assembled from different directions in the front-rear direction.

The circular member 847 has a receiving portion 848 formed in a cup shape having a size capable of accepting the pinnate member 854 and recessed toward the back side, and the circular member 847 is cylindrically projected from the center portion of the receiving portion 848 to the front side. It is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 849 to be formed.

The receiving portion 848 includes a through-hole portion 848a that is formed through a shape that overlaps with a cylinder centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5, and a gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 passes through the through-hole portion 848a. It is exposed to a position that can be seen from the back.

In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 is made meshable with the drive gear MG5, the driving force is transmitted as the drive motor MT5 rotates, and the pinnate member 854 is rotated and controlled. The rotary drive of the pinnate member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotary unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so that it is possible even in the effect standby state.

A linear notch 849a is formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 849. This is a shape portion for facilitating the posture maintenance of the central design member 858 by arranging the radial projecting portion 858b of the central design member 858, and the details will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 will be referred to as appropriate.

The illuminated substrate 850 has a circular opening formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, a deformed opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the circular opening, and a variant thereof. It is composed of a front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged on the back side at the outer diameter end of the illumination substrate 850. The back side light emitting means 852b is provided.

In the deformed opening 851, the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be arranged inside the opening, and in the assembled state, the gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 is arranged on the back side of the deformed opening 851.

The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotating shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the illuminated substrate 850, and the gear portion 855 of the pinnate member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily meshed with each other.

The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. As a result, light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a near the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854.

The rear side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces outward in the radial direction. As a result, light can be irradiated toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light toward the front side due to the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the plate of the circular member 847, the light can be advanced to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854. In the present embodiment, a plurality of long uneven shapes formed along an arc concentric with the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the plate of the circular member 847. On the other hand, the arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized in the front view.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the player does not need to arrange an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the pinnate member 854 on the front side of the illuminated substrate 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be moved in the out-of-diameter direction. In other words, while using the illuminated substrate 850 having a diameter smaller than the outermost diameter of the pinnate member 854, the outside of the surface on which the illuminated substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outer diameter of the pinnate member 854. Light can be visually recognized in (see FIG. 14).

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing the light on the radial outside of the pinnate member 854 without increasing the size of the illuminated substrate 850. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the pinnate member 854 rotates at high speed, the back surface side of the pinnate member 854 becomes a shadow, and there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to effectively perform the light emission effect in this range. .. In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the radial outside of the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854, but for that purpose, it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LED or the like. In other words, it becomes necessary to increase the area of the illuminated substrate, which increases the manufacturing cost of the substrate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while maintaining the size of the illuminated substrate 850 smaller than the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854, only the visible position of light is displaced in the outer diameter direction from the rotation locus of the pinnate member 854. It can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect without increasing the manufacturing cost.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 81 and 82. The decorative member 853 is a member formed of a light-impermeable resin material and coaxially fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively change the appearance of the light between the inside and the outside of the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, by irradiating blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and irradiating red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, there are a region that appears to emit blue light and a region that appears to emit red light. Can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

The pinnate member 854 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and extends outward in the radial direction at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a circular opening 854a bored in the front-rear direction at the center and the circular opening 854a as the center. A plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back surface side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back surface side at an intermediate position between adjacent blade portions 854b. And.

The circular opening 854a is formed with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The pinnate member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5, but a detection sensor for detecting the posture of the pinnate member 854 is not arranged, and the drive motor MT5 The posture of the pinnate member 854 is controlled by the length of the driving time of the pinnate member 854. In this configuration, the pinnate member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the position of the center of gravity coincide with each other, and by minimizing the idling after the energization of the drive motor MT5 is released, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the pinnate member 854 assumed by the driving time of the pinnate member 854 and the actual posture of the pinnate member 854. By configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor, the posture of the pinnate member 854 may be detectable.

The mediating member 857 is formed so as to be fitted to the front side opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is formed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. As a result, the mediator member 857 can be made rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849.

The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a projecting in a columnar shape from the central portion to the back surface side, a radial projecting portion 858b projecting in the outer diameter direction of the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body portion. It is provided with a design ridge portion 858c that is projected upward from the top.

The central protrusion 858a is a portion to be inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in a posture in which the radial protrusion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a, and is inserted into the female screw formed at the tip portion from the back side of the circular member 847. By screwing the fastening screw to be inserted, the central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847.

In addition to the function as the design portion, the design ridge portion 858c can come into contact with the pinnate member 854 and function to adjust the rotation mode of the pinnate member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design ridge portion 858c and the front surface of the pinnate member 854 are arranged close to each other to the extent that they rub against each other, the increase in resistance at the time of rubbing is used to stabilize the stop posture of the pinnate member 854. Can be planned.

As a result, as the drive control mode of the pinnate member 854, a drive mode in which rotation is continued for a long period of time and a drive mode in which rotation of about one rotation is intermittently generated (irregular operation at the start of rotation is produced. When there is a drive mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the pinnate member 854 in the latter drive mode.

It will be described back to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so that it meshes with the two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 and can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction. The rack member 862 and the fall prevention member 863 for preventing the rack member 862 from falling off from the vertical slide member 820 are provided.

The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion having a pitch circle radius longer than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a. A matching large-diameter pinion 861b is provided, and the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 is formed to be long on the left and right, and is formed as a rack gear that can be meshed with the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. It is provided with a columnar projecting portion 862b projecting from the end portion to the front side in a columnar shape.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are composed of gear teeth having the same shape, and have a pitch circular radius of the small diameter pinion 861a. , The ratio of the large-diameter pinion 861b to the pitch circle radius is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the lateral displacement amount of the rack member 862 to the lateral displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

The columnar protrusion 862b is formed with an outer diameter that can be arranged inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. Further, the thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar protrusion 862b is formed prevents the back end of the rack member 862 from falling off when the columnar protrusion 862b is arranged on the transmission guide portion 813. The plate thickness is set so that the columnar protrusion 862b does not fall off from the transmission guide portion 813 even if it approaches the back surface side until it comes into contact with the plate 814.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack member 862 from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813 when the fall-off prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth having the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is as large as that of the small diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

Therefore, the displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased as compared with the displacement amount of the rack member 862. As a result, it is possible to secure a large displacement width in the left-right direction of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the left-right width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, which will be described in detail later.

FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member formed of a resin material, and has a long main body portion 871 formed in a long curved shape and one side is open, and a long main body portion 871 thereof. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the elongated direction of the above, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 formed close to the support hole 872 and formed in the same direction so that electrical wiring can be arranged. It is possible to remove a plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open side end of the long main body 871 and a resin mold for forming the claws 874. It is provided with a through hole 875 for the purpose of forming a through hole 875, and a circular projecting portion 876 projecting from the vicinity of the other end portion of the elongated main body portion 871 in the elongated direction in a circular cross section in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872.

The long main body portion 871 is a portion in which the electrical wiring guided to the open side portion is arranged through the wiring arrangement hole 873, and the narrowing portion 871a having a shorter width and length is provided in the intermediate portion thereof. The electrical wiring is arranged along the long direction of the long main body 871 and is guided to the outside from the other end in the long direction (the end opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed).

The throttle portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 so as not to cause disconnection and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively displaced. The throttle portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the throttle portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed in a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted, whereby the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820.

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electrical wiring arranged in the wiring arm member 870 passes to the vertical slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, it is possible to reduce the amount of misalignment of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates. As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off from the long main body portion 871. Further, since the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 having a minimum area, the electrical wiring is opposite to the open portion side of the long main body portion 871. It is possible to prevent the through hole 875 from coming out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in the present embodiment).

The circular protrusion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protrusion length that can be arranged in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 constitutes an internal path by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886 and the prevention plate 881. The member includes a path forming member 882 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape in which one side is opened, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the opened portion, so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the back side at a position separated in the vertical direction. It constitutes a path passing through the upper open portion 883 and the lower open portion 884.

That is, the path forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a projecting to one side at the edge portion, and the upper opening portion 883 forming the upper opening portion of the path due to the lack of the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882. The lower opening portion 884 that is bored in the wall portion 882a with a size that allows the connector of the electrical wiring to be inserted in the portion, and the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 within a range that does not overlap with the prevention plate 881 in the left-right direction view. An extension portion 885 to be extended, a guide recess 886 recessed in a long groove shape within a range that does not overlap with the extension portion 885 in the left-right direction, and a guide recess 886 below the lower edge portion of the guide recess 886. A columnar projecting portion 887 is provided, which is projected on the prevention plate 881 side in a columnar shape and into which a fastening screw inserted into the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

A space is formed on the back surface side of the path forming member 882 so that the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction. It enters the back surface side of the wall portion 882a at the position where it is arranged (the position near the lower end of the displacement) (see FIG. 86 (a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position near the lower end of the displacement on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that constitutes the path through which the electrical wiring is guided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal slide member 840 while allowing the electrical wiring and the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 to overlap in the front view.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and among the displacements of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement of the wiring guide member 880 in the width direction is the extension portion 885. And it is regulated by the prevention plate 881. Further, the width direction length of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total width direction length of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion portion 876. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower opening portion 884 functions as a wiring through hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 to the back surface side.

The guide recess 886 is a connecting recess 886c that connects the front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, the rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b, and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. And.

The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion for limiting the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

The displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. In FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changing from the effect standby state to the effect upper end state is illustrated in chronological order.

FIG. 86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXVIb-LXXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a). 87 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87 (b) is a displacement rotation unit 800 in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement in the line LXXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 89 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 800, FIG. 89 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotating unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the displacement rotation unit 800 in a line.

In FIG. 86, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is a displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the intermediate right end state and the effect upper end state, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the intermediate right end state and the effect upper end state. The state of the left end in the middle of being arranged at the left end of the displacement path between the two is shown, and in FIG. 89, the state of the upper end of the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

In FIGS. 86 (a), 87 (a), 88 (a) and 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 has a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886 and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 are visible by omitting the illustration of the other shaped portions. Further, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end portion of the base plate 810, it is possible to prevent the vertical slide member 820 from being hidden during the vertical displacement.

In FIGS. 86 (b), 87 (b), 88 (b) and 89 (b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the lateral slide member 840 is shown with an imaginary line. For the purpose of showing only the displacement width in the left-right direction, it is shown by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841.

Further, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 due to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The electric wiring DK2 is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided to the lateral slide member 840 through the enclosed space, and the details of the displacement will be described later.

The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocally displaced in the vertical direction. First, the ascending displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction in the effect standby state (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. That can be determined by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Further, in the effect standby state, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer end portions) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged on the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retract from the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840, it is possible to avoid that the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is restricted to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full left and right outside.

The state in which the drive motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction in which the vertical slide member 820 is moved upward and displaced from the effect standby state and the plate portion 825a to be detected is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the state at the right end on the way (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the right end state on the way by the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

In the right end state on the way, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the ascending direction and the right direction from the effect standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the ascending direction, and the posture is maintained.

That is, in the right end state on the way, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still arranged in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, so that the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction is maintained from the effect standby state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 to the right due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the right end state on the way is executed without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. NS. As a result, it is possible to avoid collisions between the members due to the displacement timing deviation, which tends to occur when the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are both displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (b), the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction with the ascending displacement of the vertical slide member 820. In this displacement, the displacement direction is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but the displacement exceeds the left-right width of the transmission guide portion 813 and is displaced in the left-right direction.

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that guides the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are teethed on the two-stage pinion 861. Will be combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radii of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 to the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circular radius of the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) to the pitch circular radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is 9:16. The lateral slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction by the left-right width obtained by multiplying the amount of change in the above by a constant (that is, 16/9 = about 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced outward to the left and right as much as in the effect standby state in the left end state on the way. In other words, the lateral slide member 840 does not displace until it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction.

In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88A, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the right end state to the left end state on the way, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is formed in the connecting recess 886c formed on the back side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance between the support protrusion 829 as the support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction is reduced as compared with the effect standby state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the lateral slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction. Further, at the time of downward displacement, the reverse (the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction view after the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 is prevented) is established.

As a result, even if the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870 deviate from each other, it is possible to prevent the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 from colliding with each other.

The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end portion (horizontal end portion in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the displacement is limited to the vertical displacement and the posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer ends that are difficult for the player to pay attention to, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 guide the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of view.

As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), in the period until the displacement rotation unit 800 reaches the upper end state of the effect, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is formed. It is arranged in the rear vertical recess 886b formed on the back side of the connecting recess 886c of the guide recess 886, and has a support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( The front-back distance from (see FIG. 84) is maintained in the minimum state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at different front-rear positions corresponding to the vertical positions by using the wiring arm member 870 that is configured to be able to change its posture according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820. By making it possible, it is possible to secure an arrangement space for the constituent members, which is an advantageous effect.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. More specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the effect standby state is set to the right side (left and right inward side). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the position on the right side (left and right inward side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the displacement rotation unit 800 is miniaturized in order to avoid contact. May need to be dealt with. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, the lateral displacement member 840 can be sufficiently secured in the left-right direction, while the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the is reduced.

In the present embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in particular, to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640 arranged in the right region of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc. is likely to be low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured so that the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 can be displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the lateral slide member 840 is not restricted in the left-right direction. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13.

That is, at the lower end position where the lateral slide member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged on the front side of the lateral slide member 840 by arranging the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 on the front side, and the lateral slide member 840 is arranged. It is avoided that the displacement of is limited by the electric wiring DK2.

In addition, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced inward to the left and right, and at the upper position where the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged to the rear side for electrical wiring. The DK2 is placed closer to the back, leaving space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the members arranged on the game board 13 as a configuration of a solenoid or the like for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

The state change of the electric wiring DK2 in the state change shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The state change of the electric wiring DK2 referred to here means a change of the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in the state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper portion (the side closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding portion DK2b is not preferred to extend and bend exclusively up and down. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 to the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86 (a)), so that the rigidity is higher than that of the winding displacement portion of the lower winding portion DK2b. Is preferable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the resin cable tube is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so as to exhibit a behavior in which the rigidity is higher than that of the winding displacement portion.

In the state shown in FIG. 89A, the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2 to avoid rubbing between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

Further, since the wiring arm member 870 is configured so that the lower end opening direction is directed vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of the downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary bending deformation of the electric wiring DK2 from occurring.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, and is arranged on the lower side. The winding portion DK2b is arranged below the wiring arm member 870 so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887.

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the columnar protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar protrusion 823. It is composed of.

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 is displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 887. It is configured to be possible.

That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 and the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870 are configured to be different from each other. In the present embodiment, the planes in which the planes are orthogonal to each other and the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 are the first omitted portion 824a, the second omitted portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. It is configured to pass through 873.

Displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by having a portion of the wiring arm member 870 arranged inside the long main body portion 871 sandwiched between the throttle portions 871a as described above. Therefore, the relative displacement of the electric wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

From here, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wiring DK2 due to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be completed independently for each of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise from the front view centering on the columnar protrusion 823 from the portion that has passed through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the part guided by the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as the limit, and is in the effect standby state that spreads most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)). The wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 822 in the effect standby state can be reduced.

When the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, and the upper winding portion DK2a is pulled, and the radial inside centering on the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the lateral slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left side, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left side, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pushed and the upper winding portion is wound upward in the radial direction centered on the columnar protrusion 823. The part DK2a is displaced. At this time, since the guide piece 844a that inclines downward toward the left is projected from the left end portion of the wiring guide member 844, the upper winding portion DK2a is outward (vertical slide member 820 and the wiring guide member 844). It is possible to prevent the upper winding portion DK2a from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from the portion hanging downward from the wiring arm member 870 in the left side view (direction view from the left and right outside) around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (the cylindrical projecting portion 887). It includes a portion that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rotation direction), and means a portion up to a portion arranged in the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and the effect standby state that spreads most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (a)). ), The wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without a load. As a result, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 882a in the effect standby state can be reduced.

When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward due to the vertical slide member 820 being displaced upward from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, and the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction about the columnar projecting portion 887. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed and the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction centered on the cylindrical projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the inclined direction toward the front side toward the lower side, the lower winding portion DK2b is between the columnar projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (cylindrical portion). It is possible to prevent the lower winding portion DK2b from entering (above the projecting portion 887), and the lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In the present embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the lower end position of the displacement range of the horizontal slide member 840. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction is limited by the arrangement of the lateral slide member 840. The front-back width of (see) can be fully utilized for displacement.

Therefore, since a large space capable of accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently lengthened, and the wiring arm member 870 can be used. The allowable vertical displacement amount can be lengthened.

90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 has a center frame 86 arranged on the front side of the window portion 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of streams whose front side is open from the resin member. A ball flow unit 150 formed in a road shape and arranged in a lower portion on the back surface side of the base plate 60 is provided.

The ball flow-down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to accept a ball that has flowed down the lower end of the flow path LB1 of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path 152 are long box-shaped members whose front side is open and are fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 151 from the back side in a manner of being connected to the downstream side of the receiving flow path 151. A flow path member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the inner side of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the sphere are provided.

The plurality of ridge portions 154 are arranged alternately on the left and right sides at intervals of about the diameter of a sphere for each of the left and right wall portions. As a result, the flow of the sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 can be decelerated.

The functions of the first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153 will be described. The first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153 have a function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to a ball discharge path (not shown), and a ball entering the second winning opening 640. There is a function to improve the effect by making the later game ball visible to the player. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the second winning opening 640, a detection sensor for detecting ball passage is arranged near the lower edge shown in FIG. 90. As a result, the prize ball can be paid out and the hold display on the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately executed, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the player can notice the entry into the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving flow path 152. For example, it is possible to easily notice a situation in which the payout is not performed due to a defect on the pachinko / pachislot machine store side.

As will be described below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1, so that the position of the detection sensor is set downstream of the intermediate flow path LM1 or the like. The timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of holding display may be delayed.

The game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is an intermediate flow path LM1 (FIG. 27) flow down.

Similar to the guide flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so that the sphere can be guided vertically downward while being displaced in a zigzag manner to the left and right. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 look the same in the flow mode, the ball in the path on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the sphere is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 even by visually recognizing.

Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down during the right-handed game is information that is directly linked to the interests of the player, and is the information of the nail (not shown) planted on the base plate 60. This is a part where individual differences occur in the pachinko machine 10 depending on the state.

In the present embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or before entering the second winning opening 640. Since the nails that the balls collide with are planted, whether the balls easily flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during the right-handed game is determined for each pachinko machine 10. different.

A ball that does not enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving during the right-handed game will flow down the guide path DL1 and will not enter the general winning opening 63 located on the downstream side thereof. It is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (it becomes a waste ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide path DL1 correspond uniquely. The degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when paying attention to the guide path DL1 than when paying attention only to the second winning opening 640 because the guide path DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It's clear.

Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency of the ball flowing down the guide path DL1 is confirmed, the frequency of the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the frequency of occurrence of wasted balls in the right-handed game, and the like are calculated. It is expected to consider whether or not to continue the game in consideration of.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball that flows down the guide path DL1 and a ball that enters the second winning opening 640 and flows down the intermediate flow path LM1. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high, and it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning opening 640 and is discharged from the game area, so it flows down vertically as it is and the specific winning opening 65a is viewed from the front. If it flows down to a position where it overlaps with, it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a, which may hinder the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by letting the ball flow down to the left and right inward by the first receiving flow path 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, the ball reaches the position where it overlaps with the specific winning opening 65a in the front view. It is prevented (see Fig. 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. ..

The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in the front view to the vicinity of the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view, and passes through the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side of. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, he is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. , It is possible to make the player who does not pay attention to the right-handed route recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning opening 640.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, an important display is executed when the player looks away from the third symbol display device 81 for viewing the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player misses the display, which is a comfortable game. Can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows down diagonally downward to the left on the right side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridge portion 154, the staying time of the flowing ball can be extended. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls that are visually recognized in the game area in the front view.

Further, by ensuring a long left-right width of the flow path of the sphere, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the flow path of the second receiving flow path member 153 are likely to intersect. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball flowing down inside the second receiving flow path member 153 to enter the player's field of view.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effect means 160, and the decorative means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are disassembled views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effect means 160, and the decorative means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate effect means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side so as to be in contact with the front side and the upper surface side of the light guide plate 161. The center frame 86 is formed of an impermeable resin material and has an upper support member 162 for aligning the light guide plate 161 and a light transparent resin material for pressing the lower portion of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 that can be fastened and fixed, a sphere flow path component 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and formed of a light-transmitting resin material to form a sphere flow path, and a light-transmitting member. A plurality of left and right side support members 165 that are formed from the resin material of the above and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a manner of pressing the left and right side portions of the light guide plate 161 from the back side, and are formed in a long left and right shape to support the upper side. A horizontal substrate unit 166 that is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending from the upper side of the member 162 to the front side of the center frame 86, and a vertically long shape formed from the front side of the center frame 86 to the center frame 86. It includes a vertical substrate unit 167 that is arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decorative means 170 includes a first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and arranged at the center positions on the left and right near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material. On the right side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and a second decorative member 174 arranged on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86, on the front side of the right frame portion of the center frame 86. A third decorative member 177 to be arranged is provided.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to the central portion thereof, and a margin member 173 that is composed of another member as a margin portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10. To be equipped.

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 is provided with a horizontally long groove portion 171a having a horizontally long groove shape recessed on the back surface side. The horizontally long groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width in which the illuminated substrate of the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate effect means 160 can be arranged.

The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is visibly configured through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the light emitting effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state can be visually recognized by the player without being shielded by the light guide plate 161.

The relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 on the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. In FIG. 96, the vicinity of the horizontally long groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. Further, in the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the front and back sides of the illuminated substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light is irradiated along the arrows D1a and D1b in the vertical direction. 1 On the back surface side of the decorative member 171, the light that has reached the reflection shape portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a can be visually recognized conspicuously.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontally placed substrate unit 166, the mode of the light emitting effect (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depending on the forming range or forming shape of the reflection shape portion 171b. Can be made different and visible.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface on the lower surface. The rows are arranged in two horizontal rows, that is, a row corresponding to the top and bottom and a row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface are arranged inside the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a, and the rear row on the lower surface is arranged outside the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the upper row and the front row of the lower surface can irradiate the reflection shape portion 171b with light, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface can be used as different light emitting targets. It can irradiate light.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the irradiated LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to illuminate the light guide plate 161.

In the LED arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, the upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows. As a result, the light emitted from the front and rear two rows of LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in the front view. As a result, the light emitted to the display area side and the light emitted to the game area side without irradiating the display area side can be clearly separated.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged at the same front-rear position as the reflective shape portion 171b, while the front-rear surface is formed of a flat surface. As a result, even when the light is irradiated from the horizontally placed substrate unit 166, it is possible to prevent the light from being reflected intensely, and the visibility can be maintained.

In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specifications, so-called different specifications) is displayed by the number of the star shapes. It is configured so that it can be done. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a member separate from the first decorative member 171 to manufacture a pachinko machine 10 having a different type of performance, the pachinko machine 10 can be replaced by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

The margin member 173 is configured as a member separate from the first decorative member 171 and has a shape different from the shape formed on the reflection shape portion 171b as the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate (in this embodiment, a striped groove). ) Is formed so that the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflection shape portion 171b.

FIG. 97 is a partially front enlarged view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is irradiated in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflection shape portion 171b travels to the front side due to reflection or refraction, and is sparkled. On the other hand, the light that reaches the margin member 173 is visually recognized slightly dark because it is configured so that most of the light is transmitted and travels as it is, rather than being mainly reflected.

As a result, the shape of the margin member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 travels in the vertical direction. It can be visually recognized as if it were. In other words, it is possible to visually recognize the LED as if the LED is arranged on the back side to produce light emission.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 in which a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) having low transparency is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back surface side of the second decorative member 174. .. As a result, the back side of the second decorative member 174 can be made difficult to see.

As a result, the gaming area (particularly the left side portion) formed on the front side of the base plate 60 and the forming area of the light guide plate 161 in the front view (including the area overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front-rear direction). Can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sphere flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the effect of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

The third decorative member 177 is three-dimensional in such a manner that a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns are three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal shaped portions arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction are combined on the back side thereof. 178 are provided with a plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 that are specifically formed.

Like the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in a space arranged between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide path DL1 in the center frame 86. NS.

As a result, it is possible to execute a light effect that is visually recognized three-dimensionally, instead of a light effect that is visually recognized in a plane between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide path DL1. That is, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with depth in the front view.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front-rear direction is determined by the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front view. Whether it gets brighter or not changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to perform a light effect such as shining the front side or shining the back side.

In the present embodiment, as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the back side, a third symbol display device 81, a front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed. , The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, the types of light effects can be easily increased as compared with the case where light is emitted from a light emitting means such as a fixedly arranged LED toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178.

Further, for example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the left-right direction or the vertical direction, the position in the front-rear direction of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front view. Which position of is brighter changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to perform a light effect such as shining the front side or shining the back side.

In the present embodiment, the first light irradiating device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left-right direction (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least a part of the light emitted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree to which the mode of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display effect mode of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played through the three-dimensional decorative member 178. It is possible to easily prevent the color of the light visually recognized by the person from becoming purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is configured to be visible from the front view and the entire sphere is configured to flow down in the same path has been described, but the ball flow-down unit of the second embodiment has been described. In 2150, the flowing sphere is configured to flow down one of a plurality of paths. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 illustrates an example of how the granular member 320 looks immediately after firing. As shown in FIG. 98, the ball flow-down unit 2150 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 to the left, as a difference from the ball flow-down unit 150 described in the first embodiment. A third receiving flow path 2155 is provided, which is a flow path having a size that allows a sphere to flow down.

The third receiving flow path 2155 is formed on the upstream side and is set to have a gentler inclination angle than the first receiving flow path 152, and the lower end (left end) is set to the left side of the front view of the first winning opening 64 with the inclined portion 2155a. , A discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward from the front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The flow speed of the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is slower than the flow speed of the sphere in the first receiving flow path 152 due to the shallow inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in the front view. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of view for a long time.

As a result, the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to enter the field of view of the player playing the game while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. .. In other words, the attention to the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 in the same manner, and at the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 along the second receiving flow path member 153. It is switched by the switching means whether it flows down in the first direction D21 where it flows down or in the second direction D22 which flows down along the third receiving flow path 2155.

In the present embodiment, the ridge portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed in the second receiving flow path member 153 increases the flow resistance of the sphere flowing through the second receiving flow path member 153. Therefore, if the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153, the ball will be guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. ..

Such a situation is likely to occur when a plurality of balls are continuously entered in a short period of time, for example, a plurality of balls are continuously entered into the second winning opening 640. Therefore, by visually recognizing the situation in which the balls flow down the third receiving flow path 2155, the player can grasp that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning opening 640 in a row.

The mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, the ball flow unit 2150 is provided with an opening / closing plate that is configured to be able to switch between a state in which the ball flows into the first direction D21 and a state in which the ball flows in the first direction D21 by using a driving means such as a solenoid. Alternatively, an electromagnet that is arranged so that a magnetic force can be generated at the junction of the first direction D21 and the second direction D22 is arranged, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the sphere to flow down. You may switch the route.

According to these methods, not only the flow path of the ball can be switched to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also the ball can be stopped or the ball can be turned back. Unlike a ball that flows down in the game area, changing the flow path of the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game result, so a ball that uses magnetic force as described above. It is possible to switch the flow path of.

As described above, when the flow path of the sphere is switched by the device using electricity, it is possible to control whether the sphere flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22 by MPU221 (see FIG. 4). can. Therefore, it is possible to associate the result of the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155 in 60% of the cases where the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the third receiving flow path It is possible to improve the expectation of the player for the jackpot when he / she sees the ball flowing down 2155.

In this case, it is easiest to gather the player's line of sight at the lower end position of the first receiving flow path 152, which is a guide path to the third receiving flow path 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 2150 (game). It is possible to improve the attention to the ball already discharged from the area).

As described above, the fact that the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155 is the expected value of the big hit of the lottery when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 frequently or when the ball enters the second winning opening 640. Suggests a high case.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and when the passage of the sphere is determined, the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired. ..

As described above, in order to launch the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the effect standby state (see FIG. 38) to the launch standby state (FIG. 40) in advance. take time. On the other hand, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes some time for the ball to reach the discharge portion 2155b from there. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state by utilizing this flow time.

As a result, the passage of the sphere is determined by the detection sensor SC21, and at the same time, the granular member 320 can be controlled to be fired. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is launched after a certain time delay expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving flow path 2155 after entering the second winning opening 640. It is possible to make it easier to match the flow of the sphere with the firing timing of the granular member 320 as compared with the case of controlling to.

For example, the oil adhering to the sphere may adhere to the first receiving flow path 152 to reduce the flow speed of the sphere. In this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If the control is performed in this way, the granular member 320 may be fired before the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, and the effect of the effect may be reduced.

On the other hand, at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines the passage of the sphere, by controlling the granular member 320 to be launched, the player waits until the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, it is possible to improve the effect of a series of effects by firing the granular member 320 to perform a powerful effect that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161. can.

The arrangement of the third receiving flow path 2155 through which the ball flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially arranged in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the above-mentioned series of effects without requiring the player to change the line of sight.

It should be noted that a control that does not fire the granular member 320 when the sphere passes through the detection sensor SC21 may be combined. For example, if a jackpot occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, the probability of the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot may be increased.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the types of effects after the ball is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155, the player with respect to the third receiving flow path 2155 at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the attention of the player.

In addition, when the granular member 320 is not fired, it is possible to improve the attention to the subsequent display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

A detection sensor having the same function as that of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, it may be arranged at a place where a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 at the timing of passing the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific region where the benefit given to the player by passing the game ball is more advantageous.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be enlarged / reduced / displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrically discrete has been described, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, the effect member 700 has been described. , It is possible to form a non-symmetrical section in the radial expansion / contraction displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 according to the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 is only in the effect member 3700, and the configurations of the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 are common. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged at an intermediate position (intermediate position) of the radial expansion / contraction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, the adoption of five shielding design members 760 is the same as in the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, the lower two and the upper left 1 While the sheets are radially expanded and displaced with the same length, the upper one and the upper right one are still in the assembled arrangement state (not radially expanded and displaced). The configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotating plate 3730. The rotating plate 3730 has a common configuration with respect to the rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that a part of the guide holes 733 is changed to another guide hole 3733.

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotating plate 730 includes a separate guide hole 3733 instead of the guide holes 733 on the upper and upper right sides in the front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-mentioned small-diameter arc portion 733a, the large-diameter arc portion 733b, and the adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends from the connecting portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to the vicinity of the intermediate position along the same arc shape, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 or the guide hole 733 adjacently provided in the clockwise direction). It is formed so as to sharply approach the small-diameter arc portion 733a side (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733).

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c. The telescopic displacement member 740 guided to the above does not undergo radial expansion displacement while being guided to the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be displaced. The action caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, by making the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 left-right asymmetric, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the up-down direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position still remains in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 shifts to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, the effect member 3700 receives a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front due to its own weight. By this load, the effect member 3700 can change its posture in the rotation direction around the axis in the front-rear direction. Can be displaced in the combined direction.

As a result, the direction (that is, unplanned) is not planned only from the shapes of the functional plate portion 720 (see FIG. 55), the rotating plate 3730, and the telescopic displacement member 740 (see FIG. 59), which are members for displace the shielding design member 760. , Rotation direction) can be displaced.

In the present embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same except for the other parts, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc are the same. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same in the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in the collective arrangement state or is arranged at the radial expansion displacement end position, so that the shielding design member 760 is left and right. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the left-right center position and the top-bottom center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained in a displaced state, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented.

An example of production using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time and are executed individually has been described, but the purpose of this is to avoid collision with other configurations. ..

In the present embodiment, after adopting a device for avoiding collision with other configurations, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled so as to be executable at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be expanded and displaced in the radial direction while the effecting member 3700 is downwardly displaced.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the radial expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 returns, so that the effect member 3700 is shown in FIG. 99. It is possible to cause a posture change of rotation opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) assumed from the state.

In this way, it is possible to apply rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions to the radial expansion and displacement of the effect member 3700, so that a simple configuration specialized for radially expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760. As a result, it is possible to make a complicated movement with the displacement in the rotation direction added. As a result, the effect of the effect member 3700 can be improved.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described, but in the fourth embodiment, the case has been described. The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the setting part 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 101 does not show the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, since the downward displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the player does not have the line of sight blocked by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member due to the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIGS. 12A and 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the linear motion member 410 between the angle 66 degrees and the angle 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (microdisplaced) and visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, since the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the drive of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced ascending by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, so that control can be facilitated.

Further, in the embodiment in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) so as to be visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. Can be done.

The mode in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (small displacement) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibrating device to the collision member 420 to vibrate the collision member 420. In this case, it is preferable that the other vibrating device is arranged on the lower side of the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent another vibrating device from being loaded when the collision member 420 is displaced by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the case has been described. The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the arrangement of the setting part 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 102 does not show the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is launched, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see an angle of about 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least a part of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. It is possible that the granular member 320 collides with the lid member 480 to hinder the rotation of the lid member 480, but in the present embodiment, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed from an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotation shaft side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to hinder the rotation of the lid member 480.

When the drive motor MT1 is continuously driven in the forward rotation direction while the granular member 320 is on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracted side (small diameter side in FIG. 102) and the granular member 320 collides. It falls on the member 420.

On the other hand, since the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released at this timing, it is possible to avoid the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. ..

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the launch standby state, the ascending speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved and the granular member 320 can be launched at a high speed.

In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side at the time of firing, the firing of the granular member 320 is hindered at the left and right central portions where the overhanging portion 482 is arranged, and the firing is performed in the left-right direction. It can be visually recognized as the main one.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is launched can be changed depending on the launch mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated forward and the launch mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result, the firing direction of the granular member 320 can be varied, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 include a flat plate-shaped substrate and irradiate light in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the sixth embodiment has been described. The first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are provided with an illuminated substrate in which the second light irradiation device 6340 is bent and arranged. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Further, the direction of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 is schematically shown by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the first light irradiation device 6330, in addition to the illumination substrate 332, the front side end portion is close to the front side end portion of the illumination substrate 332, and the back side end portion is the illumination substrate. A second illuminated substrate 6334 is provided so as to be tilted away from the 332.

The second illumination substrate 6334 includes light emitting means such as an LED which is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the front side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct the light to the partition member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of illuminating the granular member 320 that scatters the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310.

In addition to the illuminated substrate 342, the second light irradiation device 6340 is tilted so that the rear end is close to the back end of the illuminated substrate 342 and the front end is away from the illuminated substrate 342. The second illuminated substrate 6344 is provided.

The second illumination substrate 6344 includes light emitting means such as an LED which is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the back side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct the light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, and the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

The arrangement of the illumination board is not limited to this. For example, only the second illuminated substrates 6334 and 6344 may be adopted, and the illuminated substrates 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be adopted. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side of the second illuminated substrates 6334, 6344 where the light emitting means is not arranged, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

Further, for the purpose of tilting the direction of light irradiation, a device capable of changing the posture of the light emitting means may be configured without taking the method of increasing the number of illuminated substrates. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged at the intersection of the illuminated substrate 332,342 and the second illuminated substrate 6334, 6344 to enable light irradiation.

The substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, a schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box A100. 107 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

The arrows F, B, L, R, and U, D in FIGS. 105 to 107 indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the substrate box A100, respectively. Since the same applies to the following figures, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the substrate box A100. Therefore, other description will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the substrate box A100 connects the box cover A200, the box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 so as not to be opened (caulking structure). The main control device includes a sealing unit A400 to be connected by the sealing unit A400, and a sub-cover A500 arranged at an end opposite to the sealing unit A400 of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 connected by the sealing unit A400. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotation shaft A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400. The rotating shaft A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is in the lateral direction (arrows U, D) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). It is formed as an axis parallel to the direction) and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

Further, the rotating shaft A410 is located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) in the front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B) (the side opposite to the first connecting wall portion A220 with the covering portion A270 to be described later). It is arranged on the R direction side). The rotating shaft A410 may be arranged on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), which is opposite to one side in the longitudinal direction.

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) on the main control device A110. The main control device A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) the switch device A120 and the key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same other configurations except for the presence / absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other description will be omitted.

The switch device A120 is operated (on) when the operation unit A122 is pushed from the initial position and is turned off when the push is released (the operation unit A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main control device A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A110 (main control device 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operation unit A122 is pushed to the operating position (turned on position), and the main control is based on the click feeling. The operator can detect the completion of the input to the device A110. Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the initial position (hereinafter referred to as "off position"), and the key A140 inserted at the off position is rotated (rotated clockwise in the present embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter "on"). A key-operated selector switch (mode) that is operated (on) by being placed in a position (referred to as "position") and is turned off by rotating the key A140 (rotating counterclockwise in this embodiment) and being placed in an off position. It is configured as a changeover switch).

In the present embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to about 90 degrees. Further, in the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key A140 cannot be removed in the on position.

Further, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A130. For example, in the present embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (executes RAM erasure), and is a key device. In a state where the A130 is turned on, as will be described later, a mode in which the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “setting change”) is exemplified. ..

Here, as described above, since the board boxes A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) are connected so as not to be opened, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130). Needs to open the board box A100, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 in the present embodiment, openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is possible to save time and effort by eliminating the need to open the substrate box A100. Details will be described later.

Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are located on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation unit A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The legs A121 and A131 are projected, and the legs A121 and A131 are inserted into the holes opened in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from the front side, and the protruding portion is soldered to the switch device A120 and the key device. The A130 is arranged on the front side of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, on a plane including an external force (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (insertion direction), arrows U, D, and arrows L, R) on the switch device A120 and the key device A130. When a force in the parallel direction) is applied and tilted with respect to the main control device A110 (printed board A119), the leg on one side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the side lifted from the printed board A119 by tilting). While a tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed substrate A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 may be broken or bent, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may be peeled off, resulting in disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, in the substrate box A100, a means for solving such a problem is adopted. Details will be described later.

The main control device 100 includes a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display of the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing the setting using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and then the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position while the pachinko machine A10. Turn on the power of. As a result, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in.

In the present embodiment, the first to sixth six values are defined as the set values, and these values are circulated (for example, the set values are changed from the first value to the first value by the pushing operation of the operation unit A122). When the operation unit A122 is pushed in from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device The setting value displayed in 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

The information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the set value, and may include other information. Examples of other information include the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the previous setting value, and the like. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to secure (more) the amount of information that can be displayed as compared with the case of using, for example, a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve the operability and suppress the operation error. Further, by also using the device for displaying information related to the game (third symbol display device 81), the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the display of the set value may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (the setting value is confirmed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed with the detection, and the normal mode with the set value set (changed) is activated.

After changing the desired set value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without arranging the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position (that is, in the state of being arranged in the on position). Then, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the key A140 of the key device A130 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode with the set value set (changed) is also activated.

Further, in the setting change mode, RAM erasing is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by arranging the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasure include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time elapses from that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is arranged at the off position. That is, the timing for executing the RAM erase can be set as appropriate.

Further, in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the set value can be changed by pushing the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120), the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is not placed in the off position (that is, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is not placed in the off position. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (while it is placed in the on position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is inserted. If the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while it is placed in the off position, it will not be started in the normal mode and will be in an error state, and an error display will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display at the same time as or instead of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, to confirm the set value set in the setting change mode, first, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and then the power of the pachinko machine A10 is confirmed. Turn on. As a result, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the set value is activated, and the set value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

The display of the set value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is placed in the off position. As a result, the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Further, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed with the detection, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is activated.

In the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine A10 can be turned off, and the power of the pachinko machine A10 can be turned on with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 placed in the off position. The normal mode with the set value is activated.

In the present embodiment, when the change of the set value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined mode. As a predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, “7”) blinks at regular time intervals is exemplified.

In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side to enable 4-digit display, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (2) (for example, "01" in the setting change mode. However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the set value is displayed by the latter two digits (two) (for example, the first value is "01" and the second value is "". "02" is displayed, and "06" is displayed as the sixth value).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main control device A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

FIG. 108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 in the direction of arrow CXa of FIG. FIG. 110 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 in the direction of the arrow CXb of FIG. 109.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 has a front wall portion A201 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape in front view, and from four sides of the front wall portion A201 to the back side (direction of arrow B). Mainly the wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) that are erected toward the surface and formed in a plate shape. In preparation for the above, each of the wall portions A201 to A205 is formed in a box shape with the back surface open. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

Two steps are formed on the upright tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. As for the step, the first surface (first step) is formed on the internal space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the second surface is formed on the outer side (opposite side of the internal space) of the first surface. A surface (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height of standing from the front wall portion A201 is small), and the surface on which the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter, "seat surface A206"). Is formed as).

The seat surface A206 is formed so that the surfaces (first surface) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view, and are formed as surfaces parallel to the front wall portion A201. Fastening holes A206a with female threads screwed on the inner circumference are recessed in the four corners of the seat surface A206 (the parts where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected to each other). Will be done.

Therefore, in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), the outer edge side of the front surface thereof is brought into contact with the seat surface A206, and the screw ASC (FIG. 117 (b) and (see FIG. 118 (b)) are screwed into the fastening hole A206a to be fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and to the substrate box A100. It is stored.

A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are arranged side by side on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 at predetermined intervals. The engaging piece A207 extends in one direction (arrow R direction) from the base portion erected from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction) and the erection tip of the base portion. It is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300 as described later.

The front wall portion A201 is formed with a portion recessed in a portion thereof toward the back surface side (direction of arrow B). Such a recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operating wall portion A210 located retracted to the back side (main control device 110 side) from the front wall portion A201, and each side of the operating wall portion A210 is a front wall portion. It is formed on the front wall portion A201 by the plate-shaped wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the outer surface on the front side of the substrate box A100 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) is located on the first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and the side closer to the main control device A110 than the first region for operation. It is formed from a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms an operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and is a substantially horizontally long rectangle in front view (the length in the arrow L and R directions with respect to the length dimension in the arrow U and D directions). It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimensions are lengthened), and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

The operation wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) from the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 in the front view (arrow B direction view).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110 as it is directed. Therefore, on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space connected to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be formed, and the first connection wall portion A220 and the first connection wall portion A220 and the space can be formed. The space as a whole (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded as a space that combines the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210.

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both the expansion of the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and the securing of the space inside the substrate box A100.

The second connection wall portion A230 is on one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the lateral direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 is on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R). One side on the direction side) is a wall portion connected to the front wall portion A201, respectively, and is arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted and removed from the key device A130, and a main control device A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to enable connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The front view shape of the opening A250 is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (a substantially square front view in the present embodiment), and is substantially square in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210. Located in the center. A guide wall A251 is erected around the opening A250 from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation unit A122 in the pushing direction (arrow B direction) and is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a part for controlling (falling down), and is formed in the shape of a frame having a substantially square front view surrounding the opening A250, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operating wall portion A210 is higher than the tip of the operating portion A122 pushed to the operating position (turned on position) from the operating wall portion A210. The dimension is set so that the tip is at a low position (the tip of the operation unit A122 projects outward (toward the arrow F direction) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the pushing operation of the operation unit A122 from being hindered by the guide wall A251, and it is possible to improve the operability of the operation unit A122.

However, the vertical height of the guide wall A251 from the operating wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operating wall A122 pushed to the operating position (turned on position). It may be set to a position (the tip of the operation unit A122 is immersed inward (toward the arrow B direction) from the vertical tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation unit A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with other members.

Further, the tip of the operation unit A122 in which the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is pushed to the operating position (turned on position) is abbreviated as the erection tip from the operation wall portion A210. It may be set to the same height position. When the operation unit A122 is pushed in, the fingers are brought into contact with the vertical tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operation unit A122 has been pushed to the operating position based on such contact. .. This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operating wall portion A210. The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a part of the tip end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112A), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operating wall portion A210 and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A portion A271 and a plate-shaped end face wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 are mainly provided, and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is housed in the space inside the portion A271. NS.

The peripheral wall portion A271 is a pair of protrusions protruding outward in the radial direction from a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section and two opposing positions (positions in which the phases are substantially 180 degrees out of phase) of the base portion A271a. It includes a part A271b. The peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as a whole along the axial direction (arrows F and B directions). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same cross-sectional shape as the peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion A271b) (that is, a shape in which two opposing portions of the circle are projected outward in the radial direction). An opening is formed (see FIG. 110 (b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, the end face wall portion A272. As a result, the end face wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end face wall portion A272 is formed as a plate-like (cantilever) in which the base end is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) is free.

Here, the opening A260 is limited to the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position (the region required to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees to allow displacement of a portion of the key A140 on one side of the center of rotation, and the opening A260 on the other side of the center of rotation of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (on one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end face wall portion A272 extends inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and is formed in a substantially annular shape in the front view (arrow B direction view). And a square portion A272b extending inward in the radial direction from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and formed in a substantially triangular shape in the front view (arrow B direction view). The square portions A272b are arranged in a posture of tapering inward in the radial direction in the front view (viewing in the direction of arrow B), and are formed at two positions having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

The key A140 has dimensions such that the radius of gyration of a portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of gyration of a portion on the other side of the center of rotation are different. Therefore, the opening A260 is an opening having a size (radius) different from that of the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210. The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are ridges extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end thereof is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. ..

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and the second One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge portion of the key A140 in the on position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with each other.

Further, on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is located at a position adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on the extension line of the other end). Are formed respectively. The display unit is a portion that shows information on the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 in a posture in which the edge is directed toward one end of the first ridge A211 is placed in the off position (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the key in a posture in which the edge is directed toward one end of the second ridge A212. The A140 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (parallel arrangement) in series (in a row) along the edge portion of the front wall portion A201.

Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface on the side of the arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210. The erection wall A280 includes a first erection wall A281, a second erection wall A282, a third erection wall A283, and a fourth erection wall A284, and is opened by each of these erection walls A281, A282, A283, and A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, when the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the erection wall A280.

The first erection wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 are arranged to face each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erection wall A281. The fourth erection wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erection wall A281.

The second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 are connected to the first erection wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erection wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283. Further, the fourth erection wall A284 is connected to the second erection wall A282 on one side and to the third erection wall A283 on the other side.

Further, the erection wall A290 includes a first erection wall A291, a second erection wall A292, and a third erection wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by each of these erection walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). See (b)). Therefore, when the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the erection wall A290.

The first erection wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connection wall portion A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall portion A230 and the lower wall portion A203. The second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293 are arranged to face each other with the opening A260 in between, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erection wall A291.

The second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293 are connected to the first erection wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erection wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293. Further, the fourth erection wall A284 is connected to the second erection wall A292 on one side and to the third erection wall A293 on the other side.

The erection wall A290 is formed in a size surrounding the periphery of the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) in the front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, in the front view (arrow B direction view), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 becomes the inner surface (straight line) of the second erection wall A292 and the third erection wall A293. Each is inscribed, and the outer surface (arc) of the protrusion A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed on the inner surface (straight line) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

The first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 in the standing walls A280 and A290 are the back surfaces (inner surface, on the arrow B direction side) of the operating wall portion A210. The height of the erection from the surface) is the same, and the erection tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of each of the erection walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is the seat surface A206. It is placed at the same height as.

Therefore, in the erection walls A280 and A290, the erection tip surfaces of the second erection wall A282 and A292 and the third erection wall A283 and A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and each erection wall A281 and A293 are connected. , A282, A292, A283, A293 are located on the same plane as the standing tip surface (forms the same plane). As a result, when the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206), the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing wall A281 are erected. The standing tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the walls A283 and A293 is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the erection wall A280, the length dimension of the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 (dimensions in the directions of arrows U and D) is the length dimension of the first erection wall A281 (arrow L, The value is larger than the R direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the erection wall A280 (the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283), the second erection wall There is a possibility that the A282 and the third erection wall A283 are deformed and the tilt of the switch device A120 cannot be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the facing space between the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283 is connected by the fourth erection wall A284, the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A282 and the third erection wall are connected. Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, the tilt of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by arranging the fourth erection wall A284 at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erection wall A284 becomes large. This corresponds to the partial formation of a portion having a large plate thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other portions, molding defects in the portion having a partially large plate thickness dimension and its vicinity are caused. Give rise.

On the other hand, the erection height of the fourth erection wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the erection height of the first erection wall A281, the second erection wall A282, and the third erection wall A283. As a result, while ensuring the function of suppressing the deformation of the second erection wall A282 and the third erection wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erection wall A284 is reduced, and molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate are obtained. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as will be described later, the switch device A120 is tilted toward the arrow D direction. The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth erection wall A284, and its inclination can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, the inclination is smaller than when it is brought into contact with the lower wall portion A203). ..

On the inner surface of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 on the standing tip side of the standing walls A280 and A290, the standing tip side (arrow B). Tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces that approach the outer surface side toward the outer surface side, are formed, respectively. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the erection tip of each erection wall A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 is gradually reduced toward the erection tip side, and each erection wall A281 is correspondingly reduced. , A291, A282, A292, A283, A293, the area of the vertical tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 on the standing walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

An erection wall A208 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, the surface on the side of the arrow B) of the front wall portion A201. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned erection walls A280 and A290, an erection wall A209 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

The erection wall A208 is formed in a box shape in which plate-like bodies on four sides are connected and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is opened, and is mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). 4) is formed at the position corresponding to). Further, the erection wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape in which the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210 is opened, and is a connector mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). It is formed at the position corresponding to. Therefore, in the state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the erection wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the erection wall A209.

Here, in the plurality of erection walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 that surround the plurality of objects, the height position of the erection tip surface of one or more erection walls is the erection of the remaining erection walls. It is set to a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In the present embodiment, the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). Located on the side to do). As a result, even if there is a dimensional tolerance of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 on the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variation in flatness). As compared with the standing wall A209, the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to secure the adhesion of the vertical wall surrounding the object of high importance to the printed circuit board A119.

Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111A is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111B is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 stands from the back wall portion A301 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape in front view and the four sides of the back wall portion A301 toward the front side (arrow F direction). Mainly provided with wall portions (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303) provided and formed in a plate shape. Each of these wall portions A301 to A305 forms a box shape with the front side open. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303 at predetermined intervals. The engaged portion A307 is a portion where the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed so as to project downward (toward the arrow D direction).

In the connection between the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase of the engaging piece A207 is set on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the extension portion by the extension length of the extension portion. Face each other at a shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307. Next, the box cover A200 is attached to the box base A300 in the extending direction of the extending portion in the engaging piece A207. Slide and displace in the direction of arrow R). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and both are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

Next, the main control device A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of the main control device A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device A110, and FIG. 113 is a main view in the partial CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110.

114 (a) is a front view of the main control device A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVa of FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (b) is a main control device A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVb of FIG. 114 (a). 114 (c) is a side view of the main control device A110 in the direction of the arrow CXIVc of FIG. 114 (a).

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, only the main ones among the various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and the other illustrations are omitted. ..

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main control device A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. In the printed circuit board A119, various electronic components (ICs, resistors, capacitors and transistors) are mounted on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and the circuit (pattern) connecting these electronic components is a conductor such as copper foil. The insertion holes A112 are formed at four corners.

The printed circuit board A119 has a substrate box A100 in a posture in which the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) faces the back surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). It is stored in.

In this case, at least in the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, the regions AS1 and AS2 where the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 in the box cover A200 are in contact with each other (FIG. 114). (See (a)), electronic components are not mounted or circuits are not formed, and such regions AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. Note that in FIG. 114 (a), only the portion of the region where the seat surface A206 is in contact with the standing walls A280 and A290 is shown.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation unit A122 so that it can be displaced (pushed in), and a coil spring that is arranged inside the main body A123 and applies an urging force to the operation unit A122 to return to the initial position. The urging means (not shown), the contact (not shown) that is arranged inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operation unit A122, and the leg A121 that is electrically connected to the contact. Be prepared.

The main body A123 includes a base portion A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, and a columnar protrusion A123b protruding from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base portion A123a. The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) face each other.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a and a portion where the leg A121 protrudes) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a where the legs A121 project) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base portion A123a may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 are projected from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a in the main body A123, and are inserted into the holes opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 internally arranges a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows the inner cylinder A132a to rotate with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a matching key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 thereof. A contact that can be contacted according to the state of the main body A133, the support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the state of the cylinder portion A132 (the rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b). (Not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact point.

The main body A133 has a base portion A133a which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and holds a cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) thereof, and two locations (positions where the phases are substantially different from each other by 180 degrees) on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A133a. ), A pair of protrusions A133b protruding outward in the radial direction, and an end portion A133c forming an end surface on the tip end side (arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and a portion protruding from the leg A131) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 where the legs A131 project) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (arrow B direction side) than the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. A circular opening in front view is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a) through such an opening. ..

When the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the main body A133 is housed in the internal space of the covering portion A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protruding portion A133b of the main body A133 is covered. The size of the concave portion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the peripheral wall portion A270 is formed to be the same as or slightly smaller than that of the concave portion A271b. The protrusion A133b of A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271, respectively.

Further, in this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface (end surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end surface wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. The front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end face wall portion A272 may be configured to come into contact with each other.

The leg A131 protrudes from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base portion A133a in the main body A133, and is inserted into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support A134 has an opening formed substantially in the center, and the base portion A134a through which the main body A133 (base portion A133a and protrusion A133b) is inserted, and the two opposite sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b to be extended and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided, and a metal plate-like body is bent and integrated. Is formed in.

The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is made larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B). Is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, the leg A134b1 is projected from the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and becomes self-supporting by inserting the leg A134b1 into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side and soldering the portion protruding to the back side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

A gap may be provided between the extension tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the extension portion A134b and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support A134 may be raised and arranged from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be improved by the amount of the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may have the same dimensions. That is, the extended tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to be in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 can be supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the main body A133 can be more strongly suppressed from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

Further, the leg A134b1 is not soldered, the leg A134b1 is formed into an abbreviated shape or a substantially S-shaped cross section, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in a state of being elastically deformed. It may be configured to be used. That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may be performed. It is possible to more firmly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the tilt of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The width dimension (arrow L, B direction dimension, FIG. 114 (b) left-right direction dimension) of the leg A134b1 is set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped body constituting the support A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1). The hole of the printed substrate A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 can be increased, and when the tilt of the main body A133 is supported by the support A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extension portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

Further, by forming the reinforcing portion A134c on the two opposite sides of the support A134, it is possible to regulate the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the support A134 as a whole can be increased and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that the inclination of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more strongly regulated (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

FIG. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated in the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated in the on position. 116 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction of the arrow CXVIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 116 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of FIG. 115 (b). It is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction view of arrow CXVIb.

117 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 117 (b) is a substrate in the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the box A100, FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of FIG. 115 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 in the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is a substrate in the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100.

In addition, in FIGS. 117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and a single hatch is attached to the cross section to model the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the substrate box A100, the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the operating wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 is projected. An opening A260 is formed in the end face wall portion A272 forming the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, when the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by a cheating person due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire directly into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method is performed in which the wall portion A210) is slid on the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the side of the arrow F direction) to reach the opening A260.

On the other hand, when the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210 and the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. , The tip of a foreign substance such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that regulates the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c, and the peripheral wall portion A271). The path formed by the gap between the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b) is bent, and the wall (the wire passing through the gap between the end face wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c) where the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts is bent. A wall to which the tip of the foreign matter abuts, that is, an inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 through a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (the left-right dimension of FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)). It is set to a value larger than (horizontal dimension of).

As a result, the upper surface of the support A134 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, it is formed by a gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b. The wall (path) is bent and the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire abuts the wall (the wall where the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire passes through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b, that is, the support A134. The upper surface. Further, for foreign matter such as a wire whose traveling direction is changed by hitting the upper surface of the support A134, each vertical wall A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203) are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

A protrusion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, a protrusion A133b is formed on the main body A133, and the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271, respectively.

As a result, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) and the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (in the circumferential direction due to the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b). The tip of the foreign matter such as a wire that passes along the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b with which the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire abuts by bending the path formed along the route). The wall with which the protrusion A133b abuts, that is, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIG. 118 (a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A250, the path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the guide wall A251, the operating wall portion A210, the operating portion A122, and the protruding portion A123b). The wall (path formed by the gap between them) is bent and the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire abuts (the wall where the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation unit A122 abuts, that is, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b. For foreign matter such as a wire that hits the upper surface of the protrusion A123b and whose traveling direction is changed, the route is (the inner surface of each of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall A203). Can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 from being illegally applied by a foreign substance such as an inserted wire (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be made to face each other in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the key A140 (a direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or violent operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or a collision of another member with the key A140 when the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. When an external force in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (regulate) tilting of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress breakage or bending of the leg A131, removal of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

An end face wall portion A272 is formed on the covering portion A270 at the protruding tip (side in the direction of arrow F), and the end face wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 in the front view (arrow B direction view), the cross-sectional area of the path through which foreign matter such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100 and being illegally applied to the main control device A110.

In particular, in the end face wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, the square portion A272b extends inward in the radial direction from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, only the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140) is opened in the protruding tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the protruding portion A270 is projected. All other regions of the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) are referred to as end face wall portions A272. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and make it difficult to insert a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260. Further, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end face wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening A260, the foreign matter such as the wire passes through. It can be difficult to do.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 irregular (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are combined so as to face each other), the end face wall portion A272 is relatively complicated so that the pair of square portions A272b project from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. Formed into a unique shape. In this case, the end face wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) is a cantilever beam having a constant thickness dimension (the base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) is free. Since it is formed in a shape), the shape can be simplified and its moldability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end face wall portion A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the peripheral wall portion A271 on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) is the opening A260. Even in the case of the configuration), when an external force in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilt of the key device A130. (Regulation) Can be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face wall portion A272 is formed on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge (the portion forming the opening A260) of the end face wall portion A272. Can be brought into contact with each other. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of the above-mentioned external force can be brought into contact with the end face wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and damage to the box cover A200 (covered portion A270) can be suppressed.

Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. Therefore, as described above, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) and the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrows L and R) face each other. Can be done (see FIG. 118 (a)).

Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or violent operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or a collision of another member with the key A140 when the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of arrows L and R) is changed to the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of arrows L and R). ), The rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130 can be regulated.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress breakage or bending of the leg A131, removal of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

Here, for example, the operation unit A122 when the operator carelessly or violently operates the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or opens the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, due to a collision of another member with the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the inserting direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). When acted on, the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 may be tilted, and the contact between them may deform and damage the box cover A200 (particularly, the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270). ..

On the other hand, erection walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and these erection walls A280 and A290 are the erection tip surfaces (inner surface, the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B). The surface on the side of the arrow B is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the side of the arrow F) (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

As a result, in addition to improving the rigidity of the operating wall portion A210 by erection of the standing walls A280 and A290 (functioning as ribs), the support portion (deformation suppression) that supports the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 is suppressed. As a means), the standing walls A280 and A290 can function. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

When the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the erection walls A280 and A290 to bring the switch device A120 or the key device A130 into contact with each other. The tilt of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated). That is, the portion that comes into contact with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses its inclination is shared not only with the operating wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is applied accordingly. Can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Further, since the erection tip surfaces of the erection walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119. The erection walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall (a wall that regulates further progress) to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being fraudulently applied.

The erection walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the surroundings of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (see FIG. 118 (b)). That is, the region AS1 in which the erection tip surfaces (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the erection walls A280 and A290 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119 come into contact with each other. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114 (a)).

Therefore, the path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter the inside of the substrate box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the erection walls A280 and A290. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, the movement to the outside of the space surrounded by the standing walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is restricted. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being fraudulently applied.

Further, the erection walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the periphery of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, so that the erection walls A280 and A290 are erected (function as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operating wall portion A210 be further improved, but also the arrows U, D and arrows L, R can be changed regardless of the direction of the external force acting on the operating portion A122 or the key A140. Regardless of which direction of external force acts in the including plane), the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exerted. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operating wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

The first standing wall A291 is arranged so as to be orthogonal to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and the second standing wall A292 and the second standing wall A291. The three standing walls A293 are arranged in such a posture that they are orthogonal to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be efficiently exerted on the erection wall A290.

That is, when the external force in the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R is applied to the key A140, the external force in the direction of the arrows U, D or the arrow L, R is applied to the erection wall. While the load received by A290 (the load capacity that the erection wall A290 should exert as a support part) is maximized, an external force is applied in the direction of arrow U, D or the direction of arrow L, R and the direction of inclination by a predetermined angle. In that case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the external force in the acting direction, and the load received by the erection wall A290 (the erection wall A290 exerts as a support portion) by the amount that the external force escapes due to the rotation. Should load capacity) is low. As a result, by arranging the posture of the erection wall A290 as described above, the erection wall A290 can efficiently exert its function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

Since the erection walls A280 and A290 (the second erection wall A282, A292 and the third erection wall A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, the rigidity of the box cover A200 is used to utilize the erection wall. The rigidity of the A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the functions of the standing walls A280 and A290 as support portions (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

In the printed circuit board A119, the surface to which the electronic components are connected by solder is the surface facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the standing wall A280. , Areas AS1 and AS2 (see FIG. 114 (a)) where the vertical tip surface of A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114 (a)), where electronic components are not mounted or a circuit is not formed, and such area AS1 , AS2 is formed as a flat surface.

Therefore, the erection tip surfaces (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the erection walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, and the erection walls A280 and A290 are combined with the erection walls A280 and A290. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the printed circuit board A119 and the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be reliably functioned as a wall to which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 abuts.

The first erection walls A281, A291, the second erection walls A282, A292 and the third erection walls A283, A293 in the erection walls A280 and A290 have tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, so that the erection tips are formed. The area of the surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure on the standing tip surface in contact with the printed circuit board A119 and prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted between the printed circuit board A119 and the standing walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surface (the surface facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) on the erection tip side of the erection walls A280 and A290, so that the moldability is improved. At the same time, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

That is, the shapes of the erection walls A280 and A290 are formed by reducing the area of the erection tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the erection tip side (arrow B direction). The change is gradual, and the fluidity of the resin in the molding mold can be ensured. Therefore, the moldability can be improved.

Further, when the erection tip surfaces of the erection walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. See FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the erection walls A280 and A290 to pass between the erection tip surfaces of the erection walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are projected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210. One end of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (base A271a or protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (FIG. 115). b) See).

As a result, the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 can function as ribs for increasing the rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 comes into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of each of the protrusions A211,222 is utilized to further tilt the switch device A120 or the key device A130. It can be reliably suppressed and damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

Further, on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display unit is located at a position adjacent to the other ends of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on the extension line of the other end). ("ON" and "OFF") are formed, respectively. As a result, the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 can be combined with the function as an instruction line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the off position. It is set to the same phase position (position facing the end surface of the key A140) as the narrow surface along the outer edge of the key (see FIG. 115 (a)), and one end of the second ridge A212 is the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a) is set to the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the off position, and the key A140 covers the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) on the arrow U direction side as the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272). ) Is tilted in the direction of contact (arrow U direction), the first ridge A211 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (a)), and is in the on position. When an external force acts on the key A140 in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in the direction (arrow L direction) in which the end face on the arrow L direction side is brought into contact with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272), the key A140 is tilted. The second ridge A212 is located on the extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, a load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) (the end surface of the key A140 comes into contact with the end surface). The portion to be formed) can be efficiently reinforced by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

The second connection wall portion A230 can suppress the action of an external force (a force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) on the key A140 in the off position in the direction opposite to that described above (FIG. 115 (a)). ), The action of an external force (force that displaces the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case can be suppressed by the first connection wall portion A220 (FIG. 115). See (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other side (arrow D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions). The direction side) is open (the connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and is located on the third side from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the operator's hand or other configuration on the space side collides with the key A140, and the key A140 is pointed at the arrow D. An external force that displaces in the direction or the direction of the arrow L is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 on the side that suppresses the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to such an external force (the side that receives it), it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. It can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portion A272b of the end face wall portion A272 is arranged at two locations having a phase difference of substantially 180 degrees, and is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view (arrow B direction view). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (outer edge, edge portion forming the opening A260) in the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as an unequal side triangle).

Specifically, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the off position is the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140. The square portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall portion A220 (opposite side across the key A140) is the gripping surface of the key A140 with respect to the key A140 in the off position. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the surface is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115 (a)).

Therefore, in other words, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is the length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the on position. Is shortened (smaller), and the square portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall portion A220 has a longer (larger) side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the on position. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

As described above, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the operator's hand or other configuration on the space side collides with the key A140, and the key A140. Where an external force is likely to be applied to displace the object in the arrow D direction or the arrow L direction, according to the square portion A272b in the present embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 on which the external force in the arrow D direction or the arrow F direction is applied. Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is lengthened, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and the tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, the surface pressure can be suppressed, and the damage of the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) is located on the first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and the side closer to the main control device A110 than the first region, and is an operation wall. It is formed from a second region formed by the portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface (first region formed by the front wall portion A201) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased from the person who commits the fraud as compared with the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first region). The openings A250 and A260 can be made difficult to see, and it can be difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening A260.

Here, the board box A100 is the distance between the main control device A110 and the main control device A110 (for example, the distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space) in consideration of heat dissipation from the main control device A110. )) It is necessary to secure. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily secure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250, It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from A260 into the substrate box A100. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, work is performed on the steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connecting the first region and the second region. The hand of the person (operator) interferes and interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110 as the front wall portion A201 is directed toward the operation wall portion A210. The space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of such inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

In the front view (arrow B direction view), the operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrow L, R direction) perpendicular to one direction (arrows U, D). It is formed as a region of a substantially rectangular shape (horizontally long rectangle) larger than the length dimension along the direction) (see FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b)).

The key device A130 is arranged so that the posture of the key A140 in the off position is along the other directions (arrows U and D directions) described above (see FIG. 115A). That is, the key A140 in the off position faces the surface to be gripped by the finger in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the front view (arrow B direction view). The longitudinal direction of is taken along the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region).

As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the side (right side and left side of FIG. 115A) where the surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position is desired. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into or pulled out from the key device A130, a step (first connection wall) in which a finger (for example, a thumb and an index finger) holding the key A140 connects the first region and the second region. Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) can be suppressed. As a result, operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions), as described above. As the first connection wall portion A220 is formed so as to be inclined downward, the key A140 is operated by grasping the key A140 with fingers (rotating from the off position to the on position or vice versa). It is possible to prevent a finger different from the gripping finger from interfering with a step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). As a result, operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

For example, when grasping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and the thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be arranged by utilizing the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220, and the key A140 can be arranged from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the key A140, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connecting wall portion A220.

Further, when the key A140 in the on position is gripped by the index finger and the thumb, the small finger and the ring finger are formed, and the operation wall portion A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the key device A130 is used for operation. Arranged using the space on the other side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall part A210 by locating the wall part A210 (second region) on one side from the center in the longitudinal direction. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the off position to the on position, the small finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side (arrow R direction side) in the longitudinal direction described above. can.

In the switch device A120, the position (standing height from the operating wall portion A210) of the protruding tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating portion A122 at the initial position is the protruding portion of the covering portion A270. It is set to a position (smaller dimension) lower than the position of the tip surface (front surface of the end surface wall portion A272, the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) (standing height from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interference between the operation unit A122 and the fingers when operating the key A140.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall) on one side (arrow L direction side) and the other side (arrow R direction side 9) in the longitudinal direction. Part A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall part A230) is formed on one side in the lateral direction (arrow U direction side), while the other side in the lateral direction (arrow D direction side) is formed. The connection surface is not formed.

As a result, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the lateral direction of the operating wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by such opening, the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be communicated with the external space. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped by the fingers and operated (insertion into the key device A130, withdrawal from the key device A130, rotation from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is pressed. Use the space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) the fingers (pinkie finger and ring finger) different from the grasped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). Can be done. As a result, operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

Here, as described above, the board box A100 is located at a distance from the main control device A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) in consideration of heat dissipation from the main control device A110. Distance (internal space)) must be secured.

In this case, a step connecting the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). The first connection wall portion A220 is tilted downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by tilting the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are moved. By making it non-tilted (only the first connecting wall portion A220 is tilted downward), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the substrate box A100 for heat dissipation from the main control device A110.

In this way, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is tilted downward and the others (second connection wall portion A230 and third connection wall portion A240) are not tilted, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. Makes the operation wall portion A210 (second region) a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) from the center in the longitudinal direction. ) By adopting a configuration in which the key device A130 is arranged close to each other.

By forming the third connection wall portion A240 on the other side (opposite side of the first connection wall portion A220) in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), the third connection wall portion A240 causes the third connection wall portion A240. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 during manufacturing.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) is omitted, and the illustration is omitted. Reference numerals are shown only for the main configurations.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, as described above, hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view, and the hinges 18 are attached. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface with the side provided with the above as the axis for opening and closing.

Here, in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side of the front with the hinge 18 as the axis for opening and closing, the opening angle can be sufficiently increased (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, about 90 degrees). When the opening angle of the above can be secured), the operator stands in a position facing the front of the board box A100, and the switch device A120 or the key device is in the same manner as described above (the procedure described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119). The A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, when the release angle cannot be sufficiently increased (for example, the opening angle can be secured only about 45 degrees, and the outer frame 11 and the inner frame enter the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 by the opening. Even when it is necessary to insert a hand from between 12 and operate the key device A130), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the substrate box A100 has a direction in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (for example, the arrow R and L directions in FIG. 115 (a)) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis). Along with facing, the lateral direction (arrows U and D in FIG. 115 (a)) is directed in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis), and one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115 (a)). It is arranged in a posture in which the L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when a hand is inserted from between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (the front surface of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second area), The thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb are formed into a space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (that is, the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and the key device. The space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by locating the A130 on one side of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction). Can be placed using.

In this arrangement, the operation unit A122 can be operated (pushed) with the thumb or index finger with respect to the switch device A120, and the key A140 can be operated with respect to the key device A130 when rotating the key A140. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and index finger holding the key A140, the space secured by tilting the first connecting wall portion A220 downward can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

The above-mentioned setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the board box A100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned on the front side (front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening / closing axis, the substrate box A100 is further opened to the front front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 120) with the rotation shaft A410 as the opening / closing axis. Is also good. As a result, the operator can stand in a position facing the front surface of the substrate box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 or The key device A130 can be operated, and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input / output port 205) has various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, and so on, via openings AOP1 to AOP8. 1 The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which one end is connected to the symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and FIG. 4) is connected to each of them.

Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a possibility that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are likely to be operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is performed. There is a risk of sexual deterioration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, at least the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which at least one end is connected to the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 among the plurality of electrical connection lines is the main control device A110. As long as it is connected to (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected, connection and disconnection are mixed. ), The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Since the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

On the other hand, when the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is secured and fraud can be suppressed. Connects other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol hold lamp 84 to the main control device A110. Even if the main control device A110 is released (pulled out), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated (setting change) to improve workability (ensure versatility). ) Can be planned.

That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 120) with the rotation shaft A410 as the axis for opening and closing, in order to rotate the main control device A110 (main control to the electrical connection line). It is necessary to disconnect (pull out) the electrical connection line so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

Therefore, in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed unless all the electrical connection lines are connected to the main control device A110, the main control device A110 is placed in a predetermined position (switch device). It is necessary to rotate the A120 and the key device A130 to a position where they can be easily operated), and then reconnect the electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110.

In particular, when the main control device A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, the extension line is interposed to release (pull out) the main control device A110. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main control device A110, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display) are allowed. It is not necessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line that connects the second symbol hold lamp 84 to the main control device A110) via an extension line.

As a result, the main control device A110 can be arranged at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily operated, and the labor is suppressed, and the workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is reduced. Can be improved.

Next, the substrate box A2100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the entire back surface of the end face wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the end face wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment has a ridge A2273 projecting from the back surface. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

121 (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box A2100 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A2100 in the cutting line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 121 (a). Is.

Note that FIG. 121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). Further, in FIG. 121 (b), only the portion to be cross-sectionally viewed is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 121, a ridge A2273 is projected from the back surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment. The ridge A2273 is a portion (ridge) extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is an outer edge of the end face wall portion A2272 (the tip in the overhang direction protruding radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge).

Specifically, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposing) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, and a range (position) along the outer edge of the square portion A272b. The range between the position AP1 and the position AP3 including the AP2 and the range between the position AP4 and the position AP6 including the position AP5) and one side (diameterally inward from the peripheral wall portion A271) with the square portion A272b in between. It is set to the range along the inner edge of the ring portion A272a (the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4) on the side where the overhanging dimension is large), and in this range (the range between the position AP1 and the position AP6). It is formed continuously.

The protrusion dimension from the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and the position AP3 to the position AP2 The value is gradually changed to a larger value toward the position AP2, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP2 toward the position AP1, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the protrusion dimension is gradually changed to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6, and is the same value as the position AP4 at the position AP6. Set. Further, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (protruding dimension).

By projecting the ridge A2273 from the end face wall portion A2272 in this way, the rigidity of the end face wall portion A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and arrows L, R), and the key device A130 is tilted. , It is possible to prevent the end face wall portion A2272 from being damaged when the key A140 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the end face wall portion A2272.

Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) are formed. ), The gap between the front surface and the front surface of the substrate box A2100 can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A2100.

Here, in the present embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, which is the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c in the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value that is approximately the same as the facing interval between them. Therefore, the protruding tip of the ridge A2273 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) is brought into contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) is eliminated, and foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A2100 through such a gap. Can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, since the protrusion dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, the elastic deformation of the square portion A272b formed as a plate shape (cantilever) with the outer edge side free is used. Then, the ridge A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly brought into close contact with the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A2100 from the gap between the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). ..

Further, in this way, the protruding tip of the ridge A2273 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) is in contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end face wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, it is possible to prevent the end face wall portion A2272 from being deformed in the insertion direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) of the end face wall portion A2272 from being damaged.

Next, the substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged on the side of the substrate box A3100 (box cover A3200) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122A is a front view of the substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122B is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122B shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range). Also, in FIG. 122 (b), only the main configurations are schematically shown in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

Here, the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment has a forming position of the operation wall portion A210 and an opening A260 (cover portion A270, key) in the operation wall portion A210 with respect to the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment. Since the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (guide wall A251, switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200, and the operation thereof is performed. The three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covered portion A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. Will be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220, the side in the arrow L direction) than the key device A130. That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the substrate box A3100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when it is rotated about the rotation axis A410 as a rotation center, and is arranged at a first position (arranged during a game) on the back side of the inner frame 12. The second position (position, see FIG. 120) is displaced (rotated) from the back surface of the inner frame 12 so that the front surface of the box cover A3200 (operation wall portion A210) faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010. That is, the position is set to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in a range of approximately 180 ° up to (see FIG. 122 (b)).

As a result, the board box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually recognizing the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information on setting change, set value). )be able to. As a result, since the operation can be performed while checking the display (information), it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operation mistakes can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, they can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to see from the outside, see FIG. 120), so that fraud is performed. (The switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated) can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are in the same direction (arrows). The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the desired posture (in the present embodiment, the posture in which both sides are substantially parallel) is desired (in the B direction). The angle formed by the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is preferably set in the range of approximately 0 ° to approximately 45 °.

That is, the substrate is located at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. The box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as wrapping the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. ..

As a result, the work of operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the information related to the setting change) can be made easier, and the operability is improved and the operation error is made. Can be achieved more reliably.

Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the key are formed on the operation wall portion A210. The device A130 is arranged.

As a result, the substrate is positioned so that the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are located farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122 (b)). Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly push the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the operation frequency of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (that is, on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220) than the key device A130. Arranged. As a result, the frequently operated switch device A120 can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (on the right side in FIG. 122B). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Further, since the switch device A120 is arranged adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between the fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point as well.

Here, the pachinko machine A3010 according to the ninth embodiment is up to the second position described above by the substrate box A3100 (a position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122 (b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to regulate the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (that is, fix the substrate box A3100 to the second position). ) Provide regulatory measures. As a result, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the board box A3100 by hand, so that the operability can be improved.

As the regulating means, the substrate box A3100 is fixed (held) at the second position by using the magnetic force (adhesive force) of the magnet (a force exceeding the attractive force is applied to the first one. It is provided with a protruding member that is placed in the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed urging means (for example, coil spring), which allows displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the position), and is placed in the protruding position. The protruding member engages with the substrate box A3100 arranged at the second position and regulates the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (the urging means from the protruding position). When the projecting member is immersed against the urging force of the substrate box A3100, displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is allowed) and the like are exemplified.

Next, the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft A410 of the substrate box A100 is arranged in a posture along the vertical direction (arrows U and D directions) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotating shaft A4410 in the tenth embodiment has been described. It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (horizontal direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) substrate box A4100 is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 123 (b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (arrangement position and orientation) of the rotation shaft A4410 and the number of arrangements, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 projecting from each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 in a direction away from each other. The pair of rotation axes A4410 are located on one side of the substrate box A4100 in the lateral direction (arrows U and D directions) (opposite to the operating wall portion A210 and in the arrow U direction), and are located in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100 (arrows). It is formed in a posture of projecting outward from both ends along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100 (L, R directions). Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, the substrate box A4100 has a movable range (rotatable range) when it is rotated around the rotation axis A4410 at a first position (arranged during a game) arranged on the back side of the inner frame 12. The position is displaced (rotated) from the position (the position shown by the broken line in FIG. 123 (b)) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set in a range of approximately 90 ° up to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, a position where the substrate box A4100 projects most toward the back side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)). ..

As a result, at the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side thereof (the side opposite to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed to the side where the operator is present, and the switch device A120. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operating wall portion A210 can face the back surface of another component arranged on the inner frame 12. Therefore, another component can be made to face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at a position where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent operation (the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are fraudulently operated).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 is applied to another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with each other, the substrate box A4100 is formed so as not to be arranged at the first position. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the key A140. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key A140 that has been forgotten to be removed from being illegally acquired.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the second position of the substrate box A4100 is located below the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. When the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, the substrate box A4100 can be subsequently displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to recognize that the substrate box A4100 cannot be placed in the first position.

As for the separate member, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is on the front side of the operating wall portion A210 rather than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape penetrates into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 143. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the variable winning device 65 arranged in the game area is opened in the special gaming state, and there is one winning opening (specific winning opening 65) that facilitates the entry of the game ball. However, in the variable winning device B1000 of the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of winning openings that facilitate the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state are provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the eleventh embodiment. A ball game is performed by a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13.

The game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and in addition to a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, general winning openings 63, first winning openings 64, and second winning openings. A mouth 640, a variable winning device B1000 normal winning port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled to form a peripheral portion thereof, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of an inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device B1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws and the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 124.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin arc member 70 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 124) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

The lottery based on winning will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won (for example, some benefit to the player (for example, payout of prize balls, execution of lottery, transition to a more advantageous state). A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn in the wake of the fact that there is a ball that can be expected to be granted), and when the ball passes through the ordinary winning opening 67, the ordinary symbol (second symbol) Lottery will be held. In the lottery of special symbols performed for the balls entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In that case, the jackpot type is also determined.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol). For example, it is determined as a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the special lottery performed for the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is referred to. The lottery of symbols is called "lottery of special symbols 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and at the same time, until the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, which is normally closed, elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, the operation of releasing 10 balls (until a specified number of balls) is won is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. It should be noted that the prize balls are paid out in association with the balls entering the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002, and the number of payouts will be described later.

As the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit a", "big hit b", and "big hit c" are provided. Details will be described later, but the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times the ball is entered is 4 for each type of winning opening. It is held up to a number of times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). If the number of reserved balls) remains, the next special symbol lottery will be held and the variable display according to the lottery will start. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the present embodiment, when both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. However, the lottery is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery may be executed preferentially in the acquisition order (ball entry order) of the special symbols, or the lottery may be executed alternately for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Alternatively, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be drawn at the same time.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. become. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the ordinary winning opening 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery starts. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed. After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. The pachinko machine 10 is not limited to, for example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), the time may be shortened for the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. good.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

Further, the number of times of lottery for the special symbol in which the above-mentioned normal symbol is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

In addition, the "normal symbol time saving state (time saving medium)" refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. Further, the "normal state" refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of the special symbol is changed nor the time is shortened of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed to the normal state. A longer time is set in comparison. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state, a state in which the rotating tip moves to the right with the lower end as an axis and is in a tilted posture), the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Compared with the case where the tip of rotation is on the side (left side) of the second winning opening 640), the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased as compared with the normal state.

In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the electric power. At least one of the number of times the accessory 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol (No. 1) It may be configured so that only the hit probability of 2 symbols) is increased as compared with the normal state.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 124). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

The plurality of LEDs 37a vary depending on the lighting state indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with a ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is being executed. Display, as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the ball entered in the first winning opening 64 changes. Indicates the number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered. Is held up to 4 times for each type of winning opening, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, and jackpot c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area.

The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger to display the variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display of the first symbol display device 37. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “display device”) and an LED that fluctuates and displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal winning opening (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided, and a second symbol hold lamp 84 that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball has passed through the normal winning opening 67 by a lighting state is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The display device is not limited to the device provided with the liquid crystal display, and for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured by using a reel or the like.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned in a variable display (same main symbol). The variable display) that finally stops when all the players are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs (the transition to the special gaming state starts) after the variable display is completed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (a variable display that finally stops when the same main symbol is not aligned) is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even numbers "0,2,4,6,8" are added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", it is one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the addition of are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier to insert the ball into the second winning opening 640. Further, as will be described in detail later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the first winning opening 64 will be reached. Compared to the case where a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering, the jackpot (big hit a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to be obtained.

Therefore, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot and the time saving state of the normal symbol, right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be put into the second winning opening 640 unless the player hits right, so the special symbol The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probable change state and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation), the player can perform the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming can be surely obtained.

In the right-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player obtains the benefits of being in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed hit even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be hit (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in a normal state (a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to insert the ball into the second winning opening 640). For this reason, if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the ball is hit at the first winning opening 64 by the left-handed hit. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, it is difficult to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handed strikes should not be made (left-handed strikes should be made). In addition, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of performing right-handed in a normal state.

In the present embodiment, as a method of determining whether or not a player is hitting right, the ball enters the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. Judge by whether or not you did.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), an illegal game (right-handed game) For example, a game mode in which a load is applied to the variable winning device B1000 to open the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 and the game ball is forcibly entered) is performed. It may be configured to discriminate and display a right-handed warning image. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image.

Further, for example, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the hall computer is fraudulent. It may be configured to output a signal indicating that it is being performed. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being performed.

Further, for example, by narrowing the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80, a range in which the game ball must pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged in the range. You may do so. In this case, it can be determined that the right-handed hit is performed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

Further, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting the displacement of a movable member (for example, a wind turbine) arranged on the left side of the uppermost position (corresponding to the left and right center position in FIG. 124) of the variable display device unit 80 may be arranged. good. In this case, when the game ball is launched, it can be determined that the right-handed ball is being launched based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the variable winning device B1000 is exemplified by, for example, the case where a ball is detected in the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 even though it is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Will be done.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000, the word "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom, the words "Call a gate error clerk" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning result, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball to the second winning opening 640 is increased by other methods such as increasing the hit probability, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a. If the player is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84. It is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the ordinary winning opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembled normal winning openings (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the ordinary winning opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings (prize ball openings) in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five. Further, the relationship between the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory The 640a is in the open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. The "○" symbol is easily displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state.

Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit A, jackpot a) that gives the maximum profit (ball output) as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. This is set higher than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64.

Under normal circumstances, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Launch the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, you will get many chances of a big hit lottery and become a big hit. Aiming is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the ordinary winning opening (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win the 2 winning opening 640, the ball is fired toward the 2nd winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and a normal winning is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim to win a big hit by passing the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device B1000 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 (lower left side of the second winning opening 640), and the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened in the substantially upper and lower central portion in the left-right direction. And the second specific winning opening B1002 is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery caused by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the jackpot will be won after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, which is normally closed, wins a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls (specified number)). Until) will be released.

The first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual (in the present embodiment). Based on the winning of one ball, 15) prize balls will be paid out.

The game board 13 is provided with an out opening 66 below the first winning opening 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, B1001, and B1002 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Specifically, the variable winning device B1000 operates a first guide plate B1300 constituting an open state for guiding a ball to the first specific winning opening B1001 by sliding movement in the front-rear direction, and a first guide plate B1300 thereof. 1 Solenoid B1410, a second guide plate B1500 constituting an open state for guiding a ball to a second specific winning opening B1002 by sliding movement in the front-rear direction, and a second solenoid B1610 for operating the second guide plate B1500. I have.

The first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is driven to slide the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 in the front-rear direction, and the ball is the first specified winning opening B1001 or the second specified. An open state in which a prize is easily won is temporarily formed in the winning opening B1002, and the open state and the normally closed state are alternately repeated.

Next, the variable winning device B1000 will be described. 125, 126 and 127 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B1000. In FIG. 125, the closed state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is shown, in FIG. 126, the closed state of the first guide plate B1300 and the open state of the second guide plate B1500 are shown, and in FIG. 127, the first guide plate B1300 is shown. The open state and the closed state of the second guide plate B1500 are shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 125, 126 and 127, in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding, the main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 is shown transparently except for the outer shape, and the shape on the back side thereof is visually recognized. Illustrated as possible.

The variable winning device B1000 first identifies almost all of the balls that flow down to the right of the variable table surface device unit 80 when the player strikes to the right and reaches the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface. It is configured so that it can be guided to a range between the winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 (also referred to as a flow path configuration range or a pre-ball entry range).

FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 129 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B1000. The variable winning device B1000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and is fastened and fixed to the base member B1100 fixed to the base plate 60 and the base member B1100 from the front side, and the flow path configuration range (pre-ball entry range) is set to the front side. The covering member B1200 that covers the foundation member B1200, the first guide plate B1300 that can be slid forward from the back side of the foundation member B1100, the first drive device B1400 that drives the first guide plate B1300, and the foundation member B1100. A second guide plate B1500 configured to be slidable forward from the back side, a second drive device B1600 for driving the second guide plate B1500, and a first guide plate assembled to the foundation member B1100 from the back side It mainly includes a rear cover member B1700 configured to cover the B1300, the first drive device B1400, the second guide plate B1500, and the second drive device B1600 from the back surface side.

The base member B1100 has a thin plate member B1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and the shape of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 at a substantially central portion of the thin plate member B1110. A through-forming portion B1120 that is formed through (with a slightly larger shape) along the line, a pair of holding holes B1130 that are through-holes into which a pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are inserted on both left and right sides of the through-forming portion B1120, and a thin plate. A pair of projecting portions B1140 projecting from the front side of the member B1110 toward the front side toward the flow path of the ball, and a pair of discharge ports B1150 for discharging the ball from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member B1110. Mainly includes a guide port B1160 arranged on the thin plate member B1110 inside the holding hole B1130 in the left-right direction to guide the ball from the front side to the back side, and a detour route B1170 for guiding the ball passing through the guide port B1160. ..

The penetration forming portion B1120 functions as a guide means for guiding both the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 at different timings, and also as a support hole for supporting the extended support portion B1212 of the lining member B1200. Function.

The penetration forming portion B1120 is formed as a symmetrical through hole, and is arranged so as to face the lower plane B1121 formed in a horizontally long linear shape and the lower plane B1121 in the vertical direction toward the center of the left and right. A ceiling surface B1122 configured to be inclined downward, a pair of left and right support protrusions B1123 projecting from the left and right ends toward the left and right inward in a range between the lower plane B1121 and the ceiling surface B1122, and a pair of them. A pair of left and right auxiliary protrusions B1124 projecting upward from the lower plane B1121 below the support protrusion B1123 are provided.

The ceiling surface B1122 is a surface that is arranged to face the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 and the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500, and its inclination angle is along the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. It is formed. That is, it is formed so that the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane is 7 degrees and the inclination is downward toward the center side of the left and right.

The support protrusion B1123 is projected to a position facing the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the vertical direction, and the surfaces arranged to face each other face the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. It is designed to be along the surface (parallel in this embodiment).

That is, the upper side surface of the support protrusion B1123 is an inclined plane configured so that the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane is 7 degrees and the penetration forming portion B1120 is inclined downward toward the left and right central portions, and is below the support protrusion B1123. The side surface is an inclined plane configured so that the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane is 7 degrees and the penetration forming portion B1120 is inclined upward toward the left and right central portions. As a result, the left and right ends of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, which are arranged so as to face each other in the vertical direction, and the support protrusion B1123 can be brought into contact with each other on the surface of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Support stability can be improved.

The auxiliary protrusion B1124 has the same left-right width as the protrusion length of the support protrusion B1123 described above, and its function is also the same as that described above as the function of the support protrusion B1123. That is, the upper side surface of the auxiliary protrusion B1124 is configured as an inclined plane having an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane and ascending toward the left and right central portions of the penetration forming portion B1120, and the left and right outer ends of the guide members B1310 and B1510. It is arranged so as to face (downstream end) in the vertical direction.

As a result, the left and right outer end portions (downstream side end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the auxiliary protrusion B1124 can be brought into contact with each other on the surface, so that the support stability of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be improved.

In particular, the left and right outer ends (downstream end) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 are portions where the sphere is bridged to the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, so that position stability is required. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upward displacement of the left and right outer ends (downstream side ends) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 is suppressed by the support protrusion B1123, and the downward displacement is suppressed by the auxiliary protrusion B1124. Therefore, the positional stability of the left and right outer end portions (downstream side end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 can be improved.

The projecting portion B1140 is a ridge extending in the vertical direction with a length of about the radius of the sphere, and is guided by the first guide plate B1300 in the open state or the second guide plate B1500 in the open state and flows down. It is arranged along the flow path and is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the flowing ball. As a result, the ball guided by the first guide plate B1300 in the open state or the second guide plate B1500 in the open state and flows down is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion B1140.

The detour route B1170 includes a partition wall portion B1171 extending to the back side so as to surround the flow path of the ball passing through the guide port B1160, and a closing plate portion B1172 that closes the back side opening of the partition wall portion B1171. To be equipped.

The partition wall portion B1171 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the back, and an opening through which the sphere can pass is formed at the downstream end of the flow path of the sphere. A ball that has flowed down the detour route B1170 is discharged from the opening. The flow path formed by the partition wall portion B1171 is configured to merge with the flow path of the ball passing from the discharge port B1150 on the left side to the back side. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the left discharge port B1150 to the back side is also discharged downward through the opening formed in the partition wall portion B1171.

In the present embodiment, when the ball riding on the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is rolling on the upstream side of the left and right center position, it can come into contact with the projecting portion B1140, and the left and right center position. The protrusion range of the protrusion B1140 is set so as not to come into contact with the protrusion B1140 when rolling on the downstream side of the protrusion, but the details will be described later.

It should be noted that the same projecting portion B1211 is also arranged on the lining member B1200 at a position where it does not overlap with the projecting portion B1140 in the front-rear direction (alternately arranged in the front-rear direction at intervals of about the diameter of the sphere). Will be).

The lining member B1200 is a plate-shaped main body member B1210 arranged on the front side of the base member B1100 at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member B1110, and extends in a frame shape from the right side portion of the main body member B1210 toward the back side. The right extension portion B1220 to be provided, the first detection sensor B1230 arranged and fixed to the right extension portion B1220, and the left extension portion extending in a frame shape from the left side portion of the main body member B1210 toward the back side. It mainly includes a setting portion B1240, a second detection sensor B1250 arranged and fixed to the left extending portion B1240, and a ball guide receiving portion B1260 arranged on the main body member B1210 to guide the ball to the guide port B1160. ..

In the present embodiment, the right extension portion B1220 and the left extension portion B1240 are configured to have a symmetrical shape, and the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 employ detection sensors having the same shape. ..

A sphere can flow down in a range surrounded by the main body member B1210, the front left wall portion of the right extension portion B1220, the front view right wall portion of the left extension portion B1240, and the thin plate member B1110 of the foundation member B1100. It is composed. Hereinafter, this range is also referred to as a “pre-entry range”.

The main body member B1210 has a plurality of projecting portions B1211 projecting toward the back surface side toward the flow path of the sphere on the back surface side, and an arrangement and a cross-sectional shape that can be inserted into the central portion of the penetration forming portion B1120 of the foundation member B1100. An extension support portion B1212 extending to the back side is provided.

The action of the arrangement of the projecting portion B1211 and the action of the shape of the extending support portion B1212 will be described later.

The main body member B1210 is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the range before entering the ball. The mode of the main body member B1210 is not limited to this, and may be partially opaque.

In particular, the vicinity of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the vicinity of the second specific winning opening B1002, the vicinity of the straight route for guiding the ball to the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002, and the vicinity of the first specific winning opening Even if the range other than the vicinity of the guide portions B1222 and B1242 through which the ball passing through the B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 flows down is configured to be opaque, the visibility of the ball is not significantly affected. Therefore, a seal member having a shape that covers a range other than these ranges may be prepared and attached, and a design surface on which a figure or a pattern is printed may be formed on the surface side of the seal member. You may improve the sex.

Further, a light emitting means such as an LED that irradiates light to the front side may be arranged on the back side of the main body member B1210 so that the degree of light transmission of the main body member B1210 changes (for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display).

The extended support portion B1212 is inserted into the penetration forming portion B1120 of the foundation member B1100 in the assembled state (see FIG. 125), and the lower portion thereof is arranged so as to ride on the lower plane B1121 of the penetration forming portion B1120. That is, the extension support portion B1212 is supported by the penetration forming portion B1120 on the extension end side, and is supported by both the main body member B1210 on the base end side and the thin plate member B1110 of the foundation member B1100. As a result, the position stability of the extended support portion B1212 can be improved while the weight of the sphere is loaded on the extended support portion B1212.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 125), the extended support portion B1212 is not limited to the penetration forming portion B1120 but is further extended rearward, and the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are provided. The sliding portions B1513 and B1523 are always opposed to each other (contact) regardless of the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. As a result, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be stably guided in the front-rear direction.

The right extension portion B1220 has a sensor support portion B1221 formed so as to support the first detection sensor B1230 at the left end portion and a ball that has passed through the first detection sensor B1230 supported by the sensor support portion B1221 on the back side. A guide portion B1222 that can be guided to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1223 that is formed so as to incline downward toward the left side of the front view at the ceiling portion, and a protrusion from the left side surface to the left side. A ridge portion B1224 and a ridge support portion B1225 projecting to the left below the ridge portion B1224 are provided.

The ridge portion B1224 projects from the vicinity of the upper end portion of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially parallel to the inclination direction of the inclined surface B1243, and thus has an effect of narrowing the approach path of the ball to the first detection sensor B1230.

The ridge support portion B1225 is projected from the vicinity of the lower end portion of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially parallel to the opening direction of the first specific winning opening B1001 to guide the slide displacement of the first guide plate B1300 described later. It works.

The first detection sensor B1230 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening B1001. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening B1001, the first detection sensor B1230 detects the passage, a signal is transmitted to the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4), and the number of winnings is counted.

The left extension portion B1240 has a sensor support portion B1241 formed so as to support the second detection sensor B1250 at the right end portion and a ball that has passed through the second detection sensor B1250 supported by the sensor support portion B1241 on the back side. A guide portion B1242 formed so as to be able to guide to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1243 formed so as to incline downward toward the right side of the front view at the ceiling portion, and a protrusion from the right side surface to the right side. A plurality of ridge portions B1244 and a ridge support portion B1245 projecting to the right below the ridge portion B1244 are provided.

The ridge portion B1244 projects from the vicinity of the upper end portion of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially parallel to the inclination direction of the inclined surface B1243, thereby narrowing the approach path of the ball to the second detection sensor B1250.

The ridge support portion B1245 is projected from the vicinity of the lower end portion of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially parallel to the opening direction of the second specific winning opening B1002 to guide the slide displacement of the second guide plate B1500, which will be described later. It works.

The second detection sensor B1250 includes a through hole as the second specific winning opening B1002. When the ball passes through the second specific winning opening B1002, the second detection sensor B1250 detects the passage, a signal is transmitted to the MPU201 (see FIG. 4), and the number of winnings is counted.

The ball guide receiving portion B1260 is configured and arranged so that the ball entering the inside is guided to the guide port B1160 on the back side and discharged to the back side of the thin plate member B1110.

The first guide plate B1300 is supported so as to be slidable back and forth, and is in a state of projecting to the front side of the thin plate member B1110, and can guide (roll) the ball toward the first specific winning opening B1001. It is a member that can switch between the open state and the closed state in which the ball is pulled backward from the open state and the ball is dropped, and the ball is connected to the first specific winning opening B1001. The guide member B1310 is arranged so as to be able to guide the ball, the upstream member B1320 is arranged on the upstream side of the guide member B1310 and is arranged so as to be able to guide the ball to the guide member B1310, and the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320. It is provided with a connecting / fixing member B1330 to which the is fixed, and a transmission hole B1340 formed in the connecting / fixing member B1330 to be involved in the transmission of a driving force from the first driving device B1400.

The guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 are portions that are inserted from the front side with respect to the foundation member B1100 at the time of assembly, but are arranged on the back side of the foundation member B1100 for easy understanding (connection and fixing). It is shown in the state of being assembled to the member B1330). The details of the assembly method will be described later.

The guide member B1310 is a member including left and right long plate-shaped portions, the width in the lateral direction is about the diameter of a sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction can be arranged close to the first detection sensor B1230. A rolling surface B1311 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, an upward extending portion B1312 extending diagonally upward from the front end on the right end side, and a left side portion. A sliding portion B1313 that is slidable on the extension support portion B1212 and a connecting extension portion B1314 that extends to the back surface side of the plate-shaped portion and is connected to the connection fixing member B1330 are provided.

The rolling surface B1311 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined 7 degrees downward to the right when viewed from the horizontal.

The upward extension portion B1312 is a portion for preventing an unexpected entry of a ball into the first specific winning opening B1001. That is, the upward extension portion B1312 is arranged inside the opening constituting the first specific winning opening B1001 in the closed state of the first guide plate B1310 in the opening direction view of the first specific winning opening B1001. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001.

On the other hand, in the open state of the first guide plate B1310, by arranging the first guide plate B1310 outside the opening constituting the first specific winning opening B1001, it is possible to avoid obstructing the entry of the ball into the first specific winning opening B1001. can.

Further, the upward extending portion B1312 is formed so as to be in contact with the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 in the open state of the first guide plate B1300. Thereby, in the open state of the first guide plate B1300, the frictional resistance generated between the front side surface of the upward extending portion B1312 and the main body member B1210 can be increased.

As a result, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide member B1310 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to prevent the downstream end portion of the guide member B1310 from being downwardly displaced (subducting displacement) or being upwardly displaced (for example, bouncing displacement caused by the impact of the bouncing of a sphere).

In the present embodiment, the upward extending portion B1312 is formed so as to project from the front side end portion of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 to the front side, and the front side end portion of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 is formed by the covering member. It stays at a position where the gap between the B1200 and the main body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, the formation width of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 can be shortened and the material cost can be reduced while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1310 as described above. In addition, since the gap is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surface B1311, B1321 when the first guide plate B1300 is opened, so that the rolling surface B1311, It is possible to easily meander the ball that rolls B1321 back and forth.

Further, the upward extending portion B1312 has an inclined surface B1312a formed on the opposite side of the first detection sensor B1230. The inclined surface B1312a functions to guide the sphere to the first detection sensor B1230 side by being formed so that the sphere in contact with the first guide plate B1300 can be brought toward the back side in the open state.

In addition, the inclined surface B1312a is formed so that when the first guide plate B1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the abutting sphere can be moved to the opposite side in the left-right direction of the first detection sensor B1230. The ball is separated from the first detection sensor B1230 and functions to prevent (cut off) the excessive ball.

As a result, the inclined surface B1312a can smoothly generate the balls entering the first detection sensor B1230, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the first detection sensor B1230 from exceeding the specified number.

The shape of the sliding portion B1313 is such that the side surface arranged to face the lower right arrangement side surface B1215 and the right middle arrangement inclined surface B1217 of the extension support portion B1212 is a flat surface parallel to the opposite side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1314 is arranged closer to the left side (closer to the upstream side member B1320) from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the guide member B1310.

The upstream member B1320 is a member including left and right long plate-shaped portions, the width in the lateral direction is about the diameter of a sphere, and the left end portion in the longitudinal direction extends to a position below the ridge portion B1244. A rolling surface B1321 that extends and is formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, a sliding portion B1323 that is on the right side and is slidable on the extended support portion B1212, and a plate-shaped portion. A connecting extension portion B1324 extending to the back side and being connected to the connecting fixing member B1330, and a forming portion formed so that the front side portion is removed while leaving the back side end portion on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1321. B1325 and. The details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1321 will be described later.

The shape of the sliding portion B1323 is such that the side surface of the extended support portion B1212 which is arranged to face the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 is a flat surface parallel to the facing side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1324 is arranged closer to the right side (closer to the guide member B1310) from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the upstream side member B1320.

The forming portion B1325 is a portion cut for the purpose of avoiding a collision with the upward extending portion B1512 of the second guide plate B1500 when the first guide plate B1300 is displaced. That is, the forming portion B1325 is formed with a sufficient left-right width in order to avoid a collision with the upward extending portion B1512.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1325 (the portion arranged facing the upward extending portion B1512) can be brought into contact with the first guide plate B1300 in a state of being arranged in the front position (open state). It is formed. As a result, frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1320 and the upward extending portion B1512 in the open state of the first guide plate B1300, so that the positional stability of the upstream member B1320 can be improved. ..

The connecting fixing member B1330 includes a plurality of receiving portions B1331 which are formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape having a thin vertical thickness and which are formed so as to be able to accept the connecting extending portions B1314 and B1324.

In the present embodiment, the receiving portion B1331 is formed as a recess that is recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear end portion of the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324, and this recess is formed after the connecting extension portion B1314 and B1324. By engaging with the end portion, the positional deviation of the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324 with respect to the connecting fixing member B1330 is prevented.

In addition, a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole (not shown) formed in the extension portions B1314 and B1324 for connection in the vertical direction, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the connection fixing member B1330 in the vertical direction. By being screwed into the female screw, the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324 are fastened and fixed to the connecting fixing member B1330.

The transmission hole B1340 includes a straight portion B1341 extending linearly in the left-right direction and a curved portion B1342 extending along an arc centered on a protruding shaft portion B1432 of the first drive device B1400 from the right end of the straight portion B1341. Although it is configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

The first drive device B1400 includes a first solenoid B1410 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1420 fixed to the tip of a plunger (linear motion rod) of the first solenoid B1410, and a linear motion member B1420 thereof. A rotating member B1430 in which a short projecting portion B1434 is connected to the moving member B1420 and is rotatably supported around the projecting shaft portion B1432 is provided.

The linear motion member B1420 has a through hole B1421 formed in a portion opposite to the side fixed to the first solenoid B1410. The through hole B1421 is formed as a long hole in the front-rear direction so as to accept the displacement of the short protrusion portion B1434 of the rotating member B1430.

The rotating member B1430 is a bent rod-shaped main body portion B1431, a protruding shaft portion B1432 projecting in a cylindrical shape in the vertical direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body portion B1431, and an end portion of the main body portion B1431. A longitudinal projecting portion B1433 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432 from an end portion (first end portion) arranged on the left side of the shaft portion B1432, and an end portion of the main body portion B1431. A short projecting portion B1434 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432 from an end portion (second end portion) that can be arranged on the right side of the projecting shaft portion B1432. To be equipped.

The protruding shaft portion B1432 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, and the details will be described later.

Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is inserted through the transmission hole B1340, the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is displaced along the arc locus centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432 due to the rotational movement of the rotating member B1430. Along with this, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The short projecting portion B1434 is inserted through the through hole B1421, and the linear moving member B1420 is displaced by the switching of the excitation state of the first solenoid B1410, so that the through hole B1421 is displaced. ..

The displacement of the short protruding portion B1434 is a rotational displacement centered on the protruding shaft portion B1432. Since the short projecting portion B1434 and the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 are integrally formed via the main body portion B1431, the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is also rotationally displaced in response to the displacement of the short projecting portion B1434.

In the present embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1342 of the transmission hole B1340 is an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432, and the radius is equal to the distance between the projecting shaft portion B1432 and the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. The shape is along.

As a result, the accuracy required for the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 for causing the displacement of the first guide plate B1300 can be reduced. This effect is achieved by shifting the displacement amount of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 and the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 due to the displacement of the transmission hole B1340.

More specifically, the displacement of the first guide plate B1300 occurs when the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 displaces the straight portion B1341. On the other hand, when the longitudinal protrusion B1433 is arranged in the curved portion B1342, the longitudinal protrusion B1433 is only displaced along the curved portion B1342, and the longitudinal protrusion B1433 is the inner wall of the transmission hole B1340. Since the action of pushing the first guide plate B1300 does not occur in the front-rear direction, the first guide plate B1300 does not displace.

Therefore, as long as the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is arranged in the curved portion B1342, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 does not matter at which position in the curved portion B1342 the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is arranged. Can be kept constant.

In other words, the curved portion B1342 can be used as a portion that absorbs the error of the displacement amount of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. Therefore, for example, even if the shape of the through hole B1421 is deformed due to aged deterioration or the displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410 in the excited state is insufficient and the displacement amount of the rotating member B1430 is insufficient, the displacement amount is insufficient. Minutes can be absorbed by the curved portion B1342, and the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 can be kept constant.

The distance between the longitudinal protrusion B1433 and the protrusion shaft B1432 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short protrusion B1434 and the protrusion shaft B1432. As a result, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 can be secured while keeping the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1420 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410) small.

Since the second guide plate B1500 is basically configured by reversing the first guide plate B1300 symmetrically, its functions are common except that they are opposite in the left-right direction.

That is, the second guide plate B1500 is supported so as to be slidable back and forth, and is in a state of projecting to the front side of the thin plate member B1110, and guides (rolls) the ball toward the second specific winning opening B1002. The second specific winning opening B1002 is a member that can be switched between an open state in which the ball can be opened and a closed state in which the ball is pulled backward from the open state and the ball is dropped. A guide member B1510 arranged so as to guide the ball to the guide member B1510, an upstream member B1520 arranged on the upstream side of the guide member B1510 and arranged so as to guide the ball to the guide member B1510, the guide member B1510 and the upstream side. It is provided with a connecting fixing member B1530 to which the member B1520 is fixed, and a transmission hole B1540 formed in the connecting fixing member B1530 so as to be involved in the transmission of a driving force from the second driving device B1600.

The guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are portions that are inserted from the front side with respect to the foundation member B1100 at the time of assembly, but are arranged on the back side of the foundation member B1100 for easy understanding (connection and fixing). (Assembled to member B1530). The details of the assembly method will be described later.

The guide member B1510 is a member including left and right long plate-shaped portions, the width in the lateral direction is about the diameter of a sphere, and the left end portion in the longitudinal direction can be arranged close to the second detection sensor B1250. A rolling surface B1511 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, an upward extending portion B1512 extending diagonally upward from the front end on the left end side, and a right portion. It includes a sliding portion B1513 that is slidable on the extension support portion B1212, and a connecting extension portion B1514 that extends to the back surface side of the plate-shaped portion and is connected to the connection fixing member B1530.

The rolling surface B1511 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined 7 degrees downward to the left when viewed from the horizontal.

The upward extension portion B1512 is a portion for preventing an unexpected entry into the second specific winning opening B1002. That is, since the upward extension portion B1512 is arranged inside the opening constituting the second specific winning opening B1002 in the closed state of the second guide plate B1510 in the opening direction view of the second specific winning opening B1002. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning opening B1002.

On the other hand, in the open state of the second guide plate B1510, by arranging the second guide plate B1510 outside the opening constituting the second specific winning opening B1002, it is possible to avoid obstructing the entry of the ball into the second specific winning opening B1002. can.

Further, the upward extending portion B1512 is formed so as to be in contact with the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 in the open state of the second guide plate B1500. Thereby, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the frictional resistance generated between the front side surface of the upward extending portion B1512 and the main body member B1210 can be increased.

As a result, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide member B1510 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to prevent the downstream end portion of the guide member B1510 from being downwardly displaced (subducting displacement) or being upwardly displaced (for example, bouncing displacement caused by the impact of the bouncing of a sphere).

In the present embodiment, the upward extending portion B1512 is formed so as to project from the front side end portions of the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 to the front side, and the front side end portions of the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 are formed by the covering member. It stays at a position where the gap between the B1200 and the main body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1510 as described above, the formation width of the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 can be shortened and the material cost can be reduced. In addition, since the gap is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 when the second guide plate B1500 is opened, so that the rolling surface B1511, It is possible to easily meander the ball that rolls the B1521 back and forth.

Further, the upward extending portion B1512 has an inclined surface B1512a formed on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. The inclined surface B1512a functions to guide the sphere to the second detection sensor B1250 side by being formed so that the sphere in contact with the second guide plate B1500 can be brought toward the back side in the open state.

In addition, the inclined surface B1512a is formed so that when the second guide plate B1500 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the abutting sphere can be moved to the opposite side in the left-right direction of the second detection sensor B1250. The ball is separated from the second detection sensor B1250 and functions to prevent (cut off) the excessive ball.

As a result, the inclined surface B1512a can smoothly generate the balls entering the second detection sensor B1250, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the second detection sensor B1250 from exceeding the specified number.

The shape of the sliding portion B1513 is such that the side surface of the extended support portion B1212 which is arranged to face the lower left side surface B1216 and the left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 is a flat surface parallel to the opposite side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1514 is arranged closer to the left side (closer to the opposite side of the upstream side member B1520) from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the guide member B1510.

The upstream member B1520 is a member including left and right long plate-shaped portions, the width in the lateral direction is about the diameter of a sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction extends to the position below the ridge portion B1224. A rolling surface B1521 that extends and is formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, a sliding portion B1523 that is on the left side and is slidable on the extended support portion B1212, and a plate-shaped portion. A connecting extension portion B1524 extending to the back side and being connected to the connecting fixing member B1530, and a forming portion formed so that the front side portion is removed while leaving the back side end portion on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1521. B1525 and. The details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1521 will be described later.

The shape of the sliding portion B1523 is such that the side surface of the extended support portion B1212 which is arranged to face the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 is a flat surface parallel to the facing side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1524 is arranged closer to the right side (closer to the opposite side of the guide member B1510) from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the upstream side member B1520.

The forming portion B1525 is a portion cut for the purpose of avoiding a collision with the upward extending portion B1312 of the first guide plate B1300 when the second guide plate B1500 is displaced. That is, the forming portion B1525 is formed with a sufficient left-right width in order to avoid a collision with the upward extending portion B1312.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1525 (the portion arranged facing the upward extending portion B1312) can be brought into contact with the second guide plate B1500 in a state of being arranged in the front position (open state). It is formed. As a result, frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1520 and the upward extending portion B1312 in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, so that the positional stability of the upstream member B1520 can be improved. ..

The connecting fixing member B1530 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape having a thin vertical thickness, and includes a plurality of receiving portions B1531 formed so as to be able to accept the connecting extending portions B1514 and B1524.

In the present embodiment, the receiving portion B1531 is formed as a recess recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear end portion of the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524, and this recess is formed after the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524. By engaging with the end portion, the positional deviation of the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524 with respect to the connecting fixing member B1530 is prevented.

In addition, a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole (not shown) formed in the extension portions B1514 and B1524 for connection in the vertical direction, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the connection fixing member B1530 in the vertical direction. By being screwed into the female screw, the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524 are configured to be fastened and fixed to the connecting fixing member B1530.

The transmission hole B1540 includes a straight portion B1541 extending linearly in the left-right direction and a curved portion B1542 extending from the right end of the straight portion B1541 along an arc centered on a protruding shaft portion B1632 of the second drive device B1600. Although it is configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

As described above, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 have substantially the same configuration, but there are parts having different shapes and arrangements. In particular, the shape and arrangement of the connecting and fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B1300 and the shape and arrangement of the connecting and fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 are different. The arrangement and extension length of B1314 and B1324 are different from the arrangement and extension length of the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524 of the second guide plate B1500.

Specifically, the connecting / fixing member B1330 is formed to have a shorter left-right length as compared with the connecting / fixing member B1530, and is arranged on the front side. Along with this, the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324 are formed to have a shorter extension length in the front-rear direction than the connection extension portions B1514 and B1524, and are arranged on the left and right inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 from colliding with each other, but the details will be described later.

The second drive device B1600 includes a second solenoid B1610 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1620 fixed to the tip of a plunger (linear motion rod) of the second solenoid B1610, and a direct motion member B1620 thereof. A rotating member B1630, in which a short projecting portion B1634 is connected to the moving member B1620 and is rotatably supported around the projecting shaft portion B1632, is provided.

The linear motion member B1620 has a through hole B1621 formed in a portion opposite to the side fixed to the second solenoid B1610. The through hole B1621 is formed as a long hole in the front-rear direction so as to accept the displacement of the short protruding portion B1634 of the rotating member B1630.

The rotating member B1630 is a bent rod-shaped main body portion B1631, a protruding shaft portion B1632 projecting in a cylindrical shape in the vertical direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body portion B1631, and an end portion of the main body portion B1631. A longitudinal projecting portion B1633 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1632 from an end portion (first end portion) arranged on the left side of the shaft portion B1632, and an end portion of the main body portion B1631. A short projecting portion B1634 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1632 from an end portion (second end portion) that can be arranged on the right side of the projecting shaft portion B1632. To be equipped.

The protruding shaft portion B1632 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, and the details will be described later.

Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is inserted through the transmission hole B1540, the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is displaced along the arc locus centered on the projecting shaft portion B1632 by the rotational movement of the rotating member B1630. Along with this, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The short projecting portion B1634 is inserted through the through hole B1621, and the linear moving member B1620 is displaced by the switching of the excitation state of the second solenoid B1610, so that the through hole B1621 is displaced. ..

The displacement of the short protruding portion B1634 is a rotational displacement centered on the protruding shaft portion B1632. Since the short projecting portion B1634 and the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 are integrally formed via the main body portion B1631, the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is also rotationally displaced in response to the displacement of the short projecting portion B1634.

In the present embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1542 of the transmission hole B1540 is an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1632, and the radius is equal to the distance between the projecting shaft portion B1632 and the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. The shape is along.

As a result, the accuracy required for the displacement amount of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 for causing the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 can be lowered. This effect is achieved by shifting the displacement amount of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 and the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 due to the displacement of the transmission hole B1540.

More specifically, the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 occurs when the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 displaces the straight portion B1541. On the other hand, when the longitudinal protrusion B1633 is arranged in the curved portion B1542, the longitudinal protrusion B1633 is only displaced along the curved portion B1542, and the longitudinal protrusion B1633 is the inner wall of the transmission hole B1540. Since the action of pushing the second guide plate B1500 in the front-rear direction does not occur, the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 does not occur.

Therefore, as long as the longitudinal protrusion B1633 is arranged in the curved portion B1542, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 is not limited to the position of the longitudinal protrusion B1633 in the curved portion B1542. Can be kept constant.

In other words, the curved portion B1542 can be used as a portion that absorbs the error of the displacement amount of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. Therefore, for example, even if the shape of the through hole B1621 is deformed due to aged deterioration or the displacement amount of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610 in the excited state is insufficient and the displacement amount of the rotating member B1630 is insufficient, the displacement amount is insufficient. Minutes can be absorbed by the curved portion B1542, and the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 can be kept constant.

The distance between the longitudinal protrusion B1633 and the protrusion shaft B1632 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short protrusion B1634 and the protrusion shaft B1632. As a result, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 can be secured while keeping the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1620 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610) small.

The rear cover member B1700 includes a main body portion B1710 having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of left and right connecting plate portions B1720 extending outward from the tip portion of the main body portion B1710 to the left and right outside to form a connecting surface with the thin plate member B1110, and a main body. A connection between a first support plate B1730 arranged at the lower left and right inner lower ends of the portion B1710 and capable of supporting the first solenoid B1410 on the upper surface side, and a first guide plate B1300 arranged above the first support plate B1730. The lower surface is in contact with the upper surface of the second support plate B1740 arranged so that the upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the fixing member B1330 and the connecting fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 arranged above the second support plate B1740. A configuration difference between the third support plate B1750 arranged so as to be in contact with the third support plate B1750 and the second solenoid B1610 arranged above the third support plate B1750 and at the upper left and right inner upper ends of the main body B1710 so as to be able to support the second solenoid B1610 on the lower surface side. A fourth support plate B1760 is provided.

The main body B1710 is configured so that the first support plate B1730 can be disassembled downward and the fourth support plate B1760 can be disassembled upward. That is, the first drive device B1400 including the first solenoid B1410 supported by the first support plate B1730 and the second drive device B1600 including the second solenoid B1610 supported by the fourth support plate B1760 are the main body B1710. It is removable from the top and bottom.

The joint plate portion B1720 includes a receiving portion B1721 into which the threaded portion of the fastening screw can be inserted. The fastening screw inserted through the receiving portion B1721 is screwed into the female screw portion of the thin plate member B1110, whereby the rear cover member B1700 is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110.

The first support plate B1730 is arranged on the rear side of the front end position of the coupling plate portion B1720, and thus includes a discharge portion B1731 for forming a gap with the thin plate member B1110.

The discharge unit B1731 forms a through hole with the thin plate member B1110 through which a ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes. The balls discharged from the through hole (the balls discharged from the discharge port B1150 and the detour route B1170) are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The second support plate B1740 includes a recessed portion B1741 for allowing the longitudinal protruding portion B1433 of the first driving device B1400 to pass in the vertical direction. The forming range of the recessed portion B1741 is formed in a range as small as possible on the premise that the forming range includes the movement locus of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. As a result, a flat surface portion other than the recessed portion B1741 can be secured, and the connecting and fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B1300 can be stably supported.

The third support plate B1750 includes a recessed portion B1751 for allowing the longitudinal protruding portion B1633 of the second driving device B1600 to pass in the vertical direction. The forming range of the recessed portion B1751 is formed in a range as small as possible on the premise that the forming range includes the movement locus of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. As a result, a flat surface portion other than the recessed portion B1751 can be secured, and the connecting and fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 can be stably surface-supported from the upper surface side.

Here, an example of an assembling method of the variable winning device B1000 and an assembling method to the base plate 60 will be described. Only the covering member B1200, the guide members B1310 and B1510 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are assembled to the thin plate member B1110 from the front side, and the others are assembled from the rear side.

In assembling the variable winning device B1000, first, the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are inserted into the penetration forming portion B1120 from the front side of the thin plate member B1110, and the connecting and fixing member is connected and fixed on the back side of the thin plate member B1110. Fasten and fix with B1330 and B1530.

Next, the rear cover member B1700 with the first support plate B1730 and the fourth support plate B1760 removed is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110. At this time, the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B1530 are housed inside the second support plate B1740 and the third support plate B1750 in the vertical direction.

Next, the first support plate B1730 to which the first drive device B1400 is assembled is assembled to the main body portion B1710 while inserting the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 into the transmission hole B1340 of the first guide plate B1300. Similarly, the fourth support plate B1760 to which the second drive device B1600 is assembled is assembled to the main body portion B1710 while inserting the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 into the transmission hole B1540 of the second guide plate B1500.

Then, after the covering member B1200 is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110, the variable winning device B1000 is assembled to the base plate 60 from the front side, and the variable winning device B1000 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by fastening and fixing.

The closed state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. 130 is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B1000 in the CXXXI-CXXXI line of FIG. 130. In addition, in FIGS. 130 and 131, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in a closed state, and in FIG. 130, the main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 is transparently shown on the back side thereof. The shape is visible.

In addition, in FIG. 130, in the range before entering the ball, at least a part of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily provided with a polka dot pattern (dot). That is, in the range in which the polka dots (dots) are attached in FIG. 130, the extension support portion B1212 is formed over the range between the foundation member B1100 and the lining member B1200 to form a sphere. The upper extension portions B1312 and B1512 are arranged so as not to pass through, and are arranged at substantially intermediate positions between the foundation member B1100 and the lining member B1200, so that the ball cannot pass through.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, when the second guide plate B1500 is closed, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided by the penetration forming portion B1120 and are on the back side of the front plate surface of the thin plate member B1110. It is possible to maintain the space between the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 and the main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 without narrowing the distance between them.

The thin plate member B1110 of the foundation member B1100 and the main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 are arranged side by side at intervals through which spheres can pass. The ball that has reached between the setting portion B1240 and the setting portion B1240 can be dropped below the variable winning device B1000.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the closed state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is arranged so as to partially close the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the second specific winning opening B1002.

Therefore, irregular winning (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the second guide plate B1500, the ball that hits other components is thrown laterally and enters the second specific winning opening B1002) or cheating. (For example, the act of attracting a ball with a magnet to win a prize, or the act of pulling or shaking the thread end on the opposite side of the ball launched with the thread adhered to manipulate the position of the ball to win a prize, etc.) It is possible to prevent winning a prize.

The open state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. 132 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, FIG. 132 (b) is a partially front enlarged view of the variable winning device B1000 in the range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132 (a), and FIG. 133 is a view. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus B1000 in the CXXXIII-CXXXIII line of 132 (a).

In addition, in FIG. 132 (a), FIG. 132 (b) and FIG. 133, the first guide plate B1300 is in the closed state, the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, and FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b). ), The main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 is shown transparently so that the shape of the back surface side thereof can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 132 (a), a sphere passing through the second detection sensor B1250 is shown as an example of a flowing sphere, and in FIG. 133, the outer shape of the sphere is an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere. Illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 132 (a) and FIG. 132 (b), in the range before entering the ball, at least a part of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily provided with a polka dot pattern (dot). In the range in which the polka dots (dots) are attached in FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b), the plate-shaped portions of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are added to the range described above in FIG. 130. On the other hand, the polka dot pattern (dot) is erased from the upper extension portion B1512.

That is, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is slidably displaced toward the front side, so that the plate-shaped portion of the guide member B1510, the upstream side member B1520, and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 The gap between them is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere so that the sphere cannot pass downward on the front side of the second guide plate B1500.

On the other hand, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is arranged close to the lining member B1200 so as not to interfere with the entry into the second specific winning opening B1002.

As shown in FIGS. 132 (a), 132 (b) and 133, when the second guide plate B1500 is opened, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided by the penetration forming portion B1120 to form a thin plate member. It projects to the front side from the front plate surface of B1110, and extends to the right side because the distance between the plate-shaped part of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. The ball that has reached between the portion B1220 and the left extension portion B1240 is prevented from falling.

In the present embodiment, since the distance between the plate-shaped portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end portion of the sphere is a rolling surface. Take B1311 and B1321. As a result, the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 can be easily meandered in the front-rear direction of the rolling sphere.

As shown in FIG. 133, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is arranged at a position where the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 is not blocked. Specifically, it is moved to a position where it overlaps with the frame portion forming the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Therefore, the ball can pass through the second specific winning opening B1002.

The ball that reaches between the right extension portion B1220 and the left extension portion B1240 in the open state of the second guide plate B1500 rolls on the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 of the second guide plate B1500 along the inclination. It passes through the second detection sensor B1250 from its left end.

In the open state of the second guide plate B1500, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate-shaped portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200. As a result, the amount of material required can be reduced as compared with the case where the plate-shaped portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are formed to the extent that they come into contact with the main body member B1210, or as compared with the case where they come into contact with each other. Since the occurrence of a load can be prevented, the durability of the second guide plate B1500 can be improved, which is an advantageous effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 132 (b), the action of the extension support portion B1212 on the front-rear slide displacement of the second guide plate B1500 will be described. As described above, the extension support portion B1212 extends to the rear of the penetration forming portion B1120 so that it can come into contact with the second guide plate B1500 in the vertical direction regardless of the arrangement of the second guide plate B1500.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b), the extended support portion B1212 is connected to a main body portion having a horizontally long rhombic cross section and a lower end portion of the main body portion, and has a horizontally long rectangular cross section. It is provided with a lower support portion formed in a pentagonal shape with a triangle placed on the upper side, and is configured so that the space between the main body portion and the lower support portion can be narrowed inward to the left and right.

The main body of the extension support portion B1212 is formed on the upper surface of the extension support portion B1212 as an inclined surface arranged downward on the left and right sides with the left and right center positions corresponding to the left and right center of the protruding portion B1211 as vertices. A lower right arrangement side surface B1215 and a lower left arrangement side surface B1216 forming an upper side surface of the constriction formed between the B1213 and the upper left arrangement inclined surface B1214 and the lower support portion are provided.

The lower support portion of the extension support portion B1212 is formed on the upper surface of the extension support portion B1211 as an inclined surface that inclines downward to the left and right outwards with the left and right center positions that coincide with the left and right center of the protrusion B1211 as vertices. The arrangement inclined surface B1217 and the left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 are provided.

The upper right arrangement inclined surface B1213 is arranged so as to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1523, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1523 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower plane of the sliding portion B1523). It is configured so that it can be contacted with a surface. As a result, the displacement of the sliding portion B1523 in the front-rear direction can be stably guided while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding portion B1523.

The upper left arrangement inclined surface B1214 is arranged so as to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1323 and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1323 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower plane of the sliding portion B1323). It is configured so that it can be contacted with a surface. As a result, the displacement of the sliding portion B1323 in the front-rear direction can be stably guided while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding portion B1523.

The lower right arrangement side surface B1215 is arranged so as to face the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1313, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1313 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper plane of the sliding portion B1313). It is configured so that it can be contacted with a surface. Further, the right middle arrangement inclined surface B1217 is arranged so as to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313 (in this embodiment, it is parallel to the lower plane of the sliding portion B1313). It is made flat) and is configured to be surface-contactable. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the displacement of the sliding portion B1313 in the front-rear direction while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding portion B1313.

The lower left arrangement side surface B1216 is arranged so as to face the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1513, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1513 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper plane of the sliding portion B1513). It is configured to be surface-contactable. Further, the left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 is arranged so as to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513 (in this embodiment, it is parallel to the lower plane of the sliding portion B1513). It is made flat) and is configured to be surface-contactable. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the displacement of the sliding portion B1513 in the front-rear direction while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding portion B1513.

In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, as shown in FIG. 132B, the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 is formed on the same plane as the plane on which the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are arranged, and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 is formed. The rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are formed on the same plane as the plane on which the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are arranged, and the lower right arrangement side surface B1215 and the left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 are on the same plane as the plane on which the lower side surfaces of the guide member B1510 and the upstream side member B1520 are arranged. The lower left arrangement side surface B1216 and the right middle arrangement inclined surface B1217 were designed to be formed on the same plane as the plane on which the lower left side surface of the guide member B1310 and the upstream side member B1320 is arranged.

On the other hand, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is naturally conceivable to adopt each surface formed on the extended support portion B1212 not only from a flat surface but also from a shape including other shapes (curved surface shape, uneven shape, saw blade shape, etc.).

In particular, while it is functionally significant that the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 having a function as a rolling surface of the sphere are formed in a plane shape, the other parts are slid. The above-mentioned action can be produced by matching the shapes of the moving portions B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523.

As a design concept in that case, it is considered that it is a common matter that the contact on the surface improves the action of guiding the displacement as compared with the contact on the line, but the frictional resistance becomes large. In the present embodiment, the left-right width of the extended support portion B1212 is designed so that the frictional resistance can be reduced while ensuring the action of guiding the displacement.

The sliding portions B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523 are shaped so that the ball can be guided even in a configuration in which the extended support portion B1212 is omitted. That is, both the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the sliding portions B1513 and B1523 of the second guide plate B1500 project inward to the left and right so as to narrow the gap in the left-right direction. As a result, regardless of the state of the extended support portion B1212 (for example, even if it is damaged), the ball is rolled on the upper surfaces of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to reach the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. You can guide the ball.

134 to 136 are top views of the variable winning device B1000. FIG. 134 illustrates the case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in the closed state, and in FIG. 135, the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state and the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state. A case is illustrated, and FIG. 136 illustrates a case where the first guide plate B1300 is in the closed state and the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state.

Hereinafter, switching of solenoid excitation will be described. In FIG. 134, both the first solenoid B1410 and the second solenoid B1610 are not energized and are in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B1000, which is maintained before the start of the game or in the normal state, and the variable winning device B1000 is maintained in this state for most of the operating time.

Mainly in the special gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the state of the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is changed by energizing and exciting the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610. Can be switched.

As shown in FIG. 135, the second solenoid B1610 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the first solenoid B1410 is excited, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, and the first specific prize of the first detection sensor B1230 is obtained. The ball can be guided to the mouth B1001.

The state switching of the first guide plate B1300 is performed by the front-rear slide displacement, but the front-rear direction displacement of the guide member B1310 and the upstream side member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300 is smoothly supported by the lining member B1200. Will be done.

The downstream end (right end) of the guide member B1310 is supported by the ridge support B1225, and the upstream end (left end) of the guide member B1310 is arranged at the lower right of the extended support B1212. It is sandwiched and supported from the vertical direction by the side surface B1215 and the right middle arrangement inclined surface B1217 (see FIG. 132 (b)).

As a result, first, even when a plurality of balls are placed on the guide member B1310, it is possible to prevent the guide member B1310 from sinking and being displaced, and the ball enters the first specific winning opening B1001. The sphere can be made smooth.

Secondly, since the positional deviation between the upper surface of the extension support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1310 can be suppressed, the flow of the sphere from the upper surface of the extension support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1310 is smoothed. be able to.

The ridge support portion B1225 and the extension support portion B1212 may be formed over the length direction (left-right direction) of the guide member B1310, but in the present embodiment, the ridge support portion B1225 and the extension support portion B1212 may be formed near the left and right ends of the guide member B1310. Only form. As a result, the displacement resistance (friction resistance) of the first guide plate B1300 can be reduced.

The downstream end (right end) of the upstream member B1320 is supported by the extension support B1212. As a result, even when a plurality of balls are placed on the upstream member B1320, it is possible to prevent the upstream member B1320 from sinking and being displaced, and the balls can smoothly enter the extension support portion B1212. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320, the upper surface of the extending support portion B1212 with a downward slope, and the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. It is designed to be. As a result, the steps in the vertical direction can be removed from the flow path of the ball, and the flow of the ball to the first specific winning opening B1001 can be smoothed.

As shown in FIG. 136, the first solenoid B1410 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the second solenoid B1610 is excited, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state, and the second specific prize of the second detection sensor B1250 is obtained. The ball can be guided to the mouth B1002.

The state switching of the second guide plate B1500 is performed by the front-rear slide displacement, but the front-rear direction displacement of the guide member B1510 and the upstream side member B1520 of the second guide plate B1500 is smoothly supported by the lining member B1200. Will be done.

The downstream end (left end) of the guide member B1510 is supported by the ridge support B1245, and the upstream end (right end) of the guide member B1510 is the lower left side surface of the extended support B1212. It is sandwiched and supported from the vertical direction by B1216 and the left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 (see FIG. 132 (b)).

As a result, first, even when a plurality of balls are placed on the guide member B1510, it is possible to prevent the guide member B1510 from sinking and being displaced, and the ball enters the second specific winning opening B1002. The sphere can be made smooth.

Secondly, since the positional deviation between the upper surface of the extension support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1510 can be suppressed, the flow of the sphere from the upper surface of the extension support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1510 is smoothed. be able to.

The ridge support portion B1245 and the extension support portion B1212 may be formed over the length direction (left-right direction) of the guide member B1510, but in the present embodiment, the ridge support portion B1245 and the extension support portion B1212 may be formed near the left and right ends of the guide member B1510. Only form. Thereby, the displacement resistance (friction resistance) of the second guide plate B1500 can be reduced.

The downstream end (left end) of the upstream member B1520 is supported by the extension support B1212. As a result, even when a plurality of balls are placed on the upstream member B1520, it is possible to prevent the upstream member B1520 from sinking and being displaced, and the balls can smoothly flow down to the extension support portion B1212. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520, the upper surface of the extending support portion B1212 with a downward slope, and the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. It is designed to be. As a result, the steps in the vertical direction can be removed from the flow path of the ball, and the flow of the ball to the second specific winning opening B1002 can be smoothed.

Next, an example of the flow-down mode of the sphere will be described. 137 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 137 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B1000 in the direction of the arrow CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a). 137 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B1000 on the CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa line, and FIG. 138 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B1000 on the CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 137 (a). ..

In FIGS. 137 and 138, the first guide plate B1300 is in the closed state, the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, and a plurality of balls are rolling on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1500. Illustrated.

FIG. 137 shows a state in which three balls are mounted on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500, but the second guide plate B1500 is configured to have a left-right length capable of mounting up to five balls at the same time. Has been done. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, the spheres connected on the upstream side have a cross section passing through the center of the projecting portion B1140 (see FIG. 138 (b)) or a cross section passing through the center of the projecting portion B1211 (FIG. 138 (FIG. 138). See a)) so that the center of the sphere is located.

The projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are projected on the path side of the ball that has reached the pre-entry range, and the ball flows down, although there is a difference whether it is formed on the foundation member B1100 or the covering member B1200. It is designed for the common purpose of influencing.

In the present embodiment, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 do not affect the ball rolling on the downstream side with reference to the left and right center positions of the extended support portion B1212, while rolling on the upstream side. Designed to affect the sphere.

That is, it is on the downstream side of the projecting portion B1211 formed directly above the left and right center positions of the extended support portion B1212 (on the left side in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, hereinafter simply referred to as "lower part of the range before entering the ball". The projecting portions B1140 and B1211 arranged at.) Are arranged above the rolling locus of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the second guide plate B1500, the ball does not collide with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 arranged in the lower part of the range before entering the ball.

On the other hand, on the upstream side of the projecting portion B1211 formed directly above the left and right center positions of the extended support portion B1212 (on the right side when the second guide plate B1500 is open, it is also simply referred to as "the upper part of the range before entering the ball". At least a part of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 arranged in.) Is arranged inside the rolling locus of the sphere.

The arrangement of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 with respect to the ball that reaches the pre-entry range and flows down will be described. In the present embodiment, when a ball is launched by hitting right, when a ball that has not entered the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 124) reaches the inclined surface B1223 of the variable winning device B1000, the ball is along the inclination. It will flow down to the left and reach the range before entering the ball.

In this case, it is unclear whether the sphere flows down the side close to the base plate 60 (rear side of the flow path) or the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) side (front side of the flow path). However, the ball is configured to hit the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 at least twice.

For example, when the sphere flows down the front side of the flow path, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the sphere comes into contact with the projecting portion B1211 and flows down while being displaced to the rear side of the flow path. After that, since the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are arranged alternately in the front and rear, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 will be in contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 three times before reaching the lower part of the range before entering the ball, and the flow velocity of the ball will be reduced. Will be done.

Further, for example, when the ball flows down the rear side of the flow path, the ball does not come into contact with the protrusion B1211 arranged in the uppermost stream, but as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the ball flows down the protrusion B1140. It will flow down while being displaced to the front side of the flow path. After that, since it will come into contact with the projecting portion B1211 arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212, it will come into contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 twice before reaching the lower part of the range before entering the ball. And the flow speed of the ball is reduced.

Here, because the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right are arranged outside the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300, the lower end positions thereof are located. Due to the different designs, the positions (contact heights) of the spheres that come into contact with each other are different. Therefore, without countermeasures, the sphere may escape from the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 by the amount of curvature of the sphere, and the deceleration action may be weakened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making the protrusion length of the protrusion B1140 longer than the protrusion length of the protrusions B1211 arranged on the left and right, the deceleration given to the ball by the protrusion B1140 is reduced. It is configured so that the action and the action of deceleration given to the ball by the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right can be maintained equally. The details will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the position (contact height) of the sphere BP2 that abuts in the front-rear direction with the projecting portion B1211 at the right end is a position separated from the center BCP of the sphere by a length BH1. .. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the position (contact height) of the sphere BP1 that abuts on the projecting portion B1140 in the front-rear direction is a position separated from the center BCP of the sphere by a length BH2. It becomes.

Here, since the length BH2 is longer than the length BH1 (BH2> BH1), if the protrusion lengths of the protrusions B1140 and B1211 are the same, the balls BP1 and BP2 are the protrusions B1140, When rolling the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in a state of being in contact with the plate member (thin plate member B1110 or main body member B1210) on the base end side of the B1211, a ball is used to avoid the protrusions B1140 and B1211. As for the displacement amount in the front-rear direction required for BP1 and BP2, the displacement amount when avoiding the projecting portion B1211 at the right end is larger than the displacement amount when avoiding the projecting portion B1140.

In other words, the displacement in the anteroposterior direction caused by the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 on the spheres BP1 and BP2 is not uniform in the anteroposterior direction, and the displacement in the posterior side is larger than the displacement in the anterior side, and the sphere flows down. Since the path has a bent (curved) linear shape that is asymmetrical in the front-rear direction, the positions (contact heights) of the spheres BP1 and BP2 that abut in the front-rear direction with the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are compared with the case where the center BCP of the sphere is used. Therefore, the action of decelerating the spheres BP1 and BP2 is slightly weakened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protrusion length of the protrusion B1140 is formed longer than the protrusion length of the left and right protrusions B1211, and the balls BP1 and BP2 are on the base end side of the protrusions B1140 and B1211. When rolling the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in a state of being in contact with the plate member (thin plate member B1110 or main body member B1210), the balls BP1 and BP2 are required to avoid the protrusions B1140 and B1211. It is configured so that the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction is the same. As a result, the deceleration action due to the contact between the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 and the rolling ball can be sufficiently exerted.

Although the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is increased, this design change is made to contact the rolling paths of the balls BP1 and BP2 with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the front-rear direction. This is just a design change to make the position (contact height) of the ball equivalent to the rolling path when it is the center BCP of the sphere, and the plate member (thin plate member B1110 or It is not a design change that narrows the gap widths BCL1 and BCL2 between the spheres BP1 and BP2 and the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the state of being in contact with the main body member B1210).

That is, the gap width BCL1 (see FIG. 138 (a)) between the ball BP2 that rolls the upstream member B1520 and the projecting portion B1211 in a state where the ball BP2 is in contact with the thin plate member B1110 and the upstream member B1520 are rolled. The gap width BCL2 (see FIG. 138 (b)) between the sphere BP1 and the projecting portion B1140 in a state where the sphere BP1 is in contact with the main body member B1210 is equivalent to (BCL1 = BCL2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball BP1 from being clogged while increasing the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the design concept that the forming range of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is limited to the position where the deceleration of the ball is desired to occur in the flow path is adopted. As a result, the flow velocity of the ball flowing down the upper part of the pre-entry range can be made different from the flow velocity of the ball flowing down the lower part of the pre-entry range.

In the present embodiment, the protrusion lengths of the protrusion B1211 are designed to be the same at three locations on the left and right. That is, the protruding length of the protruding portion B1211 arranged on the left and right is equal to the protruding length of the protruding portion B1211 arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212.

Since the formation height of the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right covers the entire vertical width of the rolling locus of the sphere, the position of the sphere in contact with the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right (contact height). S) is equivalent to the central BCP of the sphere.

Therefore, when the spheres BP1 and BP2 roll on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in a state where the balls BP1 and BP2 are in contact with the plate member (main body member B1210) on the base end side of the projecting portion B1211, they are arranged at the center on the left and right. The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction required for the spheres BP1 and BP2 in order to avoid the protruding portion B1211 is larger than the amount of displacement when avoiding the protruding portion B1211 at the right end.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the deceleration action of the sphere by the projecting portions B1211 arranged at the center of the left and right is configured to be larger than the deceleration action of the sphere by the other projecting portions B1140 and B1211 (maximum). Is configured to be). As a result, it is possible to easily separate (make it easy to divide) the sphere that rolls on the upper surfaces of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 with the protruding portion B1211 in the center of the left and right as a boundary.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), the gap between the projecting portion B1140 and the main body member B1210 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, if the sphere is configured to flow down from vertically above the projecting portion B1140, the center of the sphere cannot pass between the projecting portion B1140 and the main body member B1210, and the sphere will flow down to one of the left and right sides. If another sphere is placed on the closer side, the sphere that has been placed may hinder the flow of the sphere, resulting in poor flow of the sphere. In addition, if the ball is clogged and does not flow (residence state), the game cannot be continued, which is a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is arranged at a position capable of hindering the flow of the ball from vertically above the protruding portion B1140. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball flows down from vertically above the projecting portion B1140, so that the flow of the ball can be easily maintained.

Regarding the flow velocity of the ball, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it takes about 0.5 seconds to flow down the left-right distance between the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the upper part of the range before entering the ball (about 60 [mm / sec). ]), In the lower part of the range before entering the ball, it takes about 0.5 seconds to flow down the distance from the extended support portion B1212 to the center of the second detection sensor B1250 (assuming the position where the passage of the ball is detected). (Approximately 22 [mm / sec]). That is, the flow velocity in the lower part of the pre-entry range is configured to be about three times the flow velocity in the upper part of the pre-entry range.

This speed setting is also set for the purpose of reducing the number of balls staying in the lower part of the range before entering the ball. According to this speed setting, for example, when a plurality of balls BP1 and BP2 flowing down in succession roll on the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 137 (a)), the downstream ball BP1 is extended. The ball BP2 on the upstream side is arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212 until the passage is detected by the second detection sensor B1250 after passing the protruding portion B1212 arranged directly above the support portion B1212. It does not pass through the protruding portion B1212.

That is, even when a plurality of balls BP1 and BP2 flow down in succession in the upper part of the pre-entry range, the number of balls staying in the lower part of the pre-entry range can be limited to one. As a result, when the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state as the specified number of balls enter the second specific winning opening B1002, the balls may fall from the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510. It can be avoided to occur.

As described above, it can be said that the upper part of the pre-entry range is an advantageous section in the sense that at least the frequency of occurrence of the ball falling can be reduced as compared with the lower part of the pre-entry range. In the present embodiment, the flow velocity of the ball is different depending on whether the ball that rolls on the first guide plate B1300 is arranged in the upper part of the pre-entry range or the lower part of the pre-entry range. It is configured differently.

This has the effect that it is easier to attract the attention of the player who is visually recognizing the ball compared to the case where the ball flows down at a constant speed, and the ball is arranged in the upper part of the pre-entry range (the section on the advantageous side). It has the effect of being able to easily distinguish whether it is located at the bottom of the range before entering the ball.

In addition, the ball can be easily placed on the upper surface side of the first guide plate B1300 which can be switched to the open state by replacing the second guide plate B1500.

FIG. 139 is a front view of the variable winning device B1000. In FIG. 139, the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state, while the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state. Further, the spheres BP1 and BP2 shown in FIG. 137 (a) are diverted and shown. In the description of FIG. 139, FIG. 137 (a) will be referred to as appropriate.

From the state shown in FIG. 137 (a), the second guide plate B1500 was switched to the closed state and the first guide plate B1300 was switched to the open state when the ball BP1 was detected as the specified number of balls. In the case (see FIG. 139), as long as the ball BP2 is on the inclined upper surface of the extension support portion B1212 by the time the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state (for example, the interval between rounds is set to 0.04 seconds). The ball BP2 rides on the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300.

More specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 137 (a), the sphere BP2 is left side of the extension support portion B1212 after the sphere BP1 has passed through the protrusion portion B1211 arranged directly above the extension support portion B1212. If the first guide plate B1300 is opened before it can flow down the inclined upper surface, the upstream member B1320 sneaks below the center of the sphere BP2 and supports the sphere BP2 from below.

As a result, the ball BP2 rolls on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300 and can pass through the first specific winning opening B1001. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state before the ball BP2, which has been guided halfway to the open second guide plate B1500, passes through the second specific winning opening B1002. Even in the case, the ball BP2 is configured so as to easily get on the first guide plate B1300.

Therefore, the ball BP2 is different from the second specific winning opening B1002 that was initially guided, but since the ball enters the first specific winning opening B1001, the ball that has reached the pre-entry range in the special gaming state It is possible to suppress the generation of a sphere (hereinafter, also referred to as a “spill sphere”) toward the out port 66 (see FIG. 124).

In addition, since the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state in the state where the ball falling from the inclined surface B1223 after the ball BP2 is arranged above the ball BP2 (upper part of the range before entering the ball). It is easier to be saved by the first guide plate B1300 than the ball BP2. This reduces the possibility that the ball will spill below the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 when switching between the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the state of the second guide plate B1500. Can be done.

Various aspects are exemplified for the definition of the interval between rounds. For example, it may be a period from when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 that have been in the open state are switched to the closed state and then until the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state, or the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven. Focusing on the solenoids B1400 and B1600 for this purpose, the period until the excited solenoids B1400 and B1600 are switched to the non-excited shell and then the solenoids B1400 and B1600 are switched to the excited state may be set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the interval between rounds is set with a length that can suppress the spilling sphere. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in the number of spilled balls generated between the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped according to the interval between rounds and the game mode in which the firing of the ball is continued without stopping. Therefore, it is possible to increase the equality of the profits that the player can obtain.

In FIG. 139, in addition to the ball BP2, a ball arriving later falls from the inclined surface B1223 to the first guide plate B1300. Here, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are designed so as not to come into contact with the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1300 as described above, but until they reach the first guide plate B1300 ( During the fall), the ball may collide with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211.

The action caused by the collision between the falling ball and the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 will be described. It is unknown whether the falling sphere is placed on the side close to the base plate 60 (rear side of the flow path) or on the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) side (front side of the flow path). However, when it is arranged on the front side of the flow path, it is easier to come into contact with the projecting portion B1211 which is arranged close to the inclined surface B1223.

On the other hand, when the ball is arranged at the rear side of the flow path, it is not without the possibility of contacting the projecting portion B1140. For example, when the spheres collide with each other on the inclined surface B1223 and fall in a state where the left-right component of the flow velocity of the spheres is increased, the spheres also come into contact with the projecting portion B1140 arranged slightly away from the inclined surface B1223. obtain.

In this way, the ball can collide with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 regardless of the front-back arrangement of the falling ball. The sphere that collided with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is displaced in the front-rear direction along the curvature of the tips of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211, collides with the wall surface on the opposite side and bounces, and collides with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 again. , The front and rear collisions will be repeated multiple times.

Due to this collision, the velocity of the sphere in the left-right direction decreases, and the velocity of the sphere is mainly composed of the components in the falling direction. Therefore, even when the ball rides on the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 or the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320 whose inclination direction is opposite to that of the inclined surface B1223, the first one is rolled. It is possible to shorten the time until the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening B1001.

More specifically, when the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are omitted, the ball passing through the inclined surface B1223 and riding on the first guide plate B1300 rolls along the inclination of the rolling surface B1311 or the rolling surface B1321. After decelerating in the process of doing so, it flows down to the opposite side (first specific winning opening B1001 side).

In this case, the ball moves away from the first specific winning opening B1001 between the time it lands on the rolling surface B1311 or the rolling surface B1321 and the time it is decelerated, and then the ball flows down including the distance. 1 It will pass through the specific winning opening B1001. Therefore, the period until the ball dropped from the inclined surface B1223 passes through the first specific winning opening B1001 tends to be long, and it is difficult to digest the special gaming state in a short time.

In addition, while the ball that first landed on the rolling surface B1311 or the rolling surface B1321 rolls toward the first specific winning opening B1001, the ball that has fallen from the inclined surface B1223 after the ball first Since it is easy for the ball to land between the landing ball and the first specific winning opening B1001, the balls collide with each other and are easily guided to the first specific winning opening B1001, so that an excess winning is likely to occur.

On the other hand, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 can reduce the velocity component in the left-right direction of the sphere by contacting the sphere before the sphere lands on the first guide plate B1300. The flow path to the winning opening B1001 can be shortened, the occurrence of collision between balls can be suppressed, and the occurrence of excess winning can be suppressed.

As described above, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 have different effects depending on the state of the variable winning device B1000. That is, on the premise that the ball flows down from the inclined surface B1223 side, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500 having the same inclination on the left and right as the inclination of the inclined surface B1223, the ball rides on the second guide plate B1500 and rolls. While functioning as a deceleration means for reducing the flow speed (rolling speed) of the sphere, the first guide plate B1300 having an inclination on the opposite side to the inclination of the inclined surface B1223 rides on the first guide plate B1300 in the open state. It functions as a falling direction adjusting means that reduces the left-right component of the flow velocity of the previous ball and moves the falling direction of the ball in the vertical direction.

With reference to FIG. 140, a flow mode of a ball that reaches the range before entering the ball and rolls on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 will be described.

14 (a) and 140 (b) show the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, B1521, the upper right arrangement inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arrangement inclination which schematically show the movement locus of the ball rolling in the range before entering the ball. It is a front schematic diagram of the surface B1214.

The rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 are arranged so as to project over the pre-entry range, and the state in which the ball can be received is shown by a solid line. The unacceptable state is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, FIG. 140 (a) shows the open state of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137), and FIG. 140 (b) shows the open state of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139). ..

In FIGS. 140 (a) and 140 (b), the movement locus of the center BCP of the sphere is illustrated for the purpose of explaining the movement locus of the sphere rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521. That is, the movement locus of the center BCP of the sphere that rolls on the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in the open state of the second guide plate B1500 is illustrated as a left inclined locus BKL1 by a straight line downward to the left (FIG. 140). (See (a)), the movement locus of the center BCP of the sphere rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 and the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 in the open state of the first guide plate B1300 is shown as a right inclined locus BKL2 by a straight line descending to the right. (See FIG. 140 (b)).

Here, when the second guide plate B1500 in the open state is switched to the closed state and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state with an interval between rounds (0.04 seconds in the present embodiment), during that time. The central BCP of the sphere can be displaced downward. If the center BCP after the downward displacement is above the rolling surface B1311, B1321 and the upper right arrangement inclined surface B1213, the front end of the rolling surface B1311, B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 that can be switched to the open state. Can be rescued by sneaking into the lower hemisphere of the sphere. Therefore, the arrangement of the center BCP of the sphere after the downward displacement and the vertical relationship between the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are important.

The descending displacement of the sphere at the interval between rounds (0.04 seconds in this embodiment) is calculated as free fall (about 7.84 mm in this embodiment), and the sphere displaced downward from the left tilt locus BKL1 by that amount. The locus on which the central BCP can be arranged is illustrated as a post-descent locus BKD1 (see FIG. 140 (a)). Similarly, a locus in which the center BCP of the sphere displaced downward from the right tilt locus BKL2 can be arranged is shown as a post-descent locus BKD2.

The descending loci BKD1 and BKD2 are shown as lines connecting points where the center BCP of the sphere after free fall can be arranged. Therefore, the mode of the line is different between the upper part of the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214, which is the range in which free fall is hindered, and the other range.

That is, the descending post-descending loci BKD1 and BKD2 are shown in parallel with the upper right arrangement inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arrangement inclined surface B1214 above the upper right arrangement inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arrangement inclined surface B1214, and are shown in parallel with the upper right arrangement inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arrangement inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arrangement. On the left and right outer sides of the inclined surface B1214, a line offset downward from the left inclined locus BKL1 or the right inclined locus BKL2 (parallel straight lines in the present embodiment) is shown with a slight connection range in between.

When switching between the states in which the first guide plate B1300 is opened after the second guide plate B1500 is closed, the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are arranged below the center BCP of the sphere. If the switching is performed, the front end portions of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 can be slipped into the lower hemisphere portion of the sphere, and the sphere can be rescued.

In other words, in the left-right arrangement in which the descending locus BKD1 is arranged above the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321, the balls that have fallen from the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 can be saved by the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball arranged in the upper part of the pre-entry range (on the right side of the apex position of the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in FIG. 140 (a)) can be rescued without omission. On the other hand, among the spheres arranged in the lower part of the pre-entry range (on the left side of the apex positions of the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in FIG. The sphere arranged on the left side of the intersection with the rolling surface B1321 tends to be a spilling sphere.

In particular, since the ball that rolls in the pre-entry range has a velocity component in the left-right direction, the falling mode after the second guide plate B1500 is closed is not the vertical direction but the vertical displacement. And the displacement in the left-right direction are combined to make a fall along the parabola. Therefore, even if the amount of downward displacement in the interval between rounds is as described above (about 7.84 mm in this embodiment), the position in the left-right direction is the inclination of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 on which the sphere was rolling. Since it is closer to the accompanying rolling direction (in the present embodiment, the left direction), the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 with respect to the center BCP of the sphere is closer to the upper side as compared with the case of free fall in the vertical direction. A spill ball is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since it is configured to prevent a plurality of balls from being arranged in the lower part of the pre-entry range, the occurrence of the ball falling from the lower part of the pre-entry range is suppressed. can do. As a result, the generation of spilling spheres can be suppressed.

The post-descent loci BKD1 and BKD2, which are displaced downward by about 7.84 mm, described in FIG. 140, correspond to the inter-round interval in the present embodiment, and are changed according to the length of the inter-round interval. NS.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are configured to be arranged on the same straight line when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. By changing the design of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 based on the descending locus changed according to the interval between rounds, it is possible to manufacture a variable winning device having fewer spilling balls.

For example, when the interval between rounds is longer than the value (0.04 seconds) in the present embodiment, the lower line is arranged below the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 of the guide members B1310 and B1510. Although there is a possibility, the design is changed so that the arrangement of the guide members B1310 and B1510 with respect to the upstream members B1320 and B1520 is shifted downward (the downstream ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the upstream of the guide members B1310 and B1510). By forming a step between the side end portion), a structure having an effect of preventing a spilling ball can be obtained as in the present embodiment.

Although the guide members B1300 and B1500 are shown so that the tip portions on the overhang side are formed to be thick, the contact area between the tip end portion on the overhang side and the sphere when the guide members B1300 and B1500 are overhanged and displaced to the front side is formed in the front-rear direction. May be configured so that As a result, it is possible to easily prevent a ball from being sandwiched between the guide members B1300 and B1500 and the main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 and stopping. Further, in this case, the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 shown in FIG. 14-2 corresponds to the upper edge of the overhanging side tip portion.

In the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is set short for the purpose of preventing spilling spheres, but the interval between rounds may be set long (for example, 2 seconds) to allow the occurrence of spilling spheres. Further, the interval between rounds with a long interval between rounds and the interval between rounds with a short interval between rounds may be arbitrarily set.

FIG. 141 is a partially front enlarged view of the game board 13 showing the vicinity of the variable winning device B1000. As shown in FIG. 141, a distribution device B1800 configured to be operable in conjunction with the variable winning device B1000 is arranged above the variable winning device B1000. Due to the effect generated from the configuration of the variable winning device B1000, the arrangement range of the sorting device B1800 is determined.

That is, even in the past, a plurality of variable winning devices have been arranged below the second winning opening 640. However, in this case, the range required for arranging the plurality of variable winning devices tends to be large in the vertical direction, and it is difficult to find the range for arranging the movable mechanism acting on the flow of the sphere such as the distribution device B1800. rice field. It is conceivable to arrange the second winning opening 640 above to create a range, but this will lead to a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the structure of the through gate 67 and the nails on the upstream side thereof. Therefore, it was not preferable.

On the other hand, the variable winning device B1000 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are arranged on the left and right instead of being stacked vertically, and the first specific winning opening is arranged. By adopting a configuration in which the vertical height of the right-tilt locus BKL2 that guides the ball to B1001 and the vertical height of the left-tilt locus BKL1 that guides the ball to the second specific winning opening B1002 are equal, a plurality of specific winning openings B1001 , The vertical dimension of the variable winning device B1000 including B1002 can be suppressed.

Further, the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) are formed by configuring the right-tilt locus BKL2 and the left-tilt locus BKL1 so as to intersect and partially overlap the loci of the spheres. Even when at least a part of the game area is limited to the front-rear width (about 19 mm in the present embodiment), which is the gap width between the balls, the right-sloping locus BKL2 and the left-sloping locus. Sufficient left-right length of both BKL1 can be secured.

In the present embodiment, the vertical height of the right-tilt locus BKL2 and the vertical height of the left-tilt locus BKL1 are equal over the entire area, so that the variable winning device B1000 including a plurality of specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 Although the case where the vertical dimension can be suppressed has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical height of at least a part of the right inclined locus BKL2 may be equal to the vertical height of at least a part of the left inclined locus BKL1. That is, the right inclination locus BKL2 and the left inclination locus BKL1 may intersect at a position asymmetrical to the left and right, or the length of the right inclination locus BKL2 and the length of the left inclination locus BKL1 may be different from each other. ..

The distribution device B1800 includes a plate-shaped member whose left end is rotatably supported by the base plate 60, and has a posture linked to the state switching of the second drive device B1600 (see FIG. 134) by a mechanism (not shown). It is configured to change. That is, when the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600 is excited, the posture is tilted downward to the right (see the imaginary line portion in FIG. 141), and when the second solenoid B1610 is not excited, the posture is tilted downward to the left. (See the solid line portion of FIG. 141).

Various modes are exemplified as the mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the second driving device B1600 to the sorting device B1800. For example, the back side surface of the base plate 60 is squeezed from the rotating tip portion of the sorting device B1800. A rod-shaped portion is projected beyond the rod-shaped portion, and an engaging member that engages with the rod-shaped portion is disposed on the back surface side of the base plate 60 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction, and the engaging member is a linear motion member of the second drive device B1600. It may be connected to B1620. In this case, as the engaging member is displaced to the right, the engaging position with the rod-shaped portion is formed to be displaced downward (for example, formed from a shape that is inclined downward to the left in the front view). Then, the posture of the distribution device B1800 can be changed by the driving force generated by the second driving device B1600.

The flow paths BL1 and BL2 of the spheres branched by the distribution device B1800 will be described. When the second drive device B1600 (see FIG. 134) is in a non-excited state, the distribution device B1800 is maintained in a downward-sloping posture, so that the sphere easily flows down in the left-side flow path BL1.

The ball flowing down in the left flow path BL1 flows down to the left along the nail planted in the range on the left side of the sorting device B1800, and enters the ball guide receiving portion B1260 at the branch point set by the nail. It is branched into a ball-capable flow path and a flow path that reaches the inclined surface B1243.

Therefore, the ease of heading the ball to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 can be set depending on the arrangement mode of the nails planted on the left side of the sorting device B1800. In the present embodiment, the sphere branched into the flow path reaching the inclined surface B1243 and the sphere branched into the flow path capable of entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are distributed at a ratio of about 2: 1. The arrangement mode of the nails is set so that the nails can be arranged.

Therefore, as illustrated in the present embodiment, when the ball guide receiving unit B1260 is configured as the general winning opening 63 and the number of prize balls is set to 3, the distribution device B1800 is used during the time reduction or the probability change. Every time three balls flow down on the left side flow path BL1, one of them enters the ball guide receiving part B1260 and three balls are paid out as prize balls. It is possible to suppress ball loss during probabilistic change.

On the other hand, when the second driving device B1600 is excited, the sorting device B1800 is in a downward-sloping posture, so that the ball easily flows down in the right-side flow path BL2. The sphere that flows down in the right-side flow path BL2 reaches the inclined surface B1223.

Here, the progress of the special gaming state using the variable winning device B1000 will be described. In the special gaming state, as described above, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, which is normally closed, has a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls (specified number of balls). ) The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), and it is set in various ways whether the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened in each round. be able to. In the following description, the state in which the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened is also simply referred to as a "round".

For example, it is possible to set the first specific winning opening B1001 to be open in all rounds, or to set the second specific winning opening B1002 to be open in all rounds. However, it is also possible to interweave a round in which the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened and a round in which the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the round and the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to be opened is set in advance for each jackpot type described later.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, which will be described later, the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened in the odd-numbered round, and the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened in the even-numbered round. Is set (first operation pattern). That is, as the round progresses, the opening specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are alternately switched.

In this case, as a first feature, when the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state, the second solenoid B1610 is excited to switch the second guide plate B1500 to the open state, and the distribution device B1800 is tilted and displaced. do.

Therefore, even when the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in a displacement mode in which the change in the state in the front view is small and it is easy to overlook the switching of the state, which is the front-back slide displacement, the change in the state in the front view of the sorting device B1800. By displacing the second guide plate B1500 at the same time as the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 in a large displacement mode, the timing at which the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state can be overlooked by visually recognizing the switching of the state of the distribution device B1800. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence.

The second feature is that the route through which the ball is guided to the variable winning device B1000 is switched so that the ball is arranged upstream of the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 on the open side. A ball can be landed on the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243. As a result, a mechanism (see FIGS. 137 and 139) for suppressing the falling of the ball when the opening / closing state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 is switched can be generated in each round.

In other words, for example, in a plurality of consecutive rounds, when the ball lands on one of the inclined surface B1223 or the inclined surface B1243 (for example, the inclined surface B1223), the guidance for accepting the ball in the upper part of the pre-entry range of the ball. The board (corresponding to the second guide plate B1500) is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the guide plate on the opposite side (corresponding to the first guide plate B1300) is switched from the closed state to the open state to start the jackpot round. Sometimes it is easy to prevent the ball from falling.

On the other hand, in the next round, the guide plate (corresponding to the first guide plate B1300) that receives the ball is switched from the open state to the closed state at the lower part of the range before entering the ball, and the guide plate on the opposite side (the second guide plate B1500). (Equivalent) is switched from the closed state to the open state and started, but since the guide plate that can be switched to the open state is not arranged below the ball, it is difficult to prevent the ball from falling. Therefore, it is difficult to produce the effect of suppressing the fall of the ball every round.

On the other hand, in the jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot a, which will be described later, the flow path of the ball is alternately switched between the left flow path BL1 and the right flow path BL2 for each round, so that the inclined surface on which the ball lands. B1223 and B1243 can be switched alternately for each round, and the effect of suppressing the fall of the ball can be generated in each round.

As a third feature, a round in which the ball can be guided by the ball guide receiving portion B1260 and a round in which the ball is not guided by the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are alternately generated, and although the time tends to be long, entry into the specific winning opening B1001 In addition to the ball, there are alternating rounds where you can expect the prize ball to be paid out by entering the ball guide receiving part B1260 and rounds where you can not expect the prize ball to be paid out by entering the ball guide receiving part B1260 although the time tends to be short. Can occur in.

Here, the round game ends when a specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. The minimum time of the firing interval of the balls is limited to a certain value (in this embodiment, the interval of 0.6 seconds), which also limits the minimum time that a predetermined number of balls can reach the variable winning device B1000.

When a ball flows down the right flow path BL2 and reaches the variable winning device B1000, all the balls flowing downstream from the distribution device B1800 reach the variable winning device B1000, so all the launched balls are specified second. It is possible to enter the ball into the winning opening B1002. Therefore, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is such that the tenth ball from the start of launch of the first ball that can enter the second specific winning opening B1002 enters the second specific winning opening B1002. It will be the time to ball.

On the other hand, when the balls flow down the left flow path BL1 and reach the variable winning device B1000, all the balls flowing downstream from the distribution device B1800 do not reach the variable winning device B1000, but one in three. The ball enters the ball guide receiving unit B1260 at a rate of the number of balls, and does not reach the first specific winning opening B1001 of the variable winning device B1000.

In this case, it is not possible to put all the fired balls into the first specific winning opening B1001, and in order to put a specified number of balls into the first specified winning opening B1001, more balls than the specified number are fired. Need to do. More specifically, it is necessary to launch 1.5 times the specified number of balls.

Therefore, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is such that the 15th ball from the start of launch of the first ball that can enter the first specific winning opening B1001 enters the first specific winning opening B1001. It will be the time to ball.

In this way, the number of shot balls required to reach the variable winning device B1000 with a specified number of balls can be different by 1.5 times between consecutive rounds, so that the rounds and rounds in which the time required for the round game is short can be different. It is possible to generate a round in which the time required for the game is long. This makes it easier to control the time required to execute (digest) the jackpot game.

Further, since the rounds required for the round game and the rounds required for the round game are alternately generated, it is possible to easily avoid giving the player the impression that the jackpot game is delayed.

The probability of entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 can be easily changed by changing the design of the nail arrangement position or the like. For example, if one out of every two balls is designed to be guided by the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the time required for the round game in which the ball flows down on the left side flow path BL1 can be further extended. Further, for example, if one ball is guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 for 10 or more balls, the time required for the round game in which the ball flows down on the left flow path BL1 and the round in which the ball flows down on the right flow path BL2. The difference from the time required for the game can be reduced.

As a fourth feature, the ball entry interval is switched between the state where the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in the open state and the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. It can be easily changed by the timing of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball entry mode in the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, and it is easy to increase the number of prize balls to be paid out before and after the inter-round interval (immediately after in the present embodiment) in which the payout of balls is likely to be interrupted. It can be configured to be able to.

This will be described by taking as an example a state in which the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state and the ball is guided to the second specific winning opening B1002. In this case, the ball that has reached the distribution device B1800 lands on the inclined surface B1223 of the variable winning device B1000 along the inclination of the distribution device B1800, and faces the second specific winning opening B1002 along the inclination of the inclined surface B1223. And roll.

As shown in FIG. 141, the balls launched one after another land on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500 along the inclination of the inclined surface B1223. As described above, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the ball passes through the flow path of the lower part of the pre-entry range (downstream side with respect to the extended support portion B1212) in the pre-entry range. It takes 0.5 seconds, and when passing through the flow path of the upper part of the pre-entry range (upstream side with reference to the extended support part B1212), it takes 0.5 seconds to pass between the protrusions. It takes 1.0 seconds because there are three installation parts B1140 and B1211.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 141, the two spheres fired after the sphere BP3 got on the second guide plate B1500 until it reached the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (about 1.5 seconds). The BP4 and BP5 can easily get on the second guide plate B1500 (since the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the time required to launch the three balls BP3, BP4 and BP5 is about 1.2 seconds). Further, there is also a sphere BP6 that exceeds the distribution device B1800 and reaches the inclined surface B1223 even if it does not reach the second guide plate B1500.

When the ball BP3 shown in FIG. 141 is detected by the second detection sensor B1250 as the specified number of balls in the jackpot round composed of the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is closed. After that, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state at intervals between rounds (about 0.04 seconds in this embodiment).

In this case, since the central BCPs of the spheres BP4 and BP5 are both arranged above the first guide plate B1300, the first guide plate B1300 falls below the first guide plate B1300 before forming the open state. This can be avoided (see FIGS. 140 (a) and 140 (b)).

When the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the balls BP4 and BP5 flow down toward the first specific winning opening B1001 along the inclination of the first guide plate B1300. As described above, in relation to the ball that rolls in the lower part of the pre-entry range (downstream from the extended support portion B1212) in the pre-entry range, the protrusion B1140 and the protrusions arranged on the left and right are arranged. Since the portion B1211 is configured so as not to come into contact with the ball, the balls BP4 and BP5 are guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 without being decelerated by the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right. Will be done.

At that time, the ball BP5 and the ball BP4 pass through the first specific winning opening B1001 in this order. That is, the ball BP4 on the side closer to the second specific winning opening B1002 passes through the first specific winning opening B1001 after the ball BP5 arranged away from the second specific winning opening B1002.

Further, since the ball BP6 also comes into contact with the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right to reduce the velocity component in the left-right direction, the first guide plate B1300 is immediately landed on the first guide plate B1300. Enter the specific winning opening B1001.

In this way, immediately after the state is switched from the open state of the second guide plate B1500 to the open state of the first guide plate B1300, the balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 are continuously connected to the first specific winning opening B1001 in a short time. A large amount of prize balls are paid out.

That is, while the second guide plate B1500 was maintained in the open state, balls entered at intervals of about 0.5 seconds, but the second guide plate B1500 was switched to the closed state. Immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, three balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 enter the first specific winning opening within about 0.5 seconds. As a result, the ball entry mode and the effect associated with the ball entry (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out displayed on the third symbol display device 81) are notified due to the constant ball entry interval in the jackpot game. It is possible to reduce the monotony of the display effect to be performed and the audio output effect output for the same purpose, and improve the player's attention to the ball entry mode and the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched, the posture of the distribution device B1800 is switched, and the flow path of the sphere is switched to the left flow path BL1, so that the state of the first guide plate B1300 is changed. The configuration is such that it is easy for the ball that has reached the distribution device B1800 to reach the first guide plate B1300 after being switched.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the payout of prize balls is likely to be interrupted, and the player tends to feel that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is small or that the jackpot game is delayed, which reduces the interest of the player. May lead to.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of balls BP4, BP5, BP6 are entered into the first specific winning opening B1001 immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state. By doing so, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (reserved) is secured.

Therefore, the prize balls that are paid out from the time when the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched until the balls that reach the distribution device B1800 enter the first specific winning opening B1001 are the first of the balls BP4, BP5, and BP6. Since the prize ball accompanying the entry into the specific winning opening B1001 can be covered, even when the flow path of the ball is long as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the payout of the prize ball from being interrupted. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game are small or that the jackpot game is delayed.

When the first guide plate B1300 is opened and the ball flows down the left side flow path BL1, some of the balls enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, and as a result, the first guide plate B1300 is formed on the upper surface. Since the number of balls arranged in the upper part of the pre-entry range of the balls to be played is often less than two, the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the closed state. The degree of increase in payout accompanying the entry of the ball into the second specific winning opening B1002, which may occur immediately after the switch to, is the one described above for the balls BP4, BP5, BP6, etc. (that is, the second opening / closing plate B1500 is switched to the closed state. It becomes gradual as compared with the increase in payout accompanying the entry of the ball into the first specific winning opening B1001 which may occur immediately after the first opening / closing plate B1300 is switched to the open state.

On the other hand, regardless of the opening and closing of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, the ball may enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260. Since the ball is paid out even by this entry, the monotonous payout and the interruption of the ball payout at the interval between rounds, which are the problems in the first place, are unlikely to occur.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 142 (b) illustrates the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 142 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 142 (b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 142 (b)).

When the jackpot A is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49" (see 202b2 in FIG. 142 (b)).

When the jackpot B is obtained, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1160 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

The jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 142 (b)).

When the jackpot C is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 580 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the variable winning device B1000 operates in the first operation pattern in any case. do. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds, and as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79". The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 142 (b)).

When the jackpot a is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000, as in the case of the jackpot A. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89", the jackpot b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 142 (b)).

When the jackpot b is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is about 2100 as an increase obtained by subtracting the balls to be launched, and the time required for the jackpot game tends to be shorter than the time required for the jackpot a.

The jackpot c is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 142 (b)).

When the jackpot c is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is about 2250 as an increase obtained by subtracting the shot balls, and the time required for the jackpot game tends to be longer than the time required for the jackpot a.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to this difference in operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds remains unchanged, while the number of payouts and the number of balls that have reached the variable winning device B1000 but do not enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. A difference can be provided between the frequency of occurrence of balls heading to the out port 66 (hereinafter, also referred to as “spilling balls”) and the time required for the jackpot game.

More specifically, in addition to making a difference in the number of prize balls depending on whether or not the ball has entered the ball guide receiving portion B1260, forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, and forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the spilled ball in the inter-round interval Since a difference can be provided in the probability of occurrence, it is possible to provide a difference in the profit per unit time (the number of payouts including time efficiency, the game efficiency) that the player can obtain by the jackpot game depending on the difference in the jackpot type.

As a result, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) includes the jackpot (big hit a) that allows a large amount of time-efficient payout, and time-efficiency or payout. It is possible to provide a jackpot (big hit b, jackpot c) in which at least one of the numbers deteriorates, and it is possible to improve the profit balance of the player obtained when the jackpot a is acquired. As a result, even if the probability of acquiring the jackpot a is kept large, the jackpots b and c whose profit balance is deteriorated will be acquired with a small probability. A gaming machine with a large width can be configured.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance port 640, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. Since it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 142 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 142 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 142 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 143 (a) is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the first operation pattern. 143 (b) is a diagram showing the opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the second operation pattern. FIG. 143 (c) shows the opening / closing patterns of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 corresponding to the rounds, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the third operation pattern. Is.

As shown in FIG. 143 (a), in the first operation pattern, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 that are opened each time the round is switched are alternately switched. That is, a round in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited and a round in which the first solenoid B1410 is excited occur alternately, and a round in which the sphere flows down the right flow path BL2 and a round in which the sphere flows down the left flow path BL1 It occurs alternately.

The number of prize balls that are expected to increase due to payout in the jackpot of 15 rounds will be described. It should be noted that the number of payouts due to excess winning at the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (payment of excess when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the 1st specific winning opening B1001 or the 2nd specific winning opening B1002, and the specified number of each round is 10, so the 1st specific winning opening B1001 Or, regarding the entry into the second specific winning opening B1002, the number of increased balls after deducting the number of launched balls is 2100 (= (number of rounds x specified number x (number of payouts-1)) = (15 x 10 x (15-). 1))).

Next, in even-numbered rounds, three prize balls are paid out by entering the ball guide receiving unit B1260, and ten balls, which is the specified number in each round, are the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning. Since 5 balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 with respect to entering the mouth B1002, the increased number of balls entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 after deducting the launch ball amount is , 70 (= (number of rounds x expected number x (number of payouts-1)) = (7 x 5 x (3-1))).

Therefore, in the 15-round jackpot where the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 opens and closes in the first operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to payout is 2170.

The game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds will be described based on the number of launched balls. It is assumed that the game mode is such that the ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In odd-numbered rounds, it can be expected that all the launched balls will enter the second specific winning opening B1002, so if a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) are launched, the jackpot game can be completed. .. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (= number of balls x firing interval = 10 x 0.6).

On the other hand, in even-numbered rounds, it can be expected that 2 out of 3 shot balls will enter the 1st specified winning opening B1001, so 15 balls (= specified number x 3/2 = 10 x 3/2). ) Can be fired to end the jackpot game. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (= number of balls x firing interval = 15 x 0.6).

From this, it is calculated that the game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds is 111 seconds (= number of odd rounds × 6 + number of even rounds × 9 = 8 × 6 + 7 × 9).

According to the first operation pattern, from the above description, the generation of spilling balls is suppressed to 0, so that the game efficiency is reduced to about 19.5 [pieces / second] (= (number of prize balls-number of spilling balls). / Game time = (2170-0) / 111) can be calculated.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b), in the second operation pattern, what is opened in the round game is fixed to the second specific winning opening B1002. That is, since the second solenoid B1610 is composed only of the rounds in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited and the first solenoid B1410 is maintained in the non-excited state, only the round in which the sphere flows down the right flow path BL2 occurs, and the sphere flows down the left flow path BL1. There is no round to flow down.

The number of prize balls that are expected to increase due to payout in the jackpot of 15 rounds will be described. It should be noted that the number of payouts due to excess winning at the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (payment of excess when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the 2nd specific prize opening B1002, and the specified number of each round is 10, so the ball is launched regarding the entry into the 2nd specific winning opening B1002. The increased number after deducting the number of balls is 2100 (= (number of rounds x specified number x (number of payouts-1)) = (15 x 10 x (15-1))).

Next, since the flow of the ball is limited to the right flow path BL2, the ball does not enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260. Therefore, the number of balls to be increased with respect to the entry of the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is 0.

Therefore, in the 15-round jackpot that the second specific winning opening B1002 opens and closes in the second operation pattern, the number of prize balls that are expected to increase due to payout is 2100.

The game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds will be described based on the number of launched balls. It is assumed that the game mode is such that the ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the second operation pattern, since the balls do not enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, it can be expected that all the launched balls will enter the second specific winning opening B1002, so that the specified number (10 in this embodiment). You can end the jackpot game by firing (pieces) balls. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (= number of balls x firing interval = 10 x 0.6).

From this, it is calculated that the game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds is 90 seconds (= number of rounds × 6 = 15 × 6).

According to the second operation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the generation of spilling spheres. Assuming that an average of two spilling spheres are generated between rounds, the total number of spilling spheres is 28 [pieces] (= 2 × 14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as about 23.0 [pieces / second] (= (number of prize balls-number of spilled balls) / game time = (2100-28) / 90).

As shown in FIG. 143 (c), in the third operation pattern, the opening by the round game is fixed to the first specific winning opening B1001. That is, since the first solenoid B1410 is composed only of the rounds in which the first solenoid B1410 is excited and the second solenoid B1610 is maintained in the non-excited state, only the round in which the sphere flows down the left flow path BL1 occurs, and the sphere flows down the right flow path BL2. There is no round to flow down.

The number of prize balls that are expected to increase due to payout in the jackpot of 15 rounds will be described. It should be noted that the number of payouts due to excess winning at the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (payment of excess when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the first specific prize opening B1001, and the specified number of each round is 10, so the ball is launched regarding the entry into the first specific winning opening B1001. The increased number after deducting the number of balls is 2100 (= (number of rounds x specified number x (number of payouts-1)) = (15 x 10 x (15-1))).

Next, three prize balls are paid out by entering the ball guide receiving unit B1260, and 10 balls, which is the specified number of each round, enter the first specific winning opening B1001. Since five balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the number of balls to be added to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 after deducting the number of launched balls is 150 (= (number of rounds x expected number). X (number of payouts-1)) = (15 × 5 × (3-1))).

Therefore, in the 15-round jackpot where the first specific winning opening B1001 opens and closes in the third operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to payout is 2250.

The game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds will be described based on the number of launched balls. It is assumed that the game mode is such that the ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In each round, it can be expected that 2 out of 3 shot balls will enter the 1st specified winning opening B1001, so 15 balls (= specified number x 3/2 = 10 x 3/2) You can end the jackpot game by firing a ball. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (= number of balls x firing interval = 15 x 0.6).

From this, it is calculated that the game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds is 135 seconds (= number of rounds × 9 = 15 × 9).

According to the third operation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the generation of spilling spheres. Assuming that an average of two spilling spheres are generated between rounds, the total number of spilling spheres is 28 [pieces] (= 2 × 14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as about 16.5 [pieces / second] (= (number of prize balls-number of spilled balls) / game time = (2250-28) / 135).

Therefore, even when the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed, the time required for it and the number of prize balls to be paid out are different. That is, when the jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern, the game time required for the jackpot game is longer than when it is executed in the first operation pattern, and it is executed in the first operation pattern. In the case, the game time required for the jackpot game is longer than that executed in the second operation pattern.

In addition, when the jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern, the number of payout prize balls is larger than when it is executed in the first operation pattern, and it is executed in the first operation pattern. However, the number of payout prize balls is larger than that executed in the second operation pattern.

Further, focusing on the game efficiency in the above definition, the game efficiency is higher when the jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern than in the case where the jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern (23.0> 19). .5) The game efficiency is higher when the game is executed in the first operation pattern than when it is executed in the third operation pattern (19.5> 16.5).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of big hit rounds of the special symbol 2 can be set to be the same, but the number of prize balls and the game time can be set to be different. According to the comparison including the game efficiency, it can be said that the first operation pattern is a well-balanced operation pattern that always exhibits medium performance in comparison with the second and third operation patterns.

According to the present embodiment, in the jackpot of the special symbol 1, the variable winning device B1000 is controlled by the first operation pattern regardless of the jackpot type, so that the generation of spilling balls can be suppressed as much as possible. At the time of the big hit of the special symbol 1, the player has few balls, so the player wants to increase the number of balls even by one. Since the spill ball is a sphere that is surely wasted, the occurrence of the spill ball in the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is particularly discouraging for the player. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the occurrence of a spilling ball in the jackpot of the special symbol 1 can be suppressed as much as possible, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the special symbol 2, in addition to the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern in which the time required for the jackpot game is shorter than that of the first operation pattern and the first operation pattern are compared. A third operation pattern in which the number of prize balls is increased is added.

As a result, the profit obtained for each type of jackpot acquired can be slightly changed, so that it is possible to avoid the jackpot game becoming monotonous as compared with the case where the operation pattern does not change regardless of the jackpot type. can.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is difficult to suppress the occurrence of the spilling ball, but since the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is acquired through the jackpot of the special symbol 1, the player has already gathered together. I have a prize ball payout. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of disappointment with respect to the occurrence of the spilling ball, and it is possible to reduce the degree to which the player's interest is lowered due to the occurrence of the spilling ball.

A twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 157. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 slide in the front-rear direction to form an open state has been described, but the variable winning device B2000 in the twelfth embodiment includes the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing plate B2300. The opening / closing rod B2500 can be rotated around a predetermined rotation axis to configure an open state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, the constituent parts of the game area are symmetrically configured, and the player can always arbitrarily select whether to perform the left-handed game or the right-handed game, which is generated by the selection. It is configured to reduce disadvantages. The variable winning device B2000 is arranged at the lower left and right center of the game area.

145, 146 and 147 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B2000. FIG. 145 shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500, FIG. 146 shows the closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500 and the open state of the opening / closing plate B2300, and FIG. The closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 is shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 145, 146 and 147, in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is shown transparently except for the outer shape, and the shape on the back side thereof is visually recognized. Illustrated as possible.

In the variable winning device B2000, among the balls that are launched and flow down on the left and right sides of the variable table surface device unit 80, almost all the balls that have reached the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface are designated as the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific. It is configured to be able to guide to the range between the winning opening B1002 (flow path configuration range, pre-ball entry range).

FIG. 148 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 149 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B2000. The variable winning device B2000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and is fastened and fixed to the base member B2100 fixed to the base plate 60 and the base member B2100 from the front side, and the flow path configuration range (pre-ball entry range) is set to the front side. The covering member B2200 that covers the surface, the opening / closing plate B2300 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the main body member B2100 and the covering member B2200, the first driving device B2400 that drives the opening / closing plate B2300, and the main body member. An opening / closing rod B2500 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the B2100 and the lining member B2200, a second driving device B2600 that drives the opening / closing rod B2500, and a first driving device that is assembled from the back side to the foundation member B2100. It mainly includes a rear cover member (not shown) configured to cover the B2400 and the second drive device B2600 from the back surface side. The rear cover member includes a discharge portion that is a through hole through which a ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The foundation member B2100 is not provided with the penetration forming portion B1120 and the guide port B1160 as compared with the foundation member B1100 described in the first embodiment, but is provided with other constituent portions. That is, the foundation member B2100 includes a pair of holding holes B1130, a plurality of projecting portions B1140, and a pair of discharge ports B1150 as the portions described in detail.

Further, as a part to be newly explained, the foundation member B2100 is recessed in the thin plate member B2110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board and the thin plate member B2110 from the front to the back side. The first accommodating portion B2111 which accommodates the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300 and is partially formed through the opening / closing plate B2300, and the shaft portions B2511, B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500 which are recessed from the front to the back side in the thin plate member B2110. The second accommodating portion B2115 which is partially formed through, the rotary support portion B2170 which is projected toward the back side of the thin plate member B2110 and supports the power transmission member B2430 of the first drive device B2400, and the back side of the thin plate member B2110. Mainly includes a driven rotating member B2630 of the second driving device B2600 and a guide support portion B2180 for guiding the displacement of the transmission downstream member B2640.

The first accommodating portion B2111 includes a pair of left and right support recesses B2112 in which the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is accommodated, and a rectangular recess B2113 recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses B2112. , In a rectangular shape along the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses B2112 in order to move the loaded portion B2330 of the opening / closing plate B2300 that operates along the right end of the rectangular recess B2113 back and forth of the thin plate member B2110. It mainly includes a through hole B2114 to be formed through.

The structure of the support recess B2112 is different on the left and right. The support recess B2112 on the right side is formed to be recessed from the front side to the back side with a width slightly larger than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300. The back surface of member B2200 closes the recessed opening. That is, the opening / closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2112 and the back surface of the covering member B2200.

On the other hand, the support recess B2112 on the left side is formed to be recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300, and at the time of assembly, the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is formed. Is accommodated in a manner of being inserted diagonally from the rectangular recess B2113 side. That is, the opening / closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the front bottom portion of the support recess B2112 and the end portion of the rectangular recess B2113.

The surface area of the rectangular recess B2113 is larger than that of the plate portion B2310 of the opening / closing plate B2300, and the recess length thereof is slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate portion B2310. As a result, the plate portion B2310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess B2113 in the tilted posture (closed state) of the opening / closing plate B2300, and the opening / closing plate B2300 can be prevented from protruding to the front side of the thin plate member B2110.

The second accommodating portion B2115 is orthogonal to the axial direction of the pair of left and right support recesses B2116 in which the shaft portions B2511, B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500 are accommodated, and the shaft portions B2511, B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500 on the left and right inside of the support recess B2116. Mainly includes an opening B2117 in which an opening is formed in the shape of an elongated hole along a plane to be formed.

The support recess B2116 is formed as a non-penetrating recess and has a width slightly larger than the shaft portions B2511, B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500. The back surface of the B2200 closes the recessed opening. That is, the opening / closing rod B2500 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2116 and the back surface of the lining member B2200.

More specifically, the shaft portion B2511 of the left arm portion B2510 is pivotally supported by the back side surface of the left extension portion B1240 and the support recess B2116, and the shaft portion B2521 of the right arm portion B2520 is arranged in the right extension portion B1220. It is pivotally supported by the back side surface of the eaves portion B2271 and the support recess B2116.

The opening B2117 is formed so that the width in the lateral direction is slightly longer than the width in the lateral direction of the opening / closing portion B2513 of the opening / closing rod B2500, and the opening / closing portion B2513 can enter in the open state of the opening / closing rod B2500. In the present embodiment, since the opening / closing portion B2513 can be completely accommodated in the opening B2117 in the open state (lowering position state) of the opening / closing rod B2500, it is possible to easily secure a large rotation angle of the opening / closing rod B2500. The notch extending from the middle position of the vertically long opening to the opposite side of the support recess B2116 functions as an opening through which the working portion B2512 of the left arm portion B2510 is passed to the back side.

The rotation support portion B2170 has a shaft portion B2171 that rotatably supports the power transmission member B2430 and a projecting height that is evenly projected toward the back surface side of the thin plate member B2110 along a circular shape or an arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion B2171. A circular rib B2172 formed in the shape of a rib is mainly provided.

The circular rib B2172 maintains a distance between the rotating tip portion B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 and the back surface of the thin plate member B2110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member B2430, the circular rib B2172 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion B2436.

The guide support portion B2180 projects vertically in parallel with the shaft portion B2171 and has a similar shape to the shaft portion B2181 that rotatably supports the driven rotating member B2630 of the second drive device B2600, and the vertical direction on the left side of the shaft portion B22181. It is provided with a pair of guide ridges B2182 formed as long ridges. A pair of guide ridges B2182 are arranged in parallel in parallel, and are configured to be able to guide the vertical displacement of the transmission downstream member B2640 described later.

The lining member B2200 is not provided with the ball guide receiving portion B1260 as compared with the lining member B1200 described in the first embodiment, but is provided with other components. That is, the lining member B2200 includes a right extension portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extension portion B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250 as the portions described in detail above.

Further, as a part to be newly explained, the lining member B2200 is a plate-shaped main body member B2210 arranged on the front side at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member B2110 of the foundation member B2100, and an extension of the right extension portion B1220. It mainly includes a lid plate portion B2270 extending in a ridge shape from the tip portion to the left extension portion B1240 side.

A range surrounded by the main body member B2210, the front left wall portion of the right extension portion B1220, the front view right wall portion of the left extension portion B1240, and the thin plate member B2110 of the foundation member B2100 (range before entering the ball). The ball is configured to flow down.

The main body member B2210 has a plurality of projecting portions B2211 projecting toward the back side toward the flow path of the sphere on the back surface side, and a length formed by forming an opening in a long rectangular shape along the inclination of the rotation axis of the opening / closing rod B2500. It is provided with a scale opening B2215.

The projecting portion B2211 is functionally the same as the projecting portion B1211 described in each of the above embodiments, but in the present embodiment, the projecting portion B2211 cannot be formed as projecting from the long opening B2215, and the opening / closing bar. The shape is different due to the need to avoid collision with the B2500.

That is, the protrusion B2211 faces the long opening B2215 side while maintaining the effect of decelerating the ball by making the outer shape of the side surface of the ball facing the flow path side the same as the shape of the protrusion B1140. A curved surface B2212 formed slightly away from the displacement locus of the connecting portion B2530 is formed on the side surface, and a downward extending portion B2213 extending downward from a portion above the long opening B2215 is formed.

The protrusion length of the protrusion B2211 is the same as the protrusion length of the protrusion B1140. Further, the height position of the lower end portion from the center of the ball that rolls the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 in the open state is the same in the protruding portion B1140 and the protruding portion B2211. Therefore, since the meandering degree of the ball that rolls the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 in the front-rear direction can be made the same, a high deceleration effect can be produced.

In this way, by shifting the contact position from the center of the sphere, increasing the protrusion length of the protrusion B2211 in the front-rear direction and shortening the formation length in the vertical direction, the outside of the displacement locus of the connection portion B2530 is shortened. It is possible to easily form the projecting portion B2211.

In the present embodiment, the curved surface B2212 is configured as a relief for separating from the displacement locus of the connecting portion B2530, and although a slight gap is provided, even if the curved surface B2212 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the connecting portion B2530. good. That is, it may be designed to form the curved surface B2212 along the trailing edge of the displacement locus of the connecting portion B2530.

In this case, the curved surface B2212 can guide the displacement of the connecting portion B2530, stabilize the displacement of the connecting portion B2530, and bend the rearward displacement of the connecting portion B2530 in the closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500. It can be regulated by surface B2212.

Therefore, for example, even when the gap is large at the support position and the arrangement of the opening / closing rod B2500 is unstable, the connecting portion B2530 is displaced rearward when the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, and the range before entering the ball. It is possible to prevent it from overhanging. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered.

The downward extension portion B2213 functions as a portion for forming the base end portion of the protrusion portion B2211 on the outside of the long opening portion B2215, and the downward extension portion B2213 allows the protrusion portion B2211 to be viewed from the front. It can be extended to the inside of the long opening B2215.

The downward extension portion B2213 has a shape that hangs from above the long opening portion B2215, and is configured to partially close the upper side and the rear portion of the connecting portion B2530 in the closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500. Therefore, even when the ball flows down to the connecting portion B2530, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion B2530 from being loaded by colliding with the downward extending portion B2213 before colliding with the connecting portion B2530. ..

In addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 145, only the shape portion of the downward extending portion B2213 may be arranged so as to be densely arranged on the left and right above the long opening portion B2215. As a result, the range of formation of the downward extending portion B2213 for preventing the ball from colliding with the connecting portion B2530 can be expanded while maintaining the degree of deceleration, so that the load is applied to the connecting portion B2530. It can be prevented with a probability.

The long opening B2215 is formed in a shape that allows the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 to enter. That is, the shape of the opening is designed so as to avoid the movement locus of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500.

The main body member B2210 is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the range before entering the ball. The mode of the main body member B2210 is not limited to this, and may be partially opaque, and other measures similar to those of the main body member B1210 described above may be applied.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the back side of the main body member B2210 can be visually recognized through the long opening B2215, even if the main body member B2210 is configured to be light opaque, it flows down the range before entering the ball. The sphere can be easily seen.

The right extension portion B1220 has almost the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the ridge support portion B1225 is not formed (omitted) in order to realize the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300. The left extension portion B1240 has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the ridge support portion B1245 is not formed (omitted).

The lid plate portion B2270 is formed at a position where the support recess B2116 of the foundation member B2100 can be closed from the front side, and is a portion for preventing the shaft portion B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500 from falling off. That is, the shaft portion B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500 is supported by the support recess B2116 and the lid member B2270.

The opening / closing plate B2300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the first detection sensor B1230 and a case where the ball is dropped downward without contacting the ball, depending on the difference in posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate. Along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B2320 at the root of the portion B2310, a pair of shaft portions B2320 projecting from the lateral end of the plate portion B2310 along the longitudinal direction, and the shaft portion B2320 on the right side of the front view. It is mainly provided with a load-bearing portion B2330 which is extended.

The plate portion B2310 includes a rolling surface B2311 on which the ball rolls in an ascending posture (open state, see FIG. 146), and the length in the lateral direction is in the ascending posture (open state) in which the length in the lateral direction is along the front-rear direction. ), The distance from the covering member B2200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the first detection sensor B1230.

Further, the plate portion B2310 includes a chamfered portion B2312 chamfered in an arc shape in cross section at the upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion B2320 in the ascending posture (open state).

The plate portion B2310 is formed in a long flat plate shape in the left-right direction, and has a length capable of placing up to five balls side by side.

The loaded portion B2330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion B2331 extending on the front side of the rolling surface B2311 and an intervening transmission portion B2332 extending from the shaft portion B2320 side end of the ball entry prevention portion B2331. And an engaging portion B2333 that protrudes from the intervening transmission portion B2332 on the right side of the rear view (the side on which the power transmission member B2430 is arranged).

The engaging portion B2333 is extended to a position where it enters the operation locus of the power transmission member B2430, and has a chamfered portion B2333a chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member B2430, the chamfered portion B2333a abuts with the power transmission member B2430 instead of the corner portion, so that stress concentration at the time of contact between the engaging portion B2333 and the power transmission member B2430 can be avoided. ..

The first drive device B2400 has a first solenoid B2410 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and a front view H shape (a shape having recesses on the upper and lower sides, respectively) arranged at the tip of the movable member of the first solenoid B2410. ), And a power transmission member B2430 that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion B2171 of the base member B2100 and applies a load to the opening / closing plate B2300 by rotation.

The tip member B2420 has a concave portion on the upper side having a shape capable of accommodating the protrusion pin B2433 of the power transmission member B2430. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protrusion pin B2433 inside while the power transmission member B2430 rotates (see FIG. 151 (c)).

The power transmission member B2430 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body portion B2431 and an extension portion B2435 extending in the axial direction from the main body portion B2431.

The main body portion B2431 mainly includes a support hole B2432 into which the shaft portion B2171 is inserted, and a protrusion pin B2433 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole B2432.

The protrusion pin B2433 is a portion that engages with the tip member B2420, and as the tip member B2420 operates linearly due to switching of excitation of the first solenoid B2410, the protrusion pin B2433 is displaced and the power transmission member B2430 is displaced. It operates in rotation.

The extension portion B2435 includes a rotation tip portion B2436 formed in the extension tip portion from an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole B2432, and a push-in portion B2437 projecting from the rotation tip portion B2436 to the front side. Be prepared.

The opening / closing rod B2500 has a pair of left and right arm portions B2510 and B2520 that are swingably supported at one end with respect to the thin plate member B2110 of the foundation member B2100 and separated in the left-right direction on the front side, and a pair of arm portions thereof. It is provided with a connecting portion B2530 that connects the pivot end portion of B2510 and B2520 and the other end portion located on the opposite side, and is formed in a substantially U shape.

The opening / closing rod B2500 is configured such that when the arm portions B2510 and B2520 swing, the connecting portion B2530 is close to and separated from the thin plate member B2110 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110, and the arm portions B2510 and B2520 are arranged. The left and right shaft portions B2511, B2521 are formed at the upper end portion (one end portion) located on the thin plate member B2110 side in the open state of the opening / closing rod B2500 so as to project in a direction away from each other, and the axis line descends to the left in the front view. The left and right shaft portions B2511, B2521 are supported by the support recesses B2116 (see FIG. 148) of the thin plate member B2110 in an inclined posture.

The connecting portion B2530 is provided so as to extend along the longitudinal direction on the surface of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 facing the pivot end side (one end side pivotally supported by the thin plate member B2110). A moving surface B2531 is provided.

In the following description, the left arm portion may be referred to as a left arm portion B2510, and the right arm portion may be referred to as a right arm portion B2520 for distinction.

As shown in FIG. 145, the left arm portion B2510 is provided so as to be adjacent to the opening edge of the second special winning opening B1002, and the rear end portion of the left arm portion B2510 passes through the opening B2117 of the thin plate member B2110. It is configured to project to the rear side of the thin plate member B2110.

An acting portion B2512 is provided at a position of the left arm portion B2510 protruding to the rear side of the thin plate member B2110, and the acting portion B2512 is configured to be insertable from the front side into the transmission downstream member B2640 of the second drive device B2600. ..

As a result, the opening / closing rod B2500 is configured to be displaceable (swingable) in the open state and the closed state as the second solenoid B2610 is driven (excited). The details of the open state and the open / closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500 will be described later.

Here, when the opening / closing rod B2500 swings from the closed state to the open state, the connecting portion B2530 moves downward with the shaft portions B2511, B2521 as the center, and moves closer to the thin plate member B2110, and conversely from the open state. When swinging in the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 moves upward while being separated from the thin plate member B2110 around the shaft portions B2511, B2521 (see FIGS. 154 and 155). That is, the opening / closing rod B2500 is configured to swing so as to allow the ball on the rolling surface B2531 to pass downward when the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 151 (b) and 152 (b), in the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520, a sphere can pass through a region surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. As described above, the connecting portion B2530 is formed with a length dimension that can be separated from the thin plate member B2110.

Then, in the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is separated forward from the thin plate member B2110 so that the sphere can pass between the thin plate member B2110, while in the open state, the sphere cannot pass between the thin plate member B2110. The connecting portion B2530 is configured to be closer to the front of the thin plate member B2110 than in the closed state.

That is, the opening / closing rod B2500 is switched between the closed state and the open state by the connecting portion B2530 moving back and forth on the front side of the thin plate member B2110 as the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 swing. The connecting portion B2530 is separated in front of the thin plate member B2110 so that the sphere can pass between the thin plate member B2110, and the sphere passes downward through the region surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. In the open state, the connecting portion B2530 is positioned in front of the thin plate member B2110 to receive the ball so that the ball cannot pass between the thin plate member B2110 and the thin plate member B2110.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, a part of the left arm portion B2510 is located on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 to the second specific winning opening B1002. While preventing the ball from entering, when the opening / closing bar B2530 is in the open state, the left arm portion B2510 retracts from the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 to the rear, and the ball enters the second specific winning opening B1002. It is configured to allow the ball to enter.

That is, as the opening / closing rod B2500 is switched between the closed state and the open state, the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened / closed by the left arm portion B2510. Therefore, in the following description, the portion of the left arm portion B2510 that opens and closes the second specific winning opening B1002 is referred to as an opening / closing portion B2513.

That is, the opening / closing rod B2500 is provided with an opening / closing portion B2513 for closing the ball in the second specific winning opening B1002 so as not to be able to enter the ball on the lower end side of the rolling surface B2531 in the left-right direction, and the opening / closing rod B2500 is arranged at an ascending position. In the closed state, the opening / closing portion B2513 closes the second specific winning opening B1002, and in the open state in which the opening / closing bar B2500 is arranged in the descending position, the opening / closing portion B2513 is configured to open the second specific winning opening B1002. ..

In the present embodiment, by forming the opening / closing portion B2513 into a curved shape (J-shaped cross section) that is concave toward the rear, the left arm portion B2510 does not overlap with the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state. Is configured to evacuate backwards.

In the state where the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed by the opening / closing portion B2513, a part of the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened (not hidden from the opening direction) with an opening width at which the ball cannot enter. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 may be completely blocked by the opening / closing portion B2513.

Further, the opening / closing portion B2513 is formed in an inclined surface shape that inclines toward the second specific winning opening B1002 as the right side facing the opposite side to the second specified winning opening B1002 approaches the front edge side, and the opening / closing bar B2500 is in an open state. When the state is switched to the closed state, the opening / closing portion B2513 can be inserted between the second specific winning opening B1002 and the ball on the rolling surface B2531 at a position close to the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002. It has become.

That is, by forming the opening / closing portion B2513 in an inclined surface shape, the ball just before entering the second specific winning opening B1002 (the ball just before entering the second specific winning opening B1002) (the ball just before being detected by the second detection sensor B1250) is the second specific winning opening B1002. It can be pushed back from.

Further, when the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the open state, a part of the opening / closing portion B2513 protrudes to the front side of the thin plate member B2110 and is configured to be located above the rolling surface B2531 (FIG. 153 (d)). (See), a ball that rolls on the rolling surface B2531 in contact with the thin plate member B2110 comes into contact with the opening / closing portion B2513.

Therefore, the sphere that rolls on the rolling surface B2531 in contact with the thin plate member B2110 comes into contact with the opening / closing portion B2513 at the lower end portion of the rolling surface B2531 that is inclined in the left-right direction, so that the ball follows the inclination of the opening / closing portion B2513. The ball can be guided to the center of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 by separating the ball from the thin plate member B2110.

In this way, the opening / closing portion B2513 functions to push back the ball just before entering the second specific winning opening B1002, while the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 is separated from the thin plate member B2110. It also functions as a guiding surface for guiding to the second specific winning opening B1002.

The right arm portion B2520 is formed in a curved shape (J-shape) substantially equivalent to that of the left arm portion B2510, and a weight portion B2522 is provided at a connecting end portion (the other end portion) with the connecting portion B2530. The opening / closing rod B2500 is configured to urge the opening / closing rod B2500 from the closed state to the open state.

That is, in the opening / closing rod B2500, the opening / closing rod B2500 can be quickly displaced from the closed state to the open state by providing the weight portion B2522 on the end side separated from the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 pivotally supported by the thin plate member B2110. At the same time, the stability of the opening / closing rod B2500 in the open state is enhanced by the weight portion B2522, so that the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced from the open state to the closed state due to the impact when the reached ball comes into contact with the rolling surface B2531. It is configured to be preventable (suppressed).

As shown in FIG. 148, the weight portion B2522 is formed by fitting and fixing a metal weight member B2523 from the side opening of the cylindrical weight fixing portion B2522a that opens to the right.

The weight portion B2522 is arranged below the upper edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200 in the closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500, and is provided so as to be located on the front side of the rear side surface of the main body member B2210. It is provided so as to be located below the eaves portion B2271 of the lid plate portion B2270, and prevents the flowing ball from coming into contact with the weight portion B2522.

That is, the lining member B2200 is provided with an eaves portion B2271 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110 above the moving range of the weight portion B2522 to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the weight portion B2522, and the flowing ball is a weight. It is designed to prevent the opening / closing rod B2500 from being urged from the closed state to the open state by contacting the portion B2522.

The connecting portion B2530 is formed in a rod shape extending parallel to the axes of the shaft portions B2511, B2521 (see FIG. 148), and the opening / closing rod B2500 is supported by the foundation member B2100, and the left end portion of the connecting portion B2530. Is located below the right end and is configured to tilt downward to the left.

Then, in the connecting portion B2530, the rolling surface B2531 is formed on the surface of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 facing the pivot end side (the surface facing upward in the open state), and the opening / closing rod B2500 is connected in the open state. The ball received by the rod B2530 can be rolled toward the left end portion, which is the lower end of the inclination in the left-right direction.

Here, in the open state of the opening / closing bar B2500, the left end portion of the rolling surface B2531 is configured to be located at a height position substantially consistent with the lower end portion of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and is located on the rolling surface B2531. The ball can be rolled toward the second specific winning opening B1002.

That is, the rolling surface B2531 is provided on the opening / closing rod B2500 so as to incline downward to the downstream side of the flow path of the ball toward the second specified winning opening B1002 in the open state of the opening / closing rod B2500, and connects the passage downward. The ball regulated by the part B2530 is rolled toward the second specific winning opening B1002.

Further, in the open state, the connecting portion B2530 is configured to be separated from the front side of the thin plate member B2110 at a distance narrower than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 152 (b)), and the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced toward the closed state. As a result, the distance between the connecting rod B2530 and the thin plate member B2110 can be rapidly increased to a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere so that the sphere on the rolling surface B2531 can be dropped downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 abuts on the upper edge portion B2216 forming the upper edge of the long opening portion B2215 of the covering member B2200. At least a part of the rolling surface B2531 in the closed state faces the upper edge portion B2216.

In the present embodiment, the total length of the connecting portion B2530 is configured to come into contact with the upper edge portion B2216 in the closed state. That is, the ball flowing down from above does not come into contact with the rolling surface B2531 in the closed state, and the opening / closing rod B2500 is prevented from being displaced from the closed state to the open state by contact with the ball. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the rolling surface B2531 is configured to be inclined downward toward the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state, while being horizontal in the front-rear direction (front-back direction). It is composed of non-tilts in the direction). As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 can be easily displaced back and forth, so that the deceleration action due to the contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 can be effectively generated.

Further, the rolling surface B2531 is formed so that the width dimension is different between the inclined upper end side and the inclined lower end side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the rolling surface B2531 is connected to a strip-shaped first rolling surface portion B2532 located on the left-right inclined upper end side and the left-right inclined lower end portion of the first rolling surface portion B2532. It is provided with a second rolling surface portion B2533 having a width dimension larger than that of the rolling surface portion B2532 of 1.

In the first rolling surface portion B2532 and the second rolling surface portion B2533, the rear end portions facing the thin plate member B2110 in the open state are formed in a continuous linear shape over the forming portions of both rolling surface portions B2532 and B2533. ing.

On the other hand, the front end portion of the second rolling surface portion B2533 located on the main body member B2210 side of the covering member B2200 is located forward of the front end portion of the first rolling surface portion B2532 located on the main body member B2210 side. Is formed in.

That is, in the opening / closing rod B2500, a step portion B2534 is formed on the front application portion of the rolling surface B2531 corresponding to the continuous portion of both rolling surface portions B2532 and B2533. When the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, the step portion B2534 engages with the engaging recess B2217 recessed upward from the left end side upper edge portion of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200 from below. The opening / closing rod B2500 is prevented (corrected) from being displaced in the axial direction.

In this way, in the rolling surface B2531, the second rolling surface portion B2533 is widened corresponding to the inclined lower end portion on which the opening / closing portion B2513 is formed, so that the rolling surface B2531 is along the inclination of the opening / closing portion B2513. Even if the ball that rolls is guided forward, it can roll on the second rolling surface portion B2533, so that the ball can be stably rolled on the rolling surface B2531. The second rolling surface portion B2533 is formed from the right end portion of the opening / closing portion B2513 (the right surface of the left arm portion B2510) with a left-right width exceeding the diameter of the sphere.

The second drive device B2600 has a second solenoid B2610 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and a front view H shape (a shape having recesses at the top and bottom, respectively) arranged at the tip of the movable member of the second solenoid B2610. ), The driven rotating member B2630 pivotally supported by the shaft portion B2181 so as to be rotatable with the lateral displacement of the tip member B2620, and the rotational displacement of the driven rotating member B2630. A transmission downstream member B2640, which is displaceable and is guided in the vertical direction by the guide ridge B2182, is provided.

The tip member B2620 has a concave portion on the lower side thereof that can accommodate the projecting pin B2633 of the driven rotating member B2630. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the projecting pin B2633 inside while the driven rotating member B2630 rotates (see FIGS. 150 (c) and 152 (c)).

The driven rotating member B2630 has a disk-shaped main body portion B2631, a support hole B2632 formed in the main body portion B2631 with a diameter (slightly large diameter) through which the shaft portion B2181 can be inserted, and an outer diameter side from the main body portion B2631. A projecting pin B2633 projecting in a cylindrical shape parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole B2632 from the extending arm portion extending to, and an extending portion B2635 extending in the axial direction from the main body portion B2631. , A projecting pin B2636 protruding in a cylindrical shape parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole B2632 is mainly provided at the extending tip portion of the extending portion B2635.

The protrusion pin B2633 is a portion that engages with the tip member B2620, and as the tip member B2620 operates linearly by switching the excitation of the second solenoid B2610, the protrusion pin B2633 is displaced and the driven rotating member B2630 moves. It operates in rotation.

The protrusion pin B2636 is projected toward the main body plate portion B2641 side of the transmission downstream member B2640, and can be inserted into the elongated hole B2643. The distance between the projecting pin B2636 and the support hole B2632 is configured to be longer than the distance between the projecting pin B2633 and the support hole B2632. At the tip of the protrusion pin B2636, a retaining protrusion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the protrusion direction.

The retaining protrusion is formed in a shape that allows it to be inserted into the elongated hole B2643 when the long directions are aligned, and can be inserted at the time of assembly. On the other hand, after the assembly is completed, the retaining protrusion of the retaining protrusion It is configured so that the elongated direction and the elongated direction of the elongated hole B2643 are not aligned with each other. Thereby, when the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it can be prevented from falling off from the projecting pin B2636.

The transmission downstream member B2640 is projected from the plate-shaped main body plate portion B2641 arranged to face the back side of the thin plate member B2110 and the left side portion of the main body plate portion B2641 to the front side as long ridges vertically. A pair of plates arranged side by side as a wide plate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the guided ridge B2642, the elongated hole B2643 drilled in the main body plate portion B2641 in a long left-right shape, and the main body plate portion B2641. A unit B2644 is provided.

The guided protrusion B2642 is formed so that the left-right width is slightly shorter than the gap size of the pair of guide protrusions B2182. As a result, the guided ridge B2642 can be guided by the guide ridge B2182, so that the posture of the transmission downstream member B2640 can be stabilized and the displacement direction of the transmission downstream member B2640 can be stabilized in the vertical direction. can.

The elongated hole B2643 is a through hole through which the protrusion pin B2636 of the driven rotating member B2630 is inserted, and since the vertical width is slightly longer than the diameter of the protrusion pin B2636, the vertical direction of the protrusion pin B2636 It is possible to improve the followability of the transmission downstream member B2640 to the displacement of. Further, the elongated hole B2643 is configured so that the left-right width is formed longer than the vertical width so that the position shift of the projecting pin B2636 in the left-right direction can be tolerated.

The plate portion B2644 is arranged so as to sandwich the acting portion B2512 of the opening / closing rod B2500 in the vertical direction. As a result, a load is generated from the plate portion B2644 to the working portion B2512 in the vertical direction with the vertical displacement of the transmission downstream member B2640, so that the opening / closing rod B2500 can be displaced.

As described above, the displacement mode of the opening / closing rod B2500 is a rotational displacement centered on the shaft portions B2511, B2521. Therefore, the acting portion B2512 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction. The front-rear length of the plate portion B2644 is set so that the plate portion B2644 sandwiches the acting portion B2512 in the vertical direction regardless of the position of the working portion B2512 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the opening / closing rod B2500, the allowable displacement width of the opening / closing rod B2500 can be regulated by the arrangement of the plate portion B2644.

The allowable width will be described in more detail. First, the plate portion B2644 may be only one on the upper side if only the state of the opening / closing rod B2500 is to be switched between the open state and the closed state. As long as there is an upper plate portion B2644a, the opening / closing rod B2500 is closed by pushing down the acting portion B2512 by the plate portion B2644a in a state where the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized and the tip member B2620 is displaced to the left. (See FIG. 150 (a) and FIG. 150 (c)).

In this closed state, the center of gravity of the opening / closing rod B2500 is arranged on the weight portion B2522 side (front side of the shaft portions B2511, B2521). It is also urged in the front-down direction).

The plate portion B2644a applies a load to the opening / closing rod B2500 in the rotation direction (also referred to as a front-up direction), which is the opposite direction of the front-down direction. By exceeding the load, the opening / closing rod B2500 is maintained in the closed state.

When the second solenoid B2610 is excited and the tip member B2620 is displaced to the right, the plate portion B2644a is displaced upward, so that the load in the direction of pushing down the acting portion B2512 from the plate portion B2644a is temporarily weakened. In the present embodiment, the plate portion B2644a is retracted above the arrangement range of the acting portion B2512 so that the load on the acting portion B2512 is eliminated.

As a result, the opening / closing rod B2500 can be displaced in the front-down direction by the urging by the weight portion B2522, and can be switched to the open state. If the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized from this state, the plate portion B2644a pushes down the acting portion B2512 again to form a closed state. As described above, if only the state of the opening / closing rod B2500 is to be switched between the open state and the closed state, only the plate portion B2644a is indispensable, and the lower plate portion B2644b is unnecessary.

On the other hand, if only the plate portion B2644a is used, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in the posture stability of the opening / closing rod B2500 in the open state of the opening / closing rod B2500. For example, in the open state of the opening / closing rod B2500, it can be easily assumed that the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced due to the ball colliding with the opening / closing rod B2500. Cannot be regulated.

Therefore, although the second solenoid B2610 is excited and controlled to maintain the opening / closing rod B2500 in the open state, the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced forward and upward due to the impact of the collision of the spheres, and the closed state is maintained. It can cause a problem of configuration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the plate portion B2644b below the plate portion B2644a, the displacement of the open / close bar B2500 in the open state in the front-up direction is regulated. As a result, the open / close bar B2500 in the open state causes the impact of the ball and other disturbances (for example, the player applies a load to the pachinko machine 10 to move it, the load caused by the displacement of the movable accessory, and the inside and outside of the game area. It is possible to avoid a problem that constitutes a closed state due to displacement due to a load applied from the machine).

Next, the state switching of the variable winning device B2000 will be described. FIG. 150 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 150 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 in the direction of the arrow CLb of FIG. 150 (a). Is a rear view of the variable winning device B2000 in the direction of arrow CLc in FIG. 150 (b).

FIG. 151 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 151 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 in the direction of the arrow CLIb of FIG. 151 (a). Is a rear view of the variable winning device B2000 in the direction of arrow CLIc in FIG. 151 (b).

FIG. 152 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 152 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 in the direction of the arrow CLIIB of FIG. 152 (a). Is a rear view of the variable winning device B2000 in the direction of arrow CLIIC in FIG. 152 (b).

153 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 on the CLIIIa-CLIIIa line of FIG. 150 (a), and FIG. 153 (b) is a variable winning device B2000 on the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line of FIG. 150 (a). 153 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 on the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. 151 (a), and FIG. 153 (d) is a cross-sectional view of CLIIId-CLIIId of FIG. 152 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus B2000 in line.

Note that FIG. 150 shows a closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 and a closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500, FIG. 151 shows an open state of the opening / closing plate B2300 and a closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500, and FIG. 152 shows an opening / closing plate. The closed state of the B2300 and the open state of the opening / closing bar B2500 are shown. Further, in FIGS. 150 to 152, the main body member B2210 of the lining member B2200 is transparently illustrated, and the shape on the back surface side thereof can be visually recognized.

In FIGS. 150 (a), 151 (a), and 152 (a), polka dots (dots) are supplementarily added to at least a part of the range in which the ball cannot pass in the range before entering the ball.

As shown by the polka dots (dots) in FIG. 150 (a), in the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300, the ball entry prevention portion B2331 is arranged on the left side of the opening of the first specific winning opening B1001. As shown in a), the first specific winning opening B1001 is partially closed to prevent the ball from entering. Further, in the closed state of the opening / closing bar B2500, the opening / closing portion B2513 is arranged on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the second specific winning opening B1002 is partially closed. This prevents the ball from entering the ball.

In this way, in the state shown in FIG. 150A, the ball flowing down the pre-entry range falls downward without entering the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. Become. That is, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300, the ball entry prevention unit B2331 is arranged so as to partially close the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and in the closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500, the opening / closing unit B2513 is the second detection sensor B1250. It is arranged so as to partially close the opening of the. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

Therefore, an irregular prize (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500, the ball that hits other components is blown laterally to the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. (Entering the ball), cheating (for example, attracting the ball with a magnet to win a prize, or pulling or shaking the thread end on the opposite side of the ball launched with the thread adhered) It is possible to prevent winning due to the act of manipulating the position to win a prize.

Further, in the range in which the polka dot pattern (dot) is attached in FIG. 151 (a), the plate portion B2310 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is added to the range described in FIG. 150 (a), while the ball entry prevention. The polka dot pattern (dot) is erased from the part B2331.

That is, since the first solenoid B2410 is excited and the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, the gap between the plate portion B2310 and the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere opens / closes. It is configured so that it cannot pass downward on the front side of the plate B2300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), in the open state of the opening / closing plate B2300, the ball entry prevention portion B2331 enters the through hole B2114 and is more than the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 (at least, the first specific winning opening B1001). By retracting to the back side (from the opening range), the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 is arranged at a position where it is not blocked, and is configured so as not to interfere with the entry of the ball into the first specific winning opening B1001.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 151 (a), the ball flowing down the pre-entry range is guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 side, and is configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening B1001.

Further, in the range in which the polka dot pattern (dot) is attached in FIG. 152 (a), the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 is added to the range described in FIG. 150 (a), while the opening / closing portion B2513. The polka dot pattern (dot) has been erased from.

That is, since the second solenoid B2610 is excited and the opening / closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state, the gap between the connecting portion B2530 and the thin plate member B2110 of the foundation member B2100 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the connecting portion is formed. Since the gap between the B2530 and the main body member B2210 of the lining member B2200 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is configured so as not to pass downward in front of and behind the opening / closing rod B2500.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153 (d), in the open state of the opening / closing rod B2500, the opening / closing portion B2513 enters the opening B2117 and is on the back side (at least, on the second specific winning opening B1002) of the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110. By retracting to the outer side of the opening range), the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 is arranged at a position where it is not blocked, and is configured so as not to interfere with the entry of the ball into the second specific winning opening B1002.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 152 (a), the ball flowing down the pre-entry range is guided to the second specific winning opening B1002 and is configured to be able to enter the second specific winning opening B1002. When entering the first specific winning opening B1001, the first specific winning opening B1001 is blocked by the ball entry prevention portion B2331 of the opening / closing plate B2300, and the right arm portion B2520 and the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 are the first. 1 It is prevented by being arranged in the opening direction of the specific winning opening B1001.

Hereinafter, switching of solenoid excitation will be described. In FIG. 150 (c), both the first solenoid B2410 and the second solenoid B2610 are not energized and are in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B2000, which is maintained before the start of the game or in the normal state, and the variable winning device B2000 is maintained in this state for most of the operating time.

Mainly in the special gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 151 (c) and 152 (c), the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 is energized and excited by the first solenoid B2410 or the second solenoid B2610. The state can be switched.

As shown in FIG. 151 (c), the second solenoid B2610 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the first solenoid B2410 is excited, the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, and the first identification of the first detection sensor B1230 is performed. The ball can be guided to the winning opening B1001.

The opening / closing plate B2300 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion B2320 (see FIG. 153 (a)) by pushing down the engaging portion B2333 from the power transmission member B2430 when the state is switched to the open state. The details of the state switching and the open state of the opening / closing plate B2300 will be described. That is, it is rotationally displaced about an axis orthogonal to the paper surface of FIG. 153 (a).

When the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state, the first solenoid B2410 is in the excited state, the rotating tip portion B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, and the engaging portion B2333 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is pushed in. It is pushed into the portion B2437 (see FIG. 148).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 153 (c), the engaging portion B2333 of the opening / closing plate B2300 operates the power transmission member B2430 when the opening / closing plate B2300 starts operating from the closed state. When the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state while being arranged on the locus BE1, it is pushed outward (front side) of the operation locus BE1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member B2430. The operation locus BE1 is shown as an outer shape of the movement locus of the portion including the pushing portion B2437.

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate B2300 to the power transmission member B2430 after the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state is not the operating direction (rotational direction) of the power transmitting member B2430, but the surface forming the rotation direction thereof. Is hung in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion B2320 (see FIG. 153 (a)) applied to the opening / closing plate B2300 from being transmitted to the first solenoid B2410 via the power transmission member B2430.

As a result, once the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the first solenoid B2410 for maintaining the opening / closing plate B2300 in the open state is prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing plate B2300. Can be done. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep applying the voltage applied to the first solenoid B2410 to the switching plate B2300 at the maximum value.

In this way, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing plate B2300, the opening / closing plate B2300 can be maintained in an open state without being affected by the load. As the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate B2300, a load given by the weight of the sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, since the opening / closing plate B2300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface B2311, the number of the spheres is not constant and may change when the sphere is loaded by the weight of the sphere when the sphere lands. It can be said that the load applied to the opening / closing plate B2300 can fluctuate.

When the first solenoid B2410 is in a non-excited state, the extension portion B2435 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced ascending, the load on the opening / closing plate B2300 is released, and the opening / closing plate B2300 is rotated in such a manner that the plate portion B2310 is displaced downward. Dynamic displacement. Due to this rotational displacement, the ball entry prevention unit B2331 projects so as to close the first specific winning opening B1001 (see FIG. 153 (a)).

That is, the ball entry prevention unit B2331 closes the opening of the first specific winning opening B1001 in a manner of narrowing the opening from the back side edge. In the present embodiment, since the inner surface on the back side of the first specific winning opening B1001 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the foundation member B2100, the first specific winning is given at the same time as the displacement of the ball entry prevention portion B2331 is started. The opening of the mouth B1001 can be started to be narrowed. As a result, the first specific winning opening B1001 can be quickly closed.

As shown in FIG. 152 (c), the first solenoid B2410 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the second solenoid B2610 is excited, the opening / closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state, and the second identification of the second detection sensor B1250 is performed. The ball can be guided to the winning opening B1002.

In the opening / closing rod B2500, when the state is switched to the open state, the plate portion B2644 is displaced upward and the load applied to the working portion B2512 of the opening / closing rod B2500 is released, so that the shaft portions B2511, B2521 (FIG. It is rotationally displaced about the axis of 153 (b)). That is, it is rotationally displaced about the axis perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 153 (b). The details of the state switching and the open state of the opening / closing bar B2500 will be described.

When the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the open state, the second solenoid B2610 is in the excited state. That is, when the second solenoid B2610 is energized and becomes excited, the driven rotating member B2630 is displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, and the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced upward and is given to the opening / closing rod B2500. The load is released and the opening / closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state.

In the excited state of the second solenoid B2610, the plate portion B2644b is arranged below the acting portion B2512 of the opening / closing rod B2500 to regulate the forward and upward rotation of the opening / closing rod B2500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing rod B2500 from changing its state toward the closed state due to an impact that may occur when a ball collides with the opening / closing rod B2500.

The displacement of the opening / closing rod B2500 from the closed state to the open state is a downward displacement, and a displacement regulating protrusion B2514 (see FIG. 149) projecting from the left arm portion B2510 in parallel with the axial direction is attached to the base member B2100. An open state is formed at the abutting position. Therefore, it is unlikely that the opening / closing rod B2500 will be switched to the closed state due to an increase in the load due to the weight of the ball riding on the rolling surface B2531 of the opening / closing rod B2500, but rather it is likely to be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, once the opening / closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the second solenoid B2610 for maintaining the opening / closing rod B2500 in the open state from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing rod B2500. (In the first place, the opening / closing rod B2500 is not maintained in the open state by the driving force). Therefore, it is not necessary to keep applying the voltage applied to the second solenoid B2610 at the maximum value.

In this way, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing rod B2500, the opening / closing rod B2500 can be maintained in the open state without being affected by the load. As the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing rod B2500, a load given by the weight of the sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, since the opening / closing rod B2500 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface B2531, the number of the spheres is not constant and may change when the sphere is loaded by the weight of the sphere when the sphere lands. It can be said that the load applied to the opening / closing rod B2500 can fluctuate.

When the second solenoid B2610 is in a non-excited state, the plate portion B2644 of the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced downward, and a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the acting portion B2512 of the opening / closing rod B2500. The B2520 and the connecting portion B2530 are rotationally displaced in a manner of upward displacement. Due to this rotational displacement, the opening / closing portion B2513 projects so as to close the second specific winning opening B1002 (see FIG. 153 (b)).

That is, the opening / closing portion B2513 closes the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 in a manner of narrowing the opening from the back side edge. In the present embodiment, since the inner surface on the back side of the second specific winning opening B1002 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the foundation member B2100, the second specific winning opening B1002 is formed at the same time as the displacement of the opening / closing portion B2513 is started. You can start narrowing the opening of. As a result, the second specific winning opening B1002 can be quickly closed.

Next, the action of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 on the flowing sphere will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

FIG. 154 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 on the CLIVA-CLIVa line of FIG. 151 (a), and FIG. 154 (b) is a variable winning device B2000 on the CLIVb-CLIVb line of FIG. 151 (a). 154 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 in the CLIVc-CLIVc line of FIG. 151 (a).

Further, FIG. 155 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 in the CLVa-CLVa line of FIG. 152 (a), and FIG. 155 (b) is a variable winning device in the CLVb-CLVb line of FIG. 152 (a). FIG. 155 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the device B2000, which is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 152 (a).

In FIGS. 154 and 155, the outer diameter of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding. Further, in FIGS. 154 and 155, the description of the first drive device B2400 and the second drive device B2600 is omitted.

In the special gaming state, the state shown in FIG. 154 and the state shown in FIG. 155 are alternately switched. At that time, after switching the open side of the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 to the closed state, the closed side is opened after an interval between rounds in which the time length is predetermined. Although switching is performed, the occurrence of a spilling ball can be prevented by making the switching interval shorter than the ball falling (for example, 0.04 seconds).

Here, in the case where the ball on the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 on the side switched from the open state to the closed state is arranged above the side switched from the closed state to the open state. Is easy to prevent the generation of spilling spheres, as described in each of the above embodiments. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, another effective configuration for preventing the generation of spilling spheres is adopted. This will be described in order.

First, since the displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 from the open state to the closed state is the rotational displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 that descends forward with the rear end as the axis, the ball on the opening / closing plate B2300 flows down while being pulled toward the front side. As a result, the displacement direction of the connecting portion B2530 when the opening / closing rod B2500 moves from the closed state to the open state is along the arc direction centered on the rear end portion in a mode in which the displacement direction is recessed downward on the back surface side. That is, the displacement direction of the connecting portion B2530 faces the flow direction of the sphere in the front-rear direction.

Similarly, since the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 from the open state to the closed state is along the arc direction centered on the rear end portion in the manner of rising upward on the front side, the connecting portion B2530 is on the connecting portion B2530. When the sphere flows down while being moved toward the rear side, the displacement direction when the opening / closing plate B2300 moves from the closed state to the open state is a forward upward rotational displacement with the rear end as an axis. That is, the displacement direction of the opening / closing plate B2300 faces the flow direction of the sphere in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the ball flows vertically downward, the displacement amount of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the connecting portion B2530 until the ball is switched to the open / closed state and starts receiving the ball can be reduced, so that the spilling ball can be avoided. It can be made easier.

Secondly, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, at least a part of the displacement locus BE11 of the plate portion B2310 of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the displacement locus BE12 of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 is a mating member (opening / closing). It is located below the center of the ball on the plate B2300 or the opening / closing bar B2500). Therefore, even if the mating member is switched to the closed state and the ball starts to fall, the occurrence of the spilling ball can be prevented by forming the open state while the ball is in the displacement loci BE11 and BE12. ..

In particular, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the ball on the lower part of the pre-entry range of the ball rolling on the opening / closing plate B2300 protrudes below the displacement locus BE12, and a spilling ball is likely to occur. In the form, the spill prevention portion B2524 extending from the vicinity of the right arm portion B2520 of the connecting portion B2530 is configured to facilitate the rescue of the ball.

The spill prevention portion B2524 extends from the rotating tip portion of the right arm portion B2520 in a thin plate shape that curves downward in the closed posture of the opening / closing rod B2500. The cross-sectional shape of this thin plate is constant in the axial cross section, and the radius of curvature of the curved shape is configured to be larger than the radius of the sphere in the axial view. As a result, the contact between the spill prevention portion B2524 and the sphere can be made a contact at one point.

The extended tip of the spill prevention portion B2524 is formed so as to taper in the axial cross-sectional shape. As a result, the contact area with the sphere when the spill prevention portion B2524 is displaced close to the sphere can be suppressed, so that the spill prevention portion B2524 can be easily slipped into the lower hemisphere portion of the sphere.

Here, if an attempt is made to rescue the ball by attaching a portion that hangs forward to the tip of a member that is displaced in the front-rear direction, such as the guide plates B1300 and B1500, the area of the portion to be rescued increases in the front view. Since the direction of the load is orthogonal to the front side surface, there is easily no escape place for the load via the sphere, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are likely to stop.

On the other hand, since the displacement of the spill prevention portion B2524 includes the displacement in the vertical direction, it is possible to increase the number of surfaces in contact with the sphere even if the tip is thinned. In addition, since the direction of the load is inclined with respect to the front and rear side surfaces, the load can be suitably released. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the opening / closing rod B2500 is stopped.

In the present embodiment, since the spill prevention portion B2524 is formed from the downstream end portion with a width of half the axial length of the connecting portion B2530, the opening / closing plate B2300 is formed in the lower part of the pre-entry range of the rolling ball. Even if the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state when the opening / closing plate B2300 is placed, the opening / closing rod B2500 is subsequently opened to the open state, so that the ball can be easily rescued by the spill prevention unit B2524. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a spill ball to be generated.

On the other hand, focusing on the sphere that rolls the opening / closing rod B2500, the sphere is arranged above the lower edge of the displacement locus BE11 in the entire flow path of the sphere that flows down on the opening / closing rod B2500. Therefore, even if the portion corresponding to the spill prevention portion B2524 is not formed on the opening / closing plate B2300, it is possible to easily rescue the ball by utilizing the width in the lateral direction of the plate portion B2310. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a spill ball to be generated.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, when the opening / closing plate B2300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the opening / closing plate B2300 is displaced upward. do. Therefore, without countermeasures, the ball may be fixed between the opening / closing plate B2300 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211, and the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300 may be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protrusions B1140 and B2211 are arranged so as to be displaced to the left and right, and the length of each protrusion is shorter than the radius of the sphere (2.7 mm in the present embodiment). When the sphere comes into contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 during the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300, the sphere can be displaced in the left-right direction by utilizing the curvature of the sphere. Further, since the lower end portions of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 are arranged above the center position of the sphere that rolls the opening / closing plate B2300, the sphere can be displaced in the front-rear direction by utilizing the curvature of the sphere. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being fixed, so that the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300 can be kept good.

When the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced upward, so that the opening / closing rod B2500 faces the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 in the vertical direction with the ball in between. Therefore, without countermeasures, the ball may be fixed between the opening / closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211, and the operation of the opening / closing rod B2500 may be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the radius of the displacement locus of the connecting portion B2530 is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere, the connecting portion B2530 can be configured to move so as to wrap around the outside of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is fixed between the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211.

Further, when the opening / closing rod B2500 is displaced toward the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is displaced toward the lining member B2200 side (front side), while the ball on the connecting portion B2530 is displaced due to the displacement of the opening / closing rod B2500. The rolling surface B2531 is displaced toward the base member B2100 side (rear side) by inclining in the backward downward direction.

That is, the ball riding on the connecting portion B2530 is configured so that the upper side of the connecting portion B2530 is closer to the side that does not interfere with the displacement of the connecting portion B2530. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 from being hindered by the sphere, so that the sphere is fixed between the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence.

A mode of entering the ball into the variable winning device B2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. 156 (a) and 156 (b) are front views of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device B2000.

In FIG. 156 (a), the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state and the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the closed state. In FIG. 156 (b), the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the closed state and the opening / closing rod B2500 is opened. Be in a state.

In the present embodiment, as described above in FIG. 144, the variable winning device B2000 is arranged at the lower left and right center of the game area (below the first winning opening 64), so that both the left-handed game and the right-handed game can be played. The ball can reach the variable winning device B2000. In addition, since the game area is configured to have a substantially symmetrical shape, there is no big difference in the time it takes for the launched ball to reach the variable winning device B2000 depending on whether it is a left-handed game or a right-handed game.

In such a gaming machine, for example, the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device is configured to be opened by tilting and displacementing toward the front side of the player with the lower side as an axis, and detection sensors are left and right behind the opening / closing plate. When arranged symmetrically, it is considered that there is no big difference in the time until the ball passes through the detection sensor after reaching the variable winning device in both the left-handed game and the right-handed game.

On the other hand, in the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment, there is a large difference between the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the time until the ball passes through the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 after reaching the pre-ball entry range. Occurs.

First, it will be explained that there is a difference in the time from arrival to entry. For example, when playing a game with a left-handed hit, many balls are before the entry of the variable winning device B2000 along the left-handed flow path BL21, except for a ball that has a strong firing intensity and deviates to the right above the first winning opening 64. Head to the range.

In this case, when the opening / closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156 (a)), the ball rides on the left side (upstream side) of the opening / closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. do. Therefore, it takes more time than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left-right length of the opening / closing plate B2300 from the time when the ball gets on the opening / closing plate B2300 to the time when the ball passes through the first specific winning opening B1001.

On the other hand, when the opening / closing bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156 (b)), the ball rides on the left side (downstream side) of the opening / closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning opening B1002. do. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the second specific winning opening B1002 after riding on the opening / closing bar B2500 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half the left-right length of the opening / closing bar B2500.

Further, for example, when playing a game with a right-handed hit, many balls go to the pre-entry range of the variable winning device B2000 along the right-handed flow path BL22, except for the balls that deviate to the left above the first winning opening 64. Head.

In this case, when the opening / closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156 (a)), the ball rides on the right side (downstream side) of the opening / closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. do. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening B1001 after riding on the opening / closing plate B2300 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half the left-right length of the opening / closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, when the opening / closing bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156 (b)), the ball rides on the right side (upstream side) of the opening / closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning opening B1002. do. Therefore, it takes more time than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left-right length of the opening / closing bar B2500 from the time when the ball gets on the opening / closing bar B2500 to the time when the ball passes through the second specific winning opening B1002.

As described above, in the variable winning device B2000, the distance from the left-handed flow path BL21 (or right-handed flow path BL22) to the first detection sensor B1230 and the second from the left-handed flow path BL21 (or right-handed flow path BL22). Since the distances to the detection sensor B1250 are arranged so as to be different, the period until the ball that has reached the pre-entry range passes through the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 can be left-handed or right-handed. It can be changed by hitting a game.

Therefore, since the selection of the ball launch mode (selection of left-handed game or right-handed game) can be associated with the digestion speed of the jackpot game, the player is required to switch the ball launch mode in the jackpot game. be able to. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

Notifications suggesting a launch mode in which the digestion speed of the jackpot game is advantageous (for example, rapid) to the player may be executed by a display device or voice output. For example, "right-handed" is displayed or audio is output according to the execution of the round game in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state, while "" is displayed in accordance with the execution of the round game in which the opening / closing bar B2500 is in the open state. You may display "left-handed" or output audio. In this case, the player can speed up the progress of the jackpot game by switching the firing mode of the ball according to the notification.

Secondly, it will be described that there is a difference in the likelihood of spilling spheres. For example, in a round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is in an open state (see FIG. 156 (a)), when a left-handed game is performed, a ball that rolls on the rolling surface B2311 by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. Of these, the number of balls arranged on the downstream side (on the right side in FIG. 156 (a), the lower part of the pre-entry range) from the protruding portion B2211 in the center of the left and right can be limited to one.

Therefore, even if the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entry range enters the first specific winning opening B1001 and the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2311 are left and right. Since it is arranged only on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 156 (a), upper part of the range before entering the ball) from the central projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening / closing rod B2500 that can be switched to the open state immediately afterwards. As a result, the number of spilling spheres generated can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state (see FIG. 156 (a)), when the right-handed game is performed, the ball that has reached the rolling surface B2311 due to the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 Although the player is promptly guided to the first specific winning opening B1001, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-entry range is not limited to one.

Therefore, when the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entry range enters the first specific winning opening B1001 and the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the balls are released from the opening / closing plate B2300 at the lower part of the pre-entry range. Can slide down. Since the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 that is switched to the open state immediately afterwards is not configured to be arranged under the sphere, a spilling sphere may occur. Therefore, in the round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state, it is easier to reduce the number of spilled balls generated by performing the left-handed game as compared with the case of performing the right-handed game.

Further, for example, in a round in which the opening / closing rod B2500 is in an open state (see FIG. 156 (b)), when a right-handed game is performed, the rolling surface B2531 is rolled by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. It is possible to limit the number of balls to be arranged on the downstream side (left side in FIG. 156 (b), lower part of the range before entering the ball) from the protruding portion B2211 in the center of the left and right.

Therefore, even if the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entry range enters the second specific winning opening B1002 and the opening / closing bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2531 are left and right. Since it is arranged only on the upstream side (right side in FIG. 156 (b), the upper part of the range before entering the ball) from the central projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening / closing plate B2300 that can be switched to the open state immediately afterwards. As a result, the number of spilling spheres generated can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the round in which the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the open state (see FIG. 156 (b)), when the left-handed game is performed, the ball that has reached the rolling surface B2531 due to the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 Although the player is promptly guided to the second specific winning opening B1002, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-entry range is not limited to one.

Therefore, when the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entry range enters the second specific winning opening B1002 and the opening / closing bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the balls are released from the opening / closing bar B2500 at the lower part of the pre-entry range. Can slide down. Immediately after, the displacement locus BE11 of the opening / closing plate B2300 (see FIG. 155 (a)), which is switched to the open state, extends to the lower side of the ball on the opening / closing rod B2500 in the lower part of the range before entering the ball, but the opening / closing plate B2300 and the ball. Since and are arranged at overlapping positions in the front and back, a spilling sphere can occur. Therefore, in the round in which the opening / closing bar B2500 is in the open state, it is easier to reduce the number of spilled balls generated by performing the right-handed game as compared with the case of performing the left-handed game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, depending on whether the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the open state, an advantageous firing method for the purpose of reducing the number of spilled spheres is right-handed. It depends on whether it is left-handed or left-handed. Therefore, it may be controlled so as to notify an advantageous launch direction depending on whether the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the open state.

For example, in the third symbol display device 81, the launching direction advantageous to the player may be notified by displaying "aim at the right" or "aim at the left". In this case, for example, "Aim at the left" may be displayed during the round when the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state, and "Aim at the right" may be displayed during the round when the opening / closing bar B2500 is in the open state. By launching the ball according to the notification, the player can launch the ball in the launch direction in which the number of spilled balls is reduced.

It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by voice output or light emission to the game area. For example, in the case of light emission, the player can be notified of the launching direction of the ball by illuminating the traveling path of the launched ball in a streak pattern by a light emitting means such as an LED that illuminates the game area.

In the above description, the variable winning device B2000 has been described assuming that the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 are alternately opened and closed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the opening / closing plate B2300 may be opened / closed, only the opening / closing rod B2500 may be opened / closed, or the same member of the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 may be repeatedly opened / closed and opened / closed. A round section in which the plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 alternately open and close may be mixed.

The effect of suppressing the spilling ball is weakened by providing a round section in which the same member of the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing bar B2500 repeatedly opens and closes, but the ball that has reached the pre-entry range, which is achieved by the configuration of the variable winning device B2000. Still has the effect of being able to achieve both the case of entering the first specific winning opening B1001 and the case of entering the second specific winning opening B1002.

FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance of the variable winning device B2000 in the first control example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are set so that the number of payout prize balls is different, and further, the specified number in the round game in the special gaming state is set to be different. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, since the flow path of the ball that rolls the opening / closing plate B2300 and the flow path of the ball that rolls the opening / closing rod B2500 are included in the range before entering the ball, the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening / closing rod. Regardless of whether the B2500 is in the open state, the jackpot game can be advanced by firing the ball in a common firing mode (for example, right-handed).

In other words, in the jackpot game, even when the opening / closing plate B2300 is opened and the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened, the opening / closing bar B2500 is opened and the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened. Even if you do, you can play the game by firing the ball aiming at the common range (range before entering the ball), so you can prevent the player from feeling the difference in the jackpot type. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player who plays the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 157, the performance of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the performance of the second specific winning opening B1002 are set to be different. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the difference in the jackpot type.

For example, even if the jackpot has the same number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), in the jackpot of one jackpot type, only the opening / closing plate B2300 is set to repeatedly open and can enter the first specific winning opening B1001. (The number of payout prize balls is 2250 (= 15 × 10 × 15)), and in the other jackpot type jackpot, only the opening / closing bar B2500 is repeatedly opened and is set to be able to enter the second specific winning opening B1002. (The number of prize balls to be paid out is 375 (= 5 × 5 × 15)), and the difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out is about 1875. Furthermore, by setting a large number of jackpot types and setting jackpots with different numbers of rounds, it is possible to increase the types of payout prize balls.

As a result, the difference in the number of prize balls between the jackpot with the smallest number of prize balls and the jackpot with the largest number of prize balls can be increased. In addition, such improvement in ball ejection performance can be realized in a small space.

That is, even in the past, it has been possible to improve the ball ejection performance by arranging a plurality of variable winning devices in the game area and setting the number of prize balls and the specified number of them so as to be different. However, in this case, the range required for arranging the plurality of variable winning devices tends to be large.

In particular, when the game area is symmetrical as in the present embodiment, if a plurality of variable winning devices are arranged left and right, not only the arrangement range becomes large, but also the left side depends on the variable winning device to be opened. It is required to play in the appropriate one of the hitting game and the right-handing game, and the advantage of the symmetrical game area that the player can be freely hit to the left and right is hindered.

Further, when a plurality of variable winning devices are arranged vertically, the heights of the plurality of specific winning openings are stacked vertically, so that the vertical width of the variable winning devices becomes long and the arrangement range becomes large, and the arrangement range is increased accordingly. , The problem that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the third symbol display device 81, the first winning opening 64, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are arranged on the left and right, thereby suppressing the vertical dimension of the variable winning device B2000. By constructing a plurality of paths in which the vertical width is suppressed by partially overlapping in the range before entering the ball, it is possible to eliminate the need for left and right strikes.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that one of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is continuously open in the special gaming state, but as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 143 (a)). In addition, it may be controlled so as to form an open state alternately on the left and right.

In this case, the inter-round interval for transitioning from an odd-numbered round to an even-numbered round (hereinafter, also referred to as "inter-round interval A") and the inter-round interval for transitioning from an even-numbered round to an odd-numbered round (hereinafter, also referred to as "inter-round interval B"). It may be set so that the length of (referred to) is different.

For example, a case where the inter-round interval A is set short (for example, 0.04 seconds) and the inter-round interval B is set long (for example, 2 seconds) will be described. In this case, in the inter-round interval B, the ball that was in the range before entering the ball becomes a global spill ball, so the player can shoot the ball aiming at preventing the spill ball from occurring in the inter-round interval A. Can increase profits.

Immediately before the interval B between rounds, the first specific winning opening B1001 is open and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, the player shoots a large number of balls aiming at entering more than the specified number of balls. It tends to be easy. On the other hand, in the length setting of the inter-round interval B in the present embodiment, since all the balls fired a lot can become spilled balls, the profit that the player can obtain can be thinned out. That is, it is configured to increase the possibility that a ball fired a lot with the aim of over-winning becomes a spilling ball.

When transitioning from an odd round (a round in which the ball is guided toward the lower left in the pre-entry range) to an even round (a round in which the ball is guided toward the lower right in the pre-entry range) In order to reduce it, it is sufficient to shoot the ball toward the right side, which is the upstream side (upper part of the pre-entry range) in the odd round, so reduce the spilled ball by firing the ball toward the right side of the game area. Can be done.

Immediately before the interval A between rounds, it is possible to enter the second specific winning opening B1002, but since the number of winning balls is small in the first place, it is usual to shoot a large number of balls aiming at over winning. At that time, if all the large number of balls are spilled balls, the loss of the player is large, and there is a possibility that the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interval A between rounds is set short so that a ball that is launched in large numbers aiming at entering the second specific winning opening B1002 is not a spilled ball.

In this way, by setting the length of the interval between rounds to be different, for example, it is possible to obtain a variable winning device in which over-winning is likely to occur. That is, as described above, in the mechanism that sets the interval between rounds short and reduces the number of spilled balls, it is easy for a large number of balls to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 immediately after the interval between rounds. For example, when the specified number of specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is set to one, all the balls of the second and subsequent balls are over-winning (the number of balls exceeding the specified number of round games is the specified winning opening B1001, (Entering B1002). Therefore, depending on the setting of the specified number, it is possible to configure so that a large number of over prizes can be generated.

The length of the interval between rounds can be set arbitrarily. The length of the inter-round intervals A and B may be set in the reverse of the above, or the length may be set only for some inter-round intervals, and the other inter-round intervals have a constant length regardless of the difference between the inter-round intervals A and B. This may be the case, or all round-to-round intervals may be of different lengths.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by sliding the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the front-rear direction is described, but the variable winning device B3000 in the thirteenth embodiment is displaced. The members constituting the open state are composed of a plurality of members. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the variable winning device B3000 according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 158, in order to make the range before entering the ball visible, the illustration of the main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 is omitted, and the back side thereof is visible.

As shown in FIG. 158, the variable winning device B3000 includes an lining member B1200 in a state where the projecting portion B1211 and the extension support portion B1212 are omitted, and the foundation member B3100 is arranged on the back side of the lining member B1200. The first guide plate B3300, the second guide plate B3500, the first rotating member B3700 and the second rotating member B3700 which form the guide path of the sphere by being rotationally displaced so as to be close to the first guide plate B3300. A second rotating member B3900, which constitutes a guide path for the sphere by being rotationally displaced so as to be close to the guide plate B3500, is provided.

Like the foundation member B1100 (see FIG. 128), the foundation member B3100 includes a thin plate member B1100, a holding hole B1130, and a discharge port B1150, while the projecting portion B1140 and the guide port B1160 are omitted and newly added. A through-forming portion B3120 formed through the upstream member B3320 and the upstream member B3520 (in a slightly larger shape) at a substantially central portion of the thin plate member B1110, and rotating members B3700 and B3900 can be pivotally supported in a circle. A pair of left and right protruding shaft portions B3171 projecting in a columnar shape, and arcuate holes B3172 formed along an arc centered on the protruding shaft portion B3171 to guide the displacement of the protruding portions B3711 and B3911. To be equipped.

The penetration forming portion B3120 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and the vertical width of the central portion is formed slightly longer than the vertical width of the left and right end portions.

The first guide plate B3300 includes an upstream member B3320 which is inserted through the left half of the penetration forming portion B3120 and is formed so as to be slidable back and forth. The upstream member B3320 is formed in a plate shape that is inclined downward toward the left and right center side (right side) of the range before entering the ball, and has a rolling surface B3321 formed on the upper surface side so that a game ball can be placed and a lower right lower end. An extension receiving portion B3322 extending from the portion to the right and being able to come into contact with the first rotating member B3700 is provided.

The rolling surface B3321 is formed at an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed at an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139) described in the above embodiment. As a result, even in the present embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, the deceleration action can be generated by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321.

In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3320 is configured in a plate shape having a uniform thickness on the left and right sides, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower surface may be horizontal and may be formed in a wedge shape in which only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling surface B3321 can be maintained.

The first rotating member B3700 is rotationally displaced so as to fill the gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001 and the first guide plate B3300. The main body B3710 and its main body B3710, which are configured to be switchable between the open state where the ball can be guided to the specific winning opening B1001 and are rotatably and displaceably supported by the right protruding shaft B3171. It is provided with an extension plate portion B3720 extending along the radial direction of the above.

The main body portion B3710 includes a projecting portion B3711 projecting from a position on the left and right inside (left side) of the projecting shaft portion B3171 to the back surface side in parallel with the rotation axis. The projecting portion B3711 projects to the back surface side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arcuate hole B3172.

The extension plate portion B3720 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip side in the front view, and has a rolling surface B3721 on which a game ball can be placed and rolling at the extension tip. A curved portion B3722 formed by chamfering in a curved shape is provided on the opposite side of the moving surface B3721.

The rolling surface B3721 is set at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state for guiding the sphere. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3721 is formed larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321, and the sphere rolling on the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3721 is the rolling surface B3321 and B3721. It is configured so that the degree of deceleration weakens as the boundary position enters the first specific winning opening B1001 side.

The curved portion B3722 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper right surface of the extended receiving portion B3322 of the first guide plate B3300. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B3722 to match the shape of the upper right surface of the extended receiving portion B3322, the first rotating member B3700 is placed on the curved surface of the extended receiving portion B3322 in the open state of the first rotating member B3700. Since the surface can be supported by, the posture of the first rotating member B3700 can be stabilized.

The second guide plate B3500 includes an upstream member B3520 which is inserted through the right half of the penetration forming portion B3120 and is formed so as to be slidable back and forth. The upstream member B3520 is symmetrical with the upstream member B3320 and is formed in a plate shape that is inclined downward toward the left and right center side (left side) of the range before entering the ball, and is formed on the upper surface side so that a game ball can be placed. A rolling surface B3521 and an extended receiving portion B3522 extending from the lower left end portion to the left so as to be in contact with the second rotating member B3900 are provided.

The rolling surface B3521 is formed at an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed at an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137) described in the above embodiment. As a result, even in the present embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, the deceleration action can be generated by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521.

In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3520 is formed in a plate shape having a uniform thickness on the left and right sides, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower surface may be horizontal and may be formed in a wedge shape in which only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling surface B3521 can be maintained.

The second rotating member B3900 is rotationally displaced so as to fill the gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the second specific winning opening B1002 and the second guide plate B3500. The main body B3910 and its main body B3910, which are configured to be switchable between the open state where the ball can be guided to the specific winning opening B1002 and are rotatably and displaceably supported by the left protruding shaft B3171. It is provided with an extension plate portion B3920 extending along the radial direction of the above.

The main body portion B3910 includes a projecting portion B3911 projecting from a position on the left and right inside (right side) of the projecting shaft portion B3171 to the back surface side in parallel with the rotation axis. The projecting portion B3911 projects to the back surface side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arcuate hole B3172.

The extension plate portion B3920 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip side in the front view, and has a rolling surface B3921 on which a game ball can be placed and rolling at the extension tip. A curved portion B3922 formed by chamfering in a curved shape is provided on the opposite side of the moving surface B3921.

The rolling surface B3921 is set at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state for guiding the sphere. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3921 is formed to be larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521, and the spheres that roll on the rolling surfaces B3521 and B3921 are the rolling surfaces B3521 and B3921. It is configured so that the degree of deceleration weakens as the boundary position enters the second specific winning opening B1002 side.

The curved portion B3922 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper left surface of the extended receiving portion B3522 of the second guide plate B3500. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B3922 according to the shape of the upper left surface of the extended receiving portion B3522, the second rotating member B3900 is placed on the curved surface of the extended receiving portion B3522 in the open state of the second rotating member B3900. Since the surface can be supported by, the posture of the second rotating member B3900 can be stabilized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700, or the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotating member B3900 are in a closed state or an open state while interacting with each other. Constitute. In this case, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 are driven by the first driving device B1400, and the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotating member B3900 are driven by the second driving device B1600.

159 is a top view of the variable winning device B3000, FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the second rotating member B3900 and the transmission member B3640, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are FIGS. 158. It is a right side view of the 2nd rotating member B3900 and the transmission member B3640 in the direction view of the arrow CLXIa.

In addition, in FIG. 161 (a) and FIG. 161 (b), only the second rotating member B3900, the transmission member B3640, and the transmission extension portion B3550 are shown for easy understanding, and these members are held. Illustrations of other configurations are omitted. Further, FIG. 161 (a) shows a closed state of the second rotating member B3900 (a state in which the second solenoid B1610 is not excited), and FIG. 161 (b) shows an open state of the second rotating member B3900 (a state). The state in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited) is shown.

That is, when the second solenoid B1610 is in a non-excited state and the transmission extension portion B3550 is arranged on the back side, the second rotating member B3900 is in a raised posture (see FIG. 161 (a)). When the two solenoids B1610 are excited and the transmission extension portion B3550 is arranged on the front side, the second rotating member B3900 is in an inclined posture (see FIG. 161 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 159, in the present embodiment, the transmission members B3440 and B3640 capable of transmitting the driving force to the rotating members B3700 and B3900 while adopting the same driving devices B1400 and B1600 as the variable winning device B1000. By interposing between the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 can be displaced at one time.

That is, a pair of support claw portions B3111 projecting in a U shape toward the back surface side of the thin plate member B1110 are arranged on both the left and right sides, and the transmission members B3440 and B3640 are rotatably pivotally supported by the support claw portions B3111. NS.

The transmission members B3440 and B3640 are configured so that their rotational displacement can be changed to the displacements of the rotating members B3700 and B3900. The transmission extension portions B3350 and B3550, which are integrally formed with the guide plates B3300 and B3500, can be brought into contact with the transmission members B3440 and B3640, and the transmission members are caused by the displacement of the guide plates B3300 and B3500 in the front-rear direction. B3440 and B3640 are configured to be rotationally displaced.

More specifically, the first guide plate B3300 includes the above-mentioned upstream member B3320, a connecting fixing member B1330 for supporting the upstream member B3320, and a transmission hole B1340, and is right of the connecting fixing member B1330. A transmission extension portion B3350 is provided which extends from the lower portion to the front side to a position where it can come into contact with the transmission member B3440.

Further, the second guide plate B3500 includes the above-mentioned upstream member B3520, a connecting fixing member B1530 supporting the upstream member B3520, and a transmission hole B1540, and from the lower left of the connecting fixing member B1530. A transmission extension portion B3550 is provided so as to extend to the front side to a position where it can come into contact with the transmission member B3640.

In FIGS. 160 and 161 the mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the second rotating member B3900 is illustrated. Since the mechanism of driving force transmission to the left and right rotating members B3700 and B3900 is the same, the driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be described, and the driving force transmission to the first rotating member B3700 will be described. Omit.

The transmission member B3640 is a member that is rotatably supported on the back surface side of the thin plate member B1110 and engages with the transmission extension portion B3550. Are configured to engage. As a result, the state of the second rotating member B3900 (open state or closed state) changes with the change in the posture of the transmission member B3640.

The transmission member B3640 is formed of a flexible resin material, has a rotating arm portion B3641 formed of a plate-shaped portion intersecting (orthogonal) with the rotating shaft BJ1, and a C-shaped rotating tip of the rotating arm portion B3641. From the claw-shaped portion B3642 formed in a claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions B3643 projecting from the rotating arm portion B3641 in a columnar shape centered on the rotating shaft BJ1, and the rotating base end side of the rotating arm portion B3641. A base end side extension portion B3644 extending in the radial direction and a tip end side extension portion B3645 extending in a direction parallel to the base end side extension portion B3644 from the rotation tip side of the rotating arm portion B3641. Be prepared.

The transmission member B3640 is supported by the thin plate member B1110 by fitting the projecting shaft portion B3643 into the support claw portion B3111 from the tip side. At this time, the support claw of the transmission member B3640 is fitted by elastically deforming the support claw portion B3111 (the gap on the tip side of the support claw portion B3111 is smaller than the diameter of the protruding shaft portion B3643). It is intended to prevent the portion B3111 from falling off.

The driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be described. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the non-excited state of the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600, the lower end portion on the tip end side of the extension portion B3550 for transmission is the extension portion on the base end side of the transmission member B3640. It is in contact with B3644. The transmission extension portion B3550 is urged to the back side by the return spring of the second solenoid B1610, and the posture of the transmission member B3640 is maintained in a manner of being pushed toward the back side by this urging force. As a result, the closed state of the second rotating member B3900 is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (b), in the excited state of the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600, the tip end side lower end portion of the transmission extension portion B3550 comes into contact with the tip end side extension portion B3645 of the transmission member B3640. ing. The transmission extension portion B3550 is urged to the front side by the driving force of the second solenoid B1610, and the posture of the transmission member B3640 is maintained in a manner of being pushed toward the back side by this driving force. As a result, the open state of the second rotating member B3900 is maintained.

162 (a) to 162 (c) are front views of the pre-ball entry range in the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158. In FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (c), a state in which the state of the second specific winning opening B1002 is switched from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in the variable winning device B3000, after the front-rear distance between the front end of the upstream member B3520 and the covering member B1200 is less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 162 (b)), the second rotating member B3900 The transmission extension portion B3550, the transmission member B3640, and the second rotation member B3900 are designed so that the displacement occurs in the order of displacement to the end of rotation.

Further, when switching from the open state to the closed state, the gap between the transmission extension portion B3550 and the proximal end side extension portion B3644 is minimized so that the second rotating member B3900 starts to be displaced without delay. (See FIG. 161 (b)), the contact between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 can be released before the upstream member B3520 starts the slide displacement. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rubbing between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520.

In this way, when the state is switched to the open state, the second rotating member B3900 is displaced in a direction (non-parallel direction) intersecting the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the upstream member B3520 of the second guide plate B3500. Therefore, the gap between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 can be narrowed by displacement.

The switching from the open state to the closed state of the second specific winning opening B1002 occurs so as to follow FIG. 162 (a) to FIG. 162 (c) in reverse. In this case, the rolling surface B3921 is upwardly displaced so as to be close to the second specific winning opening B1002. Therefore, when a ball is on the rolling surface B3921, the ball is guided to the second specific winning opening B1002. The configuration is easy to displace. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily generate an over-winning (a number of balls exceeding the specified number of round games enters the second specific winning opening B1002).

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 171. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by the displacement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the front side has been described, but the variable winning device B4000 in the fourteenth embodiment moves to the front side. An open state is formed by a guide plate B4300 that is displaced and an opening / closing rod B2500 that is displaced toward the back side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 163, in the game area of the present embodiment, the first winning openings 64 and the second winning openings 64 and the second winning openings 64 and the second are arranged between the variable winning device B2000 and the third symbol display device 81 in the game area described above in FIG. 144. The winning opening 640 is omitted, and these functions are supplemented by a configuration arranged in the variable winning device B4000.

That is, in the present embodiment, among the configurations shown in FIG. 163, the function of the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 144) is transferred to the guide port B4160, and the function of the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 144) is the second. The function of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 144) has been transferred to the detection sensor B1250, and the function of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 144) has been transferred to the opening / closing rod B2500. The first detection sensor B1230 is used as the first specific winning opening B1001 as described above.

With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the area surrounded by the rails 61 and 62 (the area including the game area) can be improved. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be expanded by utilizing the range generated by omitting the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, or the first winning opening. Another distribution mechanism (for example, a mechanism that alternately distributes the reached ball to the left and right, or a drive that is always driven by a constant operation to change the flow path of the ball) in the range generated by omitting 64 and the second winning opening 640. A mechanism or the like may be arranged to increase the variation of the flow mode of the sphere.

164, 165 and 166 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B4000. FIG. 164 shows the closed state of the guide plate B4300 and the opening / closing rod B2500, FIG. 165 shows the open state of the guide plate B4300 and the closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500, and FIG. 166 shows the closed state of the guide plate B4300 and the closed state. The open state of the opening / closing bar B2500 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, in the variable winning device B4000, the front-rear width of the drive device can be reduced as compared with the variable winning device B1000, the arrangement space can be suppressed, and the range before entering the ball is larger than that of the variable winning device B2000. Since the area below the guide path of the ball in the above can be vacated, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 can be arranged.

FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B4000, and FIG. 168 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B4000. As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, each configuration of the variable winning device B4000 is a combination of the configurations of the variable winning devices B1000 and B2000 described above, which are partially diverted. This will be described below.

The variable winning device B4000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and is fastened and fixed to the base member B4100 fixed to the base plate 60 and the base member B4100 from the front side to set the flow path configuration range (pre-ball entry range) to the front side. The covering member B4200 covering from the above, the guide plate B4300 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the foundation member B4100, the first drive device B1400 described above for driving the guide plate B4300, and the opening / closing rod B2500 described above. The above-mentioned second drive device B2600 and a rear cover member B4700 which is assembled to the base member B4100 from the back side and is configured to cover the guide plate B4300 and the first drive device B1400 from the back side are mainly provided. ..

Like the above-mentioned foundation member B1100, the foundation member B4100 includes a thin plate member B1110, a holding hole B1130, a projecting portion B1140, and a discharge port B1150. And a guide support portion B2180 is provided.

Further, the foundation member B4100 is extended to the left and right outside from the penetration forming portion B4120 whose design is changed to a shape suitable for the guide plate B4300 through which the penetration forming portion B1120 is inserted and the upper end portion of the projecting portion B1140. Auxiliary protrusion B4141, a guide port B4160 that is bored below the penetration forming part B4120 so that the ball can be guided from the front side to the back side, a detour route B4170 that guides the ball that has passed through the guide port B4160, and a thin plate. The overhanging portion B4190 is formed so as to extend from the right side portion of the member B1110 to the front side so as to cover the right extending portion B1220 of the covering member B4200. The penetration forming portion B4120 is formed as a long rectangular opening inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front.

The auxiliary protrusion B4141 has the same cross-sectional shape as the protrusion B1140 and extends in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the left and right outside. With this configuration, the auxiliary protrusion B4141 has a function as a portion for assisting the ball flow, which will be described in detail later.

The overhanging portion B4190 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the left in the front view at the same angle as the inclined surface B1223 of the right extending portion B1220, and the lower side surface is inclined to the right extending portion B1220 in the assembled state (see FIG. 164). It is configured to abut on surface B1223 on a surface. The rolling surface B4191 constituting the upper side surface is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side.

The rolling surface B4191 is formed in a plane on which the sphere can roll. The ball rolling on the rolling surface B4191 flows into the pre-entry range in a state of being brought toward the front side along the inclination of the ball. As a result, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 and flows into the range before entering the ball can easily flow down while avoiding the projecting portion B1140, so that the deceleration action given to the ball can be weakened.

The lining member B4200 includes a main body member B2210, a right extension portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extension portion B1240, a second detection sensor B1250, and a lid plate portion B2270, similarly to the above-mentioned lining member B2200. In addition, a ball guide receiving portion B4260, which is arranged on the main body member B2210 and guides the ball to the guide port B4160, is provided.

The projecting portion B2211 arranged on the main body member B2210 is omitted in the lining member B4200. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball flowing down toward the ball guide receiving portion B4260, which will be described later, collides with the projecting portion B2211 and deviates from the ball guide receiving portion B4260. In addition, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is decelerated by the left and right projecting portions B2211.

The right extending portion B1220 is formed with a ridge support portion B1225 similar to the above-mentioned variable winning device B1000, and guides the displacement of the guide member B1310 of the guide plate B4300 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left extension portion B1240, the formation of the ridge support portion B1245 is omitted as in the variable winning device B2000 described above.

The guide plate B4300 has the same configuration as the first guide plate B1300 described above, is formed so as to eliminate a gap between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320, and connects the rolling surface B1311 and the rolling surface B1321 flush with each other. A gap closing portion B4350 is provided, and a front projecting portion B4360 projecting upward from the front end portion at a position between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320.

The front side projecting portion B4360 is formed in a triangular shape in which the front side surface B4361 has an upper apex vertically above the center position of the guide port B4160 and is inclined symmetrically, and the upper side surface B4362 faces the front side. It is formed as an ascending inclined surface.

With this configuration, in the front projecting portion B4360, a ball that rolls on the rolling surface B1321 flows down toward the main body member B2210 side (front side) of the covering member B4200 in the open state of the guide plate B4300. In this case, by contacting the sphere, the flow path of the sphere can be made closer to the back side. That is, the front projecting portion B4360 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a ball that approaches the main body member B2210 side and flows down the range before entering the ball in the open state of the guide plate B4300, and the ball hits the thin plate member B1110 by the contact. By making the relationship flush with the inner surface of the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, that is, the side in contact with the ball can be guided to the side with less resistance to entering the ball (see FIG. 126).

Further, in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front projecting portion B4360 enters the penetration forming portion B4120 and is configured so as not to project from the front side surface of the thin plate member B1110. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the front projecting portion B4360 comes into contact with the ball in the closed state of the guide plate B4300.

When the guide plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the front projecting portion B4360 may come into contact with the ball. This contact is intended to prevent the ball from entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260, but the details will be described later.

The aspect of the front projecting portion B4360 is not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment. For example, the guide plate B4300 may be configured to project from the front side surface to the front side of the thin plate member B1110 in the closed state. In this case, since the front projecting portion B4360 can come into contact with the ball in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the flow mode of the ball can be changed.

In the rear cover member B4700, the formation of the third support plate B1750 and the fourth support plate B1760, which became unnecessary due to the omission of the second drive device B1600, was omitted from the above-mentioned rear cover member B1700, and the main body portion B1710 It is formed so as to reduce the vertical dimension and the front-rear dimension.

That is, since the rear cover member B4700 is formed smaller than the rear cover member B1700 described above, the variable winning device B4000 includes a guide plate B4300 that slides back and forth and displaces like the variable winning device B1000 described above. However, the space required on the back side of the game area for arranging the drive devices B1400 and B2600 can be reduced (particularly in the front-rear direction).

Switching the state of the variable winning device B4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171. 169, 170 and 171 are front views of the variable winning device B4000. In addition, in FIG. 169, the guide plate B4300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 are in the closed state, in FIG. 170, the guide plate B4300 is in the open state and the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, and in FIG. 171 the guide plate B4300 is in the closed state. The opening / closing rod B2500 is opened.

Further, in FIGS. 169 to 171 the main body member B2210 of the lining member B4200 is transparently illustrated, and the shape on the back surface side thereof can be visually recognized. Further, in the range before entering the ball, a polka dot pattern (dot) is additionally attached to at least a part of the range where the ball cannot pass. Further, in the description of FIGS. 169 to 171, FIG. 163 will be referred to as appropriate.

First, an outline of the game progress of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. The progress of the game is based on the contents described in the eleventh embodiment. That is, during normal times, the ball is thrown into the guide port B4160 by left-handed, aiming for a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 1.

As an added value after the jackpot ends, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the state where the special symbol 2 lottery is easily received is given. It will continue, and after the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times, it will be set to the normal state.

Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the ball is fired with the aim of entering the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. In the special gaming state, the prize ball is paid out by entering the ball into the opening of the first detection sensor B1230.

Next, each part of the game progress will be described in detail. The game area in the present embodiment is basically a symmetrical configuration, and is configured so that the variable winning device B4000 can be reached by a ball launched to either the left or right. On the other hand, due to the influence of the added configuration, it is recommended to play left-handed in the normal state aiming to acquire the jackpot of the special symbol 1.

As a portion that is not symmetrically configured on the game board 13, an overhanging wall B4010 that is fixed so as to project to the front side of the base plate 60 on the lower side of the center frame 86 and obstructs the passage of the ball, and Above the through gate 67 on the left side, a ball collecting wall B4020 fixed so as to project in an inverted C shape is added to the front side of the base plate 60.

The overhanging wall B4010 is a wall portion extending in the vertical direction at a position on the right side of the center of the center frame 86 on the left and right sides, and obstructs the passage of the ball to the left and right. As a result, the ball that can be guided to just below the left and right center of the center frame 86 by the road nail arranged directly under the center frame 86 can be limited to the left-handed ball.

That is, the ball hit to the left enters the guide port B4160 if it is guided to just below the center of the left and right of the center frame 86 by a road nail and then falls along the flow path BL41 extending in the vertical direction along the center of the left and right of the center frame 86. Since it is possible to play a ball, it is easy to win a lottery for special symbol 1.

Further, since the projecting portions B1140 are arranged on the left and right sides of the flow path BL41, even when the ball deviates from the flow path BL41 to the left and right, the projecting portion B1140 abuts on the ball to cause the ball to come into contact with the ball. It can be returned to the flow path BL41 side. As a result, the probability of entering the guide port B4160 can be improved.

On the other hand, since the right-handed ball is blocked from passing to the left and right by the overhanging wall B4010, it is not guided to just below the center of the left and right of the center frame 86 by the road nail, and reaches the variable winning device B4000. In this case as well, the vehicle will land on the rolling surface B4191 and will flow down along the rolling surface B4191 along the flow path BL42.

Since the rolling surface B4191 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 in the flow path BL42 passes through a path closer to the front. Therefore, the degree of deceleration due to contact with the projecting portion B1140 can be reduced.

The ball that has passed the left end of the rolling surface B4191 is configured to pass on the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B4141 and pass above the guide port B4160 from right to left. In particular, the right extending portion B1220 is provided with a lid plate portion B2270, and the rolling surface B4191 for guiding the ball projects toward the center side from the left side, so that the ball can be easily placed on the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B4141. Can be put on. As a result, the probability of entering the guide port B4160 can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the ball launched to the left or right can reach the variable winning device B4000, but the ball is launched left-handed as compared with the ball launched right-handed. The ball is configured to have a higher probability of entering the guide port B4160. Therefore, it is recommended to play left-handed in the normal state aiming to win the jackpot of the special symbol 1.

In the probabilistic state, the player is configured to select whether to play left-handed or right-handed according to the player's preference. At this time, the player considers the advantages and disadvantages that can be obtained, and selects whether to play left-handed or right-handed. This will be described below.

In the probabilistic state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the opening / closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state according to the result of the lottery, and the ball can enter the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Since the through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right, a ball launched to either the left or right can pass through the through gate 67, but the probability of entering the left and right through gates 67 is different depending on the ball collecting wall B4020. ..

That is, in the through gate 67 on the right side, the path is changed by the collision with the nail arranged on the upstream side thereof, and only the ball reaching the through gate 67 passes through the through gate 67, while the through gate 67 on the left side passes through the through gate 67. Then, in addition to the sphere whose path has been changed by the collision with the nail, the sphere that has rolled on the upper surface of the sphere assembly wall B4020 can pass through the through gate 67.

The sphere collecting wall B4020 is composed of a pair of plate-shaped wall portions arranged above the through gate 67 with a gap of about the diameter of the sphere. The gap between the left plate-shaped wall portion and the inner rail 61 is less than the radius of the sphere, and the gap between the right plate-shaped wall portion and the center frame 86 is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere.

The lower ends of the pair of plate-shaped wall portions are arranged with a gap slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the central position of the gap is located vertically above the center of the through gate 67. Therefore, the ball that has flowed through the gap of the ball collecting wall B4020 has a higher probability of passing through the through gate 67 (than the probability that the right-handed ball will pass through the through gate 67 on the right side). Therefore, paying attention to passing the ball through the through gate 67, it is advantageous for the player to shoot the ball by hitting the left side.

On the other hand, as described above, the left-handed ball has a higher probability of entering the guide port B4160 where the special symbol 1 lottery is performed than the right-handed ball. When the lottery of the special symbol 1 is set so that the profit obtained by the player when the lottery result is a big hit is lower than that of the lottery of the special symbol 2 (for example, FIG. 142 (for example, FIG. 142). b)), in a situation where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is likely to be performed, it may be more profitable for the player to proceed with the game so that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not performed.

Therefore, focusing on advancing the game so that the ball does not enter the guide port B4160 (so that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not performed), it is advantageous for the player to shoot the ball by hitting right. ..

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game in the probabilistic state is advantageous in that the ball easily passes through the through gate 67, but is disadvantageous in that the ball easily enters the guide port B4160. It is disadvantageous in that the probability of passing the ball to the through gate 67 is inferior, but it is advantageous in that it is difficult for the ball to enter the guide port B4160, or it can be left to the player's choice. ..

In the special game state (big hit state), the guide plate B4300 is controlled to form an open state according to the progress of the round. In this case, a right-handed game is recommended for the purpose of reducing the probability of entering the guide port B4160.

That is, in the left-handed game, if the ball flows down in the flow path BL41 when the opening / closing plate B4300 is closed, the ball enters the guide port B4160. Therefore, in the left-handed game, the right-handed game is recommended to avoid this. .. The ball hit to the right flows into the pre-entry range along the flow path BL42 even when the opening / closing plate B4300 is closed, so that the ball passes above the guide port B4160 from right to left, and thus goes to the guide port B4160. It is difficult for the ball to enter.

On the other hand, since the ball hit to the right flows into the pre-entry range along the flow path BL42, it passes directly above the guide port B4160 before heading to the first detection port B1230. Therefore, without countermeasures, a ball that has slipped down from the opening / closing plate B4300 can enter the guide port B4160. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the guide port B4160 by the action of the front projecting portion B4360.

That is, the sliding of the ball from the opening / closing plate B4300 occurs when the opening / closing plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state. Pass the lower part to the back side. Therefore, when a ball is arranged behind the front projecting portion B4360, the ball is pushed by the upper side surface B4362 of the front projecting portion B4360 and is moved to the left and right outside by the action of the shape of the front side surface B4361. Sliding down. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball enters the guide port B4160.

Here, it is possible to control the flow path of the sphere after the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state by providing the opening / closing plate B2300 with a portion having the same shape. , Since the falling direction of the sphere is both downward, the displacement that leaves the sphere behind is likely to occur. Therefore, the degree of pushing the ball tends to be weak. Further, if the ball remains overhanging in the pre-entry range even in the closed state, there is a risk of adversely affecting the ball flowing down the pre-entry range.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the falling direction of the sphere and the moving direction of the front projecting portion B4360 intersecting (orthogonally), the guide plate B4300 to the extent that the front projecting portion B4360 comes into contact with the sphere. Since the ball slides down from the guide plate B4300 only after the ball is displaced rearward, the degree to which the front projecting portion B4360 pushes the ball can be easily increased. Therefore, as compared with the case where the opening / closing plate B2300 is used, the ball can be moved to the left and right outside significantly, so that it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball enters the guide port B4160.

From such a configuration, the guide port B4160 can be arranged at a position close to the guide port B4160 directly under the guide plate B4300 while maintaining the above-mentioned playability. In this case, the guide port B4160 may be arranged above the present embodiment. For example, the vertical position of the upper edge of the guide port B4160 may be higher than the vertical position of the lower end of the guide plate B4300 (and the vertical position of the lower end of the opening / closing bar B2500). .. In this case, the vertical width for arranging the openings of the guide port B4160 and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 as the ball entry port can be narrowed.

In order to make such a configuration, the guide plate B4300 is more advantageous than the opening / closing plate B2300. That is, in the opening / closing plate B2300, the guide port B4160 cannot be arranged in the range in which the plate portion B2310 (see FIG. 150 (a)) is arranged so as to hang downward in the closed state. Since the guide plate B4300 is not configured to hang downward in the closed state, the guide port B4160 can be arranged at a higher position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the winning opening corresponding to the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) can be collectively arranged in the variable winning opening B4000. .. On top of that, left-handed is recommended in the normal state, right-handed is recommended in the special game state (big hit state), and in the probabilistic state, left-handed game or right-handed game is selected according to the player's preference. Can be configured.

Further, while the guide port B4160 corresponding to the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the rolling path in the range before entering the ball, the probability of entering the guide port B4160 is determined by the left-handed game or the right-handed game. By differentiating, the game can be advanced so that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not performed.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate B2300 is arranged on the back side of the range before entering the ball has been described, but the variable winning device B5000 in the fifteenth embodiment includes the opening / closing plate B2300 that is displaced to the front side and the opening / closing plate thereof. The open state is configured by the second opening / closing plate B5500 which is displaced to the back side with the same displacement as B2300. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 172 is a front view of the variable winning device B5000 according to the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 173 is a rear view of the variable winning device B5000. In FIG. 172, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the second opening / closing plate B5500 are in a closed state, and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B5200 is transparently shown so that the shape of the back surface side thereof can be visually recognized. .. Further, in the range before entering the ball, a polka dot pattern (dot) is additionally attached to at least a part of the range where the ball cannot pass.

Further, in FIG. 173, while the first driving device B2400 is shown, the second driving device B5600 that generates a driving force for opening and closing the second opening / closing plate B5500 is shown by an imaginary line.

The variable winning device B5000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and is fastened and fixed to the base member B5100 fixed to the base plate 60 and the base member B5100 from the front side to set the flow path configuration range (pre-ball entry range) to the front side. Drives the covering member B5200, the above-mentioned opening / closing plate B2300, the above-mentioned first driving device B2400, the second opening / closing plate B5500 rotatably supported by the covering member B5200, and the second opening / closing plate B5500. A rear cover member (not shown) that is assembled to the base member B5100 from the back side and is configured to cover the first drive device B2400 and the second drive device B5600 from the back side. ) And mainly. The rear cover member includes a discharge portion that is a through hole through which a ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

Similar to the above-mentioned foundation member B2100, the foundation member B5100 includes a thin plate member B2110, a holding hole B1130, a projecting portion B1140, a discharge port B1150, and a rotation support portion B2170, and is bored in the thin plate member B2110. It is provided with a slide guide hole B5180 formed so that the slide rod B5610 of the drive device B5600 can be inserted.

The slide guide hole B5180 is bored in the gap between the through hole B2114 and the power transmission member B2430 (operation locus BE1). In the present embodiment, the extension portion B2435 is formed slightly shorter than the power transmission member B2430 described in the twelfth embodiment, and a gap forming the slide guide hole B5180 is formed.

Like the above-mentioned lining member B1200, the lining member B5200 includes a main body member B1210, a right extension portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extension portion B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250, while extending support. The portion B1212, the ridge support portion B1225, B1245, and the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are omitted.

Further, the lining member B5200 includes a housing portion B5270 which is recessed in the main body member B1210 from the back surface to the front side and accommodates the shaft portion B 5520 of the second opening / closing plate B 5500 and is partially formed through.

The accommodating portion B5270 is a rectangular recess B5272 that is recessed (penetrated) in a rectangular shape below a pair of left and right support recesses in which the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 is accommodated and a straight line connecting the support recesses. With respect to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses in order to move the small load-bearing portion B5530 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 that operates along the right end of the rectangular recess B5272 so as to enter the inside of the front-rear width of the main body member B1210. Mainly includes a through hole B5273 which is formed through a rectangular shape along a vertical direction.

The support recess is formed to be recessed from the front side to the back side with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500, and the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 is accommodated in the assembled state. By fixing the rectangular lid plate B5273 (see FIG. 174) from the front side so as to close the support recess, the shaft portion B5520 is prevented from falling off from the support recess.

The rectangular recess B5273 has a larger surface area than the plate portion B5510 of the second opening / closing plate B5500, and the recess length thereof is slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate portion B5510. As a result, the plate portion B5510 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess B5272 in the tilted posture (closed state) of the second opening / closing plate B5500, and the opening / closing plate B5500 can be prevented from protruding to the back side of the main body member B1210.

The second opening / closing plate B5500 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the second detection sensor B1250 and a case where the ball is dropped downward without contacting the ball, depending on the difference in posture. A horizontally long rectangular plate portion B5510 formed to have the same size as the plate B2300 and a pair of shaft portions B5520 projecting from the lateral end portion of the plate portion B5510 along the longitudinal direction are newly described. The small load-bearing portion B5530 extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B5520 at the root of the shaft portion B5520 on the right side of the front view and the shaft portion 5520 at the root of the shaft portion B5520 on the left side of the front view are perpendicular to the shaft portion 5520. A ball entry prevention unit B5540 that (partially) closes the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 in a closed state is mainly provided.

The plate portion B5510 includes a rolling surface B5511 in which the ball rolls in the ascending posture (open state), and the base member is in the ascending posture (open state) in which the length in the lateral direction is along the front-rear direction in the lateral direction. The distance from the B5100 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the left end portion in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the second detection sensor B1250.

Further, the plate portion B5510 includes a chamfered portion B5512 chamfered in a cross-sectional arc shape at the upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion B5520 in the ascending posture (open state).

The plate portion B5510 is formed in a long flat plate shape in the left-right direction, and has a length capable of placing up to five balls side by side.

The small load-bearing portion B5530 is projected from the opposite side of the rolling surface B5511 with reference to the shaft portion B5520, and has a shape in which the axial cross section forms a part of a circular shape, from the second drive device B5600. This is the part that receives the driving force transmission.

The ball entry prevention portion B5540 is extended to the front side of the rolling surface B5511 with a parallelogram in the axial cross section, and is extended to a position where at least a part of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 is closed. It is a part configured to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning opening B1002.

174 (a) and 174 (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device B5000 on the CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa line of FIG. 173. FIG. 174 (a) shows a closed state of the second opening / closing plate B5500, and FIG. 174 (b) shows an open state of the second opening / closing plate B5500.

The second drive device B5600 includes a slide rod B5610 which is inserted through the slide guide hole B5180 and is configured to be displaced back and forth with the operation of a second solenoid (not shown). The slide rod B5610 is arranged so as to be pulled toward the back side of the thin plate member B2110 from the front side surface when the second solenoid is not excited (see FIG. 174 (a)), and when the second solenoid is excited. It is configured so as to project to the front side of the thin plate member B2110 and push the small load-bearing portion B5530 (see FIG. 174 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in the open state of the second opening / closing plate B5500, the slide rod B5610 is inserted between the upper edge of the through hole B5273 and the small load-bearing portion B5530. In this state, when a ball rides on the rolling surface B5511 of the second opening / closing plate B5500, the weight of the ball urges the second opening / closing plate B5500 to a closed state (tilted state). On the other hand, since the slide rod B5610 has entered the displacement locus of the small load-bearing portion B5530, the slide rod B5610 is pushed by the small load-bearing portion B5530 when the second opening / closing plate B5500 is displaced toward the closed state. However, the slide rod B5610 is restricted from being displaced upward on the upper side surface of the through hole B5273. As a result, the displacement of the small load-bearing portion B5530 can be regulated, so that the second opening / closing plate B5500 can be maintained in the open state.

In the present embodiment, the slide rod B5610 projects into the range before entering the ball in the open state of the second opening / closing plate B5500. Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the ball flowing down in the pre-entry range may be obstructed by the slide rod B5610. For example, if the slide rod B5610 is arranged so as to project from the vicinity of the shaft portion B5520 on the left side of the second opening / closing plate B5500 to the front side, the slide rod B5610 is arranged on the right side of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250, thereby obstructing the flow of the ball. there's a possibility that.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the slide rod B5610 is arranged near the shaft portion B5520 on the right side of the second opening / closing plate B5500, that is, on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 from being obstructed by the slide rod B5610.

FIG. 175 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 in the line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line of FIG. 172, and FIG. 175 (b) is a variable winning device in the line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line of FIG. FIG. 175 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the device B5000, which is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 in a line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXXVc line of FIG. 172. In addition, in FIGS. 175 (a) to 175 (c), the open state of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the closed state of the second opening / closing plate B5500 are shown.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 in the line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line of FIG. 172, and FIG. 176 (b) is a line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line of FIG. 172. 176 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 in FIG. 172, which is a line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line of FIG. 172. In addition, in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c), the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the open state of the second opening / closing plate B5500 are shown.

As shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c), the ball on the opening / closing plate B2300 when the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state regardless of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate B2300 in the left-right direction. The second opening / closing plate B5500 is configured to be displaced toward the open state so as to pass under the sliding start position of the above. This also applies to the displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 when the second opening / closing plate B5500 is switched to the closed state.

Thereby, in opening and closing the opening / closing plate B2300 and the second opening / closing plate B5500, the effect of reducing the number of spilled spheres can be produced regardless of the order of opening / closing and the arrangement of the spheres with respect to the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500.

It should be noted that this effect is particularly large when the ball arranged in the upper part of the pre-entry range slides down (see FIG. 176 (a)). That is, when the ball slides down from the opening / closing plate B2300, in addition to the vertical distance between the rolling surfaces B2311 and B5511 in the open state, from the lower side of the plate portion B5510 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 in the lateral direction. Since the rolling surface B5511 can be displaced upward (rotated upward), the ball can be easily rescued.

In the present embodiment, for example, in the special gaming state, after the round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 175) is completed and the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the second opening / closing plate B5500 is When switching from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 176), the ball that is about to slide down from the opening / closing plate B2300 can be easily rescued by the second opening / closing plate B5500.

Therefore, in the special gaming state, by controlling the opening / closing plate B2300 and the second opening / closing plate B5500 to be opened and closed alternately according to the progress of the round, as in the first operation pattern described above, the interval between all rounds is reached. It is possible to generate an action of suppressing the generation of spilling spheres.

In order to suppress the generation of spilling spheres, it is required to shorten the interval between rounds. In this embodiment, the displacement directions of the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 toward the closed state and the opening / closing plate B5500 toward the open state are required. , B2300 is opposed to the displacement direction in the vertical direction, and the displacement trajectories partially overlap. Therefore, if the displacement of the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 to the closed state is delayed, there is a risk of collision with the opening / closing plates B5500 and B2300 that are displaced toward the open state.

Here, for example, when the displacement direction to the closed state is the direction to rescue the spheres as in the above-mentioned first rotating member B3700, the displacement resistance differs depending on the number of spheres, so that the displacement to the closed state May be delayed.

On the other hand, since the displacement directions of the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 in the present embodiment in the closed state are the directions of tilting downward, the displacement resistance does not change depending on the number of spheres. Further, as the number of spheres increases, the degree to which the weight of the spheres urges the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 in the displacement direction increases, so that the speed of displacement to the closed state can be improved.

Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 from being delayed in displacement to the closed state, the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 that are displaced toward the closed state and the opening / closing plates B5500 that are displaced toward the open state, Collision with B2300 can be avoided.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are arranged at an interval of about 60 mm has been described, but the variable winning device B6000 in the sixteenth embodiment is the first. The interval between the 1 specific winning opening B1001 and the 2nd specific winning opening B1002 is lengthened. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board 13 and the variable winning device B6000 according to the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 177, the arrangement of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is shifted to the left and right outside, and the interval is long.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening B1001 is arranged at a position where the left-right distance from the electric accessory 640a is 65 mm, and the second specific winning opening B1002 has a left-right distance from the electric accessory 640a of 65 mm. It is placed in position. Since the outer width of the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is about 30 mm, the distance between the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is about 160 mm. In this case, the left-right length at which the ball can flow into the range before entering the ball is set to about 130 mm by subtracting the length of the outer width of the electric accessory 640a.

The electric accessory 640a constitutes an open state by tilting in a direction away from each other with respect to a rotation shaft arranged at the lower end portion, and constitutes a closed state by rising in a direction approaching each other.

As for the configuration of the member that opens and closes and displaces in the range before entering the ball, the above-mentioned one can be redesigned and diverted. For example, the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are extended in the elongated direction to extend the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in accordance with the distance between the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002. By configuring the variable winning device B6000, the variable winning device B6000 can be configured so that the ball that has reached the pre-entry range is entered into the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

As described above, the inclination angles of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. In this case, the vertical length of the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below them is about 19.6 mm (= 160 × tan (7 degrees)). Become. Therefore, even if the interval between rounds is set longer than that described above, the generation of spilling spheres can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the case where the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 have an inclination angle of 7 degrees has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilt angle may be set at 45 degrees. In this case, the vertical lengths of the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below the upper ends can be further lengthened, so that the interval between rounds can be further lengthened. Even if it is set, the generation of spilling spheres can be suppressed.

Further, a space is formed between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below the upper ends so that the sphere can enter from the side. Therefore, the spheres that are not guided by the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and flow down to the left and right outside of the spheres collide with other members (nails and resin members) on the downstream side, and then pass through the above-mentioned space to guide the members. It is possible to cause a situation in which B1510 and B1310 are reached.

This is a judgment material when the player selects whether to hit right or left aiming at the lower part of the pre-entry range or left or right aiming at the upper part of the pre-entry range. In the situation where the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening B1001, the upper part of the pre-entry range can be aimed by the left-handed hit, and the lower part of the pre-entry range can be aimed by the right-handed hit. On the other hand, in a situation where the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening B1002, it is possible to aim at the upper part of the pre-entry range by hitting right, and it is possible to aim at the lower part of the pre-entry range by hitting left. Since the relationship between the mode and the aim is reversed when the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 that can guide the ball change, the player can concentrate on the game.

When launching a ball aiming at the upper part of the pre-entry range, it is possible to avoid arranging a plurality of balls in the lower part of the pre-entry range due to the deceleration action by the projecting portion B1140 or the like described in each of the above embodiments. , It is advantageous in that the number of spilling spheres can be reduced. On the other hand, even if the ball enters the pre-entry range from the space between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below the upper ends, the ball is out. It is disadvantageous in that it easily flows down toward the mouth 71.

On the other hand, when launching a ball aiming at the lower part of the pre-entry range, a deceleration effect cannot be expected, so a plurality of balls are arranged in the lower part of the pre-entry range, and the number of spilled balls increases. It is disadvantageous in that it is easy. On the other hand, the ball that has entered the pre-entry range from the space between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below the upper end is located in the lower part of the pre-entry range. It is advantageous in that it can reach and be guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

Simply put, when launching a ball aiming at the upper part of the pre-entry range, it is unlikely that the ball after falling from above the variable winning device B6000 will become a spilling ball, but it entered the pre-entry range from the side. There is a high possibility that the sphere will become a spilling sphere. On the other hand, when launching a ball aiming at the lower part of the pre-entry range, it is fully conceivable that even a ball after falling from above the variable winning device B6000 will become a spilling ball, but before entering the ball from the side. Even a ball that has entered the range may be guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 without becoming a spilling ball.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the profit obtained by the player when the flow path of the ball to the variable winning device B6000 is different is set, so that the player selects the desired profit balance. , The firing mode of the ball can be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the same driving mode as the variable winning device B6000, the state is switched between a state in which the ball is guided downward to the right, a state in which the ball is guided downward to the left, and a state in which the ball is not guided. Variable devices B6001 and B6002, which are configured to be possible, are arranged in the game area. The timing of state switching is not limited at all, but in the present embodiment, the state is switched in a fixed pattern from the power-on (a fixed state switching pattern is repeatedly executed, or at regular intervals. The state can be switched).

The first variable device B6001 is arranged directly below the through gate 67 on the left side. In the state of guiding the ball downward to the left, the distance between the lower end of the plate for guiding the ball and the inner rail 61 is smaller than the diameter of the ball, so that the ball is temporarily retained. Thereby, it is possible to control so that the arrangement intervals of the balls fired at equal intervals are intentionally different.

Further, in the state of guiding the sphere downward to the right, the guided sphere is guided to the internal flow path 86a of the center frame 86. The ball that has entered the internal flow path 86a passes through the inside of the center frame 86 and is guided from the vicinity of the position directly above the first winning opening 64 to the base plate 60 side (front side), and the base plate 60 and the glass unit 16 ( It will fall between (see Fig. 1). Therefore, it is possible to easily enter the first winning opening 64.

The first variable device B6001 is not arranged on the right side of the game area. Therefore, the ease of entering the internal flow path 86a can be changed between the case of hitting the ball aiming at the left side of the center frame 86 and the case of hitting the ball aiming at the right side of the center frame 86, and the first winning opening The ease of entering the ball 64 can be changed.

The second variable device B6002 is arranged directly above the center frame 86, and is arranged so that the crossing position of the guide path coincides with the left and right center positions of the center frame 86, and a ball is provided between the second variable device B6002 and the outer rail 62. They are arranged with sufficient space to pass through.

The second variable device B6002 can switch between a state in which the ball launched with a strength sufficient to land on the upper end portion of the center frame 86 is flown to the left side of the game area and a state in which the ball is flown to the right side of the game area. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the balls flow down evenly to the left and right, and to allow a large number of balls to flow down to the left or right side.

As a result, by grasping the state of the second variable device B6002 and firing the ball, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the target range of the game area, so that the player pays attention to the second variable device B6002. Power can be improved.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven by separate drive devices B1400 and B1600 has been described, but the variable winning device B7000 in the seventeenth embodiment is the first guide plate. A dual-purpose drive device B7700 that is also used for displacement of the B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 is a top view of the variable winning device B7000 according to the 17th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, in the variable winning device B7000, in addition to the configuration of the variable winning device B1000 described above, the linear moving member B1420 is directed toward the combined drive device B7700 arranged on the back side and the combined drive device B7700. Transmission rod B7422 extending from the back side to the back side and bending at the extending tip and extending upward, and transmission rod B7622 extending from the linear motion member B1620 to the back side and bending at the extending tip and extending downward. And.

The driving force generated by the combined drive device B7700 is transmitted to the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 through the transmission rods B7422 and B7622, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are configured to be displaceable.

The dual-purpose drive device B7700 is rotated and displaced around a fixed axis so as to face in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) by the rotational force of the drive motor B7710 that is rotationally driven and the drive motor B7710. A transmission rotating body B7720 configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the B7622 is provided.

The extension tips of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are extended along the vertical vertical direction of the axis of the transmission rotating body B7720. The extended tips of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are configured to engage with the transmission rotating body B7720 at the vertical position (position 180 degrees away from the axis center, see FIG. 179 (a)) of the transmission rotating body B7720. There is. Hereinafter, the configuration of the transmission rotating body B7720 will be described in detail, and the mode of transmitting the driving force to the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 will be described.

179 (a) is a front view of the transmission rotating body B7720, and FIG. 179 (b) is a side view of the transmission rotating body B7720 in the direction of the arrow CLXXIXb of FIG. 179 (a). Is a developed view of the circumferential surface of the transmission rotating body B7720.

As shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (c), the transmission rotating body B7720 is a member formed in a circular plate shape, and has a central hole B7721 to which the shaft portion of the drive motor B7710 is fixed and an outer circumference. A groove portion B7730 to be entered, which is recessed inward in the radial direction from the surface and is continuously formed along the circumferential direction, is provided.

As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged so as to enter the approached groove portion B7730. Since the minimum groove width Wmin of the approached groove portion B7730 is configured to be slightly longer than the tip thickness of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are transmitted in the approached groove portion B7730. It is possible to rotate the rotating body B7720 by 360 degrees or more.

The approached groove portion B7730 is formed with a groove width Wmin in most of the angle ranges, and the groove width is expanded to the maximum groove width Wmax in a specific angle range. The groove width Wmax is set as a sufficiently long width that does not limit the displacement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 allowed by the solenoids B1410 and B1610.

The approached groove portion B7730 has a section in which the range formed by the groove width Wmin extends along one of the two planes BS71 and BS72 perpendicular to the rotation axis, and the two planes BS71 and BS72 with respect to the rotation axis. It consists of a section connecting along a sloping line.

The two planes BS71 and BS72 correspond to the left and right positions of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622. In the present embodiment, the distance between the two planes BS71 and BS72 is set so as to correspond to the displacement width of the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 of the solenoids B1410 and B1610.

That is, when the transmission rod B7422 is arranged on the first flat surface BS71, the linear motion member B1420 is arranged at the position in the non-excited state of the first solenoid B1410, so that the first guide plate B1300 is closed. It is considered to be in a state. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7422 is arranged on the second flat surface BS72, the linear motion member B1420 is arranged at the position in the excited state of the first solenoid B1410, so that the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state. Will be done.

Further, when the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the first flat surface BS71, the linear motion member B1620 is arranged at the position in the non-excited state of the second solenoid B1610, so that the second guide plate B1500 is closed. It is considered to be in a state. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the second flat surface BS72, the linear motion member B1620 is arranged at the position in the excited state of the second solenoid B1610, so that the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state. Will be done.

Therefore, by appropriately designing the approach groove portion B7730, the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched in synchronization with the rotation of the transmission rotating body B7720. Hereinafter, the details of the shape of the groove portion B7730 to be entered will be described.

The approached groove portion B7730 is configured such that the transmission rod B7622 is guided to the upper groove portion and the transmission rod B7422 is guided to the lower groove portion with reference to the boundary position BCL71. The non-driving section B7731, the driving section B7740, B7750, and the effect section B7760 are configured in the same angle range and order.

In the non-driving section B7731, sections of about 30 degrees are arranged at two positions at intervals of 180 degrees, and the central portion in the angular direction has a groove width Wmax. In the state where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the portion of the groove width Wmax, the displacement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 is not limited to the approached groove portion B7730. Therefore, by driving and controlling the solenoids B1410 and B1610, the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state.

The driving sections B7740 and B7750 are continuously formed in a section of 105 degrees from the end of the non-driving section B7731, but the shapes are different with the boundary position BCL71 in between, so they will be described in order.

The first drive section B7740 arranged below the boundary position BCL71 in FIG. 179 (c) is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7422 and is formed with the first groove portion B7741 over about 15 degrees. A second groove portion B7742 formed continuously from the first groove portion B7741 over about 45 degrees, and a third groove portion B7743 formed continuously from the second groove portion B7742 over about 45 degrees.

The first groove portion B7741 and the second groove portion B7742 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the third groove portion B7743 is displaced from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

The second drive section B7750 arranged above the boundary position BCL71 in FIG. 179 (c) is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7622, and includes the first groove portion B7751 formed over about 15 degrees. It includes a second groove portion B7752 that is continuously formed from the first groove portion B7751 over about 45 degrees, and a third groove portion B7753 that is continuously formed from the second groove portion B7752 over about 45 degrees.

The first groove portion B7751 and the third groove portion B7753 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the second groove portion B7752 is relocated from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

Therefore, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the drive sections B7740 and B7750, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are displaced along the shape of the approached groove portion B7730. Therefore, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state by the rotation of the transmission rotating body B7720.

FIG. 179 (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the relationship between the rotation direction of the transmission rotating body B7720 and the states of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. In FIG. 179 (d), it is assumed that the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 have entered the drive sections B7740 and B7750.

According to FIG. 179 (d), the operation pattern for opening and closing only the first guide plate B1300 and the operation pattern for opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 by appropriately switching the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710 are the guide plates. An operation pattern that alternately opens and closes B1300 and B1500 is also feasible.

When the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in the first groove portions B7741 and B7751 in the standby state, the second guide plate B1500 is opened even when the operation pattern for opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 is started. Before configuring the state, it is necessary to go through the open state of the first guide plate B1300, but by increasing the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710, the first guide plate B1300 can be immediately switched to the closed state. , Practically less likely to be a problem.

When the second guide plate B1500 is opened in the final round, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 pass through the second groove portions B7742 and B7752 to return to the state of being arranged in the first groove portions B7741 and B7751 at the end of the round. It is necessary, and it seems that there is a problem that the first guide plate B1300 is opened.

On the other hand, in reality, as described above, the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710 may be increased, or the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 may be arranged at the boundary position between the second groove portions B7742 and B7752 and the third groove portions B7743 and B7753. Since it can be dealt with by closing both the guide plates B1300 and B1500, it is unlikely to cause a problem in practical use.

Even when the special gaming state is completed with both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 closed by arranging the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 at the boundary positions between the second groove portions B7742 and B7752 and the third groove portions B7743 and B7753. If the arrangement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 is stored until the start of the next special gaming state (that is, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are the boundary positions between the second groove portions B7742 and B7752 and the third groove portions B7743 and B7753). (Remembering that it starts from), it is possible to deal with both the case where the first guide plate B1300 is opened and the case where the second guide plate B1500 is opened in the first round.

As an advantage when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced by the rotation of the transmission rotating body B7720, the operation order of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be mechanically defined only by rotationally driving the transmission rotating body B7720. Be done.

Therefore, the complicated control program required when driving the guide plates B1300 and B1500 by separate drive devices is unnecessary, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are interlocked in an appropriate order regardless of the speed of the transmission rotating body B7720. Can be made to.

In this case, if the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710 is increased and the transmission rotating body B7720 is rotated at high speed, the interval between rounds can be shortened. Further, when the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven so as to switch between the closed state and the open state, it is not necessary to reverse the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710, so that the interval between rounds is shortened. It can be made easier.

In the production section B7760, sections of about 45 degrees are arranged at two locations at 180 degree intervals so as to connect the non-driving section B7731 and the driving sections B7740 and B7750, and the first plane BS71 to the second plane It is formed so that the arrangement shifts on the BS72. That is, in the state where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the effect section B7760, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state.

FIG. 180 is a front view of the variable winning device B7000. In FIG. 180, a state in which the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 have entered the effect section B7760 is shown. That is, the state in which both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 180, when both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are opened, entry into the first specific winning opening B1001 is hindered by the upstream member B1520, and entry into the second specific winning opening B1002. The sphere is obstructed by the upstream member B1320. In addition, the balls that have reached the pre-entry range are collected at the intersections of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the closed state and fall downward.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 180, while both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are in the open state, it is possible to prevent the balls from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Therefore, by opening and closing the guide plates B1300 and B1500, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 while attracting the attention of the player.

Although the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 have changed, the state shown in FIG. 180 is not strictly an open state because the balls are prevented from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Therefore, for example, the drive motor B7710 is configured to be rotationally driveable by the output from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is controlled so as to configure the state shown in FIG. 180 as the effect operation in the normal state. You may. Further, when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 form an open state (for example, a small hit) without the start of the big hit game, the mode shown in FIG. 180 may be used.

Further, as the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are closed, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are arranged on the back side and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are both arranged on the front side. It may be configurable. In the state where both are arranged on the front side, by displacing either one of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the back side, the ball can be inserted into either of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, and the open state is opened. It becomes configurable.

In the present embodiment, a discharge port B7160 capable of discharging the ball to the back side from the intersection position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is bored. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls from accumulating at the intersections of the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

A ball that has passed through the discharge port B7160 may be treated as an out ball, or the ball may be configured to return to the game area again via a detour flow path communicating from the discharge port B7160, and the return ball may be used as an entry port. It may be configured so that it can enter.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor B7710 is provided in addition to the solenoids B1410 and B1610, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the solenoids B1410 and B1610 may be omitted, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be driven only by the drive motor B7710.

Further, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the special gaming state are driven by the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 in the first state, and by the driving force of the drive motor B7710 in the second state different from the first state. You may try to do it.

Further, the special gaming state may be executed by the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, and the drive motor B7710 may be controlled by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, in the special gaming state, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 may enter the non-driving section B7731.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment corresponds to another control example of the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 both form the special winning openings B1001 and B1002 has been described, but the variable winning device B1000 in the eighteenth embodiment is the first guide. The plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are allowed to be displaced at the same time, the first detection sensor B1230 constitutes the first specific winning opening B1001, while the second detection sensor B1250 is configured to function as a specific region. NS. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181 (a) is a diagram showing the time timing change of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 181 (b) is the first guide in the fifth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the plate B1300 and the 2nd guide plate B1500. In the description of FIG. 181, reference is made to FIG. 130, FIG. 132, and FIG. 137.

In the present embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 and the second detection sensor B1250 function as a probability fluctuation determination unit. That is, the second detection sensor B1250 functions as a sensor that detects the passage of a sphere in a specific region.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the second detection sensor B1250 in the special game state, it is controlled to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game.

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main controller 110 determines the acquisition of the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the special round during the jackpot game (the first round in this embodiment). ) Only. The operation pattern of this special round will be described in detail below.

In the present embodiment, there are two types of jackpots of the special symbol, jackpot D and jackpot E. The operation patterns of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of payout prize balls accompanying the entry of balls and the transition to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to.

When the jackpot D is reached, the jackpot game of the first round is executed in the fourth operation pattern. In this case, the player can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but is configured so that the prize ball is hardly paid out.

When the jackpot E is reached, the jackpot game of the first round is executed in the fifth operation pattern. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 150 prize balls, and in most cases, cannot acquire the right to move the special symbol to the probabilistic state (high probability state).

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 4th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot D, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

The MPU 201 is a solenoid that holds the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first solenoid opens the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state. The B1410 is driven and controlled. The drive of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled so as to be switched at intervals of 3 seconds, and the first guide plate B1300 can be switched between an open state and a closed state at intervals of 3 seconds.

The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state by driving and controlling the second solenoid B1610 2 seconds after the initial drive timing of the first solenoid B1410. The second solenoid B1610 is kept driven for 28 seconds thereafter. Therefore, the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled so as to displace the first guide plate B1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the first round game R is completed. do.

According to the fourth operation pattern described above, it is possible to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening B1001 for 2 seconds after the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state, but after 2 seconds have passed. , The second guide plate B1500 is opened so that the ball can enter the specific area of the second detection sensor B1250, while the second guide plate B1500 closes the first specific winning opening B1001. It is not possible to realize the number of balls.

As a result, in the special game of the first round, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but controls so that it is necessary to wait for the lapse of the specified time. be able to.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fifth operation pattern.

The MPU 201 is a solenoid that holds the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first solenoid opens the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state. The B1410 is driven and controlled. The drive of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled so that the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state, and the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state until the end of the round.

The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state by driving and controlling the second solenoid B1610 2 seconds after the initial drive timing of the first solenoid B1410. Since the drive of the second solenoid B1610 is released after 0.5 seconds, the second guide plate B1500 returns to the closed state.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled so as to displace the first guide plate B1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the first round game R is completed. do.

According to the above-mentioned fifth operation pattern, it is possible to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening B1001 after the first guide plate B1300 is configured in the open state. The second guide plate B1500 is opened after 2 seconds, but it is immediately switched to the closed state, so that it does not hinder the entry of the ball into the first specific winning opening B1001. On the other hand, since the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state for the period in which the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the second detection sensor B1250 is blocked by the first guide plate B1300. Therefore, the sphere does not pass through the specific area.

As a result, in the special game of the first round, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first specific prize is won without waiting for the lapse of the specified time. The special game of the first round can be completed by inserting a specified number of balls into the mouth B1001.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the variable winning device B1000, by providing a different operation pattern as the control of the first round, the payout of the prize ball in the round game is hardly allowed, and the probability change state of the special symbol ( You can configure a round to get the right to move to a high probability state).

Here, unlike the prior art, in the fourth operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is closed while the second guide plate B1500 is closed before the operation in the first round game. Since it is not necessary to close the above, it is possible to easily prevent the ball that has reached the first guide plate B1300 from spilling. This will be described below.

In the prior art, if a predetermined number of balls win a prize in the first specific winning opening B1001 and the round game ends before the operation of the operating member that opens and closes the specific area starts, the operating member is in the open state. However, there is a risk that the ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening B1001 and the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, the opening / closing member that opens / closes the first specific winning opening B1001 is controlled to be maintained in the closed state for several seconds after the start of the round.

Therefore, the ball that flows down after the start of the round and reaches the opening / closing member at the timing when the ball can enter the first specific winning opening B1001 spills because the opening / closing member is maintained in the closed state, which makes the player feel sorry. There was a risk of an increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the second detection sensor B1250 is not arranged downstream of the first specific winning opening B1001, the first guide plate B1300 constitutes a closed state and the first specific winning opening B1001. Even if the ball cannot enter the ball, as long as the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the player can obtain the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem. can do.

Further, by setting the time until the start of driving to 2 seconds, the second guide plate B1500 is opened before the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls is entered into the first specific winning opening B1001. I try to switch.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state even while the second guide plate B1500 is closed before the operation in the first round game. While preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the movement of the B1300, there is a problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning mode. It can be prevented from occurring.

Further, in the fifth operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state and does not change to the closed state. Therefore, as compared with the case where the opening / closing member is maintained in the closed state for several seconds as described above in the prior art. Therefore, the number of spilled balls generated during the game of the first round can be reduced.

The mode of the special round is not limited to the above description. For example, it may be configured in the second round instead of the first round, it may be configured in the final round, and the number of rounds it is configured is arbitrary. In addition, a plurality of special rounds may be configured.

The operation patterns of the jackpot D and the jackpot E from the second round onward will not be described in particular, but may be configured in common. For example, the first opening / closing plate B1300 is maintained in the open state during the round, and the second opening / closing plate B1500 is maintained in the closed state at all times.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described. In the 14th embodiment, the case where the ball that has rolled the guide plate B4300 is configured to be difficult to enter the ball guide receiving portion B4260 has been described, but the variable winning device B9000 in the 19th embodiment has the ball guide. It is configured to facilitate entry into the receiving portion B4260. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, what kind of benefit the player receives when entering the ball guidance receiving unit B4260 can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be an advantageous one such as a lottery of a special symbol, a payout of a prize ball, a grant of a probabilistic state, or a disadvantageous one such as a fall lottery.

FIG. 182 is a front view of the variable winning device B9000 according to the 19th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 182, in the variable winning device B9000, the formation of the left extending portion B1240 is omitted, and the penetration forming portion B9120 bored in the foundation member B9100 is inclined from the left end portion of the above-mentioned penetration forming portion B4120. The shape is maintained and extended to the left, and similarly, the front-back direction is switched between an open state in which the ball can be guided to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 and a closed state in which the ball cannot be guided. The guide plate B9300, which is configured to be slidable and displaceable, has a shape that extends to the left while maintaining an inclination from the left end portion of the above-mentioned guide plate B4300.

That is, the variable winning device B9000 forms only a downward-sloping guide path for guiding the ball toward the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and unlike each of the above embodiments, the formation of the downward-sloping guide path is omitted. ing.

When the guide plate B9300 is in the open state, various modes are exemplified as the mode of reaching the guide plate B9300 by the ball. For example, the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) has a mode in which the ball falls from above the guide plate B9300 and an arrangement mode (inclination mode) in which the ball can be guided to the guide plate B9300 on the left side (upstream side) of the guide plate B9300. ), The mode in which the ball colliding with the nail BKG91 to be planted reaches the left side of the guide plate B9300 is exemplified.

The foundation member B9100 includes a plurality of projecting portions B9140 that act on a ball that rolls on the rolling surface 9311 of the guide plate B9300 in the open state. The plurality of projecting portions B9140 are formed in a long columnar shape in the vertical direction, and are formed in a projecting manner with a length that allows the guide plate B9300 to come into contact with a rolling sphere. different.

That is, the first projecting portion B9141 arranged at the left end is arranged at a distance of about the diameter of the sphere from the rolling surface B9311, and is arranged to the right of the first projecting portion B9141 with the diameter of the sphere. The second projecting portion B9142, which is arranged at a left-right interval of about twice the length, is arranged at an interval of about 5/6 of the diameter of the sphere from the rolling surface B9311.

The third projecting portion B9143, which is arranged to the right of the second projecting portion B9142 at a left-right interval of about the diameter of the sphere, is about 4/6 (= 2/3) of the rolling surface B9311 and the diameter of the sphere. The fourth projecting portion B9144, which is arranged at intervals and is arranged on the right side of the third projecting portion B9143 at a left-right interval of about the diameter of the sphere, is about the radius of the rolling surface B9311 and the sphere. They are arranged at intervals. The fourth projecting portion B9144 is formed at a position slightly shifted to the left from directly above the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

That is, as the protrusion B9140 moves from the first protrusion B9141 to the fourth protrusion B9144, the contact position of the rolling surface B9311 with the rolling sphere becomes closer to the center of the sphere. The action of decelerating the sphere gradually increases. Therefore, the protrusion B9140 can increase the degree of deceleration of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 toward the downstream.

As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the staying time of the rolling ball for each position of the rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the staying time of the ball in the vicinity of the fourth projecting portion B9141 can be relatively lengthened, the probability that the ball will flow down toward the ball guide receiving portion B4260 when the guide plate B9300 is switched to the closed state can be determined. Can be raised.

The fifth projecting portion B9145, which is arranged to the right of the fourth projecting portion B9144 at a left-right spacing of about 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, is 4/6 (= 2) of the rolling surface B9311 and the diameter of the sphere. The sixth projecting portion B9146, which is arranged at an interval of about / 3) and is arranged on the right side of the fifth projecting portion B9145 at a left-right interval of about the diameter of the sphere, is arranged with the rolling surface B9311. They are arranged at intervals of about 5/6 of the diameter of the sphere.

That is, as the protrusion B9140 moves from the fourth protrusion B9144 to the sixth protrusion B9146, the contact position of the rolling surface B9311 with the rolling sphere becomes farther from the center of the sphere. The action of decelerating the ball gradually decreases. Therefore, the protrusion B9140 can increase the degree of acceleration of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 toward the downstream.

As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the staying time of the rolling ball for each position of the rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the staying time of the ball at the position immediately before the first detection sensor B1230 can be relatively shortened, the ball is inserted into the first detection sensor B1230 before the guide plate B9300 is switched to the closed state. It can be made easier. As a result, the efficiency of entering the first detection sensor B1230 into the opening can be improved, and the number of spilled balls can be reduced.

Further, as in the present embodiment, by making the contact position with the sphere different in the vertical direction, a load in the vertical direction is likely to be applied to the sphere. Therefore, not only the case where the ball always comes into close contact with the rolling surface B9311 and rolls, but also the case where the ball flows down (ramps) while bouncing may occur. As a result, it is possible to give a variety of flow modes of the ball guided by the guide plate B9300, and the player who pays attention to the ball does not get bored.

The projecting portion B9140 has been described as having a long rod shape in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the long direction may be inclined with respect to the vertical direction. For example, the long direction may coincide with the direction of downward inclination toward the left side. In this case, the degree of deceleration of the sphere can be different depending on the speed of the sphere rolling on the rolling surface B9311. For example, when the ball rolls at high speed, it is easy to ride on the inclination of the projecting portion B9140 and the degree of deceleration becomes small, but when the rolling speed of the ball is slow, it does not cause riding and is sufficient. It can be configured so that it can be decelerated to. In this case, the degree of deceleration of the ball approaching the projecting portion B9140 can be different depending on the difference in the rolling speed of the ball.

In the section where the degree of deceleration gradually increases in the present embodiment (the section from the first projecting portion B9141 to the fourth projecting portion B9144), a section for gradually accelerating may be provided, or a section for gradually accelerating may be provided. A section for gradually decelerating may be provided in a section in which the degree of the above increases (a section from the fourth protruding portion B9144 to the sixth protruding portion B9146).

The configuration of this embodiment may be adopted for a device in which the guide paths described in each of the above embodiments intersect. Further, the projecting portion B9140 is not limited to the case where it is fixed to the foundation member B9100.

For example, through an opening integrally formed with the guide plate B9300 and formed in the foundation member B9100, the state is switched between a state in which the ball protrudes into the pre-entry range in conjunction with the guide plate B9300 and a state in which the ball is buried from the pre-entry range. It may be configured as possible. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball collides with the projecting portion B9140 in the closed state. In this case, all the projecting portions B9140 may be configured to be interlocked with the guide plate B9300, a part of the projecting portions B9140 may be interlocked with the guide plate B9300, and the other projecting portions B9140 are basic members. It may be fixed to B9100.

The ball guide receiving portion B4260 is not limited to being arranged below the lower end of the guide plate B9300. For example, the guide plate B9300 may be arranged close to the guide plate B9300 and may be arranged so as to enter above the lower end portion (the portion in contact with the ridge support portion B1225) of the guide plate B9300. In this case, by narrowing the vertical distance between the guide plate B9300 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a ball sliding down from the guide plate B9300 enters the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are configured to be in the open state by being rotationally displaced downward has been described, but the variable winning device B20000 in the twentieth embodiment is moved upward. It is configured to be in an open state by being rotationally displaced. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

183 (a) and 183 (b) are partial front views of the variable winning device B20000 in the 20th embodiment in the range corresponding to the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158, and FIG. 183 (c) is a partial front view of FIG. 183 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the variable winning device B20000 in the direction of the arrow CLXXXIIIc.

183 (a) and 183 (c) show the closed state of the variable winning device B20000, and FIG. 183 (b) shows the open state of the second rotating member B20900. As shown in FIG. 183, the variable winning device B20000 includes a first rotating member B20700 that constitutes a ball guide path by rotational displacement, and a second rotation member B20700 that constitutes a ball guide path by rotational displacement. It includes a moving member B20900.

The support members that support the rotating members B20700 and B20900 are bored along the above-mentioned protruding shaft portion B3171 and an arc centered on the protruding shaft portion B3171 to guide the displacement of the protruding portions B20711 and B2091. The arcuate hole B20172 is formed.

Since the first rotating member B20700 and the second rotating member B20900 are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape, the first rotating member B20700 will be described, and the description of the second rotating member B20900 will be omitted.

The first rotating member B20700 is in a closed state (see FIG. 183 (a)) for preventing the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001, and is rotationally displaced in the rising direction to the first specific winning opening B1001. The state can be switched between the open state (see FIG. 183 (b) for the second rotating member B20900) and the projecting shaft portion B3171 on the right side so as to be rotatable and displaceable. A main body portion B20710 and an extension plate portion B20720 extending along the radial direction of the main body portion B20710 are provided.

The main body portion B20710 includes a protrusion portion B20711 projecting from a position on the left and right inside (left side) of the protrusion shaft portion B3171 to the back surface side in parallel with the rotation axis. The projecting portion B20711 projects to the back side through the arcuate hole B20172.

Further, the main body portion B20710 includes a plate portion B20712 projecting along the radial direction. The plate portion B20712 projects toward the opening side of the first detection sensor B1230, and can prevent a ball from entering the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 in the closed state. On the other hand, in the open state (the tip is raised), the plate portion B20712 and the lower edge of the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 are gently connected to each other, and in the open state, the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 is reached. The ball can be put in.

The extension plate portion B20720 is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip side in front view, and is recessed along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis direction with a rolling surface B20721 on which a game ball can be placed. A recessed portion B20722 is provided.

The recessed portion B20722 is a recessed portion formed from the movement locus of the second rotating member B20900 to a position retracted from the movement locus of the second rotating member B20900 in the front view in order to avoid interference with the second rotating member B20900, and is a corresponding recessed portion. B20922 is also formed on the second rotating member B20900.

The recessed portion B20722 and the recessed portion B20922 are formed alternately in the axial direction. As a result, the formation area of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 is secured while avoiding the collision of the first rotating member B20700 and the second rotating member B20900.

The ball can come into contact with the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 regardless of the state of the rotating members B20700 and B20900. Therefore, for example, it is possible to cause a situation in which the rolling surface B20921 is opened immediately after being guided by the closed rolling surface B20721 and reaching the vicinity of the center position, and the ball is guided to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. .. That is, both rotating members B20700 and B20900 may function to bring the sphere closer to the opening of the same detection sensor (for example, the second detection sensor B1250).

In the closed state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 intersect, and the balls are accumulated as they are. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge port B20001 for discharging the ball reaching the intersection position of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 to the back surface side is formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls from accumulating at the intersections of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 in the closed state.

The profit given to the player by the ball entering the discharge port B2001 is not limited in any way. For example, the discharge port B2001 may be configured as an out port so as not to give any profit, the prize ball may be paid out by entering the discharge port B2001, or the discharge port B2001 may be used. The ball that has entered may be configured to return to the game area again, or in that case, the return position may be configured to be a position where it is easy to enter any winning opening.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is fixed has been described, but in the variable winning device B21000 in the 21st embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 184 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184, in the variable winning device B21000 of the present embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 formed so as to have a recess capable of receiving one ball vertically above the intersection position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Is arranged.

The ball guide receiving portion B21260 is capable of receiving one ball in a receiving posture in which the recess faces upward, and the received ball is held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260 as long as the receiving posture is maintained. When another ball reaches the ball guide receiving portion B21260 while the ball is received by the ball guide receiving portion B21260, the ball collides with the ball held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260 to guide the ball. It flows down the left and right outside of the receiving portion B21260.

The ball guide receiving portion B21260 can be switched to a discharge posture in which the concave portion faces diagonally downward to the right by rotating clockwise around the rotation shaft B21261, and is received by this discharge posture. It is configured so that the existing ball can be discharged downward. The ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to return to the receiving posture by being rotationally displaced counterclockwise from the discharging posture.

As a result, up to one ball flowing down in the left flow path BL1 can be held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260. Therefore, when the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is included in the pre-entry range, the pre-entry range The period until the reached ball enters the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be made different by the ball guide receiving unit B21260.

The timing at which the posture of the ball guide receiving portion B21260 changes is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed at regular intervals after the power is turned on, or the posture may be changed by the load of the collision of the ball to the discharge posture, and the posture may be returned to the receiving posture by an urging means such as a spring. However, the posture may be changed in conjunction with the solenoid that drives the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

When interlocking with the solenoid, the ball guide receiving unit B21260 is switched from the receiving posture to the discharging posture each time when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state, while the ball guide receiving unit is switched to the closed state. By returning the B21260 to the receiving posture, the ball that may pass through the pre-entry range in the closed state can be temporarily retained by the ball guide receiving portion B21260, so that the number of out-balls generated can be increased. It can be reduced.

Further, the displacement of the ball guide receiving portion B21260 has been described as a displacement in which the recess reciprocates on the right side of the rotation shaft B21261, but the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 may be displaced in the same direction by one or more rotations so as to return to the receiving posture after passing through the receiving posture and the discharging posture.

The 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 185. In the eleventh embodiment, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 have been described on the premise that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are individually displaced. It is configured considering that it can be displaced at the same time. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 185 (a) is a top view of the variable winning device B22000 according to the 22nd embodiment, and FIG. 185 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B22000 in the CLXXXVb-CLXXXVb line of FIG. 185 (a). FIG. 185 (c) is a partial side view of the variable winning device B22000 in the direction of the arrow CLXXXVc shown in FIG. 185 (b).

In this embodiment, a plurality of circuits for exciting the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are prepared. That is, a forward circuit for energizing and exciting the plunger in a direction opposite to the urging force of the return spring is prepared in each solenoid B1410 and B1610, and the plunger is provided in the direction along the urging force of the return spring. A reverse circuit for energizing and exciting so as to displace is prepared in each solenoid B1410 and B1610. Of course, it is possible to add such a circuit in other embodiments.

As shown in FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (c), in the second guide plate B22,500 of the variable winning device B22000, the connecting fixing member B22530 is connected to the connecting fixing portion B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 in the eleventh embodiment. , The connecting fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B22300 is formed in an L-shape in front view so as to remove the shape portion projected in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the connecting fixing member B22530 can be arranged at the same front-rear position as the connecting-fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B22300, so that the front-rear width required for arranging the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 Can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a plurality of movable members (guide plates B1300, B1500, etc.) are densely arranged as in each of the above embodiments, or when they are configured as in this embodiment, for example, the first solenoid B1410 is excited. When only the first guide plate B22300 is opened and closed, it is conceivable that the second guide plate B2500 may be interlocked by the action of the frictional force generated between the connecting fixing member B1330 and the connecting fixing member B22530.

It should be noted that the situation in which a frictional force is generated between the connection fixing member B1330 and the connection fixing member B22530 does not matter whether the design is intentional or not. For example, even if a gap is provided between the connecting / fixing member B1330 and the connecting / fixing member B22530 at the design stage so that frictional force is not generated, the arrangement of the connecting / fixing members B1330 and B22530 may shift due to aging, or a gap may occur. The gap between the connecting fixing member B1330 and the connecting fixing member B22530 is closed due to the accumulation of dust in the space or other liquids or fluids that have entered the gap and sticking to the connecting fixing members B1330 and B22530, resulting in friction. Force can be generated.

In this embodiment, it is designed to have a gap. By forming the rear cover member B23700 in a shape that covers the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B22530 that are a part of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 and are arranged close to each other from above, dust on the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B22530 is formed. Can be suppressed from reaching. Further, as will be described later, even before the transition to the big hit game, the small hits occur frequently, so that the dust arranged between the connecting fixing members B1330 and B22530 can be scattered. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of dust and prevent malfunctions caused by the accumulation of dust.

Further, for example, by closing the gap between the connecting / fixing member B1330 and the connecting / fixing member B22530 from the design stage, the effect that one connecting / fixing member B1330, B22530 guides the displacement of the other connecting / fixing member B22530, B1330 can be obtained. You may design as expected.

In this case, when one of the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 is driven, it is premised that a frictional force is applied to the other, so a load for preventing the displacement of the other (for example, solenoid B1410). , The urging force of the urging spring of B1610) may be generated.

Even in this case, the frictional force increases due to the ingress of dust, other liquids and fluids stick to each other, and the load for preventing displacement decreases due to aged deterioration. There is a possibility that the displacement of one of the guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 causes the displacement of the other.

Here, as in the first embodiment, the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced to the front side to form the corresponding specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 in an open state, but the first guide In a state where both the plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced forward, entry into both the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is prevented (see FIG. 180).

Therefore, when the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is energized and excited, the guide plates B22500 and B22300, which are different from the guide plates B22300 and B22500 that should be displaced by the excited solenoids B1410 and B1610, are the first. It is a problem if it is left in a state of being moved by the frictional force generated between the guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500.

That is, as a round game, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 is controlled so as to constitute a state in which the ball can enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. Despite this, the ball cannot be inserted into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, and the normal game cannot be continued.

In other words, as a round game, the launch ball is controlled so that it can easily enter either of the specific prize openings B1001 and B1002 and can be switched to a state where a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out. The display of the device 81 (see FIG. 124) is designed on the premise that a large number of prize balls can be expected, and the prize balls are paid out no matter how many balls are fired. It will be confusing to the player. In this case, the interest of the player may be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the first guide plate B22300 and the arrangement of the second guide plate B22500 can be detected, and the malfunction of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 can be grasped at an early stage. It is possible.

More specifically, the variable winning device B22000 is provided with the first detection sensor BSC221 and the second detection sensor BSC222, and the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are provided with detection grooves of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. Plate-shaped detected portions B22350 and B22550 that can be arranged in the above are formed, respectively. The formation positions of the detected portions B22350 and B22550 are not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are not arranged in the detection groove in the closed state, and the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in the open state. Is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove.

The detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are photocoupler type sensors that detect the positions of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. The photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and a gap into which a detection portion (detected unit B22350, B22550) can be inserted. It means a sensor provided with (slit, detection groove) and arranged in a substantially U shape.

That is, according to the above configuration, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 can determine the arrangement of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 from the outputs of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222, so that the arrangement is based on a malfunction. If so, countermeasures can be taken by various methods such as controlling to return to the normal arrangement. Hereinafter, some examples of countermeasures will be described with specific examples.

First, an example of the first countermeasure will be described. When the first solenoid B1410 is energized and excited to open the first guide plate B22300, if it operates normally, the detected portion B22350 is arranged on the first detection sensor BSC221 and the second detection is performed. The detected unit B22550 should not be arranged on the sensor BSC222.

Here, in the first countermeasure example, when it is detected that the detected unit B22550 is arranged in the second detection sensor BSC222, the guide plate B22300, in the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110, It is determined that the B2 2500 has a malfunction.

That is, even though the second solenoid B1610 is not excited, the load transmitted from the first guide plate B22300 to the second guide plate B22500 causes the second guide plate B2500 to be displaced forward and the linear motion member B1620. Is displaced to the left, and it is determined that a situation has occurred in which the plunger of the second solenoid B1610 is pushed to the left.

In this case, the control program of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 is passed through a drive circuit that excites the second solenoid B1610 so as to displace the linear motion member B1620 to the right side (opposite to the normal side). By configuring B1610 to be excited, the second guide plate B22,500 can be retracted to the rear side (controlled to be repaired). As a result, even if the guide plates B22300 and B22500 temporarily malfunction in a manner in which they are interlocked with each other, the interlocking can be eliminated, so that the game can be continued.

Next, an example of the second countermeasure will be described. When the first solenoid B1410 is energized and excited to open the first guide plate B22300, the detected portion B22350 is arranged on the first detection sensor BSC221 and the second detection sensor BSC222 is equipped with the detected unit B22350. If the detected unit B22550 is not arranged and then the energization of the first solenoid B1410 is released, the detected unit B22350 should not be arranged on the first detection sensor BSC221.

Here, in the second countermeasure example, when the detected unit B22350 is left arranged on the first detection sensor BSC221 even after the energization of the first solenoid B1410 is released, the MPU201 of the main control device 110 is used. In (see FIG. 4), it is determined that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are malfunctioning.

That is, even though the excitation of the first solenoid B1410 has been eliminated, the displacement resistance generated between the second guide plate B22500 and the first guide plate B22300 increases due to the above-exemplified circumstances, or an unexpected situation occurs. The linear motion member B1420 is maintained at the left position due to the displacement of the first guide plate B22300 being obstructed due to (for example, an illegal act of obstructing the displacement of the first guide plate B22300). It is determined that the first guide plate B22300 is maintained in the open position.

In this case, the control program of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 is passed through a drive circuit that excites the first solenoid B1410 so as to displace the linear motion member B1420 to the right side (opposite to the normal side). By configuring B1410 to be excited, the first guide plate B22300 can be retracted to the rear side. As a result, even if the guide plates B22300 and B22500 malfunction in a manner that causes a problem in retracting, the problem can be solved by using the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, so that the game can be continued. can do.

Next, a third example of countermeasures will be described. When the first solenoid B1410 and the second solenoid B1610 are maintained in a non-excited state, the detected portions B22350 and B22550 should not be arranged in any of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222.

Here, in the third countermeasure example, the detected portion B22350 is arranged on the first detection sensor BSC221 even though the first solenoid B1410 and the second solenoid B1610 are maintained in a non-excited state. When the detected unit B22550 is arranged on the second detection sensor BSC222, it is determined that the guide plate B22300 or B22500 is malfunctioning in the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110.

That is, a fine wire such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area through a gangway such as a foul ball passage connecting the game area and the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1), and the guide plate B22300 is passed through the piano wire. The guide plate B22300 or B22500 is illegally opened by a player who performs a fraudulent act of applying a load to a movable member such as B22500 from the outside of the game area to change the state of the movable member such as the guide plates B22300 and B22500. It is determined that the situation is occurring.

In this case, the control program of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 drives at least the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the side having the detected portions B22350 and B22550 that are not detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. By energizing the solenoids B1410 and B1610 on the side to be operated, configuring both guide plates B22300 and B22500 to be in the open state, and executing error notification, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are maintained closed (Fig.). (Refer to 180), an error can be notified.

In the present embodiment, in order to more reliably configure the specified winning openings B1001 and B1002 in the closed state, both the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are energized so that both the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in the open state. Will be done.

As a result, when a fraudulent act of illegally opening the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is performed, the error notification can be executed without causing the payout accompanying the winning.

That is, conventionally, for fraudulent acts of illegally opening the variable winning device B22000, for example, when the variable winning device B22000 is controlled in a closed state (for example, before the execution of a round game, during a normal game, etc.), a specific winning opening is used. When a ball entering B1001 and B1002 is detected, it may be controlled to notify an error.

However, in this case, there is a possibility that the prize ball will be paid out due to the entry of the ball, and it is considered that the fraudster may obtain a fraudulent profit (payout prize ball). For example, a cheating person can get a payout prize ball by putting a large number of balls into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 between the time when the error notification is made and the time when the error notification is dealt with. It is considered that there are cases, and it is a problem.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by opening both the guide plates B22300 and B22500 without waiting for the ball to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, the ball enters the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. (See FIG. 180), and error notification can be executed while maintaining that state, so that error notification can be executed without causing payouts associated with winning.

The method of countermeasures is not limited to the above-mentioned first countermeasure example to the third countermeasure example, and various aspects are exemplified.

In summary, when the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 whose output should be changed from the driving mode of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are set and a problem occurs in which the expected change does not occur or the unexpected change occurs. It is controlled to solve the problem or notify an error.

The detection sensors B1230 and B1250 and the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 may be used as a countermeasure against fraud (electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud) in which a prize ball is obtained by electromagnetic wave irradiation. This electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 erroneously detect that a ball has passed by emitting an electromagnetic wave toward the game board 13 using a dedicated device. When the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are prize ball sensors, an illegal profit may be generated by paying out the prize balls, and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are sensors in which a lottery (for example, a lottery of a special symbol) is executed by entering a ball. In this case, profits based on the fraudulent lottery can be generated, so early detection and prevention of electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud is desired.

Here, since the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are arranged close to each other so as to fit in the variable winning device B22000, if a false detection occurs in the first detection sensor B1230 when a strong electromagnetic wave is irradiated. At the same time, it is considered that erroneous detection also occurs in the second detection sensor B1250. On the other hand, due to the structure, it is prevented that the ball entering the first detection sensor B1230 and the ball entering the second detection sensor B1250 occur at the same time.

Therefore, when the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 detect the incoming ball at the same time, it is highly possible that the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud is performed, and the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud can be detected at an early stage by executing the error notification. can.

Further, since the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged close to each other so as to fit in the variable winning device B22000, if a false detection occurs in the first detection sensor BSC221 when a strong electromagnetic wave is irradiated, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged close to each other. At the same time, it is considered that erroneous detection also occurs in the second detection sensor BSC222.

Therefore, when the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 detect at the same time, it is highly possible that the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud has been performed, and by executing the error notification, the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud can be detected at an early stage.

If the detection of the detected unit B22350 by the first detection sensor BSC221 and the detection of the detected unit B22550 by the second detection sensor BSC222 can occur at the same time in normal control, the above-mentioned only in that case will be described above. It is preferable to control so that the error notification such as is not executed.

Here, various modes are exemplified as the mode of executing the error notification. For example, the game may be disabled at the same time as the error notification (for example, the operation of the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 4) is stopped), or the ball may be entered into a part of the winning openings at the same time as the error notification. (For example, both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are excited to close both specific winning openings B1001 and B1002), or the game itself is possible even during error notification. If the error notification continues even after a lapse of time, it may be controlled so that the game cannot be played, or if the error notification is executed in the special gaming state, until the special gaming state ends. It may be controlled so that the game can be continued and the game cannot be played when the special game state ends, or it may be controlled in other modes.

If the cause of the error notification is an urgent response, it is preferable to disable the game at the same time as the error notification. Various aspects are exemplified as those requiring urgent response, but it may occur when normal control is executed even when the load such as frictional force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is taken into consideration. Corresponds to the case where no situation is determined.

For example, when the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are in the non-excited state (here, except for the state in which the solenoids are not excited immediately after the excited state), it is determined that the detected portions B22350 and B22550 have entered the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. If this happens, it is suspected that the information boards B22300 and B22500 are fraudulently loaded from the outside, so urgent action is required.

For example, if it is not determined that the detected units B22350 and B22550 have entered the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 while the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are excited, it is suspected that the drive devices B1400 and B1600 or the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are out of order. , Urgent response is required.

In particular, when the drive devices B1400 and B1600 are out of order (for example, when the longitudinal protrusions B1433 and B1633 are broken and the driving force cannot be transmitted to the guide plates B22300 and B22500, or when the electric wires of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are broken. In the case of burning, etc.), the jackpot game cannot be executed. Therefore, even if the player wins the jackpot, the jackpot game cannot pay out sufficient prize balls to the player. Therefore, the dissatisfaction of the player increases, which is a problem. Therefore, it is preferable to stop the game at an early stage.

Various modes are exemplified as the error notification. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may display a warning message such as "an error has occurred", or the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like (see FIG. 1) may emit red light to warn the user. Alternatively, the warning voice may be output from the voice output device.

In addition, if there is a possibility of fraud or deterioration over time, auxiliary repair control is executed before error notification, and if this repair control returns to a normal state, error notification is performed. Is not executed, and the game can be continued. On the other hand, if the normal state is not returned even by the repair control, an error notification may be executed and the game may be disabled.

Various aspects are exemplified as the handling of the output signal detected as the premise of error notification. For example, the error notification may be executed when the difference from the output assumed as the normal detection pattern is determined.

Further, for example, one or a plurality of false detection patterns having different causes may be set in advance, and if they match any of the false detection patterns, the possible causes of the false detection pattern may be displayed at the same time in the error notification. .. In this case, since the time required for investigating the cause can be reduced, the time required for repairing the defective portion can be shortened.

Next, a third control example will be described using the configuration of the 22nd embodiment. In the third control example, the configuration of the 22nd embodiment will be used for convenience, but this control example can also be used in other embodiments. This also applies to other control examples.

First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a second hit random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is.

The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIGS. 187 (a) to 187 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

In this control example, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, the probability change state of the special symbol from the end of the special game state (big hit game) to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. (High probability state) is given, and it is configured to be set to the normal state after the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

In the first hit random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the first winning opening 64 is a big hit. In order to determine whether or not the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining and the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. This is a table in which the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the above is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 ( Judgment value) is set in the table. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "10 to 19", and if it is "10 to 19", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "1 to 9" or "20 to 319", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is the set table. In the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0 to 9", and if it is "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "10 to 39", and if it is "10 to 39", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined to be "40 to 319", it is determined to be out of order.

As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, at the time of lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64, the number of random numbers that becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is 320. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1, the probability of becoming a big hit of the first special symbol is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 10, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "10/320".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot of the second special symbol is 10, and the total number of random numbers is 320. Since the total number of random numbers is 10, the probability of becoming a big hit of the second special symbol is "10/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 30, the probability of being a small hit of the second special symbol is "30/320".

As in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is marked with "○". The symbol is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is released in 1 second × 2 times when the probability change is in progress, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the probability change is not in progress. Therefore, even if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (see FIG. 142 (c)) is hit when the probability change is not in progress, it is difficult to make the second winning opening 640 win the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game of trying to enter the second winning opening 640 even though the probability is not changing.

The change in the total number of small hit determination values described above is set based on the number of lottery required from the end of the big hit game to the acquisition of the next big hit. That is, the frequency of the small hit of the first special symbol is set to about 1/30, if the probability of becoming a big hit is "1/320", it is at least about 30 times before the next big hit. It is based on the perceived expectation that a lottery will be required. In addition, the frequency of the small hit of the second special symbol is set to about 1/10, if the probability of becoming a big hit is "10/320", it is at least about 10 times before the next big hit. It is based on the perceived expectation that a lottery will be required.

By setting in this way, in many cases, at least one small hit can be generated from the end of the previous big hit game to the start of the big hit game immediately after that. As a result, when a defect has occurred in the variable winning device B22000, the defect can be easily found before the start of the jackpot game. Therefore, a situation occurs in which the player's interest is significantly reduced, in which the defect of the variable winning device B22000 is discovered only after the game state shifts to the jackpot game and the period in which a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out is started. Can be easily avoided.

The frequency of small hits can be set arbitrarily. The lower the frequency, the lower the frequency of short opening of the variable winning device B22000 and the lower the risk of disturbing the player's concentration, but the effect of early detection of defects in the variable winning device B22000 is reduced. On the contrary, the higher the frequency, the higher the frequency of short opening of the variable winning device B22000, which increases the risk of disturbing the player's concentration, but it is possible to easily detect the defect of the variable winning device B22000 at an early stage. That is, the frequency of small hits can be arbitrarily set by selecting from these exemplified advantages and disadvantages.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIGS. 188 (a) to 188 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a type (see FIG. 188 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 188 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0 to 49", the small hit A is selected, and "50 to 99". In the case of, the small hit B is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is "0-9", the small hit A is selected and "10". In the case of "~ 99", the small hit B is selected.

In this control example, the operation of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 189). Although the details will be described later, the small hit A is set to operate with the aim of determining a defect based on the unintended interlocking of the guide plates B22300 and B22500, and the small hit B is the deterioration of the return springs of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. The operation is set with the aim of determining the defect based on.

It should be noted that, as the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the small hit B is made easier to be selected as compared with the small hit A for various reasons. The first reason is that the small hit B is easier to prevent the ball from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 than the small hit A, so the ball is executed to enter the second winning opening 640. Even in a situation where a ball that flows down without entering the second winning opening 640 in a right-handed game flows down through the variable winning device B22000, it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 at the time of executing a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls to be paid out. The details of the fact that the small hit B is easier to prevent the ball from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 than the small hit A will be described later.

Further, as the second reason, it is considered that the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640 often occurs a plurality of times in a row, so that when the stopped state continues for a long period of time and the gap between the members is filled. It is expected that defects based on the interlocking of the guide plates B22300 and B22500, which are considered to be likely to occur, are unlikely to occur. Rather, deterioration of the return spring, which is likely to occur when the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are repeatedly driven, is considered to have a higher priority to be detected.

The probability that the small hit A and the small hit B are selected is not limited to this. For example, the small hit A may be set so that it is easier to select than the small hit B. In this case, since the sign can be found at a stage where the frictional force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is smaller, it is possible to detect the defect in advance or to detect it at an early stage.

This can be explained by the fact that the small hit A and the small hit B differ in the state of the return spring at the time when the displacement starts due to the frictional force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500.

That is, in the small hit A, it is detected that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the non-driven side are displaced by the frictional force against the urging force of the return spring in the extended state (the state where the urging force is small), which is defective. I am aiming to judge that. On the other hand, in the small hit B, it is detected that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the non-driven side are not displaced by the frictional force against the urging force of the return spring in the contracted state (the state where the urging force is large), which is defective. I am aiming to judge that.

Therefore, the urging force of the return spring against which the frictional force opposes is smaller in the case of the small hit A than in the case of the small hit B, so that the frictional force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is smaller. Even if there are, you can find signs of the defect. As a result, it is possible to detect defects in advance and to detect them at an early stage.

In other words, by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the operation on the side where the defect can be detected from an early stage (for example, small hit A) with respect to the frequency of occurrence of the operation on the inferior side (for example, small hit B) for that purpose. , It is possible to detect defects before they occur and to detect them early.

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing the time change of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 in the small hit A and the time change of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B2500 in the small hit B.

In FIG. 189, the deviation between the operation timing of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 and the timing of energization (excitation) of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is omitted, and the timings are assumed to be the same.

Further, the normal detection pattern described later takes into consideration the time for the guide plates B22300 and B22500 to be displaced from the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern described later as a timing chart showing the excitation timing of the solenoids B1410 and B1610. It is desirable to set the pattern as a slightly delayed pattern, but in the description of FIG. 189, for convenience, the switching timing (excitation or de-excitation timing) in the timing chart of the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is set. It is illustrated and described assuming that it is the same as the switching timing in the normal detection pattern.

First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small hit A, the first solenoid B1410 is driven (excited) so that the first guide plate B22300 is maintained in the open state for 0.1 seconds from the start of the small hit. The drive (excitation) of the first solenoid B1410 is released, and this released state continues for 0.1 seconds. With this as one set, two sets are repeated as the operation of the first guide plate B22300.

After that, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited) so that the second guide plate B22,500 is maintained in the open state for 0.1 seconds, and after 0.1 seconds, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited). Is released, and this released state continues for 0.1 seconds. With this as one set, two sets are repeated as the operation of the second guide plate B22,500.

Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, for the first guide plate B22300, the first solenoid B1410 is driven (excited) so that the first guide plate 22300 is maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds from the start of the small hit, and the first solenoid B1410 is driven (excited) to 0. After 2 seconds have passed, the drive (excitation) of the first solenoid B1410 is released, and the released state is continued until 0.4 seconds from the start of the small hit.

On the other hand, for the second guide plate B2500, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited) so that the second guide plate 22500 is maintained in the open state from the start of the small hit for 0.3 seconds. After that, the drive (excitation) of the second solenoid B1610 is released, and the released state is continued until 0.4 seconds from the start of the small hit.

After 0.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, the first solenoid B1410 is driven (excited) so that the first guide plate 22300 is maintained in the open state for 0.3 seconds, and 0.3 seconds have passed. Then, the drive (excitation) of the first solenoid B1410 is released, and the released state is continued until 0.8 seconds from the start of the small hit.

On the other hand, regarding the second guide plate B2500, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited) so that the second guide plate 22500 is maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds after 0.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit. ), And after 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the drive (excitation) of the second solenoid B1610 is released, and the released state is continued until 0.8 seconds from the start of the small hit.

As described above, in the small hit B, the structure is such that the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are both located at the rear in the closed state, and the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are both located at the front. A state in which the ball is prevented from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 (hereinafter, also referred to as a "special closed state"), and an open state in which one of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 is located in front. The state can be switched with ,.

As described above, the small hit A and the small hit B have the same time of the small hit game (0.8 seconds), but the operation modes of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 during the small hit game are different.

As described above, the small hit A is set to operate with the aim of determining a defect based on unintended interlocking of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. That is, based on the sixth operation pattern set in the small hit A, the normal detection pattern that is assumed to be detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 when the sixth operation pattern operates normally is set. I will do it. When the normal detection pattern is compared with the actual detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and it is determined that they do not match (for example, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the non-driven side). By controlling the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 to notify the error when the displacement to the front side is detected, the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 increases, so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are interlocked. It is possible to determine that the state is in the state, and it is possible to make the player or the clerk of the amusement machine store grasp the defect by the error notification.

The permissible value for determining whether the detection patterns match or do not match can be arbitrarily set. Further, the type of allowable value (pattern deviation width, deviation frequency, etc.) can be arbitrarily set. In this control example, the determination is made based on the deviation width of the pattern, and when a portion where the deviation width is 0.1 seconds or more occurs, it is determined that there is a mismatch.

In this case, if the deviation frequency exceeds 0, it is determined that there is a mismatch. If this is too strict for practical use, for example, the deviation frequency may be determined at the same time, and if the deviation frequency is 10 times / sec, it may be determined that there is a mismatch. The numerical setting of the deviation frequency can be arbitrarily changed.

In the small hit A, the drive and release of the first guide plate B22300 and the drive and release of the second guide plate B22500 are executed as a set. Therefore, even if a defect occurs when driving any of the guide plates B22300 and B22500, the defect can be found with one small hit, so that the defect can be detected at an early stage.

The operation of the small hit B is set with the aim of determining a defect based on the deterioration of the return springs of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. That is, it is assumed that the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 detect when the 7th operation pattern is normally operated based on the 7th operation pattern set in the small hit B and the 7th operation pattern. Set the normal detection pattern to be performed. When the normal detection pattern is compared with the actual detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and it is determined that they do not match (for example, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the side where the drive is released). Is still detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222), for example, the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 exceeds the urging force of the return springs of the solenoids B1410 and B1610. It is possible to determine that the state is in the state, and it is possible to make the player or the clerk of the amusement machine store grasp the defect by the error notification.

In the small hit B, the case where the driving force of the first guide plate B22300 is released first and the case where the driving force of the second guide plate B22500 is released first are executed as a set. Therefore, even if there is a defect in the return spring of any of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, the defect can be found with one small hit, so that the defect can be detected at an early stage.

Further, in the small hit B, by detecting the timing at which the difference between the seventh operation pattern and the normal detection pattern occurs, it is determined which of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 has a defect in the return spring. Can be done.

That is, if there is a difference within 0.4 seconds from the start of the small hit, the first guide plate B22300 is maintained in the open state even though the excitation of the first solenoid B1410 is released. Therefore, if it can be determined that the urging force of the return spring of the first solenoid B1410 is low and a difference occurs 0.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, the second solenoid B1610 The second guide plate B22,500 is maintained in the open state even though the excitation of the second solenoid B1610 is released, and it can be determined that the urging force of the return spring of the second solenoid B1610 is low.

By changing the type of notification using this judgment result, the position requiring repair can be accurately notified, so that the time required for the operator to find the position requiring repair can be reduced, and the working time for maintenance can be reduced. Can be shortened.

As a comparison between the sixth operation pattern in the small hit A and the seventh operation pattern in the small hit B, the possibility of entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 at the time of executing the small hit will be described.

In FIG. 189, the timing at which the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 in each operation pattern are in a state where the ball can be entered is schematically described side by side with the operation pattern. That is, the straight lines described as the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 indicate that the solid line section can be entered, and the broken line section is not allowed to enter. Is shown.

In both the small hit A and the small hit B, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are maintained in the open state for 0.1 seconds, so the ball is rolled left and right (unlike the situation where the ball is entered by falling). The time for guiding the ball is insufficient to allow the ball to enter the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, and it is unlikely that the ball will enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 when the small hit is executed.

If you dare to compare, compared to the small hit A in which the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 operates independently, the small hit B with the timing of simultaneous operation has the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. It is assumed that it is less likely that the ball will enter the ball.

That is, when both the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced forward (see FIG. 180), the flow of the ball near the openings of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 interferes with the upstream members B1320 and B1520. Immediately after the displacement, the ball arrives at the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 more slowly.

In addition, when both the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced forward, the ball that reaches near the upstream side of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is moved to the center side along the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. Since it is formed so as to be brought close to each other, a speed is generated in the direction away from the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, and it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

From these facts, the small hit B is less likely to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 than the small hit A. Therefore, by configuring the control so that the small hit B can be selected as the small hit, the number of payout prize balls generated at the time of executing the small hit can be reduced.

In a situation where it is assumed that the normal detection pattern that is assumed to be detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 described above does not match, as shown in FIG. 189, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 cannot enter the ball. It is maintained in a normal state (broken line). Therefore, even if the guide plates B22300 and B22500 malfunction as described above, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

The time difference (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) set in the seventh operation pattern is set as a sufficiently short time to prevent the ball from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, but is detected. For the sensors BSC221 and BSC222, a device having a performance whose sampling period (resolution) is sufficiently shorter than 0.1 second is selected. As a result, it is possible to effectively determine whether or not the operation pattern with a short time difference of 0.1 seconds is normally generated.

For the purpose of detecting the deviation from the normal detection pattern, it is determined that the other guide plates B22300 and B2500 are displaced at the timing when only one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 should be displaced as described above. In addition to the purpose of doing so, various purposes are assumed.

For example, the purpose of determining that an operation delay has occurred from the timing of drive execution or the timing of drive release is assumed. This operation delay is assumed to be at least a delay in the timing of drive execution (delay in the start operation) and a delay in the timing of release of the drive (delay in the return operation).

As the cause of the delay in the timing of drive execution, the device (structure or control) is used to delay the opening operation of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in order to increase the operating resistance due to aged deterioration and to adjust the profit margin in the jackpot game. Is expected to be fraudulent.

Even if the drive is controlled by the same operation pattern, if the opening operation of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is delayed, the length of time that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 can be maintained in the open state becomes shorter. Therefore, the number of balls entered into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 tends to be small, and it is assumed that this is illegally used for adjusting the profit margin.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the pattern does not match the normal detection pattern, an error notification can be executed to enable early detection of the above-mentioned fraud. That is, by discovering the above-mentioned fraud during the execution of the small hit game, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage in the big hit game.

Causes of delay in the timing of drive release include an increase in operating resistance due to aging, a decrease in the urging force of the return spring due to aging, and a profit that exceeds the profit normally planned in the jackpot game (for example, the interval between rounds). Modify the device (structure or control) to delay the return operation in order to obtain an excessive amount of prize balls (payout prize balls due to excess prizes) in (for example, let a thin metal wire enter from the outside and insert the thin metal wire). It is assumed that the load is applied in the direction of hindering the backward displacement by hooking on the guide plates B22300 and B22500).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the pattern does not match the normal detection pattern, an error notification can be executed to enable early detection of the above-mentioned fraud. That is, by discovering the above-mentioned fraud during the execution of the small hit game, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage in the big hit game or a situation in which the person who commits the fraud can obtain the profit of the fraud. Can be done.

On the other hand, time delays can usually occur due to entanglement with the sphere. Therefore, when performing error notification as a time delay, in addition to the method of setting only the length of the time delay itself, error notification is performed when the preset maximum limit value of excess winning is exceeded, and the time until then. A method of setting not to notify an error regardless of the length of the delay is also conceivable.

In this case, for example, the ball is clogged on the downstream side, the ball stays in the range before entering the ball, and the staying ball affects the operation of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. Even in the case of a regular mode, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game can be continued without causing an error notification. Thereby, the degree of freedom of playability can be improved.

FIG. 190 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is a lottery opportunity for each jackpot type and a special symbol. It is stipulated in association with the type of winning opening. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined by associating a jackpot F (see 202b11 in FIG. 190).

When the jackpot F is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B22000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

The jackpot G is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49" (see 202b12 in FIG. 190).

When the jackpot G is obtained, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed in the 8th operation pattern of the variable winning device B22000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1160 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

The jackpot H is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b13 in FIG. 190).

When the jackpot is H, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the variable winning device B22000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 580 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64), the variable winning device B22000 operates in the eighth operation pattern in any case. .. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds, and as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. , Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99" (entire range). Is defined in association with a jackpot f (see 202b14 in FIG. 190).

When the jackpot f is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the ninth operation pattern of the variable winning device B22000, as in the case of the jackpot F. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the fired balls.

As described above, in the jackpot by lottery of the special symbol 1, the total number of rounds of the jackpot game is selected from three types and controlled by the eighth operation pattern. On the other hand, in the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the total number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same every time, and is controlled by the ninth operation pattern.

For convenience of explanation, the total number of rounds of the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 2 is controlled to be the same every time, but the total number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the total number of rounds of the jackpot game may be selected from a plurality of types. Hereinafter, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern will be described.

FIG. 191 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 191 (b) is a diagram showing the time timing of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the guide plates B22300 and B22500, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 8th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot F, jackpot G, or jackpot H, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 operate based on the eighth operation pattern.

Based on the eighth operation pattern, the MPU 201 sets a normal detection pattern that is assumed to be detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 when the eighth operation pattern operates normally, and sets the normal detection pattern and the normal detection pattern. It is configured so that the detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be collated at all times or at a specified timing.

The MPU 201 is a solenoid that holds the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first solenoid opens the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B22300 from the closed state to the open state. The B1410 is driven and controlled so that the first guide plate B22300 operates for a long time. At this time, it is controlled so that the short opening operation (a part of the sixth operation pattern, see FIG. 189) is executed immediately after the start of the round game R of the first round.

In this case, when the actual detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern are different, the error notification is executed. As a result, the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 increases, so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in an interlocking state, so that defects can be detected early (discovery near the start of the initial round). be able to.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled so as to displace the first guide plate B22300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the first round game R ends. ..

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to keep the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time sufficient for the balls guided by the guide plates B22300 and B22500 to pass through the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 (discharge from the game area).

Here, in the configuration of the variable winning device B22000, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are arranged adjacent to the lower ends of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 (see, for example, FIG. 180), and are guided to the guide plates B22300 and B22500. Since there is almost no time delay until the ball passes through the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, it is possible to set the first interval time Int1 between rounds in an extremely short time (for example, 0.01 seconds). ..

For example, by setting the first interval time Int1 between rounds to an extremely short time, it is possible to easily prevent a ball arranged in the range before entering the ball in the first interval time Int1 between rounds from becoming an out ball. can.

Also, the length of the interval between rounds does not have to be the same between each round. It is also possible to set a jackpot type in which the length of the inter-round interval between each round is set to be different at least in part, or a jackpot type in which the length of the inter-round interval between each round is set to be all different. It is possible. In this case, for example, as a feature between rounds, when the target rounds are different, between rounds in which a spill ball is likely to occur and between rounds in which a spill ball is unlikely to occur are generated in the same jackpot game. Can be done.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the second guide plate B22,500 is displaced from the closed state to the open open state. The second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening B1002, so that the second guide plate B22500 operates for a long time. At this time, it is controlled so that the short opening operation (a part of the sixth operation pattern, see FIG. 189) is executed immediately after the start of the second round game R.

In this case, when the actual detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern are different, the error notification is executed. As a result, the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 increases, so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in an interlocking state, so that defects can be detected early (discovery near the start of the initial round). be able to.

Then, in the second round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled so as to displace the second guide plate B22,500 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening B1002, and the second round game R ends. ..

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to keep the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the third round game R is started.

In the third round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are opened from the closed state. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the open state, but in this state, the first specific winning opening B1001 is still maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 180). After that, only the drive of the second solenoid B1610 is released, and the first guide plate B22300 is operated for a long time to maintain the first specific winning opening B1001 in the open state.

In other words, a part of the seventh operation pattern (see FIG. 189) is controlled to be executed immediately after the start of the third round game R. In this case, when the actual detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern are different, the error notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to early detect a defect (discovery near the start of the round on the initial side) due to a decrease in the urging force of the return spring of the second solenoid B1610.

Then, in the third round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled so as to displace the first guide plate B22300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the third round game R ends. ..

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to keep the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are opened from the closed state. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the open state, but in this state, the second specific winning opening B1001 is still maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 180). After that, only the drive of the first solenoid B1410 is released, and the second guide plate B22,500 is operated for a long time to maintain the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state.

In other words, a part of the seventh operation pattern (see FIG. 189) is controlled to be executed immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. In this case, when the actual detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern are different, the error notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to early detect a defect (discovery near the start of the round on the initial side) due to a decrease in the urging force of the return spring of the first solenoid B1410.

Then, in the fourth round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled so as to displace the second guide plate B22,500 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening B1002, and the fourth round game R ends. ..

When the fourth round game R is completed, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to keep the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the fifth round game R is started.

From the fifth round onward, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are alternately operated for a long time in each round game R (that is, the first guide plate B22300 is opened in odd-numbered rounds, and the second guide plate B22500 is opened in even-numbered rounds. The 5th round to the 15th round round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are closed and open. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled so as to displace between the states and open and close the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

In this case, when the actual detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern are different, the error notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to detect defects in the variable winning device B22000 at an early stage.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid B1410, so that the timer means keeps the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The B1610 is driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the 9th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 operate based on the ninth operation pattern.

Based on the ninth operation pattern, the MPU 201 sets a normal detection pattern that is assumed to be detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 when the operation is normally performed in the ninth operation pattern, and sets the normal detection pattern and the normal detection pattern. It is configured so that the detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be collated at all times or at a specified timing.

The MPU 201 is a solenoid that holds the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first solenoid opens the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B22300 from the closed state to the open state. The B1410 is driven and controlled so that the first guide plate B22300 operates for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled so as to displace the first guide plate B22300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the first round game R ends. ..

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to keep the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (0.04 seconds) between rounds elapses. Controlled, and after the lapse of the second interval time Int2 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the second guide plate B22,500 is displaced from the closed state to the open open state. The second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening B1002, so that the second guide plate B22500 operates for a long time.

Then, in the second round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled so as to displace the second guide plate B22,500 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening B1002, and the second round game R ends. ..

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so as to keep the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 between rounds elapses. After the lapse of the two interval time Int2, the third round game R is started.

From the third round onward, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are alternately operated for a long time in each round game R (that is, the first guide plate B22300 is opened in odd-numbered rounds, and the second guide plate B22500 is opened in even-numbered rounds. The third round to the maximum 15th round of the round game R is repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are closed and open. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled so as to displace between the states and open and close the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

In this case, if the actual detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern set based on the ninth operation pattern are different, the error notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to detect defects in the variable winning device B22000 at an early stage.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid B1410, so that the timer means keeps the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The B1610 is driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

There are mainly the following differences between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern described above. The first difference is that in the eighth operation pattern, from the first round to the fourth round, a part of the sixth operation pattern or a part of the seventh operation pattern is executed at the start of the round game R. .. The second difference is that in the eighth operation pattern, the interval between round games R is set at the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds, whereas in the ninth operation pattern, the round game R is set. The interval is set to the second interval time Int2 (0.04 seconds) between rounds. Hereinafter, each difference will be described in order.

According to the first difference, in the eighth operation pattern, the detection of defects by detecting the deviation of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 from the normal detection pattern can be executed at the initial stage of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied with the situation in which the defect becomes apparent during the subsequent probabilistic change and the game cannot be continued.

In the ninth operation pattern, no defect was found in the jackpot (first jackpot) of the special symbol 1 executed in the eighth operation pattern, so it is not necessary to dare to try to find the defect many times. Therefore, it is omitted to execute a part of the sixth operation pattern or a part of the seventh operation pattern at the start of the round game R.

Therefore, the player may have a disadvantage that the ball cannot enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 during the execution of a part of the sixth operation pattern or a part of the seventh operation pattern, or the range before entering the ball. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball that has reached the ball spills from the guide plates B22300 and B22500 and is guided to the out port 66 (see FIG. 124) to the player.

As a result, the ball can be guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 immediately after the start of the round game R to enter the ball, so that the time required for the round game R can be shortened and the number of spilled balls generated can be shortened. Can be reduced.

According to the second difference, the time between the round games R is shorter in the ninth operation pattern than in the eighth operation pattern, and the time required for the entire jackpot game can be shortened. .. Therefore, even if the lottery of the special symbol 2 is likely to be performed during the probability change and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 occurs continuously, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed, and it is efficient even for a short time. The jackpot game can be executed a plurality of times so that the player can obtain a sufficient prize ball.

Further, as compared with the eighth operation pattern, the ninth operation pattern has a shorter time between the round games R, and passes through the pre-entry range and heads toward the out port 66 during the round games R. It is easy to reduce the number of spilling balls. As a result, the number of spilled spheres can be reduced regardless of the firing mode of the spheres.

Therefore, the ninth operation pattern can reduce the number of spilled balls while shortening the time required for the entire jackpot game (advantage of obtaining the same number of prize balls in a short time) as compared with the eighth operation pattern. Since it can be done (the advantage of reducing the waste of the launch ball (investment) for obtaining the prize ball), it is doubly advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to acquire the jackpot of the special symbol 2, and to improve the interest of the player when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is actually acquired.

Further, according to the ninth operation pattern, since the second interval time Int2 between rounds is short, the operation timings of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 that are displaced to the closed state and the guide plates B22,500 and B22300 that are displaced to the open state are partially divided. It can be easily stacked. In other words, it is easy to configure a situation in which the other guide plates B22500 and B22300 start to be displaced before the operation of one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 that has started displacement first is completed and stopped.

In operation, the arrangement of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 tends to be unstable as compared with the arrangement of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the stopped state. By intentionally operating the guide plates B22300 and B22500 at close positions in an unstable state, it becomes easy to construct a situation in which the gap between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is filled, and it is possible to easily generate a frictional force.

Further, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the side displaced to the closed state are displaced rearward from the state in which the weight of the ball before being guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is loaded, so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are placed in a stable position in the closed state. In comparison, the arrangement tends to shift downward. From this as well, the gap between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is likely to be shorter than the dimensions at the time of design, and frictional force can be easily generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500.

As a result, for example, the guide plates B22300 and B22500, which should be displaced to the closed state due to frictional force, are maintained in the open state (front position), or the displacement is delayed, resulting in a pattern different from the normal detection pattern. Is detected (output) by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222, the MPU 201 can determine that a defect has occurred, and error notification can be executed based on this determination.

Thereby, for example, it is possible to aim at early detection of a defect caused by a decrease in the urging force of the return spring of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, and it is possible to execute repair before the defect affects the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1009 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1012 and S1013 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 192), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (not shown, the same applies hereinafter), the output data of commands and the like stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the prize detection information detected by the switch reading process is determined, and if there is the prize detection information, the prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, a command such as a round number command set in the jackpot control process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the jackpot state is reached, the jackpot effect is executed and the variable winning device B22000 is executed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are opened for each round in the jackpot state, and whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 has elapsed, or whether the specified number of balls have won in the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. To judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 192), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed. In the small hit control process, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are opened and closed according to the set operation pattern (in this control example, the sixth operation pattern or the seventh operation pattern, see FIG. 189). In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 192), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1006) is executed. In the abnormal processing, the pattern detected by each detection sensor (detection sensor B1230, B1250, BSC221, BSC222, etc.) in the normal case is used as a reference (normal detection pattern), and if the detection is different from the reference, the detection is performed. It executes control to correct it so that it returns to the standard, or determines that it is a malfunction and notifies an error. In the present embodiment, the abnormality processing (S1006) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 192), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt processing.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1007) for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed. In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1008). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B start the variation display according to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (S1008), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process ends, the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed. Is completed, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1009). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of the normal symbol variation start process, the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the normal symbol variation process, the variation display executed in the second symbol display device is terminated and the normal symbol variation is started. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of the process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1011). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1011: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1011: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1012, S1013).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1012). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1013).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C3, the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1010, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1014 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1014), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1015). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1016), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1017), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1010 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1009, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1012 and S1013 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, the stack pointer is predetermined in the initial setting process without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the stack pointer value in the process when the power is cut off. By setting the value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

The 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 198. In the eleventh embodiment, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 have been described on the premise that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are individually displaced. It is configured considering that it can be displaced at the same time based on control. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are top views of the variable winning device B23000 according to the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 193 (a) shows a state in which the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 are integrally connected by the switching device B23800, and in FIG. 193 (b), the first guide plate by the switching device B23800 is shown. The state in which the connection between the B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 is disconnected is shown in the figure.

FIG. 194 is a right side view of the variable winning device B23000, and FIG. 195 is a front view of the variable winning device B23000. In FIG. 194, the rear cover member B23700 is not shown for ease of understanding, and a part of the switching device B23800 is shown by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 195, of the rear cover member B23700, only the right plate portion related to the switching device B23800 is shown, and the other parts are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 194 and 195, a state in which the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are de-energized is shown.

The difference between the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 from the guide plates B1300 and B1500 described in the eleventh embodiment is mainly whether or not an engaging portion with the switching device B23800 is provided.

That is, the first guide plate B23300 includes a receiving recess B23350 recessed from the right side in the connecting fixing member B1330, and the second guide plate B23500 has a receiving recess B23350 recessed from the right side into the connecting fixing member B1530. The installation unit B23550 is provided. These receiving recessed portions B23350 and B23550 function as engaging portions with the switching device B23800.

The switching device B23800 is arranged on the left side of the slide main body B23810 which is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction and the left side of the slide main body B23810, and collides with each other in a pair of front and rear so as to be able to enter the receiving recesses B23350 and B23550. The displacement of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 having the approaching protrusion portion B23821 to be formed, the transmission member B23830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to the slide main body portion B23810, and the displacement of the slide main body portion B23810 in one direction. It is provided with a guide rail-shaped portion B23840 for guiding to, and an urging means B23850 for generating an urging force for moving the slide main body portion B23810 to the left side.

The slide main body portion B23810 is supported by a pair of guide rail-shaped portions B23840 formed on the upper and lower inner surfaces of the rear cover member B23700, which is formed by partially changing the shape of the rear cover member B1700, so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction. It is urged by the urging means B23850 so as to be arranged at the left side position (engagement position).

Since the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is supported by the slide main body portion B23810 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, the approach protrusion portion B23821 is configured to be displaceable not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The degree of freedom of arrangement of B23821 is increased. That is, the displacement of the approach projecting portion B23821 is secured by the slide main body portion B23810 in the left-right direction and by the slide auxiliary portion B23820 in the front-rear direction.

The approach protrusion B23821 is projected from both front and rear ends of the slide main body B23810 toward the guide plates B23300 and B23500, and the slide main body B23810 is in the left position (engagement position, see FIG. 193 (a)). The guide plates B23300 and B23500 are interlocked with each other by being arranged inside the receiving recessed portions B23350 and B23550, while the slide main body portion B23810 is in the right position (release position, FIG. 193 (b)). )), The guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be displaced independently by retracting from the receiving recesses B23350 and B23550.

The transmission member B23830 is displaced as the plungers of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are displaced, and functions to change the arrangement of the slide main body portion B23810. This will be described with reference to FIG. 196.

FIG. 196 is a front view of the variable winning device B23000. Note that, in FIG. 196, of the rear cover member B23700, only the right plate portion related to the switching device B23800 is shown, and the other parts are not shown. Further, in FIG. 196, a state in which the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized while the first solenoid B1410 is excited is shown.

The transmission members B23830 are arranged in pairs on the upper and lower sides, and are rotatably supported by the rear cover member B23700 on the base end side portion B23831 and the displacement locus side of the plungers of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 from the base end side portion B23831. The loaded portion B23832 extending toward the upper side or the lower side), and the acting portion B23833 extending from the base end side portion B23831 toward the slide main body portion B23810 so as to be in contact with the slide main body portion B23810. To be equipped.

As shown in FIG. 196, as the linear motion member B1420 is displaced by the excitation of the first solenoid B1410, the driving force is transmitted to the loaded portion B23832, and the transmission member B23830 rotates.

Due to this rotation, the acting portion B23833 arranged on the upper and lower outer sides of the slide main body portion B23810 in the non-excited state enters the upper and lower inner sides and pushes the slide main body portion B23810 to counter the urging force of the urging means B23850. Then, the slide main body portion B23810 can be displaced to the right side position (release position, see FIG. 193 (b)).

Since the transmission members B23830 are arranged in pairs on the upper and lower sides and each transmission member B23830 corresponds to the solenoids B1410 and B1610, the first solenoid B1410 is excited for the displacement of the slide main body portion B23810 shown in FIG. The same occurs not only in the case but also when the second solenoid B1610 is excited.

Therefore, the slide main body portion B23810 can be displaced to the release position by utilizing the driving force generated by energizing and exciting the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610.

That is, a state in which the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are integrally interlocked by using the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 for driving the guide plates B23300 and B23500, and a state in which the displacements of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are made independent of each other. And can be switched.

As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a separate driving means for generating a driving force for switching between a state in which the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are integrally interlocked and a state in which the displacements of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are made independent. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

The device for driving the switching device B23800 is not limited to this. For example, when the product cost is not considered, a separate drive device for driving the switching device B23800 may be provided, or the guide plates B23300, B23500 and the switching device B23800 may be driven by a single unit. It may be driven by a device.

FIG. 197 is a top view of the transmission hole B23340, the linear motion member B1420, and the rotary member B23430 of the first guide plate B23300. The transmission hole B23340 is provided from the transmission hole B1340 (see FIG. 134) for the purpose of causing the displacement of the transmission member B23830 before the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 as a relationship of the displacement caused by the excitation of the solenoid B1410. The design has been changed. Although the description of the second guide plate B23500 is omitted, the design is changed in the same manner as that of the first guide plate B23300. The details will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 197, the transmission hole B23340 is centered on the straight portion B1341 and the curved portion B1342 described above in the description of the transmission hole B1340, and the projecting shaft portion B1432 of the first drive device B23400 from the left end of the straight portion B1341. It is configured as a through hole including a second curved portion B23343 extending along an arc.

The first drive device B23400 includes the first solenoid B1410 and the linear motion member B1420 already described above, and the rotary member B23430 whose design has been changed from the rotary member B1430 (see FIG. 134) due to the design change of the transmission hole B23340. Be prepared.

The rotating member B23430 is provided with the above-mentioned projecting shaft portion B1432 and the short projecting portion B1434 as a portion projecting from the main body portion B23431 described later in the description of the rotating member B1430, and the arrangement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is changed. A bent rod-shaped main body B23431 whose design has been changed from the main body B1431 for the purpose, and an end portion of the main body portion B23431 which is arranged on the left side of the protruding shaft portion B1432 (first end portion). It is provided with a longitudinal projecting portion B23433 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432.

The longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is capable of being inserted into the transmission hole B23340, and the first solenoid B1410 is arranged at the extended end portion of the second curved portion B23343 in a non-excited state.

Since the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is inserted through the transmission hole B23340, the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is displaced along the arc locus centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432 due to the rotational movement of the rotating member B23430. Then, the first guide plate B23300 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

In the present embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1342 and the second curved portion B23343 of the transmission hole B23340 is an arc centered on the protruding shaft portion B1432, and the radius is the protruding shaft portion B1432 and the longitudinal protruding portion B23433. The shape is along an arc equal to the distance of. As a result, a time difference can be generated between the displacement of the rotating member B23340 and the displacement of the first guide plate B23300.

More specifically, the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 occurs when the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 displaces the straight portion B1341. On the other hand, when the longitudinal protrusion B2343 is arranged in the curved portion B1342 or the second curved portion B23343, the longitudinal protrusion B23433 is only displaced along the curved portion B1342 or the second curved portion B23343. Since the longitudinal protrusion B23433 does not push the inner wall of the transmission hole B23340 in the front-rear direction, the first guide plate B23300 is not displaced.

That is, the displacement of the linear motion member B1420 is started from the time when the first solenoid B1410 is excited and the rotary member B23430 starts to rotate until the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is arranged on the straight line portion B1341. The first guide plate B23300 is not displaced and its arrangement is maintained.

In the present embodiment, during this period, the arrangement of the slide main body portion B23810 of the switching device B23800 is configured to change from the left side position (see FIG. 195) to the right side position (see FIG. 196). As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction in which the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 are integrally driven while the slide main body portion B23810 is still arranged at the left side position from the structural aspect. ..

Since the curved portion B1342 has a function of absorbing the arrangement error of the longitudinal protrusion portion B1433 in the first place, even if the arrangement of the longitudinal protrusion portion B23433 in the curved portion B1342 is slightly deviated, the description of the longitudinal protrusion portion B1433 As described above, it does not affect the displacement amount of the first guide plate B23300. Therefore, even if the rotating member B23430 is configured to rotate at the same angle as the rotation angle described above in the description of the rotating member B1430, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B23300 is about the same as the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300. Since the amount of displacement can be secured, the above-mentioned additional functions can be added without changing the design of the first solenoid B1410, the linear motion member B1420, the projecting shaft portion B1432, and the short projecting portion B1434. can.

The function of the variable winning device B23000 configured as described above will be described in detail, focusing on the effect produced by the shape of the transmission hole B23340.

FIG. 198 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B23000, and FIG. 198 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the upper surface of the variable winning device B23000 in the direction of the arrow CXCVIIIb of FIG. 198 (a). c) is a front view of the variable winning device B23000, and FIG. 198 (d) is a partially enlarged view of the upper surface of the variable winning device B23000 in the direction of the arrow CXCVIIId of FIG. 198 (c).

198 (a) and 198 (b) show the displacement of the rotational displacement of the rotating member B23430 caused by the excitation of the first solenoid B1410, and FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 (d) show. A state in which the first guide plate B23300 is displaced to the front side while the posture of the rotating member B23430 is changing toward the postures shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) is shown.

Here, the states shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) show the states of the rotating member B23430 when the first solenoid B1410 is normally driven and controlled, and FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 show. In the state shown in (d), an illegal load is applied to the first guide plate B23300 even though the first solenoid B1410 is not driven (for example, a player who commits an illegal act pulls the first guide plate B23300 to the front side). It shows the state of the rotating member B23430 that has been displaced due to the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 due to the application of the load to be output).

As shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b), when the first solenoid B1410 is normally driven, the transmission member B23830 is rotated before the first guide plate B23300 starts to be displaced, and the slide main body portion. B23810 is arranged at the right side position (release position). As a result, the first guide plate B23300 can be displaced independently.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 (d), when the first guide plate B23300 is displaced to the front side prior to the displacement of the rotating member B23430, the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is the second curved portion. Displacement occurs while being placed at the extended end of B23343. In this case, since the direction BPR along which the second curved portion B23343 follows and the displacement locus BKR of the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 intersect, the displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is restricted and the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 continues. It becomes impossible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first guide plate B23300 from being illegally opened.

The effect of preventing fraud is exerted by the shape of the transmission hole B23340, and is effectively generated even when the switching device B23800 is not provided. On the other hand, assuming a rare but possible situation such as damage to the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 due to the load applied by fraudulent activity, this measure alone is not sufficient. Therefore, the effect produced by the switching device B23800, which is configured for the same purpose, will be described.

According to the switching device B23800, even if the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is damaged and the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 can be continued due to an improper load, the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 is the displacement of the switching device B23800. By causing the slide main body portion B23810 to occur before retracting, the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 can be configured to maintain a state of being integrally displaced. As a result, even if the first guide plate B23300 continues to be displaced toward the front side, it is possible to maintain a state in which it is impossible to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 (see FIG. 180).

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced to the front side and the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is displaced to the front side before the slide main body portion B23810 is retracted, the slide main body portion B23810 is retracted. It is configured to be prevented. Specifically, a guide rod for guiding the displacement direction of the slide main body portion B23810 is arranged in the displacement direction of the slide auxiliary portion B23820, and the displacement of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is regulated by the guide rod.

In other words, the slide main body portion B23810 is configured not to be displaced to the right when the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is displaced in the front-rear direction from the initial front-rear position (see FIG. 193 (a)).

With this configuration, under the normal drive control shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b), the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is moved before the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced toward the front side. Since it is displaced to the right (see FIG. 198 (a)), the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be displaced independently.

On the other hand, in the irregular displacement modes shown in FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 (d), the slide auxiliary portion B23820 slides before being displaced to the right before the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced toward the front side. Since the displacement of the auxiliary portion B23820 in the front-rear direction is started, the slide main body portion B23810 is not displaced to the right, and the displacement of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 to the right side is restricted.

As a result, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are maintained in a state of being integrally displaced (see FIG. 193 (a)). Therefore, even if the first guide plate B23300 continues to be displaced toward the front side, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are maintained. It is possible to maintain a state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 180).

In addition, since the displacement of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 to the right side is regulated, the rotational displacement of the transmission member B23830 is regulated in the middle, so that the displacement of the linear motion member B1420 is hindered in the middle. The displacement of B23300 and B23500 will also be disturbed on the way. Therefore, when the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are not fully opened, it is possible to maintain a state in which it is impossible to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced independently in normal drive control, and the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are integrally displaced in the displacement based on fraudulent activity. Therefore, if a detection sensor corresponding to the above-mentioned detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 (see FIG. 185) is provided so that the arrangement of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be detected, the ball cannot enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. It is possible to determine the abnormal arrangement of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 while maintaining the possible state, and by executing error notification in accordance with this determination, early detection of fraudulent activity can be achieved.

The variable winning device B23000 can also be driven and controlled by the various operation patterns described above. In particular, according to the present embodiment, the slide main body B23810 of the switching device B23800 is in the release position not only in the situation where one of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is excited but also in the situation where at least one of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is excited. Therefore, even when the drive is controlled by the operation pattern in which the interval time between rounds is short as in the ninth operation pattern (see FIG. 191 (b)), the slide main body portion B23810 is erroneously engaged. It will not be placed in position.

In other words, when the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are switched between excitations at extremely short time intervals, it can be identified as if both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are being excited, or both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are excited. In this case, it is possible to prevent the slide main body portion B23810 from being arranged at the engaging position. Thereby, the degree of freedom of operation of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when both the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are arranged on the front side to form a special closed state, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are caused by the impact due to the collision with the ball that has reached the pre-entry range. And the switching device B23800 are configured to be less likely to be disengaged.

That is, when a load is received from a ball that has reached the pre-entry range, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 in the specially closed state are slightly (smallly) displaced in the vertical direction (the fulcrum is the foundation member B1100 on which the penetration forming portion B1120 is formed). However, in the present embodiment, the width and length of the cross section of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 and the approach protrusion portion B23821 in the protrusion direction are elongated in the vertical direction. (See FIG. 194).

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the approach projecting portion B23821 is disengaged from the receiving recessed portions B2 3350 and B23550 of the connecting fixing members B1330 and B1530 and the engagement is disengaged.

Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the resistance of engagement to the load applied to the guide plates B23300 and B23500 from the game area regardless of the impact from the ball. That is, for example, one end of a thread or a thin metal wire is inserted into the game area through a foul ball passage or a gap generated around the game area, and the other end is pulled or pushed while one end is in contact with the guide plates B23300 and B23500. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the engagement is released when a load is applied to the guide plates B23300 and B23500. Therefore, the resistance to fraud can be improved.

The 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 199. This embodiment corresponds to another example of the 17th embodiment. In the 17th embodiment, the case where the transmission rotating body 7720 functions only as a member for transmitting the driving force has been described, but the variable winning device B24000 in the 24th embodiment is premised on being displaced by receiving a load from the game area side. The transmission rotating body B24720 is designed in. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 199 (a) is a developed view of the circumferential surface of the transmission rotating body B24720 according to the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 199 (b) is a partially developed view of the first effect section B24760. c) is a partially developed view of the second production section B24770.

The transmission rotating body B24720 is formed with the same diameter as the transmission rotating body B7720 as a substitute for the transmission rotating body B7720 provided in the above-mentioned combined drive device B7700, and is recessed in the same manner as the approach groove portion B7730. It is provided with a grooved portion B24730 whose design has been redesigned.

The approached groove portion B24730 is mainly different in the effect section B7760 in comparison with the approached groove portion B7730. That is, the approached groove portion B24730 includes the effect sections B24760 and B24770 whose design has been changed from the effect section B7760.

In the state shown in FIG. 199 (a), the first effect section B24760 arranged below the boundary position BCL71 is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7422 (see FIG. 178), and is on the upper end side thereof. The region includes a common groove portion B24761 formed so that the arrangement of the transmission rods B7422 is transferred from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

Further, the second effect section B24770 arranged above the boundary position BCL71 is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7622 (see FIG. 178), and in the upper end side region thereof, the first plane BS71. It is provided with a common groove portion B24771 formed so that the arrangement of the transmission rod B7622 is transferred onto the second flat surface BS72.

That is, when the transmission rod B7422 enters the common groove portion B24761 of the first effect section B24760 and the transmission rod B7622 enters the common groove portion B24771 of the second effect section B24770, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are open. It can be switched to the state.

On the other hand, the configuration after the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged on the flat surface BS72, that is, the configuration at the lower position of the common groove portions B24761 and B24771, is different between the first production section B24760 and the second production section B24770. It is designed. The difference will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), the first effect section B24760 is recessed as a wide groove extending from the second plane BS72 to the first plane BS71 in a manner connected to the common groove portion B24761. The groove portion B24762 and the displacement limiting groove portion B24767 extending from the lower portion of the displacement allowable groove portion B24762 along the second plane BS72 are provided.

A plurality of projecting portions B24763 are projecting from the displacement allowable groove portion B24762 along a plane parallel to the second plane BS72. The projecting portion B24763 is formed in such a projecting manner that the displacement of the transmitting portion B7422 due to the urging force of the return spring (see FIG. 134) of the solenoid B1410 can be limited by the load (friction force) applied from the projecting portion B24763. NS.

That is, in the state where the transmission rod B7422 enters the displacement allowable groove portion B24762 from the common groove portion B24761 of the first production section B24760, the transmission rod B7422 is the second even in the situation where the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1410 is generated. Since it is maintained on the flat surface BS72, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in an open state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring (see FIG. 134) of the solenoid B1410 is applied, an urging force that tends to displace the transmission rod B7422 to the right is generated from the projecting portion B24763. When the load (friction force) is exceeded, the transmission rod B7422 is displaced to the right. When the transmission rod B7422 is displaced to the right side of the protrusion B24763, the frictional force from the protrusion B24763 is no longer generated, and the transmission rod B7422 is displaced toward the first flat surface BS71 by the urging force of the return spring.

That is, in a state where the transmission rod B7422 is arranged in the displacement allowable groove portion B24762 of the first effect section B24760, a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1410 is generated, and the transmission rod B7422 is on the right side of the protrusion portion B24763. When displaced to, the first guide plate B1300 changes to a closed state.

The mode of the urging force other than the return spring is not limited at all, but in the present embodiment, the load exceeding the urging force of the return spring described above will be described as being generated by the weight of the sphere.

The displacement limiting groove portion B24767 is formed along the second plane BS72 as a recessed groove having a groove width of Wmin. Therefore, in the state where the transmission rod B7422 is arranged in the displacement limiting groove portion B24763, the transmission rod B7422 is mechanically maintained on the second flat surface BS72, so that the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state.

In this way, in the state where the transmission rod B7422 is arranged in the first effect section B24760, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state until a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring is generated, and the first guide. It is possible to switch between the case where the plate B1300 is maintained in the open state regardless of the magnitude of the urging force.

As shown in FIG. 199 (c), the second effect section B24770 is a displacement limiting groove portion B24772 extending along the second plane BS72 in a manner connected to the lower portion of the common groove portion B24771, and its displacement. It is provided with a displacement allowable groove portion B24777 which is recessed as a wide groove extending from the second flat surface BS72 to the first flat surface BS71 in a manner connected to the limiting groove portion B24772.

The displacement limiting groove portion B24772 is formed along the second plane BS72 as a recessed groove having a groove width of Wmin. Therefore, in the state where the transmission rod B7622 is arranged in the displacement limiting groove portion B24772, the transmission rod B7622 is mechanically maintained on the second flat surface BS72, so that the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in the open state.

A plurality of projecting portions B24778 project from the displacement allowable groove portion B24777 along a plane parallel to the second plane BS72. The projecting portion B24778 is formed in such a projecting manner that the displacement of the transmitting portion B7622 due to the urging force of the return spring (see FIG. 178) of the solenoid B1610 can be limited by the load (friction force) applied from the projecting portion B24778. NS.

That is, in the state where the transmission rod B7622 enters the displacement allowable groove portion B24777 from the displacement limiting groove portion B24772 of the second production section B24770, the transmission rod B7622 is the second even in the situation where the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1610 is generated. The second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state because it is maintained on the flat surface BS72 of the above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring (see FIG. 178) of the solenoid B1610 is applied, an urging force that tends to displace the transmission rod B7622 to the right is generated from the projecting portion B24778. When the load (friction force) is exceeded, the transmission rod B7622 is displaced to the right. When the transmission rod B7622 is displaced to the right side of the protrusion B24778, the frictional force from the protrusion B24778 is not generated, and the transmission rod B7622 is displaced toward the first plane BS71 by the urging force of the return spring.

That is, in a state where the transmission rod B7622 is arranged in the displacement allowable groove portion B24777 of the second effect section B24770, a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1610 is generated, and the transmission rod B7622 is on the right side of the protrusion portion B24778. When displaced to, the second guide plate B1500 changes to a closed state.

The mode of the urging force other than the return spring is not limited at all, but in the present embodiment, the load exceeding the urging force of the return spring described above will be described as being generated by the weight of the sphere.

In this way, in the state where the transmission rod B7622 is arranged in the second effect section B24770, the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in the open state until a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring is generated, and the second guide. It is possible to switch between the case where the plate B1500 is maintained in the open state regardless of the magnitude of the urging force.

As described above, since the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged at 180-degree intervals, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in one of the production sections B24760 and B24770, they are also arranged in the other production sections B24770 and B24760. Transmission rods B7622 and B7422 are arranged.

When the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in the effect sections B24760 and B24770, the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are changed by changing the positions of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 with respect to the effect sections B24760 and B24770 in the rotation direction of the transmission rotating body B24720. Can be switched. In this embodiment, the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the state of the second guide plate B1500 can be made different from each other.

That is, by adjusting the rotation position of the transmission rotating body B24720, the transmission rod B7422 is arranged in the displacement limiting groove portion B24767 and the transmission rod B7622 is arranged in the displacement allowable groove portion B24777 (first open state). A state in which the rod B7422 is arranged in the displacement allowable groove portion B24762 and the transmission rod B7622 is arranged in the displacement limiting groove portion B24772 (second open state) can be arbitrarily configured.

Therefore, for example, after the transmission rotating body B24720 is controlled to rotate in the forward direction, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 pass through the common groove portions B24761 and B24771, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are both displaced forward (see FIG. 180), the transmission is transmitted. When the rotating body B24720 is in the first open state, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced so as to retract to the back side due to the load applied from the ball reaching the pre-entry region, and the first specific winning opening B1001 You can switch to a state where you can enter the ball.

Further, for example, after the transmission rotating body B24720 is controlled to rotate in the forward direction, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 pass through the common groove portions B24761 and B24771, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are both displaced forward (see FIG. 180), the transmission is transmitted. When the rotating body B24720 is in the second open state, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced so as to retract to the back side due to the load applied from the ball reaching the pre-entry region, and the second specific winning opening B1002 You can switch to a state where you can enter the ball.

In this way, until the ball reaches the pre-entry range, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are maintained in a state of being displaced toward the front side, and which of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 can be entered. It is possible to grasp whether the ball can enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 only when the ball reaches the range before entering the ball. It is configured to be.

As a result, even if you look at the guide plates B1300 and B1500 after the drive displacement, whether it is a jackpot type that can enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or a jackpot type that can enter the second specific winning opening B1002. Whether it is a big hit or not can be made indistinguishable. In addition, since the jackpot type can be clarified by reaching the ball in the pre-entry range, it is possible to promote the launch of the ball toward the pre-entry range.

Here, when the performance is different between the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 (see FIG. 157), which of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is opened in the jackpot game is directly linked to the profit. Although it is important information to be used, when it is known which specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 will be opened at the start of the round game, it is said that it is the specific winning opening B1002 (see FIG. 157) on the lower profit side. , The interest in round games will be lost early, and the interest of the players will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the round game is started, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the front side, and any specific winning opening B1001 is used until the ball reaches the range before entering the ball. , It is unknown whether B1002 will be released. As a result, the attention of the player who wants to know which jackpot type is increased, and the player's interest can be maintained until the ball reaches the pre-entry range.

With this configuration, even after the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven and displaced, it is possible to continue the enjoyment of predicting which jackpot type the jackpot is, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. ..

The control related to the execution of error notification in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can form an open state as the transmission rotating body B24720 is controlled to rotate. Therefore, for example, it is inappropriate to control the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 to unconditionally execute error notification when outputs are generated at the same time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 detect a situation in which the open state can be configured, and in that situation, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are controlled so as to allow simultaneous output. ..

That is, a determination means such as a detection sensor capable of determining the posture of the transmission rotating body B24720 is provided, and the transmission rod B7422 is arranged in the first production section B24760 of the transmission rotation body B24720 by the determination means, and the second production section. In the situation where it is determined that the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the B24770 (hereinafter, also referred to as “allowable situation”), the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are controlled so as not to execute error notification even if outputs occur at the same time. NS.

On the other hand, in a situation other than the above-mentioned allowable situation, when the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 simultaneously output, the error notification is controlled to be executed. As a result, it is possible to detect abnormalities at an early stage while maintaining the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are formed as inclined surfaces that incline downward toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to easily generate a load in the front-rear direction due to the weight of the ball on the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521.

Further, an inclined surface in the front-rear direction is formed only at a position where the ball rides (rolling surfaces B1321, B1521, see FIG. 180) in a state where both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are formed. As for the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 on which the ball does not ride while both are displaced forward, the above effect is not obtained even if the inclined surface in the front-rear direction is formed. doing.

Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is hindered from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, which occurs when the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 are formed as inclined surfaces in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are closer to the rear surface side (foundation member B1100 side) of the pre-entry range (see FIG. 126), the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 are rear surfaces. It may be configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the side. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the balls into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

Depending on this inclination, the components in the front-rear direction that decompose the weight of the sphere face the front side, but since the sphere does not ride in the state where both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 Both do not affect the state change due to the weight of the sphere from the state of being displaced forward.

In the present embodiment, the case where the projecting portions B24763 and B24778 are formed to increase the displacement resistance of the transmission portions B7422 and B7622 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance of the transmission portions B7422 and B7622 may be changed by forming wavy or saw blade-shaped grooves on the surface of the displacement allowable groove portions B24762 and B247777, or on the surface of the displacement allowable groove portions B24762 and B24777. The displacement resistance of the transmission portions B7422 and B7622 may be changed by performing the embossing (imparting the embossing).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in a range other than the non-driven section B7731, the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is defined by the shape of the approached groove portion B24730. , It is possible to prevent unexpected interlocking of the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

Next, the 25th embodiment will be described. In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the guide plates B23300 and B23500 for opening and closing the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are displaced while being engaged to prevent illegal entry of a ball has been described, but in the 25th embodiment, a pair The electric accessory B640a is displaced while being engaged, so that it is possible to prevent an illegal winning of the second winning opening 640. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200 (a) and 200 (b) are right side views of the electric accessory B640a in the 25th embodiment. In FIGS. 200A and 200B, for ease of understanding, only the electric accessory B640a, the drive solenoid B25110, the transmission member B25640, and the switching device B25700 are shown, and other members holding these members are shown. The illustration of the configuration is omitted. Since the arrangement of the electric accessory B640a has already been exemplified in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 177), the illustrated drawings (for example, FIG. 177) will be appropriately referred to in the following description.

The electric accessory B640a is arranged in pairs on the left and right in order to change the ease of entering the second winning opening 640, and is in a closed state that keeps the probability of entering the second winning opening 640 low (FIG. 177). (See) and the open state in which the probability of entering the second winning opening 640 increases by tilting left and right with respect to the lower end portion, and the state can be switched.

The electric accessory B640a is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60. As another member (device) arranged behind the front surface of the base plate 60, the drive solenoid B25110 fixed in position with respect to the base plate 60, and between the drive solenoid B25110 and the electric accessory B640a. The transmission member B25640, which is arranged so that the driving force generated from the drive solenoid B25110 can be transmitted to the electric accessory B640a, and the electric accessory B640a are arranged below the electric accessory B640 so that the state of the electric accessory B640a can be switched. The switching device B25700 and the switching device B25700 are provided.

The drive solenoid B25110 includes a tip member B25111 that slides in the front-rear direction by excitation, and a coil spring B25112 that applies an urging force to the tip member B25111.

When the drive solenoid B25110 is not excited, the tip member B25111 is arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 200A) by the urging force of the coil spring B25112, and when the drive solenoid B25110 is excited, the coil spring B25112 The tip member B25111 is driven against the urging force and is arranged at the rear side position (see FIG. 200B).

FIG. 200A shows a closed state (reduced state) of the electric accessory B640a, and FIG. 200B shows an open state (enlarged state, operating state) of the electric accessory B640a. That is, when the drive solenoid B25110 is in the non-excited state and the tip member B25111 is arranged in the front side position, the transmission member B25640 is in the downward tilted posture (see FIG. 200A), and the drive solenoid B25110 is in the excited state. When the tip member B25111 is arranged at the back surface side position, the transmission member B25640 is in an upward tilted posture (see FIG. 200 (b)).

In the present embodiment, the tip member B25111 is configured to allow a slight displacement (wobble) of the drive solenoid B25110 with respect to the plunger, so that the portion corresponding to (grasping) the pair of left and right electric accessories B640a. The displacement of the posture of the transmission member B25640 is allowed. This makes it possible for the electric accessory B640a to operate asymmetrically, which will be described in detail later.

The switching device B25700 is provided with a through hole in the thickness range of the base plate 60, or is arranged behind the front surface of the base plate 60 (behind the game area) by utilizing the gap space on the rear side of the base plate 60. The switching solenoid B25710, which is arranged so that the plunger can be displaced in the vertical direction, and the switching solenoid B25710 are urged upward so as to be arranged so as to face the back surface of the electric accessory B640a in the non-excited state. On the other hand, the switching member B25720 is configured to retract downward from the back surface side of the electric accessory B640a when the switching solenoid B25710 is excited.

The switching member B25720 is connected to the switching solenoid B25710 so as to be relatively displaceable in the left-right direction with respect to the plunger of the switching solenoid B25710. As a result, when the electric accessory B640a is configured to be in contact with the eccentric projecting portion B640b in the left-right direction as described later, when an urging force in the rotational direction is generated in the electric accessory B640a due to a collision of balls or the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the load is concentrated between the switching member B25720 and the eccentric protrusion B640b and the eccentric protrusion B640b is damaged.

The electric accessory B640a is rotatably supported by a columnar portion B25013b fixedly arranged on the front side of the base plate 60, and an eccentric projecting portion projecting from a position eccentric to the rotation axis toward the back side. It is provided with B640b.

The eccentric protrusion B640b is arranged so as to be vertically in contact with the claw-shaped portion B3642 of the transmission member B25640, and is electrically driven as the eccentric protrusion B640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-shaped portion B3642. The state of the accessory B640a changes.

The projecting receiving portion B25013a is a portion that is configured to be in contact with the transmission member B25640 and the tip member B25111 and defines the moving end position thereof, and the details will be described later.

The transmission member B25640 is configured so that two members having a shape similar to the above-mentioned transmission member B3640 are connected to each other, and is rotatably pivotally supported on the back surface side of the base plate 60 and is attached to the rotating tip portion. The claw-shaped portion B3642 to be arranged and the electric accessory B640a are configured to engage with each other. As a result, the state (open state or closed state) of the electric accessory B640a is changed according to the change in the posture of the transmission member B25640. Next, the details of the transmission member B25640 will be described with reference to FIG. 201.

FIG. 201A is a right side view of the transmission member B25640 in which the transmission member B25640 is visually recognized from the direction of the rotation axis BJ1, and FIG. 201B is a view of the transmission member B25640 in the direction of the arrow CCIb in FIG. It is a front view. In the description of FIG. 201, FIG. 200 will be referred to as appropriate.

The transmission member B25640 is formed on a pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 formed of a flexible resin material and formed of a plate-shaped portion intersecting (orthogonal) with the rotating shaft BJ1 and at the rotating tip of the rotating arm portion B25641. A claw-shaped portion B3642 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions B3643 projecting outward from the rotating arm portion B25641 in a columnar shape centered on the rotating shaft BJ1, and a rotating arm portion. The base end side extension portion B3644 extending in the radial direction from the rotation base end side of B25641 and the tip side extending in the direction parallel to the base end side extension portion B3644 from the rotation tip side of the rotary arm portion B25641. A non-fixed connecting rod that is formed in the shape of a cylindrical rod whose axis center is arranged on the rotating shaft BJ1 and is inserted into a pair of left and right rotating arm parts B25641 to connect the rotating arm parts B25641 to each other so as to be relatively rotatable. A section B25646 is provided.

The front end of the transmission member B25640 comes into contact with the lower end of the projecting receiving portion B25013a to restrict further rotation (see FIG. 200A). As described above, the transmission member B25640 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory B640a, and the ball can enter the second winning opening 640 in the open state of the electric accessory B640a.

The pair of rotating arm portions B25641 are arranged so as to face each other at a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the flow path of the sphere can be formed so that the sphere passes between the rotating arm portions B25641, so that the degree of freedom in designing the flow path on the downstream side of the second winning opening 640 can be improved.

That is, since the rotating arm portions B25641 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter of the sphere (11 mm), the sphere can flow between the opposing rotating arm portions B25641. As a result, the transmission member B25640 can be arranged so as to surround the flow path of the sphere from above, so that the transmission member B25640 and the flow path of the sphere can be compactly arranged.

The driving force transmission to the electric accessory B640a will be described. In the non-excited state of the drive solenoid B25110, the lower end portion of the tip member B25111 is in contact with the tip end side extension portion B3645 of the transmission member B25640 (see FIG. 200A). The tip member B25111 is urged to the front side by the coil spring B25112, and the posture of the transmission member B25640 is maintained by this urging force. As a result, the electric accessory B640a is maintained in the closed state.

In the excited state of the drive solenoid B25110, the lower end portion of the tip member B25111 is in contact with the base end side extension portion B3644 of the transmission member B25640 (see FIG. 200B). The tip member B25111 is urged to the back side by the driving force of the driving solenoid B25110, and the posture of the transmission member B25640 is maintained in a manner of being pushed toward the back side by this driving force. As a result, the electric accessory B640a is maintained in the open state.

Therefore, in the load transmission with the tip member B25111 side as the upstream side, the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 arranged on the downstream side are rotationally displaced so as to match their postures with each other. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right rotating arm portions B25641 are intentionally configured so that the posture can be relatively changed by the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645.

Therefore, load transmission with the electric accessory B640a side upstream (for example, transmission of the load generated by the collision of a ball or foreign matter such as a thread or a thin metal wire inserted in the game area is used to illegally give the electric accessory B640a. In the transmission of the load to be performed), the postures of the pair of left and right rotating arms B25641 can be changed. This will be described below.

202 (a) to 202 (c) are front views of the electric accessory B640a and the second winning opening 640. FIG. 202 (a) shows the closed state of the electric accessory B640a, and FIG. 202 (b) shows the open state of the electric accessory B640a whose state is switched by driving the drive solenoid B25110. FIG. 202 (c) shows a state in which the electric accessory B640a on the right side is forcibly displaced to the open position while the drive solenoid B25110 is not driven.

As shown in FIG. 202A, in the closed state of the electric accessory B640a, the switching member B25720 is arranged at a position between the eccentric protrusions B640b, and can be interlocked with the lateral displacement of the eccentric protrusions B640b. It is configured.

When the drive solenoid B25110 is excited based on the signal from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) to open and close the electric accessory B640a in the case where the lottery of the second symbol is won, the switching is performed in advance. A control program so that the solenoid B25710 is excited and the switching member B25720 is retracted in advance below the lower end of the eccentric protrusion B640b (outside the movement locus of the eccentric protrusion B640b) (see FIG. 202 (b)). Is configured.

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the switching solenoid B25710 is excited and the switching member B25720 is retracted downward, the eccentric protrusion B640b does not interfere with the switching member B25720, and the electric accessory B640a is rotationally displaced. Can be made to.

On the other hand, FIG. 202 (c) shows one of the electric accessory B640a (for example, the electric accessory on the right side) in a state where the switching solenoid B25710 is not excited, such as when the drive solenoid B25110 is deviated from the drive timing. It is a state when B640a) is tilted and displaced.

Since the switching device B25720 is still arranged in the displacement locus of the eccentric projecting portion B640b, the switching member B25720 is pushed by the eccentric projecting portion B640b and displaced to the left, and the switching member B25720 is subjected to the electric accessory B640a. The other (electric accessory B640a on the left side) is pushed and displaced. As a result, the other electric accessory B640a closes the second winning opening 640 so that the ball cannot enter.

Therefore, when the electric accessory B640a is displaced regardless of the driving force from the drive solenoid B25110 (see FIG. 200A), it is possible to prevent the ball from easily entering the second winning opening 640. ..

Examples of the case where the electric accessory B640a is displaced regardless of the driving force from the drive solenoid B25110 are, for example, the case where the ball is displaced by the impact when a ball flowing down the game area collides, or the case where a cheating person causes a foreign substance (foreign matter) in the game area. For example, a case where a thread or a thin metal wire) is illegally inserted and the electric accessory B640a is forcibly displaced through the foreign matter is exemplified. That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the situation exemplified in this way occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being easily entered into the second winning opening 640.

Since the switching member B25720 can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction, when the left electric accessory B640a is tilted and displaced regardless of the drive of the drive solenoid B25110, the right electric accessory B640a wins the second prize. The mouth 640 is displaced so as to be closed so that the ball cannot enter. That is, regardless of whether the electric accessory B640a to which the load is applied is the left or right electric accessory B640a, it is possible to prevent the ball from easily entering the second winning opening 640.

The state in which the second winning opening 640 is closed to the ball is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, as illustrated in the present embodiment, the size of the ball and the size of a general entry opening exemplified as the second winning opening 640 (FIG. 137), even if the entire second winning opening 640 is not blocked. , The size of the second winning opening 640 in front view may be closed to the extent that it is smaller than the size of the sphere, based on the relative relationship with the guide opening B1160), or the entire second winning opening 640 may be closed. It may be closed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202 (c), the distance between the pair of electric accessory B640a is set to be less than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere is on the front side of the second winning opening 640. It also prevents it from reaching.

Further, since the rotating tip of the electric accessory B640a displaced so as to block the second winning opening 640 is displaced until it exceeds the left-right center of the second winning opening 640 in the left-right direction, the left and right of the second winning opening 640 are left and right. When a collision is received from a ball flowing down along the vertical direction passing through the center, a load can be applied to the ball in a direction away from the second winning opening 640 in the left-right direction.

When a load that tilts and displaces the electric accessory B640a as described above is applied to both the pair of left and right electric accessory B640a, the eccentric protrusions B640b are moved in the left-right direction via the switching member B25720. The eccentric projecting portion B640b is in a state of being pressed against each other, and the displacement of the eccentric protrusion portion B640b inward to the left and right is suppressed by the switching member B25720. As a result, the displacement of the electric accessory B640a can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from easily entering the second winning opening 640.

The switching member B25720 is arranged behind the game area, and is configured to be able to prevent a ball flowing down the game area, a foreign substance entering the game area, or the like directly applying a load to the switching member B25720. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from easily entering the second winning opening 640 at an unscheduled timing.

In the state of FIG. 202 (c), the vertical position of the eccentric protrusion portion B640b is deviated, and the postures of the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 of the transmission member B25640 are deviated from each other. As described above, the B25640 allows the posture deviation by adopting a configuration in which the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 are connected to the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645.

In this embodiment as well, similarly to each of the above embodiments, the devices corresponding to the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged to detect the state of the electric accessory B640a (operation mode such as posture and operation pattern). It may be configured as possible. In this case, whether or not the electric accessory B640a is operating normally can be determined by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and control is performed so that error notification is executed based on the determination result. Can be done.

Next, the 26th embodiment will be described. The 26th embodiment is another embodiment of the 19th embodiment. In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260 are always in a state where the ball can be received has been described, but the variable winning device B26000 in the 26th embodiment has the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiver. An opening / closing plate B26500 for opening / closing the portion B4260 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 203 is a front view of the variable winning device B26000 according to the 26th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203, the variable winning device B26000 is an opening / closing plate configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction at a closed position overhanging the front side of the foundation member B9100 and an open position retracting rearward from the front side of the foundation member B9100. It is equipped with B26500.

When the opening / closing plate B26500 is arranged in the closed position, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260. Further, when the opening / closing solenoid (not shown) that generates a driving force for displacement of the opening / closing plate B26500 is excited and the opening / closing plate B26500 is arranged in the open position, it enters the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260. Balls are allowed.

Since the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B26500 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the left side in the front view, the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B26500 is configured to easily flow down to the left side. As a result, when the opening / closing plate B26500 is arranged in the closed position, the guide plate B9300 is closed, and even when a plurality of balls on the rolling surface B9311 fall, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260 It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a plurality of balls flow into a range where the left-right width is tapered between the right extending portion B1220 and the flow of the balls is hindered.

In the present embodiment, the guide plate B9300 is driven by the first solenoid B1410 (see FIG. 167), and the opening / closing plate B26500 is a drive device different from the first solenoid B1410 (for example, the second solenoid B1610 or the second solenoid B2610, etc.). ) Driven by. Therefore, the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B26500 are configured to be independently operable based on the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4).

Here, the above-mentioned switching device B23800 (see FIG. 193) may be adopted in a manner in which the engagement state and the disengagement state of the displacement between the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B26500 can be switched. That is, when the guide plate B9300 or the opening / closing plate B26500 is driven based on the control of the main control device 110, it can operate independently (disengagement is possible), but it does not depend on the control of the main control device 110. When the guide plate B9300 or the opening / closing plate B26500 is forcibly displaced due to an improper load, it may be configured to be interlocked (engaged).

In this case, even if an illegal load occurs, the guide plate B9300 is arranged in the rear (closed state) and the opening / closing plate B26500 is arranged in the front (closed state), or the guide plate B9300 is arranged in the front. The possible state can be limited to the state in which the opening / closing plate B26500 is arranged rearward (open state) together with the (open state).

In order to enter the guide port B4160, it is necessary that the guide plate B9300 is arranged rearward (closed state) and the opening / closing plate B26500 is arranged rearward (open state). It is possible to prevent illegal entry of the ball.

The function of the guide port B4160 is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a prize ball opening where the prize ball is paid out when the ball is entered, an out opening where the prize ball is not paid out, a starting port with a lottery of symbols, or the player is advantageous by passing the ball. It may be a V entrance having a specific area on the downstream side for acquiring a new state, or a falling entrance having a falling area on the downstream side for the player to acquire a disadvantageous state by passing the ball.

Next, the 27th embodiment will be described. The 27th embodiment is another embodiment of the 19th embodiment or the 26th embodiment. In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the ball passing through the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 flows down to the discharge path is described in one way, but the variable winning device B27000 in the 27th embodiment is the first detection sensor. The route on the downstream side of B1230 is branched, and the sphere can flow down through a plurality of routes. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 204 is a front view of the variable winning device B27000 according to the 27th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 204, the variable winning device B27000 is an opening / closing plate configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction at a closed position overhanging the front side of the foundation member B9100 and an open position retracting backward from the front side of the foundation member B9100. It is equipped with B27500.

Further, the variable winning device B27000 includes a branching range B27180 in which a ball can be arranged on the downstream side of the opening of the first detection sensor B1230. The branching range B27180 includes an advantageous side entry port B27181 formed so that a ball can pass directly under the opening / closing plate B27500, and a disadvantageous side entry formed so that a ball rolled to the right on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B27500 can pass through. It is provided with a ball mouth B27182.

In the present embodiment, by detecting the entry of the ball into the advantageous side entry port B27181 during the jackpot, the player is given the right to change the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed (during the probability change). Configured to be possible (acts as a specific area). On the other hand, when only the ball entering the disadvantaged side entry port B27182 is detected during the big hit, the game state after the big hit game is configured to be the time saving state (time saving medium) (as a non-specific area). Function). That is, the profit given to the player by entering the unfavorable side entrance B27182 is set lower than the profit given to the player by entering the advantageous side entrance B27181.

The profit generated by entering the ball into the advantageous side entry port B27181 and the disadvantage side entry port B27182 is not limited to this. For example, the guide plate B9300 may be controlled to open and close in the small hit game, and the right to shift to the big hit game may be acquired by entering the ball into the advantageous side entry port B27181 (so-called one-kind two-kind mixture). It may be configured as a machine).

Whether the ball that has entered the branching range B27180 enters the advantageous side entry port B27181 or the disadvantageous side entry port B27182 can be controlled by the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate B27500.

When the opening / closing plate B27500 is arranged at an open position (a position retracted rearward from the front surface of the thin plate member B1110), the ball is allowed to enter the advantageous side entry port B27181. Further, when an opening / closing solenoid (not shown) that generates a driving force for displacement of the opening / closing plate B27500 is excited and the opening / closing plate B27500 is arranged at a closed position (a position protruding forward from the front surface of the thin plate member B1110). It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the advantageous side entry port B27181.

Since the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B27500 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right side in the front view, the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B27500 is configured to easily flow down to the right side. As a result, when the opening / closing plate B27500 is arranged at the closed position, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B27500 can be smoothly guided to the disadvantaged side entry port B27182.

In the present embodiment, the guide plate B9300 is driven by the first solenoid B1410 (see FIG. 167), and the opening / closing plate B27500 is a drive device different from the first solenoid B1410 (for example, the second solenoid B1610 or the second solenoid B2610, etc.). ) Driven by. Therefore, the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B27500 are configured to be independently operable based on the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4).

Here, the above-mentioned switching device B23800 (see FIG. 193) may be adopted in a manner in which the engagement state and the disengagement state of the displacement between the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B27500 can be switched. That is, when the guide plate B9300 or the opening / closing plate B27500 is driven based on the control of the main control device 110, it can operate independently (disengagement is possible), but it does not depend on the control of the main control device 110. When the guide plate B9300 or the opening / closing plate B27500 is forcibly displaced due to an improper load, it may be configured to be interlocked (engaged).

In this case, an illegal load is applied to the closed guide plate B9300, and the ball is forcibly displaced toward the open state, so that the ball can enter the opening of the first detection sensor B1230. Even if the guide plate B9300 is displaced, the opening / closing plate B27500 can be displaced to the closed position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the advantageous side entry port B27181. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the advantageous side entry port B27181 by fraudulent means.

The functions of the advantageous side entry port B27181 and the disadvantageous side entry port B27182 are not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a prize ball opening where the prize ball is paid out when the ball is entered, an out opening where the prize ball is not paid out, a starting port with a lottery of symbols, or the player is advantageous by passing the ball. It may be a V entrance having a specific area on the downstream side for acquiring a new state, or a falling entrance having a falling area on the downstream side for the player to acquire a disadvantageous state by passing the ball.

Further, although the case where there is a difference in the functions of the advantageous side entry port B27181 and the disadvantageous side entry port B27182 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the functions of the advantageous side entry port B27181 and the disadvantage side entry port B27182 may be set to be the same. Further, the advantages and disadvantages may be reversed and set.

Although the case where the opening / closing plate B27500 is arranged in the closed position by the excitation of the solenoid has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the solenoid may be arranged in a closed position in a non-excited state, and may be displaced to an open position by exciting the solenoid.

Although it has been explained that the opening / closing plate B27500 is driven by the driving device, the driving mode thereof is not limited in any way. For example, the opening / closing operation may be controlled after a lapse of a predetermined time based on the operation timing of the guide plate B9300, or the opening / closing operation may be controlled so as to always operate constantly after the power is turned on.

Next, the center frame C86 in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 220.

In the first embodiment, the case where the center frame 86 is composed of one component has been described, but the center frame C86 in the 28th embodiment is composed of two members, an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 205 is a front view of the game board C13 in the 28th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 205, the center frame C86 is a member that is formed in a shape that can be fitted to the window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) of the base plate 60 and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by a tapping screw or the like. An upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b are provided.

The upper frame C86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side of FIG. 205) and the left and right (left side and right side of FIG. 205) in the window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame C86b is the base plate. It is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 205) of the window portion 60a of the 60. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is a portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side of FIG. 205) of a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (the window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) of the base plate 60). That is, the portion in which the lower frame C86b is arranged) is omitted, and the other portions other than the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. FIG. 206 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 207 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. In FIGS. 206 and 207, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially shown, and the tapping screw for fastening and fixing the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the lower frame C86b has an inlet COPin formed as an opening capable of accepting a sphere, a first passage CRt1 communicating with the inlet COPin, and a first passage thereof. The second passage CRt2 through which the ball guided by CRt1 is flowed down, and the third passage through which the ball guided through the second passage CRt2 (the ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction of the second passage CRt2) is flowed down. The fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, in which the CRt3 and the ball guided through the third passage CRt3 are distributed by the distribution member C170 and flowed down, and the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt4 are flowed down. A 6-passage CRt6 and an outlet COPout formed as an opening for the ball guided through the 5th passage CRt5 to flow out to the game area are formed (see FIGS. 214 and 215).

An upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 205) is formed in the upper frame C86a. The upper frame passage CRt0 guides a ball that has flowed in (entered) from the area on the left side (left side in FIG. 205) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61). The receiving port COPin of the lower frame C86b is communicated with the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0.

That is, the ball that has flowed into (entered) the upper frame passage CRt0 from the game area flows into (enters) the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b from the upper frame passage CRt0 via the receiving port COPin.

The lower frame C86b is provided with a distribution member C170 that operates according to the weight of the sphere (see FIGS. 214 and 215), and when the connected spheres are guided through the third passage CRt3. , The preceding ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt4, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fifth passage CRt5. When the distance between the spheres is larger than a predetermined amount, both the preceding sphere and the trailing sphere are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4.

Here, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 205) in the vertical direction. .. Therefore, the ball distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 is likely to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, the sixth passage CRt6 has a concave surface formed by inclining downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) in order to allow the ball guided by the sixth passage CRt6 to flow out to the game area, and the first prize is awarded. Not only is the central outflow surface C181 formed (arranged) at a position above the vertical direction of the mouth 64, but also the position is positioned in the width direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 205) of the game board 13 from above the vertical direction of the first winning opening 64. Lateral outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. Further, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt6, a lateral outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outflow surface C182 to the game area than the probability of flowing out from the central outflow surface C181 to the game area in the sixth passage CRt6. , It is difficult to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is lower than the ball distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 described above).

As described above, in the lower frame C86b in the present embodiment, when the connected spheres flow into the third passage CRt3, the preceding spheres are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4), while the rear spheres are distributed. The ball is distributed to a passage (in the present embodiment, a passage in which the ball is almost certainly won in the first winning opening 64 (fifth passage CRt5)) in which the ball to be carried is easily won in the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball will win the first winning opening 64 (make sure that the ball wins), the player can be expected to form a state in which the balls are connected, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 220 in addition to FIGS. 206 to 207.

FIG. 208 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 209 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. 210 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, FIG. 211 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 212 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. 213 (a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b in the direction of arrow CCXIIIa of FIG. 211, and FIG. 213 (b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b in the direction of arrow CCXIIIb of FIG. 211.

214 and 215 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b on the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210, and FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b on the CCXVI-CCXVI line of FIG. 211. 217 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b in the CCXVIIa portion of FIG. 214, and FIG. 217 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b in the CCXVIIb-CCXVIIb line of FIG. 210. be. Note that FIG. 214 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 215 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 206 to 217, the lower frame C86b is a front member C110, a dish member C120 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the front member C110, and the front member C110. A back member C130 arranged to face the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) at a predetermined interval, and a first intermediate member C140 arranged on the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the back surface member C130. The second intermediate member C150 is arranged to face the front surface of the back member C130 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) at a predetermined interval, and the first device is interposed between the back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. It is arranged on the back surface of the installation member C160 and the distribution member C170, the front member C110, the second interposition member C180 interposed between the first and second intermediate members C140 and C150, and the back member C130. A decorative member C190 and a detour member C200 are provided.

The lower frame C86b is one (single unit) by fastening and fixing each member to each other by tapping screws and rotatably supporting the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 to the back member C130. ) (See FIG. 206).

Further, in the lower frame C86b, the members other than the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (that is, the member on the back side and the sphere can be seen through), and the distribution member is composed of a resin material. C170 and decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, and the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution member C170 and the displacement of the decorative member C190 accompanying the operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In this case, the lower frame C86b suffices if at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 are made of a light-transmitting resin material. At least one or both of the connected state of the balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether the distance between the preceding ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C170 are given to the player. On the other hand, if it is possible to visually recognize that the trailing sphere has been distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170, such a sphere has a high probability of moving from the outlet COPout to the first winning opening 64 (in the present embodiment). This is because it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 because almost the entire ball enters the ball.

The distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 may be made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material and painted on the front surface thereof, or may have a sticker attached to the front surface thereof.

On the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 are made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. It may be painted or attached with a sticker. That is, the ball passing through the third passage CRt3 and the distribution member C170 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C110 includes a plate-shaped front portion C111 forming the front surface, a plate-shaped bottom surface portion C112 erected from the back surface of the front surface portion C111, and one side in the longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111 and the bottom surface portion C112. It is provided with a connecting portion C113 arranged on the side in the direction of arrow L).

A plurality of insertion holes C111a are bored in the front surface portion C111 along the outer edge on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the front surface portion C111 in the plate thickness direction. The lower frame C86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60.

An outlet COPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) in the front portion C111 at a position above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 205) in the vertical direction. As described above, the outflow port COPout is an opening that serves as an outlet when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the second interposition member C180 is arranged to face the bottom surface of the bottom surface C112, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the bottom surface C112 and the second interposition member C180 (recess C183). NS. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the through hole formed through the second interposition member C180 is a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

The bottom surface portion C112 is continuously formed over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the vertical tip of the bottom surface portion C112 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) hits the front surface of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. Be touched. As a result, the intrusion of foreign matter such as wire is suppressed.

A receiving port COPin is formed in the connecting portion C113 (drilled in the plate thickness direction). As described above, the receiving port COPin is an opening that receives a sphere from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a. In the state where the center frame C86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front surface portion C111 and the connecting portion C113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. As a result, the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 and the receiving port COPin are communicated with each other.

The dish member C120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C121 and a lower bottom surface portion C122 forming the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C123 and a lower side wall portion C124 forming the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C121 is extended along the left-right direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage in the top view, and is inclined downward in the direction away from the receiving port COPin (arrow R direction). Is formed. The upper bottom surface portion C121 is located below the receiving port COPin in the vertical direction (on the side in the arrow D direction), and a step in the vertical direction is formed between the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the upper frame passage CRt0. That is, the dish member C120 is configured to freely drop a ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.

A concave groove C121a having a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion C121 in the width direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 217). The concave groove C121a extends linearly along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The groove width of the concave groove C121 (dimension in the arrow LR direction) is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the groove depth of the concave groove C121a (dimension in the arrow UD direction) is the bottom surface of the concave groove C121a. The depth is set so that the sphere does not touch.

As a result, the sphere on the upper bottom surface portion C121 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridge line portions where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the concave groove C121a intersect). Therefore, the contact area between the sphere and the passage can be increased as compared with the case where the concave groove C121a is not formed (that is, the sphere is supported at only one place). Therefore, the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage CRt0 can be buffered (received), and the resistance when the ball rolls can be increased.

As described above, the ball is dropped from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121, and the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 is supported at two places. When a sphere flows (falls) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), the flow of the preceding sphere is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), and the sphere follows. It is possible to make it easier to catch up with the preceding ball. Therefore, the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere can be reduced.

The upper side wall portion C123 partitions the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), respectively. The passage width should be the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can be guided only in series.

A notch C123a is formed in the upper side wall C123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface C121 (first passage CRt1), and the upper bottom surface C121 (first) is formed through the notch C123a. A ball can flow down from the passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

The lower bottom surface portion C122 is extended along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage in the top view, and the extension direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow). The cross-sectional shape on the plane including the UD direction) is formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 217 (b)).

The lower side wall portion C124 has one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (direction of guiding the sphere) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) and the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). ) And the passage width are separated. The passage width should be the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can be guided only in series.

The lower bottom surface portion C122 is arranged in parallel with the upper bottom surface portion C121 in a top view, and is one end side in the longitudinal direction of the downstream end (end portion on the arrow B direction side) of the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the lower bottom surface portion C122. (End portion on the arrow B direction side) is arranged at a position adjacent to each other.

At the position corresponding to the notch C123a in the upper side wall C123, the lower side wall C124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface C121 (first passage CRt1) via the notch C123a. A ball can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

In the lower side wall portion C124, a notch portion C124a is formed at a position corresponding to the bottom portion (the position where the height position in the vertical direction is the lowest) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 curved in an arc shape, and this notch is formed. A ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) via the portion C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed by being curved in an arc shape, and is formed from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) on its ascending slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122). Since the sphere is flowed down, the flowed sphere is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then the cutout portion C124a A ball can flow down from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) at a predetermined interval, the lower bottom surface portion C122 ( By using the reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt2), it is possible to make the preceding ball catch up with the following ball and reduce the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball (connect the balls). ..

The outflow surface C122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion C122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (that is, the position where the height position in the vertical direction is the lowest). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for causing the ball guided by the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface that inclines downward toward.

Therefore, after reciprocating the lower bottom surface portion C122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly flowed out (flowed down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) by using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), the spheres in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the spheres in a continuous state) are connected. Can flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the above.

The width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the sphere reciprocating in the lower bottom surface portion C122, dimension in the arrow FB direction) is the notch portion C124a in the top view. The closer to the side, the larger the shape is formed (see FIG. 210).

Further, in a top view, when the sphere is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) of the notch portion C124a, the sphere rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the sphere that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) comes into contact with the lower side wall portion C124 at the position farthest from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the sphere is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C124). Even in the state of rolling (position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that it overlaps the center of the sphere in the top view (the locus of the lower top of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C122, the sphere that has flowed down into the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is subjected to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage). There is a possibility that the outflow surface C122a may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the CRt2) reciprocates even once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times. .. That is, there is a risk that the two spheres will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) with the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere not reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch portion C124a (in the direction of arrow L) (see FIG. 217). As a result, due to the action of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122, the sphere is pressed against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) of the notch portion C124a, and the sphere is pressed against the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second). It can be rolled (reciprocated) in the two-passage CRt2).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is easy to get over (easily cross) the outflow surface C122a and sufficiently reciprocate the ball along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to make the preceding sphere catch up with the following sphere and reduce the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere (connect the spheres).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C122, and is vertical. In the arc shape that is convex downward in the direction (in the direction of arrow D), see FIG. 217 (b)), the radius of the arc shape on one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction is on one end side and the other end side. It is made smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between them (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or its vicinity), it is easy to reciprocate the sphere and to catch up with the sphere following the preceding sphere. , The ball does not reach the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating sphere becomes low (one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or its vicinity), and the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow region including the outflow surface C122a. In the step), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

The dish member C120 is arranged so that the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 is arranged. Since it is arranged inside, the space formed by the window portion 60a in the front-rear direction can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the total length of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) can be secured, and the balls can be easily connected.

The back member C130 includes a main body portion C131 formed in a plate shape, a lower stopper portion C132 erected from the front of the main body portion C131, an upper stopper portion C133, and a shaft support portion C134.

The main body C131 is formed with an opening C131a which is an opening for communicating the passages (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C131. Below the opening C131a, a recess C131b having a recessed outer edge of the main body C131 is formed. The recess C131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt5 while facing the bypass member C200.

The lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the distribution member C170 when the distribution member C170 is displaced downward, and defines a second position of the distribution member C170 (see FIG. 215). .. On the other hand, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be in contact with the upper surface of the distribution member C170 when the distribution member C170 is displaced upward, and defines the first position (predetermined position) of the distribution member C170. (See FIG. 214).

The shaft support portion C134 is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. The shaft C192 is fixed to the decorative member C190, and the distribution member C170 is non-rotatably connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back surface of the main body C131, so that the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 are connected. Together, it is rotatably supported by the main body C131 (shaft support C134). Further, the shaft C192 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion C134 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C141, a bottom surface portion C142, a top surface portion C143, and a passage portion C144 which are erected from the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body portion C141, and the back surface thereof. It is arranged on the left side of the front view of the member C130.

In a state where the first intermediate member C140 is arranged on the back member C130, the erected tips (sides in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the passage portion C144 are brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface member C130. As a result, the third passage CRt3 is formed by the space partitioned by the back member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (main body portion C141, bottom surface portion C142, and top surface portion C143), and the back surface member C130 and the first intermediate member are formed. The fourth passage CRt4 is formed by the space partitioned by the C140 (passage portion C144) and the distribution member C170 at the second position (see FIG. 215).

The bottom surface portion C142 is inclined downward from the dish member C120 side toward the distribution member C170 side. Further, the passage portion C144 includes an opposing portion C144a formed at a position facing the distribution member C170 at the second position and a bottom surface portion C144b forming a rolling surface of the sphere, and the bottom surface portion C144b is the first. It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the distribution member C170 side at two positions toward the facing portion C144a side and downwardly inclined from the back member C130 side toward the front member C110 side. Therefore, the sphere can be received in the fourth passage CRt4 from the distribution member C170 displaced to the second position, and the sphere can flow out (roll) to the sixth passage CRt6.

Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the plate member C120 rolls a sphere along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the plate member C120 to the bottom surface portion C142 is moved in the left-right direction (left-right direction). A sphere is flowed down along the arrow LR direction (to the right in this embodiment), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) is a left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the sphere flowed down from the dish member C120. ) (To the right in this embodiment).

In this case, the distance between the preceding sphere CB1 and the trailing sphere CB2 (see FIG. 218) is determined by the reciprocating movement in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). It flows down from the side bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) in the left-right direction, and flows down (rolls) along the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) in the left-right direction. ), So that the distance between the two balls CB1 and CB2 can be confirmed from the front view, and the player can easily see the distance. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The second intermediate member C150 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C151 and a bottom surface portion C152 erected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body portion C151, and is arranged on the right side of the back surface member C130 in the front view. Will be set up. In a state where the second intermediate member C150 is arranged on the back member C130, the vertical tip (side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C152 comes into contact with the front surface of the back member C130.

The main body C151 is formed with a recess C151a having a recessed outer edge thereof. A detour member C200 (gutter portion C203) is arranged to face the bottom surface of the bottom surface portion C152, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C151a and the bottom surface portion C152 and the detour member C200 (gutter portion C203). Will be done. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the detour member C200 is formed in a tubular shape and is a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

The first interposition member C160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a sphere in a part of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the back surface member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned by the back surface member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the first intermediate member C160.

The cross-sectional shape of the first interposition member C160 in a plane including its extension direction (arrow LR direction) and vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is directed downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). It is formed by being curved in a convex arc shape (see FIG. 215). Therefore, the ball distributed to the first intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) by the distribution member C170 can be reciprocated on the first interposing member C160 and then flowed out to the opening C131a.

Thereby, for example, the time required for the balls distributed by the distribution member C170 to flow out to the opening C131a can be lengthened as compared with the configuration in which the balls are directly discharged to the opening C131a. That is, it is possible to make it easier for a player who expects to form a state in which the probability of winning a ball (winning) in the first winning opening 64 is formed, and to secure time to enjoy such a state. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first interposition member C160 flows out to a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (that is, the position where the height position in the vertical direction of the rolling surface of the first interposition member C160 is the lowest). The surface C160a is recessed. The outflow surface C160a is a portion for causing the sphere guided by the first intervening member C160 to flow out to the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface that inclines downward toward the opening C131a.

The distribution member C170 includes a main body portion C171 in which the fitting hole C171a is formed on one side, and a receiving portion C172 formed on the other side opposite to the side in which the fitting hole C171a of the main body portion C171 is formed. And a rolling portion C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body portion C171, and is rotatable about a shaft C192 (shaft support portion C134) fitted in the fitting hole C171a.

The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole having a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192 having a cross-sectional shape matching the cross-sectional shape is fitted so that the shaft C192 is non-rotatably fixed to the main body portion C171. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 without rotation, so that the main body C171 (distribution member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192. NS.

In this case, the center of gravity of the unit composed of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 is on one side with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192) (the side opposite to the distribution member C170 across the axis C192, the right side in FIG. 214). Be eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distribution member C170 is raised on the receiving portion C172 side (rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in the front view), and the rotation is restricted by the upper stopper portion C133 (first position). (A state in which it is arranged at a predetermined position)) (see FIG. 214).

On the other hand, in a state where the sphere is received by the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, the position of the center of gravity as a whole is oscillated with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192) with respect to the other side (axis C192) due to the weight of the sphere. It is eccentric to the side on which the component member C170 is arranged, the left side in FIG. 214). Therefore, in the state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the receiving portion C172 side of the distribution member C172 is lowered (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in the front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C132. (See FIG. 215).

In the decorative member C190, at least a part of the main body portion C191 is visible to the player, and the decorative member C190 (main body) is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position of the distribution member C170. The unit C191) is also rotated, and the position (form) visually recognized by the player is changed. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the state of the distribution member C170 (that is, the distribution direction of the sphere) based on the position (form) of the decorative member C190. Further, the decorative member C190 can have both a role as a weight for displacing the distribution member C170 and a role as a portion for recognizing the distribution direction of the sphere, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

After the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, when a ball is discharged (outflowed) from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140, the distribution member C170 moves to the distribution member C170. It is returned to the first position (predetermined position) by the action of its own weight (eccentricity from the axis C192 of the center of gravity position) of the unit composed of the decorative member C190.

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C170 to the first position is performed by the own weight (weight) of the unit including the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190. Therefore, for example, an urging spring is provided. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the distribution member C170 is urged toward the first position by the urging spring.

Further, as compared with the case of using the urging spring, the displacement (returning operation) of the distribution member C170 to the first position can be made slower, so that the trailing ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling portion C173. can. That is, after the distribution member C170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the trailing sphere CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow into the rolling portion C173. The time required for the displacement can be increased. Further, a third ball that follows the trailing ball CB2 can also be provided with the possibility of reaching the rolling portion C173 (see FIGS. 218 to 220).

The receiving portion C172 supports the facing portion C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 at the first position and the received ball at the first position, and rolls the ball toward the passage portion C144 at the second position. It includes a bottom surface portion C172b that forms a rolling surface for movement.

In the receiving portion C172, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom surface portion C172b is the facing portion. It is formed so as to incline upward from C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 214).

Here, in the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C172a is inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (rolling of the facing portion C172a). If the moving portion C173 side is inclined in a direction away from the third passage CRt3 than the bottom surface portion C172b side), the ball colliding with the opposing portion C172a may be flipped upward and flow back to the third passage CRt3. There is.

On the other hand, the facing portion C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, so that the first intermediate member C140 The ball received from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the above can be received by the facing portion C172a, and the backflow to the third passage CRt3 can be suppressed.

Further, in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed so as to be inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140. If this is the case, the sphere received by the receiving portion C172 will flow out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 at an early stage, and the weight of the sphere cannot be used, so that the distribution member C170 reaches the second position. There is a risk that it will not be allowed.

On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed so as to be inclined upward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position. The ball can be held on the bottom surface portion C172b at least until the distribution member C170 rotates by a predetermined amount from the first position. As a result, it is possible to delay the time until the ball received by the receiving portion C172 flows out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140. As a result, the weight of the sphere can be effectively used to ensure that the distribution member C170 reaches the second position.

For the reason described above (preventing backflow to the third passage CRt3), the facing portion C172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C173 side is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom surface portion C172b side.

The receiving portion C172 is formed so that the bottom surface portion C172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position ( (See FIG. 215). As a result, the ball received by the receiving portion C172 can be reliably flowed out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140.

Further, while the sphere is rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b, the weight of the sphere is caused to act on the distribution member C170, and the distribution member C170 is placed in the second position (that is, the trailing sphere is moved to the rolling portion C173 (third). It can be easily maintained in a state where it can be guided to the 5-passage CRt5).

The rolling portion C173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) a sphere that rolls on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second intermediate member C160 (fifth passage CRt5). Yes, in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the second interposition member C160 (fifth passage CRt5). It is located (erected) between the upstream end.

The upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is formed so as to project from the facing portion C172a of the receiving portion C172. That is, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (the end on the arrow L direction side) is projected from the facing portion C172a toward the upstream side (first intermediate member C140 (third passage CRt3) side, arrow L direction). A plate-shaped part is formed. By inserting this plate-shaped portion between the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2, both spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be separated.

In the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, the first intermediate member C140 rolls with respect to the height position at the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). The height position at the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the portion C173 (rolling surface) is located downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and the distribution member C170 arranged at the second position is directed to the first position by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle). ) Is displaced (rotated), the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are arranged at the same height position.

Here, when a sphere rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the sphere. (Rotation), the lower surface of the distribution member C170 is brought into contact with the lower stopper portion C132, so that the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position.

In this case, the distribution member C170 may be flipped upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132, and the distribution member C170 is flipped upward to cause the first intermediate member. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) is located above the vertical direction (arrow U direction) with respect to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) of the C140. Then, there is a possibility that the ball cannot flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the rolling portion C173.

In particular, when a sphere collides with the distribution member C170 (the end face on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173) that has been flipped upward, and the distribution member C170 is further flipped upward by the impact of the collision of the sphere (sphere). (When the distribution member C170 is pushed further upward), the sphere flows into the receiving portion C172 (although it was originally a sphere that should have flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C173). May be accepted).

On the other hand, in the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) Since a step is formed between the two, even if the distribution member C170 is flipped upward due to an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is larger than the downstream end of the bottom surface C142 due to the step between the two. It is possible to suppress the position in the upper direction in the vertical direction (direction of arrow U). That is, it is permissible for the distribution member C170 to be flipped up by the amount of the step between the two. Therefore, the sphere to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C173 (the trailing sphere CB2 whose distance from the preceding sphere CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). Can be easily flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C173.

Further, in the distribution member C170, the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface on the arrow L direction side) is from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 ( It is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bottom surface portion C142). That is, as for the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173, the edge portion on the receiving portion C172 (opposing portion C172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C173. It is formed in a shape that is close to each other.

As a result, when a sphere collides with the distribution member C170 (the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173) that is flipped up upward, the distribution member C170 (the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173) is collided from the sphere. ) Can be the direction of the force acting to push down the distribution member C170 downward. As a result, the sphere to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C173 (the trailing sphere CB2 having a distance between the preceding sphere CB1 and the preceding sphere CB1 being equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). ) Can be easily flowed into (rolled) into the rolling portion C173.

The receiving portion C172 and the rolling portion C173 are arranged on the same side with respect to C192 (the side in which the distribution member C170 is rotated in the same direction depending on the weight of the sphere). Therefore, even if the sphere is discharged from the receiving portion C172 after the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position by the weight of the sphere received by the receiving portion C172, the weight of the sphere that rolls on the rolling portion C173 is applied. By utilizing it, the distribution member C170 can be maintained in the second position. That is, when there is a sphere that guides the sphere to the fifth passage CRt5, the posture of the distribution member C170 can be maintained in the posture for guiding the sphere to the fifth passage CRt5 by using the weight of the sphere. ..

Therefore, it is not necessary to maintain the distribution member C170 in the second position by utilizing the weight of the sphere (the sphere that rolls the bottom surface portion C172b) received by the receiving portion C172, and the extended length of the bottom surface portion C172b. Can be shortened, and the distribution member C170 can be miniaturized accordingly. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the distribution member C170 can be increased.

Here, the distribution member C170 has a direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) toward the receiving portion C172 (direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the ball, arrow R direction) and the receiving portion C172. The direction in which the ball rolls from the to the passage portion C144 (the direction in which the received ball is rolled, the arrow L direction) is the opposite direction. That is, the receiving portion C172 is configured to reverse (change direction) the flow (rolling) direction of the sphere.

As a result, the ball is distributed by the amount of time required for reversal, as compared with the case where the direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the ball and the direction in which the ball rolls from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 are in the same direction. It is possible to secure a time for staying in the member C170 (receiving portion C172), and it is possible to easily maintain the distribution member C170 in the second position by utilizing the weight of the sphere staying in the receiving portion C172. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C173.

Further, since the residence time can be secured by utilizing the inversion of the sphere, the extending length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened by that amount, and the distribution member C170 can be miniaturized. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the distribution member C170 can be increased.

The second intervening member C180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the sphere in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the front member C111 and the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed by the space partitioned by the front member C110, the first intermediate member C140, the second intermediate member C150, and the second intermediate member C180.

As described above, on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C180, the front side (arrow) is used to allow the ball guided by the second interposing member C180 (sixth passage CRt6) to flow out to the game area. A concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and side outflow surface C182) formed by inclining downward toward (F direction) is formed. Further, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6, and the lateral outflow surface C182 is arranged at the bottom of the undulations, while the central outflow surface C181 is arranged at the top of the undulations.

The upper edge (edge in the arrow U direction) of the front portion C111 of the front member C110 is the upper surface (rolling) of the second interposition member C180 except for the region where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. It is projected upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the moving surface). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member C180 flows out (flows down) to the game area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is recessed in the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C180, and as described above, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110. ..

The decorative member C190 includes a main body portion C191 formed in a plate shape and a shaft C192 fixed to the main body portion C191, and is connected (integrated) to the distribution member C170 via the shaft C192 as described above. ). A design such as a character is displayed on the front of the main body C191 by printing or attaching a sticker, and the movement of the distribution member C170 can be visually recognized by the player based on the movement (displacement) of the character. ..

The axis C192 is arranged in a posture orthogonal to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 205). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the lower frame C86b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The detour member C200 further extends the plate-shaped main body C201, the wall surface C202 erected from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the main body C201, and a part of the wall surface C202 toward the front side. It is provided with a gutter portion C203 formed by installing the gutter portion C203, and is arranged on the back surface side of the back surface member C130 at a position facing the opening C131a.

In the state where the detour member C200 is arranged on the back member C130, the vertical tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall surface portion C202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C130 (main body portion C131), and the gutter portion C203. The tip of the erection (on the side in the direction of arrow F) is in contact with the back surface of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge portion of the gutter portion C203 is in contact with the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152). Be touched.

As a result, the space partitioned by the back member C130 (main body C131) and the detour member C200 (main body C201 and the wall surface C202), and the second intermediate member C150 (bottom surface C152) and the detour member C200 (gutter). A part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned by C203) (see FIG. 216).

The gutter portion C203 is inclined downward from the back surface member C130 side toward the second intermediate member C150 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the bypass member C200 from the opening C131a of the back member C130 is rolled on the gutter portion C203, and is between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 and the second intermediate member C180 (recessed portion C183). It can flow into the fifth passage CRt5 formed in.

Next, the sphere distribution operation by the distribution member C170 will be described. 218 to 220 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the sphere distribution operation by the distribution member C170, and correspond to the cross section taken along the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210.

Note that FIGS. 218 (a) and 218 (b) show a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, and corresponds to FIG. 214. 219 (b) and 220 show a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, and corresponds to FIG. 215.

As shown in FIG. 218 (a), when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the receiving portion C172 can accept the sphere CB1 that rolls on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (sphere). CB1 can flow in).

That is, in the receiving portion C172, the facing portion C172a is arranged at a position intersecting the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface), and vertically below the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). The bottom surface portion C172b is arranged at a position (in the direction of arrow D).

In the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the bottom surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C173. The distance between the opposite surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow D) and the upstream end (the end on the side in the direction of arrow L) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere can pass). ..

On the other hand, the rolling portion C173 cannot accept the ball CB1 that rolls on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in) when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position. Is placed in.

That is, in the rolling portion C173, the bottom surface portion C172b is arranged at a position (one step higher position) in the vertical direction (arrow U direction) with respect to the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C173 and the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from overcoming the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 at the first position.

In the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 (the end on the arrow R direction side) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (arrow L). The distance from the end on the directional side) is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimension that the sphere cannot pass through). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from overcoming the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 at the first position. However, the interval may be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

When the sphere CB1 (leading sphere) and the sphere CB2 (the sphere that follows the leading sphere at a predetermined interval) roll on the bottom surface C142 of the first intermediate member C140, FIG. 218 (b). ), The sphere CB1 flows into (accepts) the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, and the sphere CB1 is brought into contact with (received) the opposing portion C172a and held by the receiving portion C172.

When the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the sphere CB2 catches up with the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 comes into contact with the sphere CB1. As described above, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the distance between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere (the dimension is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Since the size is set so that the sphere cannot pass through, it is possible to prevent the sphere CB2 from passing over the sphere CB1 and flowing into the rolling portion C173. That is, the sphere CB2 can be made to stand by behind (upstream side) the sphere CB1.

As shown in FIG. 218 (b), when the sphere CB1 is received by the receiving portion C172, as shown in FIG. 219 (a), the distribution member C170 is directed from the first position to the second position by the weight of the sphere CB1. Is displaced (rotated). Further, when the sphere CB2 is catching up with the sphere CB1, the weight of the sphere CB2 is also acted on the distribution member C170.

Here, the receiving portion C172 has a region on the side connected to the bottom surface portion C172b of the facing portion C172a and a region on the side connected to the facing portion C172a of the bottom surface portion C172b, that is, the facing portion C172a and the bottom surface portion C172b. The connecting portion with and is formed to be convex toward the axis C192 side and curved in an arc shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the sphere is held by the curved portion in the arc shape. It is possible.

Further, the distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C172b (the end on the arrow L direction side)) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is shaken. In the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the dimension is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere (the dimension that the sphere cannot pass through), and the distribution member C170 is displaced from the first position to the second position (the size is such that the sphere cannot pass through). By being rotated), it is gradually expanded.

That is, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (the position between FIGS. 219 (a) and 219 (b)), the above-mentioned The distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C172b (the end on the L direction side of the arrow)) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is the diameter of the sphere. When the distribution member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position by being expanded to substantially the same size (dimension through which the sphere can pass), the above-mentioned interval is further expanded and the first The maximum spacing is formed at the two positions.

Therefore, while the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the sphere CB1 is received by the receiving portion C172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) in a state where the sphere CB1 is received by the receiving portion C172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. As a result, the state in which the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the sphere CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained.

In this case, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end on the bottom surface (the surface opposite to the rolling surface, the surface on the arrow D direction side) of the rolling portion C173. The distance between the end (the end on the L-direction side of the arrow) is gradually reduced by the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member C170 from the first position to the second position, and the distribution member C170 Before reaching a predetermined intermediate position, it is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimension that the sphere cannot pass through). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172.

Further, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the locus of the sphere CB1 held by the receiving portion C172 (the connecting portion between the facing portion C172a and the bottom surface portion C172b). The locus of the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction) at the bottom surface (the surface opposite to the rolling surface, the surface on the arrow D direction side) of the rolling portion C173 rather than the outer edge (the outer edge on the opposite side of the axis C192). Is configured to pass on the side closer to the axis C192.

Therefore, the state in which the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, the state in which the sphere CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained, and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (the end on the arrow L direction side). The sphere CB2 can be pushed back (pushed back) by the part). That is, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 can be inserted between the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 to separate the two spheres. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172. Further, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling portion C173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the distribution member C170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. 219 (a), the sphere CB1 rolls the bottom surface portion C172b toward the passage portion C144 and the sphere CB2. Is flowed down to the rolling section C173 (accepted by the rolling section C173).

As shown in FIGS. 219 (b) and 220, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, the sphere CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (fourth passage CRt4) and the sphere. The CB2 rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows into the first interposition member C160 (fifth passage CRt5).

After the spheres CB1 and CB2 flow into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the distribution member C170 is returned (displaced) by its own weight from the second position to the first position. It should be noted that even when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, or even after the distribution member C170 has started displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the third sphere When the ball reaches the rolling portion C173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows into (guides) the fifth passage CRt5.

As described above, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface facing the arrow L direction) is from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142). ), Therefore, even after the distribution member C170 has started displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the inclined surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173 (). The end face) can be used to facilitate the flow of the third ball into the rolling portion C173.

The distribution member C170 is configured to be able to be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one sphere. Therefore, when the distance between the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 are sequentially received by the receiving portion C172, and the fourth passage CRt4 is subjected to the above-mentioned distribution operation. It is distributed to.

As described above, according to the lower frame C86b in the 28th embodiment, when the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 are connected at intervals of a predetermined amount or less (including the case where the distance between the two spheres is 0). Can distribute (guide) the sphere CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4, and distribute (guide) the sphere CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the sphere CB1. On the other hand, when the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 are connected at intervals exceeding a predetermined amount, both spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the guiding passage can be changed according to the state in which the spheres CB1 and CB2 are connected (whether or not the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere exceeds a predetermined amount), so that the interest can be improved. be able to.

Next, the center frame C2086 according to the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 236. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 221 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b according to the 29th embodiment, and FIG. 222 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. In addition, in FIGS. 221 and 222, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially shown, and the tapping screw for fastening and fixing the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the lower frame C2086b has an inlet COP2000in formed as an opening capable of accepting a sphere, a first passage CRt2001 communicated with the inlet COP2000in, and the first passage thereof. The second passage CRt2002, through which the sphere guided by the CRt2001 (the sphere that reciprocates along the longitudinal direction of the first passage CRt2001) flows down, and the sphere guided by the second passage CRt2002 are distributed by the distribution member C2170. The third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the ball guided through the third passage CRt2003, and the ball that fell from the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball that did not reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flowed down. The sixth passage CRt2006 and the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball reaching the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flow down the fifth passage CRt2005 and the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005. An outlet COP2000out is formed as an opening for outflow to the gaming area (see FIGS. 229 and 230).

The center frame in the 29th embodiment is composed of an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. The upper frame in the 29th embodiment has other configurations in the 28th embodiment except that the shape of the upper frame passage (not shown) is different from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the 28th embodiment. Since the configuration is the same as that of the upper frame C86a, the description thereof will be omitted.

The upper frame passage is a ball that has flowed in (entered) from the area on the left side (left side in FIG. 205) of the game area (the area between the center frame (upper frame) and the rail 61 (see FIG. 205)). The receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b is communicated with the downstream end of the upper frame passage. That is, the ball that has flowed into (entered) the upper frame passage from the game area is flowed (entered) from the upper frame passage into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b via the receiving port COP2000in.

The lower frame C2086b is provided with a distribution member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the sphere (see FIGS. 229 and 230), and when the connected spheres are guided through the second passage CRt2002. , The preceding ball is distributed to the third passage CRt2003, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004. When the distance between the spheres is larger than a predetermined amount, both the preceding sphere and the trailing sphere are distributed to the third passage CRt2003.

Here, the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt4 is flowed down to the fifth passage CRt5, and the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt2005 (the opening that causes the ball to flow out to the game area), is the first. It is formed (arranged) at a position above the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 205) in the vertical direction. Therefore, the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 is likely to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, the sixth passage CRt2006 has a concave surface formed by inclining downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) in order to allow the ball guided by the sixth passage CRt2006 to flow out to the game area, and the first prize is awarded. Not only is the central outflow surface C181 formed (arranged) at a position above the vertical direction of the mouth 64, but also the position is positioned in the width direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 205) of the game board 13 from above the vertical direction of the first winning opening 64. Lateral outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. In addition, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt2006, a lateral outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulation.

Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outflow surface C182 to the game area than the probability of flowing out from the central outflow surface C181 to the game area in the sixth passage CRt2006, and as a result. , It is difficult to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is lower than that of the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 described above).

As described above, in the lower frame C2086b in the present embodiment, as in the case of the 28th embodiment, when the connected spheres flow into the second passage CRt2002, the preceding spheres are in the normal passage (the second passage (the first). While being distributed to the three passages CRt2003), the passage in which the trailing ball easily wins the first winning opening 64 (in the present embodiment, the passage in which the ball is almost certainly won in the first winning opening 64 (fifth passage CRt2005). ) Is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004, which allows the ball to flow down. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball will win the first winning opening 64 (make sure that the ball wins), the player can be expected to form a state in which the balls are connected, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sphere guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 is formed so as to be able to fall into the sixth passage on the way, and only the sphere that reaches the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling goes to the fifth passage CRt2005. It is possible to flow down (inflow). Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball will win the first winning opening 64 (make sure that the ball wins), after the trailing ball among the balls in the continuous state is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004, the first winning ball is taken. It is possible to make the player expect that the ball reaches the end of the 4-passage CRt2004 without falling, and enhance the interest of the game.

Next, in addition to FIGS. 221 to 222, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 236.

FIG. 223 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 224 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. 225 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, FIG. 226 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 227 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. 228 (a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIa of FIG. 226, and FIG. 228 (b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIb of FIG. 226.

229 and 230 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b on the CCXXIX-CCXXIX line of FIG. 225. FIG. 231 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b in the CCXXXI-CCXXXI line of FIG. 227, and FIG. 232 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b in the CCXXXII-CCXXXII line of FIG. 227. Note that FIG. 229 shows a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 230 shows a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 221 to 232, the lower frame C2086b is a front member C2110, a countersunk member C2120 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the front member C2110, and the front member C2110. A back member C2130 arranged to face the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) at a predetermined interval, and the first intermediate member C2140 and the first intermediate member C2140 arranged on the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the back surface member C2130. 2 Intermediate member C2150, first intermediate member C2160, magnetic portion C2400 and receiving member C2500, distribution member C2170 interposed between the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140, front member C2110 and back member. A second intervening member C2180 interposed between the C2130s and a detour member C2200 and a magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130 are provided.

The lower frame C2086b is fastened and fixed to each other by tapping screws, and the distribution member C2170 is rotatably supported by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140. ) (See FIG. 221).

Further, in the lower frame C2086b, the other members except the distribution member C2170 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (that is, the member on the back side and the sphere can be seen through), and the distribution member C2170 is colored. It is composed of resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the first passage CRt 2001 to the sixth passage CRt 2006, and the player can visually recognize the sorting operation by the distribution member C2170, which can enhance the interest of the game.

In this case, the lower frame C2086b suffices if at least the first intermediate member C2140 is made of a light-transmitting resin material. The player can visually recognize the connected state of the balls in the second passage CRt2002 (whether or not the distance between the preceding ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C2170. If it can be visually recognized that the trailing sphere is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170, the sphere flows from the outlet COPout to the first winning opening 64 with a high probability (in the present embodiment, it flows into the fifth passage CRt2005). This is because it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 because (almost the entire ball) enters the ball.

The distribution member C2170 may be made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material and painted on the front surface thereof, or may have a sticker attached thereto.

On the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or the first intermediate member C2140 may be painted or attached with a sticker. That is, the ball passing through the third passage CRt2003 and the distribution member C2170 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C2110 includes a plate-shaped front portion C111 forming the front surface and a plate-shaped bottom surface portion C112 erected from the back surface of the front surface portion C111.

A plurality of insertion holes C111a are bored in the front surface portion C111 along the outer edge on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the front surface portion C111 in the plate thickness direction. The lower frame C2086b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60.

An outlet COPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) in the front portion C111 at a position above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 205) in the vertical direction. As described above, the outflow port COPout is an opening that serves as an outlet when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the second interposition member C2180 is arranged to face the bottom surface of the bottom surface portion C112. A tubular portion communicating with the outlet COPout is formed on the bottom surface portion C112, and this tubular portion is a part of the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, since the overlapping portion (seam) between the front member C2110 and the second interposition member C180 is not formed on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, when the player looks into the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outlet COPout. The appearance can be improved, and foreign matter such as a wire can be prevented from entering from the overlapping portion (seam).

The bottom surface portion C112 is continuously formed over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the vertical tip of the bottom surface portion C112 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) is in front of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first intermediate member C2160. Be abutted. As a result, the intrusion of foreign matter such as wire is suppressed.

The dish member C2120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C2121 and a lower bottom surface portion C2122 forming the bottom surface of the passage, and a side wall portion C2124 forming the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C2121 is extended along the front-rear direction (arrow LR direction) as a substantially linear passage in the top view, and is inclined downward in the direction away from the receiving port COP2000in (arrow direction). Is formed.

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 is extended along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage in the top view, and the extension direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow). The cross-sectional shape on the plane including the UD direction) is formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 217 (b)).

The side wall portion C2124 has a passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (first passage CRt2001) and one end side and the other end side of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) in the longitudinal direction (direction for guiding the sphere). The portion and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) are partitioned respectively. The passage width should be the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can be guided only in series.

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 intersects the upper bottom surface portion C2121 at approximately 90 degrees in a top view, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 and the lower bottom surface portion C2122. It is arranged at a position where the side (the end on the side in the F direction of the arrow) is adjacent to the side.

A notch C124a is formed in the side wall C2124 at a position corresponding to the bottom of the lower bottom surface C2122 curved in an arc shape (the position having the lowest height position in the vertical direction), and the notch C124a is formed. A ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed by being curved in an arc shape, and a sphere is flowed down from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 on its ascending slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122). The flowed ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and then from the notch portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C2142 (first passage CRt2001). The ball can flow down into the two passages CRt2002).

As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) at a predetermined interval, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) is formed. The reciprocating motion can be used to catch the trailing sphere to the preceding sphere and reduce the distance between the leading sphere and the trailing sphere (connecting the spheres).

The outflow surface C122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (that is, a position having the lowest height position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for causing the ball guided by the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002), and the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is formed as a concave surface that inclines downward toward.

Therefore, after reciprocating the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly flowed out (flowed down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) by using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), the spheres in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the spheres in a continuous state) are connected. Can flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining the above.

The width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the sphere reciprocating in the lower bottom surface portion C2122, dimension in the arrow FB direction) is the notch portion C124a in the top view. The closer to the side, the larger the shape is formed (see FIG. 225).

Further, in the top view, when the sphere is in contact with the lower side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) of the notch portion C124a, the sphere rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the sphere that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C2124 at the position farthest from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the sphere is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C2124). Even in the state of rolling (position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that it overlaps the center of the sphere in the top view (the locus of the lower top of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C2122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the sphere that has flowed down into the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) is subjected to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage). CRt2001) may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before reciprocating once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times. .. That is, there is a risk that both balls will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) with the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere not reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch portion C124a (in the direction of arrow L) (see FIG. 229). As a result, by the action of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the ball is pressed against the side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball is pressed against the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage). It can be rolled (reciprocated) with CRt2001).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the sphere becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is easy to get over (easily cross) the outflow surface C122a and sufficiently reciprocate the ball along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to make the preceding sphere catch up with the following sphere and reduce the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere (connect the spheres).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, and is vertical. In the arc shape that is convex downward in the direction (in the direction of arrow D), see FIGS. 217 (b) and 228 (b)), the radius of the arc shape on one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction is one end thereof. It is made smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the side and the other end side (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or its vicinity), it is easy to reciprocate the sphere and to catch up with the sphere following the preceding sphere. , The ball does not reach the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating sphere becomes low (one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or its vicinity), and the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow region including the outflow surface C122a. In the step), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

The back member C2130 includes a main body portion C2131 formed in a plate shape and a shaft support portion C2134 erected from the front of the main body portion C2131.

The main body C2131 has an opening C2131a which is an opening for communicating a passage (fifth passage CRt2005) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C2131, and a distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). An opening C2131c, which is an opening for avoiding interference, is formed. Below the opening C2131a, a recess C2131b having a recessed outer edge of the main body portion C2131 is formed. The recess C2131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 while facing the bypass member C2200.

The shaft support portion C2134 is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170. The shaft C2174 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion C2134 and the shaft support portion C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C2141 and a bottom surface portion C2142, a top surface portion C2143, a passage portion C2144, and a lower stopper portion C2145 which are erected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body portion C2141. And is arranged on the left side of the back member C2130 in the front view.

The main body C2141 is formed with an opening C2141a which is an opening for communicating the passages (third passage CRt2003 and sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C2141. Further, a shaft support portion C2141b is erected from the back surface of the main body portion C2141. The shaft support portion C2141b is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170.

In a state where the first intermediate member C2140 is arranged on the back member C2130, the vertical tip (side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 is in contact with the front surface of the back surface member C2130. As a result, the second passage CRt2002 is formed by the space partitioned by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (main body portion C2141, bottom surface portion C2142, and top surface portion C2143), and the back surface member C2130 and the first intermediate member are formed. The third passage CRt2003 is formed by the space partitioned by C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142 and passage portion C2144) and the distribution member C2170 at the second position (see FIG. 230).

The bottom surface portion C2142 is inclined downward from the dish member C2120 side toward the distribution member C2170 side. Further, the passage portion C2144 is located between the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) at the second position and the opening C2141a, and is located between the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) at the second position and the opening C2141a. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side. Therefore, when the passage portion C2144 receives the sphere from the distribution member C2170 displaced to the second position, the sphere can flow out (roll) to the sixth passage CRt2006 through the opening C2141a.

The bottom surface portion C2142 is formed so as to be in contact with the upper surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced upward, and the distribution member C2170 The first position is defined (see FIG. 229). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced downward, and the distribution member C2170 is formed. The second position of is defined (see FIG. 230).

When the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (raised) upward. That is, the bottom surface portion C2173 in the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the second position is above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom surface portion C2173 in the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position (arrow). Located on the U side).

The second intermediate member C2150 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C2151 and a bottom surface portion C2152 and a wall surface portion C2153 and C2154 which are erected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body portion C2151, and the first intermediate member C2150. It is arranged on the right side of the back member C2130 in the front view while being separated from the member C2140 by a predetermined distance.

In the present embodiment, the facing distance between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 (the distance in the arrow LR direction) is the dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the receiving member C2500. The value is set to be larger than the size obtained by adding the size of at least twice the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, a space through which the ball can pass is secured on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (both between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150). can do. Therefore, it is possible to increase the types (variations) of the direction in which the ball flows down and enhance the fun of the game.

In the state where the second intermediate member C2150 is arranged in the back member C2130, the bottom surface portion C2152 is arranged at a position where it can communicate with the opening C2131a of the back member C2130, and is inclined downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when the bottom surface portion C2152 receives a sphere that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (a sphere that has fallen from the end of the magnetic portion C2400), the sphere can flow (roll) into the opening C2131a. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom surface portion C2152.

In a state where the second intermediate member C2150 is arranged on the back member C2130, the erected tips (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2152 and the wall surface portions C2153 and C2154 are brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface member C2130. Further, the main body portion C2151 and the wall surface portions C2153 and C2154 are projected upward (in the direction of arrow U) by a predetermined amount along the edge portion of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom surface portion C2152.

The wall surface portion C2153 located on the side far from the magnetic portion C2400 intersects the extension line of the moving direction of the sphere guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (the direction along the lower edge (the edge portion that attracts the sphere) of the magnetic portion C2400). Form a surface to be used. As a result, the ball ejected from the fourth passage CRt2004 (falling from the magnetic portion C2400) is directly received by the wall surface portion C2153, or is bounced (jumped up) by the bottom surface portion C2152 and then received by the wall surface portion C2153. It can be dropped onto the bottom surface C2152. In the embodiment, the wall surface portion C2153 is formed up to a position higher than the lower edge (edge portion where the sphere is attracted) at the end (end portion in the arrow R direction) of the magnetic portion C2400.

On the other hand, the protruding dimensions of the bottom surface portion C2152 from the upper surface are the protruding dimensions of the wall surface portion C2154 located closer to the magnetic portion C2400 and the protruding dimensions of the main body portion C2151 located on the side farther from the magnetic portion C2400. It is made smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of C2153. As a result, the ball can fall from the bottom surface portion 2152 (fifth passage CRt2005) to the first interposition member C2160 or the second interposition member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), and the interest of the game is enhanced. The protruding dimensions of the wall surface portion C2154 and the main body portion C2151 are preferably smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

The receiving member C2500 includes a first bottom surface portion C2501 and a second bottom surface portion C2502 forming an upper surface (rolling surface), and is between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member 2150 facing each other, and is a magnetic portion C2400. It is arranged at a position below the (arrow U direction side). Therefore, the sphere that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be received by the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 and flowed down (rolled) to the first interposition member C2160.

The first bottom surface portion C2501 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the connection portion with the second bottom surface portion C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 side (arrow L direction), and the second bottom surface portion C2502 is formed by the first bottom surface portion C2501. It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the connection portion with and toward the second intermediate member C2150 side (arrow R direction). Further, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are inclined downward from the front side to the back side (rear member C2130 side) of the receiving member C2500 (see FIG. 232).

As described above, a space for at least one sphere is formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction).

Therefore, the sphere that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) is rolled in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, and the first interposition member C2160. Can be flowed down to. In this case, the direction in which the ball flows down can be changed according to the portion (first bottom surface portion C2501 or second bottom surface portion C2502) that receives the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400).

Further, a sphere that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) is rolled in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, and then the first bottom surface thereof. It can flow down from the downstream end of the portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 to the first interposition member C2160. As a result, the ball can be easily rolled along the longitudinal direction of the first interposition member C2160.

At least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side to the back side (rear member C2130 side) of the receiving member C2500, or the receiving member. It may be non-tilted (that is, horizontal) from the front side of the C2500 toward the back side (back member C2130 side).

Further, the receiving member C2500 has a form in which a space through which the sphere can pass is secured only on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (that is, one of the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150). A space in which the sphere can flow down (pass) is formed only between the spaces, and the sphere cannot flow down (pass) between the other and the other. In this case, the longitudinal dimension of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 can be secured, and the rolling time of the sphere can be lengthened accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The first intermediate member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface that causes a ball that has flowed down from the receiving member C2500 to flow down to the second intermediate member C2180, and is a member of the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150. It is installed between the opposite sides.

A concave surface (center outflow) formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposition member C2160 so as to incline downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) in order to allow the sphere to flow out to the second interposition member C2180. Surface C2161 and lateral outflow surface C2162) are formed. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (that is, the first winning opening 64) of the second interposition member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is the central outflow surface. It is formed (arranged) at two positions different from C2161 in the width direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 205) of the game board 13. Further, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposition member C2160, a lateral outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and a central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulations.

The side outflow surface C2162 is located outside (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) in the width direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 205) of the game board 13 with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180. Are formed (arranged) differently. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 is inclined downward from the side outflow surface C182 of the second interposition member C2180 (that is, toward the side outflow surface C182). It can flow down to the upper surface (rolling surface)). Therefore, the ball can be easily rolled along the longitudinal direction of the second interposition member C2180. As a result, it is possible to form an opportunity for the second interposition member C2180 to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 (that is, to enter (win) the first winning opening 64), and to enhance the interest of the game.

The distribution member C2170 includes a main body portion C2171 to which the shaft C2174 is pivotally supported, a receiving portion C2172 formed on one side of the main body portion C2171, and a rolling portion C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body portion C2171. It is provided with a brass weight C2175 arranged (attached) to the main body C2171 at a position opposite to the receiving portion C2172 with the shaft C2174 in between, and centered on the shaft C2174 (shaft support portions C2134, C2141b). It is made rotatable.

The center of gravity of the distribution member C2170 is on the other side of the center of rotation (axis C2174) (the side on which the weight C2175 is arranged, that is, the side opposite to the receiving portion C21720 across the shaft C2174, right side in FIG. 229). Be eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distribution member C2170 is raised on the receiving portion C2172 side (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 in the front view), and the rotation is restricted to the bottom portion C2142 (at the first position). (See FIG. 229).

On the other hand, in a state where the sphere is received by the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the position of the center of gravity as a whole is formed on one side (receiving portion C2172) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174) due to the weight of the sphere. Is eccentric to the side, that is, the side opposite to the weight C2175 with respect to the shaft C2174, the left side of FIG. 230). Therefore, in the state where the ball is received by the receiving portion C2172, the distribution member C2170 is lowered on the receiving portion C2172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C2174 in the front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C2145. (See FIG. 230).

After the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, when a ball is discharged (outflowed) from the receiving portion C2172 to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140, the distribution member C2170 moves to the distribution member C2170. It is returned to the first position by the action of its own weight (eccentricity from the axis C2174 of the center of gravity position).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position is performed by the own weight (weight) of the distribution member C2170. Therefore, for example, an urging spring is provided and the distribution member C2170 is distributed by the urging spring. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the member C2170 is urged toward the first position.

Further, as compared with the case of using the urging spring, the displacement (returning operation) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position can be made slower, so that the trailing ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling portion C2173. can. That is, after the distribution member C2170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the trailing sphere CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow into the rolling portion C2173. The time required for the displacement can be increased. Further, a third ball that follows the trailing ball CB2 can also be provided with the possibility of reaching the rolling portion C2173 (see FIGS. 233 to 235).

The receiving portion C2172 supports the facing portion C2172a formed at a position facing the second passage CRt2002 in the first position and the received ball in the first position, and rolls the ball toward the passage portion C2144 in the second position. It is provided with a bottom surface portion C2172b that forms a rolling surface for movement.

In the receiving portion C2172, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom surface portion C2172b is the facing portion. It is formed so as to incline upward from C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 229).

Here, in the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (rolling of the facing portion C2172a). If the moving portion C2173 side is inclined in a direction away from the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom surface portion C2172b side), the ball colliding with the opposing portion C2172a may be bounced upward and flow back to the second passage CRt2002. There is.

On the other hand, the facing portion C2172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, so that the first intermediate member C2140 The ball received from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the above can be received by the facing portion C2172a, and the backflow to the third passage CRt2003 can be suppressed.

Further, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed so as to be inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 (passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140. If this is the case, the sphere received by the receiving portion C2172 will flow out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 at an early stage, and the weight of the sphere cannot be used, so that the distribution member C2170 reaches the second position. There is a risk that it will not be allowed.

On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed so as to ascend and incline from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position. The ball can be held on the bottom surface portion C2172b at least until the distribution member C2170 rotates by a predetermined amount from the first position. As a result, it is possible to delay the time until the ball received by the receiving portion C2172 flows out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140. As a result, the weight of the sphere can be effectively used to ensure that the distribution member C2170 reaches the second position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface portion C2172b is a region on the proximal end side (right side in FIG. 229, side in the direction of arrow R) connected to the facing portion C2172a in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position. The angle of ascending inclination is set to be larger than the angle of ascending inclination in the region on the tip side (left side in FIG. 229, side in the direction of arrow L) opposite to the facing portion C2172a. In other words, the bottom surface portion C2172b has a downward inclination angle in a region on the tip end side (left side in FIG. 229) opposite to the facing portion C2172a in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position. The angle is set to be larger than the angle of the downward inclination in the region on the proximal end side (right side in FIG. 229) connected to the portion C2172a.

Therefore, in the initial stage where the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the receiving portion C2172 is utilized by utilizing the ascending inclination in the region on the base end side (right side of FIG. 229) of the bottom surface portion C2172b. In the latter stage, the downward inclination in the region on the tip side (left side of FIG. 229) of the bottom surface portion C2172b is used to ensure the holding of the sphere in the (bottom surface portion C2172b) to the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003). The ball can be ejected smoothly.

For the reason described above (preventing backflow to the second passage CRt2002), the facing portion C2172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom surface portion C2172b side.

The receiving portion C2172 is formed so that the bottom surface portion C2172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position ( (See FIG. 230). As a result, the ball received by the receiving portion C2172 can be reliably flowed out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.

Further, while the sphere is rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the weight of the sphere is caused to act on the distribution member C2170, and the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position (that is, the trailing sphere is moved to the rolling portion C2173 (th). It is possible to easily maintain a state in which the vehicle can be guided to the 4-passage CRt4).

The rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region opposite to the receiving portion 2172 (bottom surface portion 2172b) with the shaft C2174 in between. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position by the weight of the sphere received by the receiving portion C2172, the region is raised upward (in the direction of arrow U) with the rotation. The rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region containing at least. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling portion C2173 is lifted upward, and the distance from the magnetic portion C2400 is shortened. Therefore, the ball that rolls the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, in the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, if the rolling portion C2173 is formed only on the opposite side in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) with the shaft C2174 sandwiched, the bottom surface portion. When a ball is flowed down from 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the distribution member C2170 may be rotated toward the first position due to the weight of the ball or the momentum of the drop. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling portion C2173 is lowered, and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is increased, so that the ball rolling the rolling portion C2173 is jumped to the magnetic portion C2400. There is a risk that it will not be (adsorbed).

On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 is formed over a range (region) overlapping the axis C2174 in the vertical direction in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 230). That is, the region on the upstream side (second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling portion C2173 is located on one side in the horizontal direction (arrow L direction side) with respect to the axis C2174, and the weight of the ball rolling on the upstream side is determined. The distribution member C2170 can act as a force in the direction of maintaining the second position.

Therefore, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the inertia in the direction of maintaining the state in the second position by utilizing the weight and the momentum of the fall of the ball. A force is applied to the distribution member C2170, and the ball is moved downstream of the rolling portion C2173 while the distribution member C2170 is about to be displaced (rotated) in a direction in which the distribution member C2170 is maintained in the second position by the action of the inertial force. It can be rolled to the side area. As a result, the ball that rolls the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

The extended length (length in the direction of guiding the ball) of the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 is set to a dimension larger than the extended length of the rolling portion C2173. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a state in which another ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 while the ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173. That is, while the sphere rolls on the rolling portion C2173, the weight of another sphere can be applied to the distribution member C2170 on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172.

As a result, when a sphere rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the sphere (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). Can be suppressed. As a result, the ball that rolls the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In particular, since the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (direction orthogonal to the axis C2174), the point of action of force (of the sphere) as the sphere rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b. The distance between the position where the weight acts) and the fulcrum (center of rotation) can be increased (increased). That is, as the sphere rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the distribution member C2170 can be easily maintained at the second position (the distribution member C2170 arranged at the second position is displaced (rotated) to the first position). You can increase the required force).

As a result, when a sphere rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the sphere (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). Can be suppressed. As a result, the ball that rolls the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

Here, the distribution member C2170 has a direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) toward the receiving portion C2172 (direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the ball, arrow R direction) and the receiving portion C2172. The direction in which the sphere rolls (the direction in which the received sphere rolls, the arrow L direction) is the opposite direction. That is, the receiving portion C2172 is configured to reverse (change direction) the flow (rolling) direction of the sphere.

As a result, as compared with the case where the direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the ball and the direction in which the ball rolls in the receiving portion C2172 are the same, the ball is distributed by the distribution member C2170 (accepting) by the amount of time required for reversal. It is possible to secure a time for staying in the portion C2172), and it is possible to easily maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position by utilizing the weight of the sphere staying in the receiving portion C2172. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C2173.

The rolling portion C2173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) a sphere that rolls on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). In a state where the dividing member C2170 is arranged at the second position, between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). Positioned (erected).

As described above, the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position of the distribution member C2170, so that the height position of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is in the vertical direction. It is displaced (elevated) in the direction (arrow UD). As a result, the rolling portion C2173 can be arranged at a position below the magnetic portion C2400.

As a result, the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, and the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (raised) upward to bring it closer to the magnetic portion C2400 and attract the sphere against the action of gravity. On the other hand, by arranging the distribution member C2170 in the first position and displacing (raising) the rolling portion C2173 downward, the sphere is separated from the magnetic portion C2400 and the action of gravity is also used to move the sphere. It is possible to surely form a mode in which it is not adsorbed.

The connecting portion between the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side) and the facing portion C2172a of the receiving portion C2172 is on the upstream side (first intermediate member C2140 (second passage CRt2002) side, arrow L direction). It is formed in the shape of a sharp protrusion protruding toward. By inserting this protrusion-shaped portion between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2, both spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be separated.

In the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, it rolls with respect to the height position at the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140. The height position at the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the portion C2173 (rolling surface) is located downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173, and the distribution member C170 arranged at the second position is directed to the first position by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle). ) Is displaced (rotated), the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 are arranged at the same height position.

Here, when a sphere rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving portion C2172, the distribution member C2170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the sphere. (Rotation), the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 is brought into contact with the lower stopper portion C2145, so that the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position.

In this case, the distribution member C2170 may be flipped upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145, and the distribution member C2170 is flipped upward to cause the first intermediate member. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) is located above the vertical direction (arrow U direction) with respect to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) of the C2140. Then, there is a possibility that the ball cannot flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173.

In particular, when a sphere collides with the distribution member C2170 (the end face on the upstream side of the rolling portion C2173) that has been flipped upward, and the distribution member C2170 is further upwardly flipped up by the impact of the collision of the sphere (sphere). (When the distribution member C2170 is pushed further upward), the sphere flows into the receiving portion C2172 even though it was originally a sphere that should have flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173 (when it is pushed further upward). May be accepted).

On the other hand, in the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C2170 is flipped upward due to an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 is larger than the downstream end of the bottom surface C2142 due to the step between the two. It is possible to suppress the position in the upper direction in the vertical direction (direction of arrow U). That is, it is permissible for the distribution member C2170 to be flipped up by the amount of the step between the two. Therefore, the sphere to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173 (the trailing sphere CB2 in which the distance between the sphere and the preceding sphere CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). Can be easily flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173.

As in the case of the 28th embodiment, the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C2173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C2140, the surface facing the arrow L direction) is first from the rolling portion C2173. It may be inclined downward toward the intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142). That is, the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C2173 is closer to the first intermediate member C2140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C2173 on the receiving portion C2172 (opposing portion C2172a) side. It may be a cross-sectional shape that is close to each other.

As a result, when a sphere collides with the distribution member C2170 (the end face on the upstream side of the rolling portion C2173) that is flipped up upward, the distribution member C2170 (the end face on the upstream side of the rolling portion C2173) from the sphere ) Can be the direction of the force in the direction of pushing down the distribution member C2170. As a result, the sphere to be flown (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173 (the trailing sphere CB2 having a distance between the preceding sphere CB1 and the preceding sphere CB1 being equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). ) To the rolling unit C2173 can be easily flowed (rolled).

The magnetic portion C2400 is a long plate-like body made of metal, and can attract a sphere by utilizing the magnetic force acting from the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. A plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C2400.

When the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position and a ball is flowed down from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball that has rolled on the rolling surface) jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400. That is, it is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 (the ridge line formed by the intersection of the front surface (the surface in the arrow F direction) and the lower surface (the surface in the arrow D direction)) (see FIG. 236). The sphere adsorbed on the magnetic portion C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 by the action of the force of the sphere due to jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, depending on the state of the sphere (the speed of the sphere when jumping from the rolling portion C2173 of the distribution member C2170 to the magnetic portion C2400, the position of the sphere, the rotational state of the sphere, etc.), from the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400. It is possible to form an unstable state with the possibility that the ball will fall (the ball may not reach the end). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the distribution member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. That is, the spheres distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 pass through the second passage CRt2002 in a state where the distance between the spheres and the preceding spheres CB1 is smaller than a predetermined amount (that is, in a state of being connected to the preceding spheres CB1). It is only a sphere that flows down (rolls) (a trailing sphere CB2), and the possibility that such a trailing sphere B2 will occur is relatively low. Displace the sphere (following sphere B2) that has reached the distribution member C2170 through such a low possibility in an unstable state that may fall (the possibility that it cannot reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Then, the player can be expected to pass safely, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The thickness dimension of the magnetic portion C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (6% of the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment). Therefore, in the sphere in which the outer surface point CP1 is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400, the outer surface point CP2 at a position below the position CP1 is brought into contact with the front surface of the main body portion C2131. In this case, since the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front of the main body C2131 than the outer surface point CP2, the weight of the sphere (gravity acting on the center of gravity) uses the outer surface point CP1 as a fulcrum and the outer surface point CP2 as the main body. It acts as a force in the direction of pressing against the front of 2131 (that is, a force that rotates the sphere clockwise (clockwise) about the outer surface point CP1 in FIG. 236) (see FIG. 236).

As a result, when a sphere is attracted to the magnetic portion C2400, the sphere can be supported at two points, the outer surface point CP1 and the outer surface point CP2, and as a result, the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 can be supported. The movement of the sphere along can be stabilized. Further, the moving speed of the sphere can be slowed down (decreased) by utilizing the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front surface of the main body portion 2131. Therefore, this also makes it possible to stabilize the movement of the ball, increase the time required for passing through the fourth passage CRt2004, and expect the ball to reach the fifth passage CRt2005 without falling. Can be improved.

In this way, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic portion C2400 are arranged so as to sandwich the main body portion c2131 of the back member C2130, and the sphere is moved (sliding) along the magnetic portion C2400 to adjust the attractive force. The passage path of the sphere can be formed with a simple structure while facilitating the optimization of the frictional force.

The second interposition member C2180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the sphere in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the front member C2110 and the first intermediate member C2140 and the first interposition member C2160. .. That is, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed by the space partitioned by the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, the first intermediate member C2160, and the second intermediate member C2180.

As described above, on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180, the front side (arrow) is used to allow the ball guided by the second interposing member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006) to flow out to the game area. A concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and side outflow surface C182) formed by inclining downward toward (F direction) is formed. Further, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006, and the lateral outflow surface C182 is arranged at the bottom of the undulations, while the central outflow surface C181 is arranged at the top of the undulations.

The upper edge (edge in the arrow U direction) of the front portion C111 of the front member C2110 is the upper surface (rolling) of the second intermediate member C2180 except for the region where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. It is projected upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the moving surface). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 flows out (flows down) to the game area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is recessed in the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C2180, and as described above, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110. ..

The detour member C2200 further extends the plate-shaped main body portion C2201, the wall surface portion C2202 erected from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main body portion C2201, and a part of the wall surface portion C2202 to the front side. It is provided with a gutter portion C2203 formed by installing the gutter portion C2203, and is arranged on the back surface side of the back surface member C2130 at a position facing the opening C2131a.

In the state where the detour member C2200 is arranged on the back member C2130, the vertical tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall surface portion C2202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C2130 (main body portion C2131), and the gutter portion C2203 The tip of the erection (on the side in the direction of arrow F) is in contact with the back surface of the second interposition member C2180, and the edge of the gutter portion C2203 is in contact with the bottom surface of the first interposition member C2160.

As a result, the space is divided into the back member C2130 (main body C2131) and the detour member C2200 (main body C2201 and the wall surface C2202), and the first interposition member C2160 and the detour member C2200 (gutter C2203). A part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the partitioned space (see FIGS. 231 and 232).

The gutter portion C2203 is tilted downward from the back surface member C2130 side toward the second intermediate member C2180 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the bypass member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the back member C2130 is rolled on the gutter portion C2203 to be between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second interposition member C2180 (recessed portion C183). It can flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 formed in.

Next, the sphere distribution operation by the distribution member C2170 will be described. 233 to 235 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing the transition of the sphere distribution operation by the distribution member C2170, and correspond to the cross section in the CCXXIX-CCXXIX line of FIG. 225. FIG. 2366 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b in the CCXXXVI-CCXXXVI line of FIG. 235 (b).

Note that FIGS. 233 (a) and 233 (b) show a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and corresponds to FIG. 229. 235 (a) and 235 (b) show a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, and corresponds to FIG. 230.

As shown in FIG. 233 (a), when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the receiving portion C2172 can accept the sphere CB1 that rolls on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (sphere). CB1 can flow in).

That is, in the receiving portion C2172, the facing portion C2172a is arranged at a position intersecting the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface), and vertically below the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface). The bottom surface portion C2172b is arranged at a position (in the direction of arrow D).

In the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (arrow L direction) of the rolling portion C2173. The distance between the side end portion, the connecting portion between the rolling portion C2173 and the facing portion C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere can pass).

On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 cannot accept the ball CB1 that rolls on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in) when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position. Is placed in.

That is, in the rolling portion C2173, the bottom surface portion C2172b is arranged at a position (one step higher position) vertically upward (in the arrow U direction) than the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C2173 and the extension line extending the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from overcoming the step and flowing into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 at the first position.

In the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end of the top surface portion C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the arrow R direction side) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (arrow L). The distance from the end on the directional side) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (the dimension through which the sphere can pass). As a result, it is possible to allow the ball to get over the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 at the first position.

In this case, in the state where the distribution member C2170 is in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is opposite to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) with the shaft C2174 in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction). It is located on the side and is inclined downward in a direction (arrow R direction) away from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

Therefore, even if the ball gets over the step and flows into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 in the first position, the distribution member C2170 is rotated toward the second position by the ball (that is,). The rolling portion C2173 can be prevented from being lifted upward), and the ball can be dropped to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) along the downward inclination of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere that has overcome the step from jumping (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (reaching the fifth passage CRt2005).

However, the magnetic portion C2400 may be arranged at a position where the sphere that has overcome the step can jump (adsorb) to the magnetic portion C2400. That is, when the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the sphere CB2 catches up with the sphere CB1, and the sphere CB2 gets over the sphere CB1, the magnetic portion is in a position where the sphere CB2 can jump (adsorb) to the magnetic portion C2400. C2400 may be arranged. Since the ball CB2 is originally a ball that should be distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004, it is disadvantageous to the player by suppressing the ball from being dropped to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006). It can be suppressed.

When the sphere CB1 (leading sphere) and the sphere CB2 (the sphere that follows the leading sphere at a predetermined interval) roll on the bottom surface C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, FIG. 233 (b). ), The sphere CB1 flows into (accepts) the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, and the sphere CB1 is brought into contact with (received) the opposing portion C2172a and held by the receiving portion C2172.

When the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the sphere CB2 catches up with the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 comes into contact with the sphere CB1. As a result, the sphere CB2 can be made to stand by behind (upstream side) the sphere CB1.

As shown in FIG. 233 (b), when the sphere CB1 is received by the receiving portion C2172, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the distribution member C2170 is directed from the first position to the second position by the weight of the sphere CB1. Is displaced (rotated). Further, when the sphere CB2 is catching up with the sphere CB1, the weight of the sphere CB2 is also acted on the distribution member C2170.

Here, the receiving portion C2172 has a region on the side connected to the bottom surface portion C2172b of the facing portion C2172a and a region on the side connected to the facing portion C2172a of the bottom surface portion C2172b, that is, the facing portion C2172a and the bottom surface portion C2172b. The connecting portion with and is formed to be convex toward the axis C2174 side and curved in an arc shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the sphere is held by the curved portion in the arc shape. It is possible.

Further, the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end portion on the downstream side (arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142). When the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the two is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the sphere (the size that the sphere cannot pass through), and the distribution member C2170 is set from the first position to the first position. By being displaced (rotated) toward two positions, it is gradually expanded.

That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (the position between FIG. 234 (a) and FIG. 234 (b)), the above-mentioned Between the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the downstream side (arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142). When the distance between the two is expanded to substantially the same size as the diameter of the sphere (the size through which the sphere can pass) and the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position, the above-mentioned distance is obtained. Is further expanded to form the maximum spacing at the second position.

Therefore, while the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the sphere CB1 is received by the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position in a state where the sphere CB1 is received by the receiving portion C2172. As a result, the state in which the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the sphere CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained.

In this case, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) (the end on the arrow R direction side) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a). The distance between them is gradually reduced by the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member C2170 from the first position to the second position, and the distribution member C2170 of the sphere is before reaching a predetermined intermediate position. It is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter (dimension that the sphere cannot pass through). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172.

Further, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the locus of the sphere CB1 held by the receiving portion C2172 (the connecting portion between the facing portion C2172a and the bottom surface portion C2172b). The locus of the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a) rather than the outer edge (the outer edge on the opposite side of the shaft C2174) passes through the side closer to the shaft C2174. It is composed of.

Therefore, the state in which the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, the state in which the sphere CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142, and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side) can be maintained. The sphere CB2 can be pushed back (pushed back) by the portion and the connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a. That is, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 can be inserted between the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 to separate the two spheres. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172. Further, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling portion C2173 to stabilize the subsequent rolling.

When the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. 234 (a), the sphere CB1 is directed toward the passage portion C2144 as shown in FIG. 234 (b). While the C2172b is rolled, the ball CB2 is flowed down to the rolling portion C2173 (accepted by the rolling portion C2173).

As shown in FIGS. 235 (a) and 235 (b), when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, the sphere CB1 flows from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003). At the same time, the sphere CB2 that has rolled the rolling portion C2173 jumps (adsorbs) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.

After the spheres CB1 and CB2 flow into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the distribution member C2170 is returned (displaced) by its own weight from the second position to the first position.

It should be noted that even when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, or even after the distribution member C2170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the third sphere When reaches the rolling portion C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C2173, the third ball rolls the rolling portion C2173. In this case, the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) depends on whether or not the sphere CB1 is on the receiving portion C2172 (bottom portion C2172b), the rolling speed (momentum) of the third sphere, and the like. It is determined whether it is dropped into the magnetic portion C2400 or jumps (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004. That is, two states can be formed.

The distribution member C2170 is configured to be able to be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one sphere. Therefore, when the distance between the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 are sequentially received by the receiving portion C2172, and the third passage CRt2003 is subjected to the above-mentioned distribution operation. It is distributed to.

As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b in the 29th embodiment, when the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 are connected at intervals of a predetermined amount or less, the spheres CB1 are distributed (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. ), And the distribution member C2170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the sphere CB1 can lift the sphere CB2 upward and distribute (guide) it to the fourth passage CRt2004, while the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 When they are connected at intervals exceeding a predetermined amount, both spheres (sphere CB1 and sphere CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. In this way, the guiding passage can be changed according to the state in which the spheres CB1 and CB2 are connected (whether or not the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere exceeds a predetermined amount), so that the interest can be improved. be able to.

Next, the center frame C3086 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240.

In the 28th embodiment, the case where the distribution member C170 is rotated has been described, but the distribution member C3170 in the 29th embodiment is slide-displaced. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

237 and 239 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C3086b according to the thirtieth embodiment, and FIGS. 238 and 240 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. In addition, in FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the state where the distribution member C3170 is arranged at the first position is shown, and in FIGS. 239 and 240, the state where the distribution member C3170 is arranged at the second position is shown. .. Further, FIGS. 237 and 239 correspond to the cross section in the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210.

Here, the lower frame C3086b in the thirtieth embodiment has a different structure in which the distribution member C3170 is displaced with respect to the lower frame C86b in the 28th embodiment and a structure in which the decorative member C3190 is interlocked with the distribution member C3170. Except for the points, the other configurations are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 237 to 240, two linear guide grooves C3131c are extended in the vertical direction in a posture parallel to each other in the main body portion C131 of the back member C3130. These two guide grooves C3131c are arranged so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the first intermediate member C140 toward the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D).

That is, the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) position of the distribution member C3170 at the second position is closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the distribution member C3170 at the first position. Be positioned.

A total of four shafts C3171a, which form a pair of upper and lower shafts, are projected from the back surface of the main body portion C3171 of the distribution member C3170. The shaft C3171a is a guided portion that is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and the shaft C3171a is slid along the guide groove C3131c so that the distribution member C3170 is in the first position and the second position. It is slide-displaced (linearly) between and.

A set of shafts C3171a is arranged in each of the left and right guide grooves C3131c. Therefore, the distribution member C3170 is set between the first position and the second position without causing a change in posture due to rotation (that is, while maintaining a constant inclination angle of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173). It is possible to slide and displace between them.

A collar CW having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide groove C3131c is arranged at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and the collar CW restricts the shaft C3171a from coming out of the guide groove C3131c. It is said to be a stopper.

The distribution member C3170 is defined (arranged) at the first position by abutting the shaft c3171a on the upper end (end in the arrow U direction) of the guide groove C3131c and restricting the upward displacement (FIG. 237). And FIG. 238), the lower stopper portion C132 abuts on the lower surface of the distribution member C3170, and the downward displacement is restricted, so that the lower stopper portion C132 is defined (arranged) in the second position (see FIGS. 239 and 240). ).

The decorative member C3190 includes an arm portion C3193 formed integrally with the main body portion C191 and extending radially outward around the shaft C192, and the arm portion C3193 has a linear guide groove C3193a having a shaft C192. It extends along the radial direction of the center. The shaft C3171a is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3193a.

The position of the center of gravity of the decorative member C3190 is eccentric to one side (the side opposite to the distribution member C3170 across the shaft C192, the left side in FIG. 238) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in the no-load state, the decorative member C3190 is in a posture in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in the rear view, see FIG. 238), and the distribution member C3170 is When the shaft C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, it is placed in the first position (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

On the other hand, when the sphere is received by the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C3170, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member C3170 and the decorative member C3190 as a whole is different from the center of rotation (axis C192) due to the weight of the sphere. It is eccentric to the side (the side on which the distribution member C3170 is arranged with respect to the shaft C192, the right side in FIG. 240). That is, in a state where the ball is received by the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C3170 is lowered along the guide groove C3131c by the weight of the ball and is arranged at the second position. Further, the decorative member C3190 is in a state in which the arm portion C3193 is pushed downward by the shaft C3171a and rotated clockwise about the shaft C192 in the rear view (see FIG. 240).

At the second position, when the ball is ejected from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise about the axis C192 in the rear view by utilizing the eccentricity of the center of gravity. The arm portion C3193 is lifted upward. Along with this, the shaft C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, so that the distribution member C3170 is arranged (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

The distribution operation of the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 due to the slide displacement of the distribution member C3170 between the first position and the second position is the same as in the case of the 28th embodiment described above. Omit.

As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b in the thirtieth embodiment, when the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 are connected at intervals of a predetermined amount or less (including the case where the distance between the two spheres is 0). Can distribute (guide) the sphere CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4, and distribute (guide) the sphere CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the sphere CB1. On the other hand, when the spheres CB1 and the spheres CB2 are connected at intervals exceeding a predetermined amount, both spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the guiding passage can be changed according to the state in which the spheres CB1 and CB2 are connected (whether or not the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere exceeds a predetermined amount), so that the interest can be improved. be able to.

Here, in the structure in which the distribution member C170 is rotated about the axis C192 as in the case of the 28th embodiment, the displacement amount of the receiving portion C172 is secured (the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the fourth). It is necessary to increase the length (distance) between the shaft C192 and the receiving portion C172 in order to make it displaceable between the positions facing the passage CRt4), and the width direction (the shaft C192 and the receiving portion C172). In the direction of connecting), the size of the distribution member C170 is increased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the distribution member C3170 is slid and displaced in the vertical direction, the displacement amount of the receiving portion C172 is secured (that is, the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the position facing the fourth passage CRt4). Since it is not necessary to provide a portion for connecting the center of rotation (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C3170 can be downsized in the width direction. That is, the dimension in the width direction of the distribution member C3170 can be the length dimension of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173 (the dimension in the arrow LR direction).

Next, the dish member C4120 according to the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 241. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

241 (a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 according to the 31st embodiment, and FIG. 241 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 in the CCXLIb-CCXLIb line of FIG. 241 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 in the CCXLIc-CCXLIc line of FIG. 241 (a).

The dish member C4120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C4121 and a lower bottom surface portion C4122 forming the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C4123 and a lower side wall portion C4124 forming the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C4121 is extended along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as a substantially linear passage (first passage CRt4001) in the top view, and is in the direction approaching the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (arrow). It is formed with a downward slope toward (R direction).

The upper side wall portion C4123 partitions the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The passage width should be the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can be guided only in series. However, the passage width may be a dimension capable of guiding a plurality of spheres in a parallel state (a dimension larger than twice the sphere).

A notch C4123a is formed in the upper side wall C4123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface C4121 (first passage CRt4001), and the upper bottom surface C4121 (first) is formed through the notch c4123a. A ball can flow down from the passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

The lower bottom surface portion C4122 is extended along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the top view, and the straight portion C4122a having a substantially linear shape on one end side and the other end side in the extension direction and them. Between the pair of straight portions C4122a, it is formed from an arc portion C4122b that is curved in an arc shape in which the outflow surface C122a side is concave in the top view. The arc portion C4122b has a shape that most protrudes toward the upstream side (arrow L direction side) in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at substantially the center in the front-rear direction.

Further, as the cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) becomes toward the arc portion C4122b in the pair of straight portions C4122a. It is formed as a plane that inclines downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D), and is formed substantially horizontally in the arc portion C4122b. That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction.

The lower side wall portion C4124 includes one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (direction of guiding the sphere) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) and the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). ) And the passage width are separated. The passage width should be the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can be guided only in series.

The straight portion C4122a of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is arranged substantially perpendicular to the upper bottom surface portion C4121 in top view, and is arranged at the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) and the lower bottom surface of the upper bottom surface portion C4121. The portion C4122 is arranged at a position adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction (the end portion on the arrow B direction side and the ascending slope side of the straight portion C4122a).

At the position corresponding to the notch C4123a in the upper side wall C4123, the lower side wall C4124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface C4121 (first passage CRt4001) via the notch C4123a. A ball can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

The lower side wall portion C4124 on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc in the top view, the arrow R direction side) is located at the substantially center of the arc portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (the position most protruding in the curved arrow L direction). ) Is formed with a notch C124a, and a sphere flows down from the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 214) through the notch portion C124a. It is possible.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed of a pair of straight line portions C4122a and an arc portion C4122b, and the upper bottom surface portion C4121 is formed on the upwardly inclined side of the straight portion C4122a (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122). Since a ball is flowed down from (first passage CRt4001), the flowed ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). Above, a sphere can flow down from the notch C124a to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 214).

As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) at a predetermined interval, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 ( By utilizing the reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt4002), it is possible to make the preceding ball catch up with the following ball and reduce the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball (connect the balls). ..

The arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 protrudes most in the substantially center (curved arrow L direction) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the arc portion C4122b at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a. The outflow surface C122a is recessed in the position). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for causing the ball guided by the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface that inclines downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 214).

Therefore, after reciprocating the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly flowed out (flowed down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) by using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), the spheres in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the spheres in a continuous state) are connected. Can flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the above (see FIG. 214).

The width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the sphere reciprocating in the lower bottom surface portion C4122, dimension in the arrow FB direction) is the notch portion C124a in the top view. The closer to the side, the larger the shape is formed.

Further, in the top view, when the sphere is in contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side, arrow L direction side) from the notch portion C124a, the sphere rolls on the outflow surface C122a. To (cross). That is, the sphere that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 at the position farthest from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the sphere is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C4124). Even in the state of rolling (position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that it overlaps the center of the sphere in the top view (the locus of the lower top of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the sphere that has flowed down into the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) is subjected to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage). CRt4002) may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a without reciprocating once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times. .. That is, there is a risk that the two spheres will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) with the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere not reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed by being curved in an arc shape, and the notch portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side (center side of the arc in the top view, the arrow R direction side) of the arc portion C4122b. Is formed. Therefore, a centrifugal force is applied to the sphere that rolls on the arc portion C4122b toward the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) of the notch portion C124a, and thereby opposes the notch portion C124a. While pressing the ball against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the side (opposing side), the ball can be rolled (reciprocated) by the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 214) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the sphere becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is easy to get over (easily cross) the outflow surface C122a and sufficiently reciprocate the ball along the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to make the preceding sphere catch up with the following sphere and reduce the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere (connect the spheres).

Next, the lower frame C5086b in the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 242 (a). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 242 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C5086b according to the 32nd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CCXXXII-CCXXXII of FIG. 227. In FIG. 242 (a), only the cross sections of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic portion C5400 of the lower frame C5086b are shown.

The magnetic portion C5400 is a long metal body, and a protrusion is projected downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) from an end portion on the side opposite to the back member C2130 (arrow F direction side). Therefore, the magnetic portion C5400 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. Further, the protruding portion of the magnetic portion C5400 is arranged at a position where the end portion on the back surface member C2130 side is separated from the front surface of the back surface member C2130 at a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic portion C5400. Is formed linearly in the width direction (arrow FB direction).

The magnetic portion C5400 is capable of attracting a sphere by utilizing the magnetic force acting from the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. A plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400.

When the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position and a ball is flowed down from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball that has rolled on the rolling surface) jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 (see FIG. 235). That is, it is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400. The sphere adsorbed on the magnetic portion C5400 moves to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400 due to the force of the sphere due to jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C5400. Will be done. As a result, the ball flowing down along the magnetic portion C5400 can be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 230).

As described above, the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400 is arranged along the magnetic portion C5400 at a position where the end portion on the back surface member C2130 side is separated from the front surface of the back surface member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere. The contact between the flowing ball and the back member C2130 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of frictional force on the sphere, so that the flow velocity of the sphere can be increased. Further, since the sphere is not supported by the front surface of the back member C2130, it is possible to form a mode in which the sphere sways when flowing down, and the sphere may be dropped from the magnetic portion C5400 (the possibility that the fifth passage CRt2005 cannot be reached). Can be raised. As a result, the behavior of the ball can be noticed by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the lower frame C6086b in the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 242 (b). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 242 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the 33rd embodiment and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CCXXXII-CCXXXII of FIG. 227. In FIG. 242 (b), only the cross sections of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic portion C6400 of the lower frame C6086b are shown.

In the magnetic portion C6400 of the 33rd embodiment, the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 is closer to the back member C2130 as the vertical direction is upward with respect to the magnetic portion C5400 of the 32nd embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the magnetic portion C5400 in the 32nd embodiment, except that it is formed as a surface).

The sphere attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 is brought into contact with the back surface member C2130 due to the effect of the inclination of the bottom surface and the magnetic force directly applied from the magnet portion C2300. Therefore, a frictional force can be applied to the sphere, and the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down along the magnetic portion C6400 can be slowed down. As a result, the moving time of the ball can be lengthened, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the sphere can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 and the back member C2130, and it is possible to prevent the sphere from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C6400.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is decelerated by the ridge portion 154 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an adhesive member may be arranged on the inner surface to increase the flow resistance of the sphere, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by a magnetic force. You may.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged in the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be arranged on the back surface side of the effect member 700 so that the overhang width to the back surface side can be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated by configuring the main body 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 to be inserted into the rear case 510 while the overhang width is long. can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by operating the operation member 183 so that the insertion into the rear case 510 is released in a state where the overhang width is shortened. At this time, the effect member 700 of the effect member 700 The displacement regulating device 180 also displaces with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized and produced by the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by a manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be provided with a driving device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the deregulated state prior to the initial operation from the power-on, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from starting displacement while the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. can do. This makes it possible to prevent the operating member 183 from being overloaded.

Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operating member 183 is provided without driving the displacement regulating device 180, and the displacement regulating device 180 is determined to be in the regulated state by this detection sensor. May be controlled so as not to start driving the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof may be used.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the effect member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 from changing. When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is projected, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with the recess provided in the lower arm member 630 to prevent the lower arm member 630 from changing its arrangement in the left-right direction. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged as an example of the device that regulates the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the upper side of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, by disposing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displaceting the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it may be designed to prevent the granular member 320 from being rubbed against the wall surface of the partition member 310, cracking, or scratching the partition member 310.

For example, by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side (effect standby state), it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacement of the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480. Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partition member 310 that the granular member 320 can contact at the time of shipment, and it is possible to suppress the displacement amount of the granular member 320, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which cracks occur due to collision between the granular members 320. can.

Further, as another example, the granular member 320 is arranged on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate effecting means 160, is configured to be overhanging in the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is arranged in the internal space IE1 in the overhanging state. An overhanging member may be provided so as to be able to limit the displacement of the.

By configuring this overhanging member so that it can be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (front side of the gaming board 13), and switching between the overhanging state and the non-overhanging state each time the pushing operation is performed. After installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game machine store, the overhanging member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the overhanging member can be improved.

The mode of changing the state of the overhanging member is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism as in the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engaging or disengaging the claws with each other.

Further, as another example, the arrangement of the granular member 320 may be maintained by shipping the partition member 310 in a state where the internal air pressure is increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game machine store and lowering the air pressure in the partition member 310 before operating it, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

Further, as another example, a resin used as a material for the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing a ferromagnetic metal powder, and a magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. As a result, at the time of shipment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, by removing this magnet during operation, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

The magnet is not limited to the one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be arranged as a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be arranged on the lid member 480.

In the embodiment in which the granular member 320 is mixed with the metal powder of the ferromagnetic material, for example, after the firing effect is executed, the granular member 320 operates so as to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the partition member 310 (for example, the magnet is brought close to the partition member 310). By disposing the effect (operating) effect, the effect mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visualized as if it is floating) can be included in the launch effect.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the scaling unit 600 is fixed to the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an insertion hole formed in the rear case 510 on the same straight line as the central axis of the regulated hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged at a predetermined terminal position is formed in the rear case 510, and is shipped at the time of shipment. A metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole, fixed with tape or the like, and after arriving at the game machine store, the clerk of the game machine store pulls out the metal rod or resin rod. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be soiled with the tape for fixing, and the metal rod or resin rod cannot be thrown away for delivery to other stores of the pachinko machine 10 and stored. It may be necessary to do so.

In addition, if the storage of the metal rod or resin rod is left to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and if the metal rod or resin rod is delivered to another store without the metal rod or resin rod, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured. It may not be possible. It can also be recognized that the displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 is an improvement of this viewpoint.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width of the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear compartment lower portion 314 are about the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the front-rear width of the left-right central portion 312b and the back compartment lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-rear width of the left-right portion 312a and the back compartment lower portion 314. In this case, since the moving resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased on the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the front plate portion 311 and the front plate portion 311 can be increased. It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged by the collision.

Further, for example, the front-rear width of the left-right portion 312a and the back surface section lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be made to enter the internal space IE1 without losing the momentum of the injected granular member 320.

Further, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, the shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. In this case, since the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive load locally on the partition member 310. Further, by moving the tapering direction toward the front side, it is possible to easily move the scattered granular member 320 toward the front side.

Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion that protrudes toward the back side may be provided at a portion of the front plate portion 311 where the ejected granular members 320 are expected to reach together. good. A separate member may be arranged and fixed to the back surface of the front plate portion 311 or the concave portion may be formed so that a part of the front plate portion 311 may be formed so as to project to the back side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed in the shape of a soccer ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be spherical, rugby ball-shaped, or star-shaped (a shape in which a protrusion is formed three-dimensionally). By forming the members having a certain size, a gap can be created between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the firing effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back surface side of the light guide plate 161 so as to launch the granular member 320 in the diagonally forward and upward direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the injection device 400 may be arranged at the left-right position of the light guide plate 161 or at an upper position. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally forward. When the injection device 400 is arranged at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the effect standby position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed of a monochromatic (red in this embodiment) resin member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two-color molding or two members of different colors may be combined to form one granular member 320. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, the color layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as the collision member 420 may be adopted as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape having the same size as the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. As a result, the way the granular member 320 flies and looks changes depending on whether the firing effect is executed with the curved shape fitted well or the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitted. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular members 320 are arranged so as to be scattered in the internal space IE1 and gather on the collision member 420 by gravity has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the granular member 320 is provided with an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side in the effect standby state), and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. You may. In this case, it is possible to avoid limiting the initial position side of the granular member 320 to the lower side.

Examples of the urging means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member having fixed ends, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the urging means and the granular member 320 is not limited in any way. For example, the granular member 320 and the urging means may be bonded to each other, and although they are not bonded, they are not separated from each other, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. The urging means may be supported by the internal space IE1 while being displaceable from the granular member 320.

Further, the urging means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, the atmospheric pressure adjusting means for adjusting the atmospheric pressure in the internal space IE1 may be adopted in the same manner as the gravity acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment. In this case, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be affected by raising or lowering the air pressure in the internal space IE1.

For example, when the pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, the upper side of the internal space IE1. When the pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner of extracting gas from the interior space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating displacement) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

When the atmospheric pressure is changed, it is preferable to close the deformed penetrating portion 315. It is easily possible to impart the function of closing the deformed penetrating portion 315 to the lid member 480. For example, when a flexible, thin and highly deformable deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480, and the lid member 480 enters the deformed penetrating portion 315, the lid is used. The gap between the member 480 and the deformed penetrating portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the deformed penetrating portion 315.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface of the right end portion facing the transmission protrusion 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is arranged at the lower end position, but also the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while in contact with the curved surface, so that the coil spring SP1 It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum urging force of.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right central portions of the collision member 420 are formed of a curved shape of an upward protrusion has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a slope shape in which the central portion is sharpened and descends in the left-right direction, or it may be a hipped roof shape. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharp point in the central portion in the left-right direction as compared with the curved shape. Therefore, the bias of the left-right arrangement of the granular member 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, it may have a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction, or may have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a mass until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310 and then separated by the collision.

When changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is formed of a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is preferably formed in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are convex upward. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 from colliding with each other.

In the first embodiment, the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is formed into a flat shape in a lateral view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower half may be overhanging and bent in a lateral view. In this case, the dense position of the granular member 320 can be moved to the upper half side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the size of the partition member 310 in the front view is about the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the partition member 310 in front view is designed to be about or larger than the size of the visible area in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the edge portion of the partition member 310 overlaps with the display by the third symbol display device 81 and is visually recognized, so that the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the first embodiment, a single collision member 420 is adopted as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be adopted, and may be operated cooperatively or individually by separate drive devices.

In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 comes into contact with the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not come into contact with the collision member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pillar portion protruding from the plate portion 422 to the back surface side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 so as to be in contact with the front side transmission member 440. In this case, the contact portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar portion is formed in a concavo-convex manner in such a manner that the radial length is switched according to the angular arrangement, so that the pillar portion is arranged as the front transmission member 440 rotates. Can be changed. Utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (microdisplaced).

In the first embodiment, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited to this. For example, it may enter by sliding displacement along the linear direction. In this case, the shape of the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape recessed toward the back surface side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is separated and fits under the lid member 480 in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a protruding portion may be formed so as to project from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and the protruding portion may be configured to be in contact with the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular member 320 is locally deposited, by pushing the granular member 320 by the protruding portion, the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be broken along with the displacement of the lid member 480 to the approach side. .. As a result, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

The shape of the protruding portion of the lid member 480 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured so that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, the protrusions can be brought into contact with the deposited granular member 320 regardless of the position where the granular member 320 is deposited, and the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be broken.

Further, it may be configured as a pair of ridges that are arranged so as to be inclined to the left and right outwards as the advance / retreat portion 481 moves toward the retracted end portion, starting from the left and right center portions of the approach side tip portion of the overhanging portion 482. .. In this case, with the displacement of the lid member 480 on the approach side, a load in the direction of pushing the granular member 320 toward the left and right outward can be applied to the granular member 320.

Moreover, the direction of the ridge is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be opposite, the ridges may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or a combination of ridges having different degrees of inclination may be used, or an inclination may be obtained. A ridge without a ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping with) the rotation axis) may be used. In addition, the number of ridges is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

The projecting length of the protruding portion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be projected until it reaches a circle having the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or the lid member 480 is configured so that the protruding length from the advancing / retreating portion 481 is constant. Is also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protruding portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing / retreating portion 481. Can be played by the club.

The action timing of the protruding portion when the protruding portion is formed on the lid member 480 is not limited to the time when the granular member 320 is stopped and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is contained below the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is moved in the forward and reverse directions in small steps near the state in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with reference to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be displaced up and down in small steps, and the granular member 320 resting on the collision member 420 can be displaced. Can be displaced up and down.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collide with the protruding portion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the rearrangement of the granular member 320 can be executed, and the deposition of the granular member 320 can be collapsed.

Further, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (when it is displaced ascending), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side, so that it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protrusion. be able to.

The execution of the small forward / reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward / reverse direction, or the forward rotation may be generated at short time intervals. In this case, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 causes the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 to be displaced in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, so that the drive motor MT1 can rotate in the reverse direction.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right, so that the lid member corresponds to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not a flat surface but has an uneven shape (wave shape), and the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 are close to each other. The distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 may be changed. Further, the approach-side end of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed so as to be formed parallel to the axis of the rotating shaft O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be arranged at the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by the posture change of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, contact member 430, transmission arm) are transmitted. In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the case where the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there may be a timing to displace all the members among the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the drive motor MT1 to be adopted may be slightly enlarged.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 contacts the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, a repulsive force is generated between them, the front side. The load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the linear motion member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, in the transmission protrusion 446, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between the transmission protrusion 414 and the protrusion 414 is disposed in a half portion in the circumferential direction that is arranged so as to face the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410. On the other hand, the magnetic material of the magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force is disposed between the ridge portion 414 and the circumferential half portion on the opposite side, so that the repulsive force causes the linear motion member 410 to be positioned at the lower end position. Since it can be configured so as to occur on the side to be maintained, the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions, the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. I explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed on at least one of the circumferential surfaces of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and the driving force may be transmitted through the groove to increase the number of driving force transmission targets.

In the first embodiment, the case where it may be unclear whether or not the timing at which the front transmission member 440 should be rotated in the reverse direction may be unclear due to the detection by the detection sensor SC4, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor for detecting the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is arranged, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 indicates that the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. You may judge whether it is possible or not. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the drive in the forward rotation direction has passed through the firing state, so that the reverse rotation is possible if the firing state is not reached, and the reverse rotation is not possible if the firing state is exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, a linear motion slide).

In the first embodiment, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent a defect related to the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state. The case where it is configured has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by making the shape of the extended claw portion 734 different, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is higher than that of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are balanced with the earlier displacement start due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are simultaneously operated in all directions. It can be made to appear as if the displacement has started.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating plate 730 is brought into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740 to generate a load in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 730 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Not limited. For example, a spring member that applies an urging force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be arranged to apply the urging force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating plate 730 is used as both a means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacementing the telescopic displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and the first guided protrusion 743b is radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. The case where the second guided protrusion 744b to be arranged receives a load later has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b occurs at the same time. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment, the case where the telescopic displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, a first guided protrusion 743b and a second guided protrusion 744b, has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to project diagonally with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740, the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer side of the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement members 740 toward the collective arrangement state has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Not limited. For example, an overhanging portion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the overhanging portion allows the first guided protrusion 743b to be extruded outward in the radial direction, thereby moving the telescopic displacement member 740 to the discrete state side. It can assist the displacement toward.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change of the effect member 700 at the lower end position of the displacement and loosens the degree of the attitude change of the effect member 700 allowed at the upper and lower intermediate positions has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the degree of tolerance for the posture change of the effect member 700 may be increased toward the lower end position of the displacement.

Further, the degree of posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the position where the acting force is generated on the effect member 700, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be made variable. For example, by changing the thickness of the tip portion of the lower arm member 630 for each portion, the thickness (hole depth) of the arc-shaped hole 634 can be changed, so that the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 The contact area of can be changed.

The degree of change in posture of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. For example, the front surface of the plate of the main body member 601 arranged to face the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 and the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 may be provided with irregularities to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the posture change of the effect member 700 in the front surface of the plate of the main body member 601 or in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. Therefore, it becomes easy to suppress the posture change in the portion where the interval is narrow. Further, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the descending end.

In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increase / decrease device capable of increasing / decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increasing / decreasing device may be a braking device capable of increasing or decreasing the frictional resistance, a device for increasing or decreasing the displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device for projecting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to a position where the displacement can be mechanically regulated. .. In the case of a device using a magnetic force, it is easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arcuate hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

In the first embodiment, as the arrangement position of the effect member 700 moves downward, a large displacement is allowed as a displacement in the expansion direction, and after the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed, the effect member 700 is in the expansion direction. Although the case where displacement occurs has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled so that the displacement in the expansion direction occurs in the middle of the displacement of the effect member 700 in the vertical direction. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is moved to the left and right by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction in which the effect member 700 is reduced (displaced inward in the radial direction) while the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced. It is possible to offset the influence of the change from the long posture to the long vertical posture, and to suppress the change in the posture of the effect member 700 in the forward tilting direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is displaced vertically has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in the assembled state, and the state changes to the discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. It may be configured to change to a larger state.

In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to open an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 that covers the front surface of the game area. Further, the second layer glass unit is inclined from the same front-rear position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front side toward the upper side, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17. Is preferable.

In the first embodiment, the case where the postures of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjusting member 744 are likely to be tilted due to the positional relationship of the second long member 743 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an urging means such as a spring that generates an urging force is arranged between the second long member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744, and the posture of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the posture inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the attitude inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exerted.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cable tube may be wound around the electric wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion arranged on the upper side of the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electric wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By executing the operation control of the drive device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the throttle portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing tool such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 may be limited.

Further, the fastening position of the electric wiring DK2 can be arbitrarily set. For example, in the electric wiring DK2 arranged through the connecting position of the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, a diaphragm portion 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connecting position. , The fastening position may be provided on the vertical slide member 820 side of the connection position.

Further, the means for fastening the electric wiring DK2 is not limited to the use for the electric wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electrical wiring DK1 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. That is, by narrowing the width of a part of the arrangement portion 635 on which the electric wiring DK1 is arranged, the electric wiring DK1 may be sandwiched to limit the displacement, or the inside of the arrangement portion 635 may be narrowed. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixture such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the arrangement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the target to which the electric wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 provided with the arrangement portion 635, or the effect member 700 arranged on the tip end side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in a direction (front-rear direction) in which the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced on the vertical and horizontal planes, and the wiring arm member 870 is displaced from the vertical and horizontal planes. Although the case of doing so has been explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the lateral slide member 840 is on the front-back and left-right planes, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up-down direction. It may be tilted and displaced.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b has been described in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is displaced in a spiral shape in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose postures can be changed according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged according to the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and the electrical wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the electric wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by disposing a drive device such as a solenoid that displaces the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 854, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced if necessary even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as follows.

In the first embodiment, the case where the overhanging state of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the state change to the enlarged state occurs in the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, when the pinnate member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 having the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700 is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state, the effect member 700 May be configured so that the state can be changed to the enlarged state.

In this case, it is possible to avoid a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800, and it is possible to avoid expecting a change in the state of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the pinnate member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the intermediate flow path LM1 is composed of the same shape as the guide path DL1 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends with a longer left-right width than the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. ..

In the first embodiment, the case where the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path for the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to flow down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a route for a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63, may be used as a route for a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path of a sphere that has passed through the out port 71.

Further, since the arrangement of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, and 65 is set at an arbitrary position in the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow path LM1 can also be arbitrarily set. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the back side of the game area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16 or the like). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section in which the ball flows down along the path in the front view of the ball flowing down in the game area.

Further, for the purpose of putting the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the player's field of view, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left and right center side of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 in front view may be used.

In the first embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as in the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination substrate may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Further, the entire range of the illuminated substrate is not limited to the one hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illumination substrate may not be shielded, and the light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a stepped shape, a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is stopped may be alternately generated.

Further, by fastening the guide holes 733 formed in a stepped shape to a part of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to be close to or in contact with each other at different displacement loci and different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illuminated substrates has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the horizontal substrate unit 166 and the vertical substrate unit 167 of the light guide plate effect means 160 may be configured by a plurality of illuminated substrates. Further, the portion (left and right long portions) corresponding to the horizontally long groove portion 171a of the decorative means 170 is configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of illuminated substrates, and is used as an intersection. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, the light may be visually recognized through the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the light irradiation direction, the present invention is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard illuminated substrates are used. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED may be arranged on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing it at a portion. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the light irradiation direction can be increased. Further, in this case, it can be configured by a single substrate.

In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of a plurality of configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced) regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusions A133b are formed at two positions of the key device A130 has been described, but the number of such protrusions A133b (the number of formations) may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the key device A130 of 1 is arranged in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number of such key devices A130 (the number of arrangements) may be increased to 2 or more. ..

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, the arrangement direction (direction, posture, phase) with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration is used as a reference. The order of each may be changed. The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each configuration are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is on one side of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) (first connection wall portion A220 side). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the third connection wall portion A240 side).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering portion A270) connects the pair of protruding portions A133b (protruding portions A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). , R direction) has been described, but the direction in which the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) are connected is the operation wall portion A210 (original wall portion A210). Predetermined as the arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the second region) and the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). The key device A130 (covered portion A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (attitude, phase) having an angle (an angle greater than 0 ° and less than 90 °).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A260 (covering portion A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connecting wall portion A220 has been described. For example, the order of arranging the openings AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) in the reverse order of the arrangement of each of the above embodiments (that is, in order from the side closer to the first connecting wall portion A220). ), And the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. Will be).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operating wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the like. It may be formed at the site of. That is, it is not necessary to form the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 on the lower portion of the outer surface. As other parts, for example, a part forming the outer surface of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, that is, the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, and the left wall part of the box covers A200 and A3200. Examples thereof include A204 or the right wall portion A205, the back wall portion A301 of the box base A300, the upper wall portion A302, the lower wall portion A303, the left wall portion A304, the right wall portion A305, and the like. Similarly, as other portions, for example, a first connection wall portion A220, a second connection wall portion A230, or a third connection wall portion A240 is exemplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operating wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operating portion A122 to a position where it protrudes from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F direction) of the operating wall portion A210. It is preferable that the guide wall A251 is also provided on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 as the length dimension of the operation portion A122 is extended.

In each of the above embodiments, a recess is formed on the outer surface (front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom surface of the recess is the operation wall portion A210 (that is, from the front wall portion A201). Although the case where the operation wall portion A210 is located at a lower position (on the side of the main controller A110) is not necessarily limited to this, the outer surface (for example, the front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200 is not necessarily limited to this. The portion that forms the protrusion and the protruding tip surface of the protrusion may be the operation wall portion A210 (that is, the portion is operated at a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (opposite to the main control device A110). (Position the wall portion A210).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main control device 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. As long as the operator is operated through the opening, the stored items are arbitrary. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a stored object has, for example, a connecting portion connected to an opening / closing lid that opens / closes a discharge port for discharging the ball from the flow path of the ball, and the opening / closing lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. Examples of members (structures, devices) that open and close the.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a push button switch and a key operation type selector switch are adopted as the operation means (switch device A120, key device A130) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other types. The operating means of may be adopted. Examples of other types of operating means include tactile switches, rocker switches, DIP switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation mode of the operator (operation unit A122, key A140) is pushing and rotating has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the operation elements are formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is arranged so as to be operable through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in each of the above embodiments). Other operating modes include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (eg, a mode in which the operating buttons are displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends, such as a rocker switch operation button), tilting (eg, toggle). An embodiment in which the operating lever is displaced so as to tilt to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum, such as an operating lever of a switch) is exemplified.

In this case, the sliding direction of the operator, the direction connecting both ends of the operator that is displaced by the seesaw, and the tilting direction of the tilting operator are the longitudinal directions (arrows L and R directions) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 (second region) can be effectively utilized to improve the operability of the operating means.

In any of the above-described operation modes, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is formed only in the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the operator (the region required to allow the displacement). Is also good.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by a finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or the end surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 and the end surface wall portion A272, A2272 (annulus). The structure may be such that the portion A272a or the outer edge of the square portion A272b) is in contact with the portion A272a. That is, at least one of the face or end face of the key A140 in the off position or the on position to be gripped by the finger is in contact with the end face wall portion A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the ring portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end face of the key A140 may be slid with respect to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the ring portion A272a).

The surface and end face of the key A140 to be gripped by the fingers and the gap between the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the upright wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the tilt of the key device A130 to be tolerated). That is, it is set to a value at which at least one of the above gaps is eliminated (the key A140 or the key device A130 is abutted) before reaching an angle (an angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off or be damaged or the solder is peeled off). .. The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed at only one place or at three or more places. When formed at two or more locations, their circumferential positions (phases) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be continuously formed in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are projected outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is projected inward in the radial direction from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protrusion is radially inward on the outer surface of the base A133a of the key device A130. A recessed portion may be provided so that the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recessed portion of the key device A130. In this case, if the recess is made continuous up to the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base A133a so that the covering portion A270 can be put on the key device A130 (the protrusion is inserted into the recess) (protrusion). An opening for inserting the portion into the recess may be formed on the end face).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in addition to this, the ridge A251 is connected to the guide wall A251. May be concatenated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where two ridges (first ridge A211 and second ridge A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of such ridges is not necessarily limited to this. It may be one, or three or more. When forming a plurality of lines, the connection position between one end of the line and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect the other ridges at positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position / on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212, the cross-sectional shape of the other ridges, and the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the erecting dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210). ) And the width dimension (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the height direction of the cross-section disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end face shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a shape in which these are combined. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and whichever is larger may be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (the vertical dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operating wall portion A210) is along the extending direction. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and may be changed along the extension direction.

It should be noted that the height dimension may be gradually lowered as it is separated from one end connected to the covering portion A270. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation angle (phase difference between the on position and the off position) of the key A140 is set to 90 ° has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) are not necessarily limited to this. Phase difference) may be set. That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 °, or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end face wall portion A272) is a region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (the region required to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140. The second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of the portion on the other side (opposite side to one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed in a shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of gyration (distance from the center of rotation to the end face (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by a finger)) and a center of rotation of the key A140. Explained the case where the radius of gyration of the other side is different from the radius of gyration, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the radius of gyration (from the center of rotation to the end face (hold with a finger)) on one side and the other side. The distance) to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may be openings having substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be used. good. Examples of other front view shapes include a substantially square, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape having a pentagon or more, and a shape in which these are combined.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be substantially orthogonal (that is, a form in which the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 is along the arrows U and D directions).

In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is a connection wall portion (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion). A240) has been described, and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but the present invention is not limited to this. The entire outer edge of the operating wall portion A210 may be surrounded by the connecting wall portion.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall portion A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. However, the operation wall portion A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 does not match the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) are arranged in substantially series (substantially in a row) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include staggered arrangements, arrangements dispersed in non-regular positions, and arrangements in a grid pattern (arrangements at intersections of a plurality of straight lines orthogonal to each other). Further, when arranged in substantially series (substantially in a row), the series direction may be arranged not parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portions A210 (box covers A200, A3200), and the arrangement is substantially orthogonal to each other. It may be.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 is formed as a flat surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are not necessarily limited to this. One or more protrusions or ridges (ribs) may be erected from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F).

In this case, the ridge (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is an end face wall in a front view (arrow B direction view). It is preferable that the portions A272 and A2272 extend radially outward from the center (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271) in a radial direction. Further, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, when the key A140 is pulled out, even if the key A140 engages with the edge of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the pulling direction (arrow F direction) of the key A140, This is because damage to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the ridges (ribs).

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape in the front view that is continuous in the circumferential direction. A plurality of such ridges (ribs) may be arranged at different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erection tip surface of the erection walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). Although the case (positioned on the separated side) has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and other standing walls A208, A280, and A290 may be retracted.

Further, the amount of retreat of each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Further, the amount of retreat may change in the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 of 1.

In this case, it is preferable that the amount of retreat of the erection tip surface from the reference surface is smaller as the erection wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. The area farther from the fastening hole A206a of the printed circuit board A119 is separated from the abutted erection wall when the erection wall is abutted by the amount that the regulation by the screw ASC is weaker than the area closer to the fastening hole A206a. The degree of adhesion to the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened due to the tendency of deformation (displacement) in the direction of the erection. This is because it is possible to easily secure the close contact between the erection tip surface of the erection wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 on all the erection walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the erection tip surface of the erection wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference surface, the fastening hole A206a (in this order), the erection wall A280, the erection wall A290, and the erection wall A208 ( Since the distance from the erection wall A209) becomes longer, the amount of retreat from the above-mentioned reference plane is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the erection tip surface of the erection wall A208). The amount of retreat from the reference plane is minimized).

Further, the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may also be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erection tip surfaces of the erection walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 of 1 may be configured to be inclined with respect to the front wall portions A201 of the box covers A200 and A3200, respectively.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display in the setting change mode has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of this, the setting value is displayed. Alternatively, or in addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device. Examples of other display devices include a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol hold lamp 84.

Further, the set value may not be displayed on any of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the set value before the activation, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. The configuration may be such that the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to prevent the set value from being illegally acquired by an illegal means (for example, a means for capturing the display of the third symbol display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall). Further, when the setting is changed during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the set value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although the description is omitted in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the rotation center) is provided, and the inner frame 11 is provided with the inner side. When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is permitted, and the inner frame 12 has a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If the release (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, the input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be invalidated). .. This is because it is possible to prevent illegal setting changes.

Further, a second detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational position centered on the rotation axis A410) is provided, and the board box A100 is provided with respect to the inner frame 12. When the second detection sensor detects that the A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device). (The input from A130 is invalid), and if the opening (rotation) of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is made. It may be configured to be acceptable. This is because it is possible to prevent illegal setting changes.

Both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are predetermined. When the opening (rotation) of an angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the above-mentioned setting change may be allowed. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch in which the mechanical detection unit is displaced as the machine opens and closes.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 And the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless the predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main control device A110. That is, if at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected). , Even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be allowed. In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed by the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed by the 7-segment display of the main control device A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 And the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless the predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), but this is not necessarily the case. If a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main control device A110, it is disconnected regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if it is connected). However, even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed (that is, when a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110). It may be configured so that the setting change is prohibited. Also in this case, a predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, as a predetermined electrical connection line, a payout control device 111 is exemplified. According to this, since the power of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being illicitly operated and the game ball being paid out.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ridge A2273 is extended in a streak shape has been described as a form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side at a predetermined interval between the position AP1 and the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5. Alternatively, the ridge A2273 may be formed intermittently between the position AP1 and the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5.

The range in which the ridge A2273 or a plurality of ridges are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. .. Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 to be rotated to a second position (a position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010). Although the case where it is arranged in b)) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt another displacement form.

As another displacement form, for example, the substrate box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (arrow L, R direction) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slidably displaced in the opposite side to the hinge 18 (arrow L direction). By doing so, the rotation axis A410, which is a form in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position, is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrows F and B directions) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis thereof. An example is a mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) with the A410 as the center of rotation.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft A4410 is formed on each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one or both of the rotating shafts A4410 are formed. It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, a split body of the rotation shaft A4410 is formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300, and in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotation shaft is formed from each split body. A4410 may be formed.

The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotating shaft A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400 has been described. However, the rotating shaft A410 is formed on the box covers A200, A3200 or the box base A300. You may. Further, as in the case described above, in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotation shaft A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed in each.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the main body member B1210 of the lining member B1200 and the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 rub against each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening may be provided on the side of the lining member B1200, and the front side surfaces of the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be projected to the front side with dimensions that allow entry into the opening. In this case, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide members B1310 and B1510 can be stabilized by engagement (fitting) instead of frictional resistance.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, a case where a part of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is assembled from the front side of the thin plate member B1110 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the penetration forming portion B1120 is such that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be inserted back and forth including the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512, so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be assembled on the back surface of the thin plate member B1110. Can be completed on the side.

Further, the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured to be disassembled from the guide members B1310 and B1510. As a result, the portion of the thin plate member B1110 that is required to be assembled from the front side is limited to the upward extension portions B1312 and B1512, which are likely to be subject to a collision load from the ball and have a higher possibility of damage than other portions. can do. In this way, maintainability can be improved by assembling only the parts that are likely to be damaged from the front side.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are opened alternately and the case where one of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are opened are described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, other variations may be prepared in which the ratio of the round sections that are opened alternately and the round sections that are continuously opened by either one is changed.

For example, the first guide plate B1300 may be opened alternately from the 1st to 8th rounds and the 9th to 15th rounds. In this case, the operation pattern can have the characteristics of each operation pattern (number of payout balls, round game time, number of spilled balls, etc.) in half.

In the eleventh embodiment, the protrusion lengths are changed by setting the left-right arrangement intervals of the protrusions B1140 and B1211 to equal intervals, but the protrusion length is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a section may be provided in which the protrusion lengths are the same and the arrangement intervals are changed, or the arrangement intervals may be equal while the protrusion lengths are the same. The projecting portions B1140 and B1211 may be designed according to the desired deceleration mode.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are arranged at a height that does not come into contact with the ball that rolls in the lower part of the range before entering the ball is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the height may be set so as to graze the vicinity of the upper end of the sphere. In this case, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 function as a projecting portion that has a large deceleration effect on the ball when tilted to one side (for example, tilted toward the lower right), and tilted to the other side (for example, to the lower left). In the directed tilt), it can function as a projecting portion having a small deceleration action on the ball.

The deceleration section is composed of the shape of the portion that comes into contact with the game ball (addition of a protrusion protruding inward of the guide path or change in the inclination of the guide path). In that respect, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are not limited to those projecting in the front-rear direction. For example, the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212 may travel upward from the lower end positions of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521.

The preferred deceleration section configuration differs depending on the displacement mode of the member that guides the ball. For example, if the member is linearly displaced, it is easy to add a projecting portion and change the inclination of the rolling surface. Further, for example, if the member is rotationally displaced so as to project from the width direction of the guide path, it is easy to add a protrusion, but the change in inclination reduces the degree of freedom in design due to the relationship with the rotation axis. Further, for example, in the case of a member that is rotationally displaced so as to project from the longitudinal direction of the guide path, the degree of freedom tends to be low because it is necessary to avoid the displacement locus of the displaced member when adding the protrusion. However, the degree of freedom in designing changes in inclination is high.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where a plurality of detection sensors are arranged in one variable winning device B1000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a part of the configuration of the variable winning device B1000 may be diverted to be configured as a variable winning device that guides the ball to a single detection sensor.

In the eleventh embodiment, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 have a structure having a gap in the middle, but the structure is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a gap may be formed only on one side and no gap may be formed on the other side, and the plate may be formed of a single plate.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the connecting fixing members B1330 and B1530 are formed in a block shape in both the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 and an interval is provided in the front and rear is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, by deleting the portion of the connecting / fixing member B1530 that overlaps with the connecting / fixing member B1330 in the front view and configuring the connecting / fixing member B1530 as a member having an L-shape in the front view, the connecting / fixing member B1530 can be made of the connecting / fixing member B1330. It may be possible to place it directly above.

That is, in the standby state, the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B1530 may be arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction. In this case, the front-rear width required for arranging the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be shortened.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the extension support portion B1212 fills the gap between the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, for example. The formation of the extended support portion B1212 may be omitted. In this case, the gap between the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 becomes a step, and the flow of the sphere is slightly disturbed, but the sphere can be guided to the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 without any problem. Further, by omitting the formation of the extension support portion B1212 and utilizing the vacant space, the ends of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream side members B1320 and B1520 are extended to narrow the gap, thereby narrowing the sphere. The turbulence of the flow can be minimized.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the relative positions of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 do not change and only the front-back movement occurs in the guide plates B1300 and B1500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 may be connected to the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 can be displaced so as to approach the guide members B1310 and B1510 according to the front-rear displacement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. As a result, although the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are configured to intersect in a front view, the gap generated at the intersection position can be closed by the lateral displacement of the upstream members B1320 and B1520, so that the formation of the extended support portion B1212 is omitted. be able to.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched from the open state to the closed state, the upper extension portions B1312 and B1512 are arranged on the upstream side of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to allow the ball to enter. Cut off. In this case, the upward extension portions B1312 and B1512 are configured to be displaced from the front side to the back side of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Therefore, the direction of the load applied to the sphere from the upward extending portion B1312, B1512 is toward the back side. Therefore, the sphere applied with the load from the upward extending portion B1312, B1512 during displacement is first a thin plate of the base member B1100. It collides with the member B1110, and a ball whose momentum is reduced by bouncing collides with the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 constituting the design surface.

Therefore, the load applied to the main body member B1210 can be reduced, and problems such as cracking of the design surface can be easily avoided, but the displacement of the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, when the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 block the entry of the ball, the upper extending portion B1312 and B1512 may be configured to be displaced from the back side to the front side. In this case, when the inner edges of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are formed flush with the plate surface of the thin plate member B1110 of the foundation member B1100, the ball can be blocked at an early stage.

The mode in which the members that block the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are displaced from the back side to the front side is not limited at all. For example, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be configured to be displaced to the front side when switching to the closed state, or the upward extension portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured separately from the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Then, as the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the back side when switching to the closed state, the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured to be displaced to the front side.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the extended support portion B1212 and the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 are flush with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower end portions of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be arranged at a position lower than the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upper end of the extended support portion B1212 forms a step (stairs) with respect to the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521, and the flow speed of the ball can be reduced by this step.

That is, the projecting portion such as the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 that reduces the flow velocity of the ball by contacting with the ball is not limited to the case where the projecting portion is projected from the front-rear direction of the flow path. It may be configured so as to project upward from the lower surface. The projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are described as an example of a mode in which the ball is projected from the upper side to the lower side of the flow path of the ball.

For example, the lower end portions of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be arranged at a position higher than the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 form a step (stairs) with respect to the extended support portion B1212, and the step causes the ball to flow backward from the downstream side of the lower ends of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from riding on the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. Therefore, the ball can be smoothly guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

As described above, the extended support portion B1212 is always arranged in the range before entering the ball even in the closed state of the first opening / closing plate B1300 and the second opening / closing plate B1500, thereby delaying the fall of the ball and rolling. Depending on the design of the arrangement with respect to the surfaces B1321 and B1521, it can be used as a means for decelerating the flow of the ball or as a means for preventing the backflow of the ball.

In the twelfth embodiment, the rolling surface B2531 is configured to be horizontal with respect to the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface B2531 may be inclined back and forth. At this time, for example, by inclining downward toward the back side, the ball can be smoothly dropped when switching to the closed state, so that the displacement of the opening / closing rod B2500 can be made smooth.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the sphere is distributed to the left and right by the distribution device B1800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mechanism for alternately distributing the balls to the left and right may be provided on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000, or the balls may be distributed by a movable body that operates constantly from the time the power is turned on. Further, the distribution mechanism on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000 may be omitted.

Further, although the example in which the ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 only when the solenoid is not excited and the distribution device B1800 is raised has been described, the reverse is also possible. For example, the distribution device B1800 is configured to rise when any of the solenoids is excited. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball guide receiving portion B1260 from winning a prize during normal times or during a short time.

The ball guide receiving portion B1260 may be arranged on the upstream side of the sorting device B1800. Further, the ball guide receiving portion B1260 may be omitted. In this case, the time efficiency of the progress of the special gaming state can be improved. Further, regardless of whether the ball flows through the distribution device B1800, the path on the downstream side thereof may be configured to be able to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260. The distribution device B1800 is not limited to dividing the path of the sphere 100%. For example, the nail may have a similar function, such as cutting 80% of the nails.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the extended support portion B1212 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extended support portion B1212 may be movable. In this case, it may be configured to operate in conjunction with (for example, being pushed) with the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the range before entering the ball is set to the front-back width of about the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be long in the front-rear direction (it may be configured to be at least twice the diameter of the sphere). In this case, even if they intersect in the front view, they can be separated from each other in the front and back in the top view. Therefore, it does not need to be placed directly above. In other words, by intersecting, both the left and right lengths of the guide flow paths to the entrances arranged on the left and right can be lengthened even in the game area having a front-rear width of 19 mm. On the other hand, if the front-rear width allows two balls to be arranged in the front-rear direction, a plurality of specific winning openings can be arranged with a small vertical width without intersecting.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 project from the back side to the front side has been described, but at least one of them is displaced from the front side to the back side to form an open state. You may do so.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the ball aiming at the upper part of the pre-entry range is decelerated as compared with the ball aiming at the lower part of the pre-entry range has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, the formation of the projecting portion B1140 or the like is omitted, and the ball launched in the upper part of the pre-entry range (upward slope) is accelerated, and the ball launched in the lower part of the pre-entry range (downstream side) is accelerated. , It may be configured to be slow due to the inversion in the left-right direction.

In the twelfth embodiment, the design on the premise that the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 operate independently has been described, but the design is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the displacement locus BE11 and the displacement locus BE12 partially overlap each other, when the interval between rounds is shortened in order to prevent a spilling ball, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 come into contact with each other and operate in relation to each other. It may be designed in consideration of the possibility that it may (interlock).

For example, if the connecting portion B2530 is displaced toward the open state before the switching from the open state to the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 is completed, the connecting portion B2530 engages with the lower portion of the plate portion B2310. This may cause a malfunction of the opening / closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, the opening / closing plate B2300 is formed with a leading collision portion that is hemispherically projected from the left and right center portions on the rotation tip side of the plate portion B2310 toward the opening / closing rod B2500 side, and the opening / closing rod B2500 is connected to the connecting portion. A preceding collision portion may be formed so as to project hemispherically from the left and right central portions of the B2530 toward the opening / closing plate B2300 side, and the preceding collision portions may be arranged so as to collide with each other.

Since each preceding collision portion is configured as a portion close to the mating member prior to the other constituent members, the preceding collision portions collide with each other before the connecting portion B2530 engages with the lower portion of the plate portion B2310. be able to.

Then, if the load due to the collision between the preceding collision portions is configured to be generated in the direction of displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 toward the closed state, the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 is being switched to the closed state. Even if the opening / closing rod B2500 or the opening / closing plate B2300 starts to be displaced toward the open state, a load is applied to the opening / closing plate B2300 or B2500 in which the opening / closing rod B2500 or the opening / closing plate B2300 that is switched to the open state is displaced toward the closed state. By giving, the state switching can be promoted.

As a result, the interval between rounds becomes too short, and the other member of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 starts to be displaced toward the open state before one member forms the closed state, and the members move to each other. Even if a collision occurs, the load due to the collision only acts to push one member toward the closed state, and it is possible to avoid causing malfunction of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500.

This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of problems when setting the inter-round interval short, and makes it easier to execute control for setting the inter-round interval short to the extent necessary to avoid a spill ball. can. The shape and arrangement of the preceding collision portion can be arbitrarily set. For example, the spill prevention unit B2524 may function as a preceding collision unit.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 toward the open state is defined as an ascending displacement (rising displacement) about the upper side is not necessarily limited to this. For example, from the standing closed state, the open state may be set by a downward displacement (tilting displacement) about the lower side, and the upper side surface in the open state may be used as the flow lower surface (rolling surface) of the sphere.

In this case, it is preferable that the back surface side of the opening / closing plate in the closed state is recessed with a size that allows the ball to enter, and the detection sensor is arranged downstream of the recessed portion. When the opening / closing plate is switched to the closed state when the ball is on the upper side surface in the open state of the opening / closing plate, the ball on which the opening / closing plate is placed can be drawn into the recessed portion without spilling.

In the twelfth embodiment, the opening / closing plate B2300 that is displaced to the front side when switching to the open state and the opening / closing rod B2500 that is displaced to the back side when switching to the open state are used to form a ball in the range before entering the ball. The case where the flow mode can be switched has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the member that is displaced to the front side may be configured as a member having the same configuration as the opening / closing rod B2500.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the rolling surface B2311 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is formed in a plane with the same inclination has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface may be formed in a mountain shape so that the inclination angle changes in the middle. In this case, the shape of the rolling surface can change the degree of deceleration of the sphere.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the right arm portion B2520 is formed in the same shape as the left arm portion B2510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the shape of the right arm portion B2520 can be arbitrarily set. .. For example, the right arm portion B2520 may be formed in a straight bar shape, or may be in a J shape curved on the opposite side of the curvature of the left arm portion B2510. In this case, the right arm portion B2520 can be separated from the flow path of the ball rolling toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 in the closed state of the opening / closing rod B2500. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of obstructing the flow of the ball flowing down along the rolling surface B2311 of the opening / closing plate B2300.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the flow path branches to the left and right with the center frame 86 as a boundary has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a partition for dividing the flow path of the sphere may be provided on either the left or right side (for example, the right side) of the center frame 86. In this case, a plurality of flow paths of the sphere can be configured on either the left or right side of the center frame 86.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 are driven by a single first driving device B1400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device for driving the first guide plate B3300 and the drive device for driving the first rotating member B3700 may be individually arranged, and the displacement timing may be adjusted by control.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the guide plates B3300 and B3500 guide the ball in the upper part of the pre-entry range and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 guide the ball in the lower part of the pre-entry range will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide plate and the rotating member are configured to have lengths extending to the left and right of the range before entering the ball, guidance to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 is performed by the guide plate, and guidance to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 is performed. It may be configured to be performed by a rotating member.

In this case, the rotating member may be configured to be further tilted by switching to the closed state. In this case, the number of spilling spheres can be reduced because the rotating member is in the displacement direction to rescue the spheres by switching to the open state.

Further, the rotating members arranged on the left and right may be configured to have a length extending to the left and right in the range before entering the ball. In this case, in order to prevent a collision near the intersection position, it is configured to have a recessed portion recessed from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side (for example, the width in the axial direction is large). (It may be configured to be narrower, or it may be configured in a comb shape with teeth extending in the radial direction), and the positional relationship that allows the non-concave portion of the other rotating member to enter the concave portion of one rotating member. It is preferable to design so as to be. As a result, even if the left and right rotating members are configured to overlap in a front view during displacement, a collision between the members can be prevented.

In this case, the rotating member may be configured to be further tilted by switching to the closed state. In this case, since the rotating member is in the displacement direction to rescue the ball by switching to the open state, it is possible to easily rescue the ball that has passed the intersection position (the ball arranged in the lower part of the range before entering the ball). The number of spilling spheres can be reduced.

Further, the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 of the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are configured to be flat, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to these. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of planes so that the inclination changes, or it may be composed of curved surfaces. This makes it possible to complicate the flow mode of the sphere that rolls on the rolling surface.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are slidably displaced toward the front side to form an open state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 may be slid and displaced toward the back side to form an open state.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the angle of inclination of the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3521 forming the upper part of the pre-entry range with respect to the horizontal plane is the angle of inclination of the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 forming the lower part of the pre-entry range with respect to the horizontal plane. The case where the size is larger has been explained, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle may be smaller in the lower part of the range before entering the ball. That is, the degree of deceleration may be higher in the lower part of the range before entering the ball.

In this case, since it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a plurality of balls are arranged on the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 in the lower part of the range before entering the ball, the rotating members B3700 and B3900 rotate when the state changes to the closed state. The number of spheres pushed by the members B3700 and B3900 and caught in the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be increased.

It should be noted that the change in the degree of deceleration does not necessarily have to occur due to the difference in the inclination of the rolling surface. For example, the degree of deceleration may be different by arbitrarily setting the forming width, the protruding length, and the forming interval (density) of the protrusions protruding in the range before entering the ball such as the protruding portion B1140. ..

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the rotating members B3700 and B3900 and the guide plates B3300 and B3500 form a guide path for the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the guide plates B3300 and B3500 that slide and displace, a rotating member that displaces in the same manner as the opening / closing plate B2300 may be configured with the same left-right width as the guide plates B3300 and B3500.

In this case, since the rotating member as a substitute and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 face each other in the rotating direction, the load can be offset at the time of contact, so that the rotating member can be stopped at an early stage. Further, since they are displaced so as to approach each other from the vertical direction, it is easy to fill the gap.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the guide plates B3300 and B3500 which are both displaceable and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are displaced close to each other to close the gap has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, a fixing member is interposed between the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 so that the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 do not come into direct contact with each other to create a gap. You may try to block it.

Further, when both the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are displaced and come into contact with each other to close the gap, one is formed more flexibly than the other and is configured to bend at the time of contact. You may. For example, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 may be configured to be stiffer than the rotating members B3700 and B3900. As a result, the gap can be easily filled by the bending of the rotating members B3700 and B3900.

Further, for example, when the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are configured more flexibly than the rotating members B3700 and B3900, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are damaged. The plates B3300 and B3500 can be easily constructed to be thin.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are arranged apart by about five balls has been described, but the arrangement intervals of the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are arbitrary. For example, the rotating members B3700 and B3900 may be arranged at both left and right ends of the game area.

Further, the eaves may be formed above the rotating members B3700 and B3900 to prevent the collision of balls in the closed state.

In the 14th embodiment, the case where the rolling surface B2531 of the opening / closing rod B2500 is not tilted in the front-rear direction has been described, but the rolling surface B2531 may be tilted back and forth. In particular, since the deceleration of the ball that rolls the opening / closing rod B2500 is not intended, the ease of contact with the projecting portion B1140 does not matter. For example, by configuring the rolling surface B2531 to incline downward to the front side, the ball can be rolled on a path away from the projecting portion B1140.

The guide port B4160 may be arranged below the intersection position of the guide path by using the configuration of the 16th embodiment. In this case, since a sufficient space can be provided inside the vertical width of the guide path, it is possible to easily arrange the guide port B4160 inside the vertical width of the guide path.

In the 14th embodiment, the opening / closing rod B2500 projecting to the back side is configured by rotational displacement, and the guide plate B4300 projecting to the front side is configured by slide displacement, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the member projecting to the back side may be configured by slide displacement, and the member projecting to the front side may be configured by rotational displacement.

In the 14th embodiment, when the ball is guided by the opening / closing rod B2500, the ball may not be sufficiently decelerated due to the configuration in which the collision with the projecting portion B1140 is avoided, but the speed is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the opening / closing rod B2500 may be bent at an intermediate position to bend the guide path of the sphere in the open state (change the vertical inclination of the guide path in the middle). As a result, the sphere can be decelerated by changing the inclination angle.

In the 14th embodiment, the ball flowing from the eaves portion B2271 passes through the ball guide receiving portion B4260, so that the frequency of entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260 on the left and right is changed. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion B1140 may be added at an intermediate position of the projecting portion B1140, and the lower edge of the center frame 86 may be projected to the front side of the projecting tip of the added projecting portion B1140. ..

In this case, the ball falling from the lower edge of the center frame 86 can be made difficult to come into contact with the projecting portion B1140 and can be configured so as not to hinder the entry of the ball into the ball guide receiving portion B4260, while the opening / closing rod B2500 is closed. A ball that slides down from the opening / closing rod B2500 (a ball that is moved toward the back side) when the state is switched to the state can be brought into contact with the projecting portion B1140, and the trajectory of the ball can be deflected to the left or right of the ball guide receiving portion B4260. As a result, only the frequency of entering the ball from the opening / closing rod B2500 into the ball guide receiving portion B4260 can be reduced.

In the 14th embodiment, the sphere assembly wall B4020 is configured so that the sphere can easily enter the through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an alternating distribution device may be arranged on the upstream side of the through gate 67 so that the balls pass through the through gate 67 at a ratio of one ball to two balls (alternately), or the through gate 67 is placed on the left side. A plurality of them may be arranged.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where a plurality of guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven by a single drive motor B7710 based on the configuration of the variable winning device B1000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive by the combined drive device B7700 may be added to the configuration of the variable winning device B2000. In addition, it is necessary to newly redesign the approach groove portion B7730.

In the 14th embodiment, the case where the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is arranged in the variable winning device B4000 and is unitized in the variable winning device B4000 like the guide port B4160 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the guide port B4160 may be arranged on the base plate 60, and the base member B4100 may be formed with a recessed portion for avoiding interference with the ball guide receiving portion B4260. In this case, a nail can be planted in the base plate 60 in the gap between the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the recessed portion of the foundation member B4100. As a result, when the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is used as a substitute for the first winning opening 64, a life nail can be easily planted.

Further, the ball guide receiving unit B4260 may function as a substitute for the general winning opening 63, not as a substitute for the first winning opening 64. The number of payout prize balls can be increased. Further, since it is on the lower side of the guide path, it is possible to prevent the special gaming state from being prolonged as compared with the case where it is arranged on the upstream side.

In the 14th embodiment, the case where the front projecting portion B4260 is integrally formed with the guide plate B4300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a member independent of the guide plate B4300, a member fixed to the covering member B4200 may be used. According to this, even in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front projecting portion B4260 can collide with the ball. Further, the front projecting portion B4260 may have a block shape or may be formed in a columnar shape extending to the back surface side.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the difference in the functions of the projecting portion B9140 has been described by the difference in the arrangement height, but the difference is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting length may be changed. Further, although the case where the guide path of the sphere is only the path inclined to the lower right has been described, the route may be configured in both directions as in each of the above-described embodiments.

The configuration that makes it easier for the game ball to stay is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may be decelerated by a ridge projecting toward the inside of the flow path of the game ball to facilitate the stay of the game ball, or the game ball may be easily retained by switching the degree of inclination of the guide path. It may be a mode in which the game ball is easily stayed by decelerating.

Further, the game ball may be configured so that the game ball can be decelerated by forming an uneven shape (wave shape) on the rolling surface of the path forming means, so that the game ball can easily stay, or a windmill is arranged and the game ball is arranged. The kinetic energy of the above may be used for the rotation of the wind turbine to decelerate the game ball so that the game ball can easily stay.

In addition, for example, in a mode in which the route forming means is displaced corresponding to a predetermined number of rounds in a special game, a plurality of route forming means are arranged, and a game ball spilled from one of the route forming means is placed by the other route forming means. When it is configured so that it can be rescued, it is preferable to arrange the second entry port below the position where the game ball is likely to stay in the route forming means on the side that constitutes the guide path in the final round in the special game.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide paths of the intersecting spheres have a symmetrical shape has been described, but the guide paths of the intersecting spheres may be asymmetrical. In each of the above embodiments, the one that spills from the intersecting route is described as a loss, but the spill may be configured so that the profit given to the player is greater.

In each of the above embodiments, the projecting portion B1140 and the like capable of contacting the ball rolling on the guide path have been described, but the arrangement of the projecting portion is not limited to this. For example, a projecting portion may be provided at a position where the ball falls on the left and right of the intersection position of the guide path. In this case, the vertical speed of the ball can be decelerated and the falling speed can be reduced, so a device to improve the degree of freedom in setting the interval between rounds. That is, it can be set with a numerical value longer than 0.04 seconds.

In each of the above embodiments, the degree of deceleration of the ball is switched with the left and right intermediate positions in the range before entering the ball as a boundary, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the degree of deceleration may be switched to three or more sections, or the degree of deceleration may be changed with a position closer to the left and right from the left-right intermediate position as a boundary.

In each of the above embodiments, members for guiding the ball to the openings of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 overhanging in the range before entering the ball are individually arranged for each of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, a rotating body having an axial length of about the left-right width of the pre-entry range is arranged on the back side of the pre-entry range, and the rotating body can guide the ball to both the detection sensors B1230 and B1250. You may.

That is, for example, when the rotating body is composed of a long square pillar shape in the left-right direction, the outer surface facing the pre-entry range is switched from the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface every time the rotation angle differs by 90 degrees. It is configured to be. A rolling surface capable of guiding the ball to the first detection sensor B1230 is formed on the first outer surface so as to project outward in the radial direction, and a rolling surface capable of guiding the ball to the second detection sensor B1250 is formed on the third outer surface. The moving surface is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction. Further, the overhanging portion is not formed on the second outer surface and the fourth outer surface, and when they are arranged to face the pre-entry range, they are arranged outside the pre-entry range. Further, a drive motor for rotationally driving the rotating body is arranged, and the rotating body is configured to be rotatable in both forward and reverse directions.

In this case, the ball can be guided to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 by rotating the rotating body by the drive motor so that any one of the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface faces the range before entering the ball. The state (the first outer surface is facing, the first open state), the state where the sphere can be guided to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (the third outer surface is facing, the second open state), and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250. The state can be switched between a state in which the ball is not guided (a second outer surface or a fourth outer surface faces each other and is closed). Therefore, the member that guides the sphere to the openings of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be composed of a single member and a single drive device.

Further, the direction of displacement of the rotating body when switching from the above-mentioned closed state to the open state (first open state or second open state) is possible in both forward and reverse directions. That is, when switching to the open state (first open state or second open state), the rolling surface is displaced upwardly and displaced in the pre-entry range, and the rolling surface descends in the pre-entry range. It can be configured as a case where it is displaced and arranged.

For the purpose of reducing the number of spilled balls from the range before entering the ball, it is advantageous that the rolling surface is arranged in an ascending displacement because it is easier to rescue the ball. Therefore, by configuring the rotation direction of the rotating body to be controllable in different directions, it is possible to configure an opening mode that is advantageous to the player and an opening mode that is disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, when the rotating body is adopted, it is not necessary to consider the interference between the members as in the case where the members are composed of individual members, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. For example, the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 are arranged on the same side (for example, on the right side) at different vertical positions, the guide path is configured to be inclined in the same direction, and the upstream side is above one of the guide paths. By arranging the other guide path arranged in (for example, providing a step) on the downstream side below the one guide path, it is possible to easily construct a structure in which the guide paths intersect.

In addition, such a structure (structure inclined in the same direction) can be applied to the guide members (guide plates B1300, B1500, B3300, B3500, B4300, opening / closing plates B2300, B5500, opening / closing rod B2500, and rotating member B3700, respectively. The shape of B3900) may be changed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the variable winning device B1000 or the like is arranged near the lower part of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device B1000 or the like may be arranged above the game area (for example, above the center frame 86 or above the upper and lower intermediate positions of the center frame 86).

In each of the above embodiments, the structure in which the rolling paths of the balls intersect is described as the structure of the member that opens and closes the winning opening, but the structure is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used without a winning opening (away from the winning opening) as a means for changing the flow path of the ball in a range of the game area.

In each of the above embodiments, a round in which the opening of the first detection port B1230 is opened and a second in which the opening of the first detection port B1230 is opened by making the flow path on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000 or the like different or arranging another winning port. Although the case where there is a difference in the round digestion time between the round in which the opening of the detection port B1250 is opened and the round in which the opening of the detection port B1250 is opened has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the degree of deceleration is made different so that the flow speed of the ball guided toward the opening of the first detection port B1230 and the flow speed of the ball guided toward the opening of the second detection port B1250 are different. This may cause a difference in round digestion time.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the non-driving section B7731 in the special gaming state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state, the transmission rod B7422 may be controlled to be arranged in the first groove portion B7741, and the transmission rod B7622 may be controlled to be arranged in the first groove portion B7751. In this case, the arrangement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 can be held on the first plane BS71 in a state other than the special gaming state. As a result, for example, a fraudulent act of forcibly pulling out the guide plates B1300 and B1500 (for example, a thin metal wire is made to enter the game area, or the glass unit 16 is partially destroyed to allow a finger or a small instrument to enter the game area. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent profits from the structural aspect due to fraudulent acts that impose a load on the guide plates B1300 and B1500 by fraudulent means such as.

In the 20th embodiment, it has been described that both the rotating members B20700 and B20900 may function to bring the sphere closer to the opening of the same detection sensor (for example, the second detection sensor B1250). It is not limited. For example, the rotating members B20700 and B20900 can be configured to be open at the same time so that the sphere does not approach the openings of any of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 (stops above the discharge port B2001). It may be configured. In this case, it is possible to configure a state in which the ball stays in the range before entering the ball.

Further, a state in which the rotating members B20700 and B20900 simultaneously form an open state can be arbitrarily designed. For example, the tips of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 may be shortened so that the ball can enter the openings of both detection sensors B1230 and B1250 at the same time, or the rotating members B20700 and B20900 may be configured sufficiently long and the rotating tip side. By closing the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, the ball may not be able to enter the openings of any of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250.

Further, when one of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 constitutes an open state, one ball can be retained between the rotating tip and the other rotating base end side portion of the rotating members B20700 and B20900. It may be configured as. In this case, both the rotating members B20700 and B20900 are closed, and after the special gaming state is completed, the stagnant balls can be put into the discharge port B20001.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the guide plates B22300 and B22500 that slide in the front-rear direction are displaced at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which the displacement directions face each other, such as the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 may be configured to operate at the same time. In this case, since the operation locus of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the operation locus of the opening / closing rod B2500 overlap, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 hit each other before reaching the displacement end and stop when they operate at the same time. That is, since one of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 functions to regulate the displacement of the other, it is possible to easily prevent unauthorized entry into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

In the 22nd embodiment, the detected portions B22350 and B22550 are formed on the guide plates B22300 and B22500, and the positions of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are set according to the arrangement of the detected portions B2230 and B22550. It is not limited. For example, the detected unit may be formed on the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 of the drive devices B1400 and B1600, and the positions of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 may be set according to the arrangement thereof.

In this case, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged at the end of operation when the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 are displaced by the excitation of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 (the longitudinal protrusions B1433 and B1633 of the rotary members B1430 and B1630 are transmitted. A state in which the holes B1340 and B1540 are arranged in the curved portions B1342 and B1542) and a state in which the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are illegally loaded and pulled out to the front side (longitudinal protrusions B1433 and B1633 of the rotating members B1430 and B1630). Is pushed by the straight portions B1341 and B1541 of the transmission holes B1340 and B1540 and displaced, and is still arranged in the straight portions B1341 and B1541).

As a result, whether the displacement of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is due to the excitation of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, or the displacement due to the improperly applied load or the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the opposite side. , It can be determined from the detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222, and fraud or abnormality can be detected at an early stage.

In the 22nd embodiment, when it is determined that one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is illegally opened, the other is driven toward the open state as an emergency process, and the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are connected. The case of controlling so that the ball cannot enter has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be controlled so as to be easily released.

In this case, at least a part of the balls launched toward the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 will enter the second winning opening 640, so that the balls illegally enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. The number of can be reduced. If the rotational radial length of the electric accessory 640a is extended so that all the balls reached in the open state enter the second winning opening 640, an illegal entry into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is performed. Can be prevented.

In addition, by setting the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the entry into the second winning opening 640 to one, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls from exceeding the number of launched balls. Can be prevented from getting an illegal payout prize ball.

If a clerk who notices the error notification arrives while gaining time with such control, even if a big hit occurs in the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the big hit is treated as invalid. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraud from gaining fraudulent profits.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged behind the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the glass unit 16 may be provided with a recess to create a space on the front side of the game area, and the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 may be arranged therein. Even in this case, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be used to guide the guide plates B22300, by forming the detected portions of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the overhanging tip side so as to be able to enter the detection grooves of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. The position of B2 2500 can be detected.

In this case, since the thickness of the constituent members that enter between the outside of the pachinko machine 10 and the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be reduced, when urging by electromagnetic wave irradiation is performed, the electromagnetic wave is weak. Can also be easily detected.

In the third control example of the 22nd embodiment, the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern have been described as examples of the operation pattern in the small hit, but the operation pattern is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be either the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 that is driven by the small hit A. Further, the small hit A may be divided into a small hit A1 and a small hit A2, and only the first guide plate B22300 may be driven in the small hit A1 and only the second guide plate B22500 may be driven in the small hit A2. ..

Further, for example, the operation order of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 in the small hit A may be reversed. Further, the small hit A is divided into a small hit A3 and a small hit A4 so that the first guide plate B22300 is driven first in the small hit A3 and the second guide plate B22500 is driven first in the small hit A4. Is also good.

Further, in the small hit A, the case where the number of times of opening and closing of one set is two times has been described, but the number of times of opening and closing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be once, or may be three or more times. Further, the case where the operation of the second guide plate B22500 occurs after the operation of the first guide plate B22300 and the small hit operation ends has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the set of operations of the first guide plate B22300 and the set of operations of the second guide plate B22500 may be configured to occur alternately and a plurality of times.

Further, for example, the operation order of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 in the small hit B may be reversed. Further, the small hit B is divided into a small hit B1 and a small hit B2, and the small hit B1 is driven so that the first guide plate B22300 is retracted first, and the small hit B2 is driven so that the second guide plate B22500 is retracted first. It may be driven so as to. Further, in the small hit B, the case where the number of times of opening and closing of one set is two times has been described, but the number of times of opening and closing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be once, or may be three or more times.

The operation pattern as described as these small hits may be configured to be executable by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). In this case, for example, by configuring the guide plates B22300 and B22500 to be displaceable by the transmission rotating body B7720 (see FIG. 179) in addition to the solenoids B1410 and B1610, control can be configured without fear of malfunction.

That is, the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are controlled by the MPU201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), while the transmission rotating body B7720 is controlled by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). It may be configured.

Further, in the small hit A and the small hit B, the case where the opening time of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is 0.1 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening time may be extended to 0.2 seconds or more so that the ball can enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

In the description of the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern, the confirmation operation is performed during the round, but the operation is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to perform the confirmation operation during the interval.

In the third control example, the small hit probability is set on the premise that both the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are members driven by the small hit game, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 may function as the first specific winning opening B1001, and the second detection sensor B1250 may function as the second winning opening 640. That is, whether or not the second guide plate B22,500 is driven is determined by the lottery result of the second symbol.

As a result, by detecting whether the variable winning device B22000 is operating normally, not only is there an abnormality in the ball entering the first specific winning opening B1001 used in the jackpot game, but also the time is shortened. It is possible to determine whether or not an abnormality occurs in the ball entering the second winning opening 640 used during the probability change.

In this case, the first guide plate B22300 is driven by executing the small hit game, and the second guide plate B22500 is driven if the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit. Therefore, the driving frequency of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is determined. The standard is the total probability of the small hit probability and the winning probability of the second symbol. Therefore, the small hit probability set for driving the guide plates B22300 and B22500 at the same frequency as in the third control example (when at least one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is driven by executing the small hit game) is set. 3 It can be made lower than the small hit probability in the control example.

In the above third control example, a case where the round game R is operated in a control mode including a part of the sixth operation pattern and a part of the seventh operation pattern is described only in the jackpot of the special symbol 1, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, only in the jackpot of the special symbol 2, the round game R may be operated in a control mode including a part of the sixth operation pattern and a part of the seventh operation pattern. In this case, as the specifications of the gaming machine, even when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 can occur excessively continuously (for example, it occurs continuously 10 times on average), the occurrence of defects occurring in the variable winning device B22000 during the jackpot game is overlooked. Can be found without.

Further, for example, both the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 are operated in a control mode including a part of the sixth operation pattern and a part of the seventh operation pattern in the round game R. You may. In this case, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 occurs without going through the jackpot of the special symbol 1 (for example, when the second winning opening 640 is configured to be able to win in the normal state, or when the route is downstream of the predetermined winning opening. The first winning opening 64 is arranged at a position where the ball flowing in the first path can win a prize, and the second winning opening 640 is arranged at a position where the ball flowing in the second path can win a prize. Even in the case of installation), it is possible to detect defects in the variable winning device B22000 at an early stage.

In the above third control example, when the detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern are different in the jackpot game, the case where the error notification is immediately executed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, even if it is detected that the detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are different (defective) from the normal detection pattern, the error notification is not immediately executed, the detection result is stored for a predetermined period, and later. Error notification may be executed.

For example, the detection result is stored in the main control device MPU201, and the error notification is not executed during the continuation of the jackpot game or the probability change state, and the error notification is executed after the game state shifts to the normal state. It may be controlled to. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied by avoiding the situation where the game is stopped during the jackpot game or the probability change in which the player's interest is improved.

In this case, since it is preferable to configure the game so that the game can be continued for a while from the detection of defects, the threshold value for determining that the detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and the normal detection pattern are different is set to the looser side (error). It is preferable to set it closer to the strict side (the side with the smaller error tolerance) than the side with the larger tolerance (the side with the larger tolerance).

In the third control example, in the ninth operation pattern, one guide plate B22300, B22500 is operated to displace the other guide plate B22500, B22300 to the open state immediately after the displacement to the closed state is started. Although the case of controlling the displacement has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to operate to displace the other guide plates B2500 and B22300 to the open state immediately before one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 starts to be displaced to the closed state.

In this case, the time during which both guide plates B22300 and B22500 operate at the same time can be relatively long. Further, even if simultaneous operation occurs, if both guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in an open state (a state in which they are arranged in front), both specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are closed, and the careful attention is paid. If configured, by configuring both guide plates B22300 and B22500 so that the balls are prevented from entering both specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 whenever both guide plates B22300 and B22500 operate at the same time. It is possible to prevent accidentally winning a prize in the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

In the third control example, the case where both the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are controlled to open and close in the small hit game and the big hit game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the big hit game, only the first guide plate B22300 may be configured to open and close, and in the small hit game, only the second guide plate B22500 may be configured to open and close.

Further, in this case, the operation pattern in the small hit game is intermittently repeated as an operation pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific winning opening B1002 (for example, an operation pattern that maintains the open state for 1.8 seconds). An operation pattern in which the total of the open states is within 1.8 seconds) may be used. According to this, it is possible to configure a case where the second guide plate B22,500 is opened due to a ball entering the second winning opening 640 during the probability change, and it is possible to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening B1002. Therefore, it is possible to execute the game during the probability change in a state where the payout prize ball by entering the second specific prize opening B1002 can be obtained.

In this case, the setting of the small hit determination value in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not limited to the above case, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, most of the first random number counter values C3 (for example, 10 to 319) in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 may be set as the small hit determination values during the probability change (or during normal or time reduction). .. In this case, the second guide plate B22,500 can be opened each time the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and the ball can be frequently entered into the second specific winning opening B1002.

Then, according to the present embodiment, since the displacement of the second guide plate B22500 can be used to detect defects that may occur in the first guide plate B22300 at an early stage, the jackpot game is started and the first guide plate B22300 is started. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a defect of the first guide plate B22300 is discovered only after the drive is started.

The same can be said for the first guide plate B22300. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the displacement of the first guide plate B22300 can be used to detect defects that may occur in the second guide plate B22500 at an early stage, the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the probable change state. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a defect of the second guide plate B2500 is discovered only after the second guide plate B22,500 is started to be driven.

As a result, for example, the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained in the game during the probability change is set to be larger than the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game. Even for a gaming machine in which the driving of the second guide plate B22,500 occurs more frequently, the defect of the variable winning device B22000 can be detected at an early stage.

That is, at least, the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 has a configuration capable of early detection of defects on the side with low operation frequency by utilizing the drive displacement on the side with high operation frequency. By configuring the above, it is possible to detect defects in the variable prize device B22000 at an early stage. As a result, the defect of the variable winning device B22000 can be found and repaired before the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state in which a large amount of payout prize balls can be obtained, so that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage. It can be avoided, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest is reduced.

In the third control example, the case where both the solenoids B1410 and B1610 can be excited at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to mechanically prevent excitation at simultaneous points. That is, the switching means composed of a switching device such as an existing switch relay (contact relay, non-contact relay) is on the upstream side of the circuit that energizes the first solenoid B1410 and the upstream side of the circuit that energizes the second solenoid B1610. Connected to each side, by the function of the switch relay, neither the first solenoid B1410 nor B1610 can be energized, only the first solenoid B1410 can be energized, and only the second solenoid B1610 can be energized. It is configured to be switchable depending on the state. In this case, the function of the switch relay can prevent a situation in which both the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are energized.

In the above third control example, the case where the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is set to be more likely to occur than the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the frequency of small hits may be set to be the same for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Further, the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 may be set to be more likely to occur than the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2.

In this case, small hits occur frequently during the probability change, and it is possible to facilitate providing a comfortable game as compared with the case where the variable winning device B22000 operates. That is, during the probability change, the line of sight of the player tends to gather on the right side of the game area. On the other hand, it makes the player think that an advantageous state is occurring, which leads to misleading the player. If this happens frequently, the player's dissatisfaction may increase. Therefore, by suppressing the frequency of small hits in the special symbol 2, the frequency of misleading the player can be reduced as described above, so that the player can play more comfortably.

In the third control example, the case where it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a defect in the variable winning device B22000 by the operation in the small hit game or the big hit game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the start-up process of the main control device 110, the solenoids B1410 and B1610 of the variable winning device B22000 are controlled to be excited, and the variable winning device B22000 operates normally from the detection patterns of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 at that time. It may be determined whether or not it is. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether the variable winning device B22000 operates normally each time the power is turned on.

In this case, the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 may be controlled to be stopped during the start-up process. As a result, for example, when the power is turned on with the remaining game balls in the game area, even if the remaining game balls enter the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 during the start-up process, the prize is awarded. It is possible to prevent the payout of the ball. Therefore, it is impossible to realize a game mode in which an illegal profit (prize ball) is obtained by using a power failure (for example, a game mode in which the power is restored while a large number of game balls are intentionally left in the game area). be able to.

In the third control example, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 should not always detect the detected units B22350 and B22550 (normal detection pattern is always non-detection pattern), so the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 use the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. If it is determined that the detected units B22350 and B22550 have been detected, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the determination, and it is desirable to control so as to deal with it. For example, it may be controlled to execute error notification.

Further, for example, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 may be controlled to be driven to return to the rear position (closed position). In this case, if the detection state of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 does not change even after the control is executed, it is assumed that the outputs of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are changed due to the illegally irradiated electromagnetic waves. , It is preferable to immediately execute the error notification so that the game cannot be continued.

In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 of the rotating member B23430 is smoothly displaced along the locus of the second curved portion B23343 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 may not be stable, and a frictional force may be generated between the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 and the second curved portion B23343 to cause a malfunction in which the first guide plate B23300 starts to be displaced. In this case, by providing an urging spring for urging the first guide plate B23300 so as to be displaced rearward and generating an urging force larger than the frictional force, the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 becomes the straight portion B1341 of the transmission hole B23340. It is possible to prevent the first guide plate B23300 from being displaced in the front-rear direction before reaching the above position (before the pushing force is generated).

In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the position of the switching device B23800 is changed by the load from the solenoids B1410 and B1610 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another drive device that changes the position of the switching device B23800 may be prepared. In this case, the configuration in which the engagement is performed in the drive release state and the engagement is released by the drive of the drive device is engaged in the drive state and the engagement is released by the drive release of the drive device. Compared with the configuration, the energizing time can be shortened and the durability of the drive device can be improved.

Further, in this case, the drive of the switching device B23800 may be switched at the switching timing of the gaming state. For example, except for the big hit game and the small hit game (normal, short time, probable change, etc.), the engagement state should be switched, and the engagement should be released at the timing of switching to the big hit game or the small hit game. Switch to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide plates B1300 and B1500 from operating separately in a state other than the big hit game and the small hit game. Therefore, even if the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are illegally displaced, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be prevented from operating separately. The specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 can always be maintained in a state in which they cannot enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal payout of the prize ball due to the entry of the ball.

In the 23rd embodiment, the operation order of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 and the switching device B23800 is set by changing the shape of the transmission hole B23340, but the operation order is not necessarily limited to this. For example, assuming that the shape of the transmission hole B23340 is the same, the operation order may be set by changing the properties (hardness, repulsive force, etc.) of the material in the vicinity of the transmission hole B23340. In this case, the operation order can be changed between the operation by the excitation of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 and the operation not by the excitation of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 by setting the range for changing the property.

For example, if only the rear side wall portion of the straight portion B1341 at the opposite end of the curved portion B1342 of the transmission hole B1340 is softly configured so that the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are illegally pulled forward, the transmission hole B1340 The soft portion can be deformed first, and the timing at which the rotating member B23430 rotates can be delayed.

In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are switched between interlocking and operating independently by the slide displacement of the slide main body portion B23810 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the switching may be performed by changing the posture instead of the slide displacement. In this case, since a space for securing the displacement amount of the slide displacement is not required, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the switching device B23800 can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the displacement allowed for the slide main body portion B23810 changes depending on the front-rear arrangement of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a hook-shaped portion that is bent into a hook shape is formed at the tip of the approach protruding portion B23821, and an engaging portion that projects into the hook-shaped portion is formed inside the receiving recessed portions B2350 and B23550. In the state where the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are arranged in the closed position (position retracted to the rear), the engaging portion is located outside the displacement locus of the hook-shaped portion, but the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are in the closed position. After the displacement starts from the front, the engaging portion may be configured to enter the displacement locus of the hook-shaped portion. In this case, the states of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be switched between a state in which they are interlocked and a state in which they can operate independently, depending on whether or not the hook-shaped portion and the engaging portion are engaged.

In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the switching device B23800 is arranged on the back side of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the switching device B23800 may be arranged in the game area so that a collision with the game ball may occur. Even in this case, since the switching device B23800 changes its state by driving the solenoids B1410 and B1610 of the variable winning device B23000, it is possible to maintain a constant playability.

In the 23rd embodiment, the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is described as a rigid body, and the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are described as being integrally displaced in a state of being engaged with the approach projecting portion B23821, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the slide auxiliary portion B23820 may be made of a resin material, and the approaching protrusion portion B23821 may be allowed to bend and deform. In this case, for example, when the first guide plate B23300 is forcibly (for example, illegally) displaced to the front side regardless of the driving force of the first solenoid B1410, the second guide is caused with a slight time delay. The plate B23500 is displaced toward the front side. As a result, the closed state of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 can be maintained.

In the 23rd embodiment, the shape of the portion where the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is connected to the slide main body portion B23810 is shown in a simplified manner, but the shape of this portion can be arbitrarily designed. For example, as shown in the drawing, a member having a shape corresponding to the rectangular recess may be inserted.

Further, for example, a mode in which the groove cross section of the long groove is formed in a T shape having a wide deep portion and the connecting portion on the slide auxiliary portion B23820 side is formed in a T shape so that the connecting portion is inserted from the long direction of the groove. But it's okay. In this case, by catching the wide portion, it is possible to prevent the slide auxiliary portion B23820 from coming off from the slide main body portion B23810. Further, design ingenuity such as providing a taper (inclined surface) at the corner of the T-shape can be arbitrarily made.

In the 23rd embodiment, both the guide plates B23300 and B23500 have been described as members involved in opening and closing the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first guide plate B23300 is configured as a member used for opening and closing the specific winning opening B1001, while the second guide plate B23500 is configured as a member used for opening and closing the starting port (for example, the second winning opening 640). You may. In this case, the ball entry port, which can be prevented from entering the ball by engagement using the switching device B23800, can be extended to the starting port. Further, the member is not limited to the member used for opening and closing the starting port, and may be configured as a movable member controlled to operate constantly after the power is turned on, for example.

In the 24th embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is maintained by the configuration of the transmission rotating body B24720 in the non-excited state of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the transmission rotating body B24720 is omitted, the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be maintained by the frictional force between the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

That is, by configuring so that a frictional force having a strength exceeding the urging force of the return springs of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is generated between the guide plates B1300 and B1500, for example, after exciting both solenoids B1410 and B1610, the first one. Even if the solenoid B1410 is de-excited, the first guide plate B1300 can be maintained in the front position by the frictional force generated between the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

In this case, the frictional force may be configured to always be generated, or may be configured to be changeable according to the front-rear position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. For example, the gap between the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be widened so that the frictional force when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are arranged at the rear position is smaller than the urging force of the return springs of the solenoids B1410 and B1610. By interposing a member to prevent contact, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the guide plates B1300 and B1500 cannot be independently driven and displaced forward.

In this case, a further advantage is that the player cannot recognize the operation pattern of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 even by visually observing the guide plates B1300 and B1500. In other words, it can be configured so that the operation pattern of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 can be noticed only after the sphere reaches the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Therefore, when the solenoids B1410 and B1610 have a specific operation pattern, the aim is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which a ball is launched toward the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

In addition, this effect, for example, gives the first specific winning opening B1001 a function as a winning ball opening in a jackpot game, and the second specific winning opening B1002 has a function as a specific area for acquiring an advantageous state. In pachinko machines that are configured to have (for example, one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machines, pachinko machines that are configured to shift the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probable change state by entering a specific area, etc.) This is particularly effective when the possibility of entering the second specific winning opening B1002 changes due to a difference in the operation patterns of the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

In the 24th embodiment, the case where the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are configured to have a profit difference in the number of payout prize balls and the number of counts has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the probability of entering a specific area, the probability of continuing an advantageous state, and the like may be configured to cause a profit difference.

In this case, the difference in profit caused by entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is not only the special game being executed, but also other games (next special game or special game) that are executed following the special game. Since it leads to a difference in profit in the ball game (ball game for the purpose of transitioning to the state), it is possible to improve the attention to the ball fired to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

In the 24th embodiment, the effect sections B24760 and B24770 have been described as sections constituting a state in which the ball is guided to any of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adjusting the arrangement relationship of the groove shapes of the effect sections B24760 and B24770, in addition to or in place of the above-mentioned state, after both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward, the sphere Due to the load of the above, both of them are evacuated to the rear and it becomes impossible to guide the ball to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. A state in which the ball cannot be guided to B1001 and B1002 may be configured.

In this case, the vertical range of the profit difference obtained by the player is larger than that in the case where it is confirmed that the ball that has reached the pre-entry range will enter either of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the range before entering the ball.

In the 24th embodiment, when the ball reaches the range before entering the ball, one of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is pushed backward by the load from the ball and displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the balls can be discharged from the intersections of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 through the discharge port B7160, and the load is insufficient until a predetermined number of balls stay in the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are moved backward. It may be configured so as not to be displaced.

In this case, since the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are not pushed by the load of the balls and displaced until the plurality of balls are accumulated in the pre-entry range, a sufficient load is generated during the rotation of the transmission rotating body B24720. It is possible to reduce the possibility that any of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 will be pushed backward and displaced at an inappropriate timing.

In this case, for example, if the discharge port B7160 is an out port that only discharges the ball from the game area, a notification that prompts the ball to be launched into the pre-entry range in order to reduce wasted balls as much as possible. Is expected to be executed.

Further, for example, if the discharge port B7160 is a prize ball port, the ball is frequently reached in the pre-entry range, and any of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is displaced rearward, and any of the specific winning ports B1001 and B1002 is used. It is possible to select whether to shift the ball to a state where it can enter the ball or to maintain the state where the ball can enter the discharge port B7160 depending on the firing frequency or the arrival frequency of the ball to the pre-entry range. Moreover, it is assumed that the notification suggesting to the player is executed as such.

In the 25th embodiment, there is a case where the postures of the left and right rotating arm portions B25641 are different by configuring the pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 to rotate relative to each other with the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645 as an axis. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even when the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 are connected and fixed by a predetermined connecting portion, if the connecting portion is flexibly configured, the posture difference between the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 due to the deformation of the connecting portion. Can be caused.

Further, the case where the pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 is displaced by receiving a load from a single tip member B25111 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of tip members B25111 may be configured and separately configured as each member that applies a load to the pair of rotating arm portions B25641.

In this case, different plungers may be provided corresponding to each tip member B25111. As a result, it is possible to easily form a state in which the front and rear positions of the tip member B25111 are different, so that the tip member B25111 can be firmly fixed to the plunger. Even in this case, since the position of the tip member B25111 in the excited state can be arbitrarily set depending on the design of the stopper, it is necessary to avoid a situation in which the posture of each electric accessory B640a in the open state remains deviated. Can be done. Further, when a plurality of plungers are provided, one solenoid may be provided to give a driving force to each plunger, or a plurality of solenoids may be provided.

In the 25th embodiment, when an unexpected load is applied to one of the electric accessory B640a, the switching device B25700 interlocks the pair of electric accessory B640a and unexpectedly causes both of the electric accessory B640a. Although the case where the displacement of the pair of electric accessories B640a is suppressed when a load is applied has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the switching device B25700 may be configured so as to suppress or regulate the displacement of the electric accessory B640a regardless of the mode of the load applied to the electric accessory B640a.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the load transmission occurs between the electric accessory B640a and the state where the load transmission does not occur can be switched depending on the presence or absence of excitation of the switching solenoid B25710, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, by devising the configuration of the transmission member B25640, a load for moving the eccentric protrusion B640b to the left and right may be generated.

For example, a pair of rotating arm portions B25641 are provided with cylindrical portions extending around the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645 with dimensions that allow external contact, and the cylindrical portions are brought into surface contact with each other at the extending ends. In the case of the above configuration, the contact surface may be formed as an inclined surface inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis BJ1. That is, a shape exemplified by a clutch mechanism in which so-called cylinders or disks are brought close to each other to form a contact state and a non-contact state, and can be engaged with a triangular claw or a saw blade-shaped claw. You may adopt it.

In this case, based on the state where there is no posture difference between the pair of rotating arm portions B25641, when a posture difference occurs between the rotating arm portions B25641, the meshing state of the meshing teeth having the above shape changes, and the cylinder is changed according to the change. The left and right positions of the shape can be changed.

Then, the displacement in the left-right direction caused by the difference in posture of the rotating arm portion B25641 is configured to be used for the displacement of the eccentric protrusion portion B640b, so that the second switching solenoid B25710 is not used. It is possible to generate an action of preventing the ball from entering the winning opening 640.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the electric accessory B640a is displaced so as to prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a roof member is arranged vertically above the second winning opening 640 so that the ball does not fall vertically, and the electric accessory B640a is tilted and displaced by the excitation of the drive solenoid B25110, the roof. While the member does not displace, when the electric accessory B640a is displaced without the excitation of the drive solenoid b25110, the roof member can be configured to be movable or can be expanded to the left or right according to the tilt of the electric accessory B640a. By configuring it, it may be possible to configure a state in which the electric accessory B640a is displaced so as not to expand the gap between the roof member. That is, the presence / absence of interlocking between the roof member and the electric accessory B640a may be switched depending on the presence / absence of control by the solenoid.

In the 25th embodiment, the material of the switching member B25720 is not particularly specified, but it may be a hard resin, a soft resin, or a metal. It should be noted that the resin can alleviate the stress generated in the eccentric protrusion B640b due to the deformation of the switching member B25720.

In each of the above embodiments, a movable member provided in the variable winning devices B1000 to B24000 that can switch the path of the ball is mainly used for switching whether or not the ball can enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is arranged on the downstream side of a predetermined specific winning opening, and is used as a member for switching whether or not to enter a specific area in which a player can obtain a predetermined profit by passing the ball. Is also good.

In this case, for example, the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 and the specific area on the downstream side thereof are provided, while the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 and the fall area (a big hit when the ball enters the ball). It may be configured to provide a region) in which the gaming state after the end of the game shifts to the low probability state). In this case, the profit obtained by the player changes significantly depending on whether the ball enters the first detection sensor B1230 or the second detection sensor B1250, so that the player's attention to the ball entering is improved. Can be planned.

Further, in particular, as described in the variable winning device B24000 of the 24th embodiment, it is possible to enter the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 until the ball reaches the range before entering the ball, or the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. When it is unclear whether or not it is possible to enter the ball, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the range before entering the ball.

In addition, as a detection mode in the case of entering both the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250, various modes are exemplified. For example, the one with a large number of balls may be valid, or if one of the balls is detected, the other may be invalidated, or the predetermined number of balls (for example, 1) may be invalidated. Only the first or last ball) may be valid.

In each of the above embodiments, a gap between the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is secured and the locations where they rub against each other are reduced as much as possible, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a contact portion for securing an area for contact with each other is configured, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are configured to operate integrally in a normal state, and after both guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 may be controlled so that one side is retracted backward.

In this case, it is determined that the number of operations of the variable winning device B1000 has reached a predetermined value (limit value) by detecting the timing at which the contact portion gradually rubs and does not operate integrally with the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. Can be done. Based on this determination, the variable winning device B1000 can be easily grasped that the replacement timing has been reached by notifying the third symbol display device 81, the sound device, or the like.

In each of the above embodiments, as a result of collating the normal detection pattern with the outputs of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222, an error notification is sent when there is a mismatch, or during normal operation (the movable members of the variable winning devices B1000 to B24000 are in a closed state). Although it has been described that an error notification is given when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the entry of the launch ball into the game area is detected, it may be controlled to execute a predetermined notification.

For example, when it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, the third symbol display device 81 sets the location to be aimed at as the arrival position of the launch ball, the preferable firing timing, sound, light, an image, or the like (“here”. It may be controlled to execute the notification indicated to the player by the display such as "Aim").

In this case, based on the notification, the player can make a determination to adjust the firing intensity of the ball and to select whether to continue or stop the firing of the ball. In other words, based on the notification, the player can feel that he / she is playing in a more preferable game mode, so that a part of the player's anxiety can be removed and the player's interest can be improved. Can be planned.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where both the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are arranged on the left and right sides of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one specific winning opening B1001 may be arranged on the left and right sides of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the other specific winning opening B1002 may be arranged on the lower side of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, or the other. The specific winning opening B1002 may be provided with an opening / closing plate that opens and closes by tilting forward, and the specific winning opening B1002 may be arranged behind the opening / closing plate. Further, the areas below the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be divided, and the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 may be arranged in the divided areas. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the variable winning device B1000 can be improved.

In the 28th to 33rd embodiments, the spheres roll in series on the bottom surfaces C142 and C2142 of the first intermediate members C140 and C2140, and the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 (reception portions C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling). The case where only one ball flows into the moving parts C173, C2173, C3173) at the same time has been described, but the bottom parts C142 and C2142 of the first intermediate members C140 and C2140 can be rolled in parallel by two or more balls, and the distribution is performed. Two or more balls may be simultaneously flowed into the members C170, C2170, C3170 (reception portions C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portions C173, C2173, C3173).

In the 28th to 33rd embodiments, the ball flowing down the area on the left side (left side in FIG. 205) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61) is below. The case where the ball flows into (enters) the side frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b has been described, but instead of or in addition to this, the area on the right side of the front view (right side in FIG. 205) of the game area flows down. The ball may be configured to flow (enter) into the lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b.

In the 28th to 33rd embodiments, the case where one upper frame passage CRt0 is communicated with the inlet COPin and COP2000in has been described, but a plurality of upper frame passages CRt0 are formed in the upper frame C86b, and they are formed. The configuration may be such that the inlet COPin and COP2000in are communicated with each other.
In the 28th to 33rd embodiments described above, the case where the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are returned to the first position by their own weight has been described, but the urging means is provided and the urging force of the urging means is shaken. The component members C170, C2170, and C3170 may be applied as an auxiliary force when returning to the first position. Alternatively, it may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are displaced to the second position. Examples of the urging means include coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, and the like.

In the 28th and 29th embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170 and C2170 are directly supported by the shafts C192 and C2174 has been described, but the distribution members C170 and C2170 may be displaceable by the link mechanism. In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

In the 29th embodiment, the case where the passage (fourth passage CRt2004) through which the ball rolled through the rolling portion C2173 of the distribution member C2170 passes is formed by the magnetic portion C2400 has been described, but is the same as the other passages. In addition, the fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage through which the ball is rolled along the rolling surface to pass (flow down).

In the thirtieth embodiment, the case where the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line has been described, but the guide groove C3131c may be formed in a curved shape. Further, the shape may be a combination of a straight line and a curved line.

In the 31st embodiment, the case where the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 has a uniform arc shape (same curvature) in the top view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Arc shapes with different radii may be combined and formed. For example, the curvature of the arc on one end side and the other end side of the arc portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is the curvature of the arc in the region between the one end side and the other end side (the region including the outflow surface C122a). It may be made larger than the curvature, that is, the curvature of the arc in the region including the outflow surface C122a may be made smaller. In this case, in the initial stage (the stage in which the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or its vicinity), the sphere is easily reciprocated and the sphere follows the preceding sphere. The ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or its vicinity at the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating sphere becomes low while making it easier to catch up with the sphere, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow region including the above), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

In the 31st embodiment, the cross-sectional shape on the plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is substantially horizontal in the arc portion C4122b. In other words, the case where the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the upper surface (rolling surface) is not necessarily limited to this, and is downward in the vertical direction (arrow D). It may be formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the direction). Alternatively, it may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane similar to the pair of straight lines C4122a, or may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane different from the pair of straight lines C4122a. As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or its vicinity), the sphere can be easily reciprocated and the sphere follows the preceding sphere. The ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or its vicinity at the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating sphere becomes low while making it easier to catch up with the sphere, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow region including the above), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

In the 31st embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (straight line portion C4122a and arc portion C4122b) may be formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the notch portion C124a (arrow L direction). As a result, while pressing the ball against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) of the notch portion C124a, the ball is rolled (reciprocating) by the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). Can be made to.

In the 28th, 29th, and 31st embodiments, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a in the vertical direction upward (arrow U direction). As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C212, and C4122 in the extending direction, and it is possible to easily cause the ball to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). ..

In the 32nd embodiment, the case where the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic portion C5400 is formed linearly in the width direction (arrow FB direction) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the magnetic portion is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of C5400 may be formed by being curved in an arc shape. When the arc shape has a radius substantially the same as the radius of the sphere and becomes convex in the vertical direction upward (arrow U direction), the contact area between the sphere and the magnetic portion C5400 can be increased, and the sphere becomes It is possible to prevent the magnetic portion C5400 from falling before moving to the downstream end. On the other hand, when the arc shape becomes convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction), it is possible to form a mode in which the sphere sways when flowing down, and there is a possibility that the sphere will fall from the magnetic portion C5400 (fifth passage). The possibility that CRt2005 cannot be reached) can be increased. As a result, the behavior of the ball can be noticed by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the 33rd embodiment, the case where the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, a surface closer to the back member C2130 in the vertical direction) has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed as an inclined surface facing the side opposite to the back surface member C2130 (that is, a surface away from the back surface member C2130 toward the upper part in the vertical direction). As a result, the sphere attracted to the magnetic portion C6400 and the back member C2130 can be arranged at a position separated from each other, and it is possible to prevent the sphere flowing down along the magnetic portion C6400 from coming into contact with the back member C2130. ..

In the 29th and 33rd embodiments, the inclined surface (that is, the vertical direction) in which the main body portion C2131 of the back member C2130 approaches the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 side (arrow F direction side) as it goes downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). It may be formed as a surface closer to the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 side toward the lower side). As a result, the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 and the back member C2130 can sandwich the sphere flowing down along the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400, and the sphere falls before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400. Can be suppressed.

In the 29th, 32nd, and 33rd embodiments, in addition to the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300 may be additionally arranged downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). .. When the added magnet C2300 is arranged vertically upward (arrow U direction) from the center of the sphere attracted to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400, the magnetic force acting on the sphere by the added magnet C2300 Since the direction is upward in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the sphere from falling before moving to the downstream ends of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, when the added magnet C2300 is arranged vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the center of the sphere attracted to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400, the added magnet C2300 acts on the sphere. Because the direction of the magnetic force is on the lower side in the vertical direction
The possibility that the sphere will be dropped from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 (the possibility that the fifth passage CRt2005 cannot be reached) can be increased.

In the 29th, 32nd, and 33rd embodiments, the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130 may be formed by extending downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). As a result, in addition to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the sphere can be attracted by the effect of the magnetic force directly acted on by the magnet C2300, and the sphere falls before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. Can be suppressed.

In the 29th, 32nd and 33rd embodiments, the magnetic force of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400 and C6400 may be different in strength. For example, when the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 arranged on the upstream side is stronger than the magnetic force of the other magnets C2300, the sphere that has rolled on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is transferred to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400. It can be easily adsorbed to the magnet, that is, it can be easily guided to the fourth passage CRt2004. Further, for example, when the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of a plurality of magnets C2300 is weaker than the magnetic force of the other magnet C2300, a sphere passing through the one magnet C2300 can be dropped from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400. The sex (the possibility that the fifth passage CRt2005 cannot be reached) can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the 29th, 32nd and 33rd embodiments, the arrangement direction of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400 and C6400 may be changed. For example, the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side are arranged so as to be inclined downward (in the direction of arrow D) in the vertical direction with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side. In other words, the magnets C2300 are arranged. When arranged in a convex shape, it is possible to easily direct a sphere flowing down along the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400 toward the magnet C2300 arranged on the downstream side, and the sphere falls from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side is inclined upward in the vertical direction (arrow U direction), in other words, the magnets C2300 are arranged. When arranged in a concave shape, there is a possibility that a sphere may be dropped from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400 at the boundary between the upstream side and the downstream side of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that the fifth passage CRt2005 cannot be reached). Can be high. Further, the arrangement shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed in a straight line or in an arc shape. Further, instead of the magnet C2300, the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above-mentioned shape (convex shape or concave shape, and linear or arc shape).

In the 29th, 32nd and 33rd embodiments described above, adjacent magnets C2300 of a plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400 and C6400 may be formed apart from each other. In this case, it is possible to create a section in which no magnetic force is applied to the sphere in the extending direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400, and there is a possibility that the sphere will be dropped from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 in this section (fifth passage). The possibility that CRt2005 cannot be reached) can be increased.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an array pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Direction incorporating randomness>
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an operating means and a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving an action from the acting means, and including an auxiliary means configured so that the displacement modes of the displacement means are in a plurality of modes. A1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are displaceably arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and include displacement means that are displaced when a driving device such as a motor is driven (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention is gradually lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be complicated by the action of the auxiliary means in which the auxiliary means makes the displacement modes of the displacement means into a plurality of modes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and it is possible to keep the player's attention in a high state.

The specific examples of the auxiliary means are not limited at all. For example, a box-shaped space-constructing means that constitutes a space in which the displacement means can be displaced may be used, or a pushing device that is displaced by a driving device different from the acting means and pushes the displacement means to change the displacement mode of the displacement means. It may be a means. Further, the driving device of the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the acting means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating means can be configured into a first state in which the first acting unit can act on the displacement means and a second state in which the second acting unit can act on the displacement means. A2 game machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the part when the acting means acts on the displacement means can be different, so that even if the movements of the acting means at the time of action are the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be different.

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, the operating means includes a contact means that abuts and applies a load to the displacement means, and is configured to be capable of generating a load in a plurality of types via the abutting means. A3 gaming machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, there are a plurality of types of loads generated via the abutting means, so that the displacement means of the displacement means can have a plurality of types of displacement modes.

In the game machine A3, the contacting means is configured to be displaceable and is configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the first contacting portion is configured to be able to contact the displacement means. A second contact portion different from the portion is provided, and the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangent line of the first contact portion) in a predetermined direction is determined by the above. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is configured to be different from the angle in the predetermined directional view between the displacement direction of the abutting means and the second abutting portion (or the tangent line of the second abutting portion).

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be changed without changing the displacement direction of the contacting means, so that there are a plurality of types of displacements of the displacement means. Can occur in the direction of.

In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is a tangent line drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion so that the tangent lines parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the displacement means can be loaded in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means is displaced with less energy loss. Can be made to. As a result, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a load generating means configured to be able to generate a load for displacement of the acting means is provided, and the load generating means loads at a position where the displacement means are arranged more densely. The gaming machine A6, which is configured to generate the above.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the acting means is supported in a support mode that allows a posture change, and the posture change occurs on a side that easily maintains a balance of arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means. A7 game machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained by the posture change of the acting means, so that the overload is locally applied to the acting means. It can be avoided to occur.

The cause of the change in posture of the means of action is not limited in any way. For example, it may be generated by the balance of the load from the displacement means, or a drive device for changing the posture of the acting means may be provided. When the posture of the acting means is changed by balancing the load from the displacement means, it is easy to change the posture of the acting means by providing a plurality of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the acting means. It is possible to generate multiple types of displacement.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes a guide means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide the displacement of the displacement means in one direction. The first guide portion and the second guide portion capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means in another direction are provided, and the first guide portion and the second guide portion are surfaces facing the displacement means. A8, which is characterized in that the formation mode of the game machine is different.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the operating means is configured to be displaceable, and the arrangement of the acting means is configured to change the ease of maintaining the balance of the displacement means, at a position where the balance of the displacement means can be easily maintained. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it can act on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the acting means.

The gaming machine A10, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement means includes one or more members, which are configured not to be coupled to each other.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and formed into a mass. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered.

In the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the members.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the posture of the displacement means can be stabilized when the displacement means is arranged in the acting means.

The method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making a hole in the member may be used.

<Changes due to advancing / retreating means that advance / retreat to the displacement range of the displacement means>
An arrangement means configured to be displaceable in a predetermined range and an advancing / retreating means configured to be displaceable in the advancing / retreating direction with respect to the range are provided, and the advancing / retreating means enters the predetermined portion of the range to enter the range. The gaming machine B1 is configured so that the width of the machine can be changed, and the width can be changed in a plurality of types.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine including a first movable member that is displaced to the left and right and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members due to the displacement of the first movable member. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the moving / retreating means is configured with a plurality of types of changing modes of the width of the range when entering the range, the displacement modes of the arranging means can be configured with a plurality of types. The displacement mode of can be improved.

The mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular effect member formed from a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

Further, the method of configuring the changing mode of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advancing / retreating means with a plurality of types is not limited at all. For example, the approach side portion of the advancing / retreating means may be formed by an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion having a different width of entering the range, or the displacement width of the advancing / retreating means may be changed to change the range. The width of may be variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-shaped means configured to prevent the arrangement means from entering and exiting, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing / retreating means enters in the unchanged state of the range. The gaming machine B2 is configured to be displaceable in an embodiment, and the box-shaped means includes an opening portion capable of inserting the advancing / retreating means and immovably forming the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the advancing / retreating means can enter the range through the open portion, while the displacement means can be prevented from falling out of the range.

The arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged in a place where the arrangement means is difficult to reach. In this case, the possibility that the placement means accidentally falls out of the range can be further reduced. Further, the open portion may be arranged at a place where a load from the arrangement means is unlikely to occur (for example, the upper side as the opposite side in the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent the load from the arranging means from being applied to the advancing / retreating means during displacement, obstructing the displacement of the advancing / retreating means, or causing a defect in the advancing / retreating means or the arranging means.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advancing / retreating means is configured so that the direction for guiding the arranging means is different according to the direction in which the arranging means is in contact with the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make the player appear as if the arranging means is guided in different directions by the same advancing / retreating means. As a result, the types of effects can be increased, so that the effect of the effects using the arrangement means and the advancing / retreating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancing / retreating means is configured such that the gap between the advancing / retreating means and the facing surface of the range becomes shorter than the width and length of the arranging means when entering the range. A gaming machine B4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even when the arranging means is arranged on the side far from the advancing / retreating means, the advancing / retreating means is used as the arranging means in the entered state. Can act.

It should be noted that the structure may be configured so that there is no gap between the advancing / retreating means and the facing surface of the range. Further, it may be configured so that there is a gap in a part and there is no gap in the other part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing / retreating means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the approach side, the representative tip portion farthest from the axis is said. The gaming machine B5 characterized in that the gap between the range and the range is minimized.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip portion, which is most likely to be displaced from the axis, first enters the range, so that the position from the axis is increased. It is possible to respond to the misalignment at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce the resistance of the subsequent approaching motion.

The pachinko / pachislot machine B5 is characterized in that the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined overhanging portion, and is formed so as to incline toward a side that recedes from the range as the distance from the overhanging portion is along the axial direction. Pachinko machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the arranging means can be displaced so as to move away from a predetermined overhanging portion in the approaching process of the advancing / retreating means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing / retreating means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion in the axial direction.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advancing / retreating means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion. It is possible to secure a place for arranging.

Various aspects are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is open. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is opened before the advancing / retreating means is entered, or the shape may be such that the range side is opened when the advancing / retreating means is entered.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a driving means capable of generating a driving force and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the advancing / retreating means are provided, and the transmitting means and the advancing / retreating means are provided. The driving force is transmitted by abutting, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmitting means and the advancing / retreating means can be changed, and the contact area is such that the advancing / retreating means enters the range. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it is configured to be maximum at the initial stage and then decrease.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of approach where a large load is likely to occur when the advancing / retreating means starts to come into contact with the arranging means. By doing so, the load applied per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the advancing / retreating means and the transmitting means can be improved.

The mode of the advancing / retreating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means of displacing outside the game area or a means of displacing inside the game area.

<Synchronous operation of two members with a transmission cam>
The transmission means includes a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or a plurality of members, and a transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means. A first transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first target portion of the displacement means in the first aspect, and the displacement means in a second aspect different from the first aspect. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the second target unit is provided with a second transmission unit configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is a drive device used for the displacement of the displacement means, and includes a first drive device for moving the displacement means up and down and a second drive device for rotationally displacement the displacement means. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a plurality of displacement means are displaced in synchronization with the first drive device and the second drive device in order to execute the operation effect of the displacement means, the drive timings are shifted. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be ruled out and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with the first transmission unit and the second transmission unit, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. Since it is configured, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

The time when the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partially transmitted at the same time) may be used.

Further, when the driving force is simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, it is preferable to arrange the driving force so that at least a part of the driving force is generated in the direction of gravity. As a result, the weight of the vehicle can be used for transmitting the driving force.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the driving force transmission to the first target portion and the driving force transmission to the second target portion are configured to occur at different times.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by suppressing the maximum value of the driving resistance to a low value.

Here, the driving force transmission may mean a load in the traveling direction in which the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force, or as a load transmission generated by the displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Is also good.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement locus of the first member and the second member. The first member is configured to be able to come into contact with the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contacted state, the first member is interposed via the first member. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that a driving force can be transmitted to a second member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 or C2, a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means can be configured. In other words, a case where the driving force is directly transmitted to the second member from the transmission means and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted through the first member can be configured.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in a state where the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member can be retracted to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, it is possible to prevent the first member being displaced from coming into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs in a state where the first member arrives at a predetermined arrangement and is stopped, so that the mode of transmitting the driving force to the second member can be smoothly switched. Can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the transmission mode of the driving force can be switched by changing the arrangement of the transmitting means, so that the displacements of the first member and the second member are stabilized. It is possible to avoid unintended collisions or contacts of each member.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging means configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction that opposes the urging force. A gaming machine C6, wherein the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined direction with the second member arranged on the opposite side of the first member in a predetermined direction. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to form a timing in which the second member is displaced against the urging force and a timing in which the second member is fastened against the urging force due to the displacement of the transmission means.

In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C7 is configured such that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmitting portion of the transmitting means is displaced toward the predetermined direction side. ..

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, a part of the load required for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the urging force can be used as an auxiliary.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission unit can form a non-contact state that is non-contact with the second member, and in the non-contact state, the displacement of the second member. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so as not to interfere with the second transmission unit.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member includes a displacement state pushed by the second transmission unit and a displacement state separated from the second transmission unit. And can be configured.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending parallel to the predetermined direction from the contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission means to be in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulatory section that regulates.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmitting means via the first member is blocked by the regulating unit to reach the driving means. Can be prevented (the degree can be reduced).

The mode of the regulatory department is not limited in any way. For example, a guide portion that limits the displacement mode to the slide displacement by regulating the displacement may be used, or a shaft support portion that limits the displacement to the rotational displacement may be used.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives a first state of being displaced or stopped by receiving a driving force of the drive means and a load from the second target portion. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that it can change its state in a second state in which it is displaced or stopped.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Load transmission is cut off by limiting the generation of load when it is far away>
A gaming machine including a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, and abutting the displacement means in contact with the displacement means. A first means that can change the state between a state and a non-contact state that is not in contact with the displacement means is provided, and an object that transmits a load given from the outside to the first means is switchably configured. The gaming machine D1 characterized by the fact that.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine in which a displacement means composed of one movable body that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means can come into contact with another movable body at the displacement end position (upper end position) and receive a load. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving means via the displacement means, and the state of the driving means by control (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) and Since there is a possibility that the state of the driving means may differ from the actual state, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

Further, it is also conceivable that the operating resistance of the driving means may be unstablely increased or decreased depending on the load applied to the driving means, and the deterioration of the driving means may be accelerated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, so that the drive state of the drive means can be stabilized. Further, the durability of the driving means can be improved by suppressing the unstable increase / decrease in the operating resistance of the driving means.

The method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing a load may be interposed at the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means (for example, the first means receiving an external force) that causes the load may be caused by the first means. It may be configured to occur only in the non-contact state.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced as compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face opposite sides.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an arrangement means that is arranged so as to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means is configured so that the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. The gaming machine D3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs in the non-contact state of the transmitting means and the displacement means, so that the load is transmitted between the transmitting means and the displacement means. It can be blocked.

The collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means or in the non-contact state. When the collision of the arrangement means occurs in the non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be blocked, so that the arrangement of the transmission means (presence or absence of contact between the transmission means and the displacement means) ), The load transmission to the drive means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in the direction of the load generated by the contact (the contact portion). The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it is flexibly configured to the extent that it can be deformed.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing the load transmission between the displacement means and the transmitting means. can do.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second contact portion configured to be abuttable, and the second means of at least one of the first means or the displacement means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the contact portion is formed of a shock-absorbable material.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the impact can be absorbed by the second contact portion, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

One of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is provided with an urging means for urging the displacement means, and the standby position of the displacement means is set at the end of the displacement range in the urging direction of the urging means. The gaming machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to prevent the standby position of the displacement means (the position of waiting for the load generation from the transmission means) from shifting. It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the one means and the displacement means are separated from each other. Thereby, the driving means can be easily and appropriately controlled.

Further, by lowering the degree of freedom in arranging the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to prevent the first means and the displacement means from inadvertently coming into contact with each other.

A gaming machine D7, wherein in any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the first means is allowed to change its posture due to a collision of the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arranging means can be used to change the posture of the first means, so that the load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the urging force of the urging means. The urging state to be received and the transmission means are in contact with the displacement means, and the displacement means is displaced to the opposite side in the direction of the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the state can be changed between an invalid contact state in which transmission to the means is invalid and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated from each other.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6 or D7, a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of easiness of changing the posture with respect to a collision of the arranging means) can be configured.

<Conditionally regulate one of the forward and reverse rotations>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable by a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point at which the displacement mode changes, and there are a plurality of types from the reference position. The gaming machine E1 is configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the above-described embodiment.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different operations in a plurality of effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, different operations correspond to the presence or absence of switching of the drive direction of the drive device, so that the type of effect can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the effect to be executed from now on. Since the player can predict about the above, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the effect to be executed from now on by the discriminating involvement means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the correct effect and the displacement effect may be different effects with displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if the displacement means of the displacement means is displaced to the predetermined position in one way, the displacement from the predetermined position occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated), and it is possible to know whether or not the displacement means is correct. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the displacement is correct even if the displacement occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated).

Moreover, the mode of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

The game machine E1 includes a driving means for generating a driving force for displacement of the displacement means and a regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement means, and the driving means generates the driving force in the regulating means. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in the absence state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be muted when the displacement means is regulated. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the direction is the opposite.

Further, unlike the case where the driving force continues to generate the driving force when the effect for a long time (long reach or the like) is executed in the state where the displacement of the displacement means is regulated, it is possible to suppress the heat generation of the driving means.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the regulating means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacement means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of arranged driving means can be reduced as compared with the case where the driving means for driving the regulating means is separately provided.

A gaming machine characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 is provided with a discrimination-involvement means configured to have a section in which it is difficult to determine which aspect of the plurality of modes is displaced. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the discriminant-involved means can be configured so that it is difficult to discriminate the displacement mode of the displacement means in the predetermined section. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of displacement of the displacement means up to now, which is difficult to determine the displacement mode, as compared with the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section of the gaming machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being discovered from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the drive means before notifying the result.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a detecting means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means is provided, and the detecting means determines a feasible displacement switching among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6 that is also used as a determination means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching can be used in combination, so that the detection sensor can be used. The number of arrangements can be reduced.

<A sense of unity of multiple members>
In a gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are displaceable, the mode in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different between the first member and the second member. The gaming machine F1 characterized by being configured in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the first member and the second member, which are configured to be displaceable, to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacements of the first member and the second member occur on the same straight line, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member will revert after contacting each other depending on the speeds close to each other. Yes, it can look bad. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the effect mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the mode in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different. For example, the displacement modes of the first member and the second member are not set to be close to each other on the same straight line, but the first member and the second member are brought closer to each other by changing the direction after approaching on another straight line. It is possible to avoid reversion and make it easier to maintain the effect mode.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for contacting each other, and the first member and the second member The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the postures of the first section and the second section are different.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

The gaming machine F1 or F2 is provided with a load generating means capable of generating a load toward the side that maintains the proximity arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

The load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a certain direction or a load having a certain size. For example, when a load that is easily received (for example, an effect mode that generates an external force) changes depending on a situation (for example, a gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

Further, it is not necessary that the load generated by the load generating means is always generated. For example, the generation of the load and the elimination of the load may be switched according to the above-mentioned change in the situation. The load generating means may be an external one.

The gaming machine F3 includes a displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means is the displacement. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is integrally configured with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be appropriately maintained, and the timing is deviated. It is possible to prevent a load from being generated.

Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least a part of the first member comes into contact with the second member.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily execute an effect of filling a gap between the first member and the second member.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in a state other than a predetermined state.

A gaming machine F7, wherein in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of places.

According to the gaming machine F7, in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, since the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of places, the state is not limited to the maintenance of the state with respect to the displacement in one direction. , It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against a change in posture. As a result, even when the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid conspicuous misalignment.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded portions include a first loaded portion and a first load portion thereof. A second loaded portion having a larger displacement amount with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion is provided, and the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be gradually applied to the first member or the second member. Further, the roles of the loads given to the first loaded portion and the second loaded portion can be separated. For example, the first loaded portion can be used in the role of arranging the first loaded portion at a predetermined position, and the second loaded portion can be used in the role of adjusting the posture.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, in the load generating means, the portion that applies a load toward the side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is the first member as compared with the other parts. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the pick-up length of the facing surface facing the second member is formed to be long.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the hanging of the first member or the second member due to its own weight. On the other hand, for the other portion, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved, and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, the gaming machine F10 is characterized in that the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other. ..

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load generated in the assembling work. That is, it is easier to avoid load transmission between the first member and the second member as compared with the case of assembling in the contact state, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without any loss. can.

As a result, the first member and the second member can be provided with the contact surface as designed, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which a misalignment is likely to occur due to a load by the load generating means such as when a gap is generated. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling states of displacement means>
The gaming machine G0 includes a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, and the action means is configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to enable a displacement composed of a change in arrangement and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the portion supporting the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, the posture of the displacement means is due to the need to provide a gap to secure the displacement. There was a problem that the countermeasures against the change were not sufficient and there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the posture change of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. As a result, even when the space where the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid a collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

The direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, tilting may be performed with a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, etc.) as the axis, or horizontal swing may be performed with the straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.) as the axis.

In the gaming machine G0, the gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the acting force that suppresses the posture change of the displacement means according to the arrangement position of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means can be changed according to the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the space for arranging the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the effect of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means reciprocates, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing the number, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

Further, for example, when the displacement means itself is expanded / contracted or rotationally displaced by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse, so that the driving force generation position By increasing the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine G0 or G1, the gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the operating means is configured to support the displacement means by a plurality of main supporting means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0 or G1, the displacement means is supported by a plurality of main supporting means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, so that the displacement means is prevented from tilting. It can be made easier.

In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the operating means includes an auxiliary supporting means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main supporting means is arranged.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the displacement means is supported by three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line by the main support means and the auxiliary support means. Posture changes can be suppressed in all directions.

In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means also functions as a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding the displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that the area in a predetermined direction is increased or decreased, and the action means is configured so that the acting force generation position is maximized at the displacement end position of the displacement means. The gaming machine G5 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacement means is most effective. , The change in posture of the displacement means can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement. Therefore, if the position where the acting force is generated is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means rises. , The problem that the drive device becomes large is assumed.

On the other hand, by configuring the position other than the displacement end position to reduce the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to prevent the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid increasing the size of the drive device.

<Wiring guidance for propeller unit>
The displacement means, the electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and the electric wiring displacement means configured to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring are provided, and the displacement means is the predetermined portion of the electric wiring displacement means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined portion is displaceable on the side avoiding the displacement means when the displacement is made toward the side approaching.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member linked to the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). See publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for the purpose of avoiding contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, it is difficult to configure the displacement means so as to continue to displace beyond the electric wiring, and it is more difficult than the displacement end of the displacement means. Since a space for arranging the electric wiring is required on the outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the predetermined portion of the electric wiring can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacement means by the electric wiring displacement means, the contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring is positive. Since it can be avoided, the displacement means can be configured to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

The case where the displacement means approaches a predetermined portion is not limited in any way. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there is a risk that the displacement means and the predetermined portion come into contact with each other, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means may be closer than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least the first direction and the second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in the first direction and the third direction orthogonal to the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid that the displacement amount of the displacement means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction is limited to the electric wiring.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set to be in the direction along the predetermined directional view. The effect on the appearance can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined portion is provided, and the electric wiring displacement means is the said. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured so as to be easily displaced with respect to the stopping means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stopping means can be improved.

The configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is arranged in a spiral shape in the stopping means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be a movable member. In the case of being guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

In the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, since the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end in the first direction of the displacement means, the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. As a result, the amount of accommodation of the electrical wiring of the stopping means can be increased, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means that compensates for the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wiring displacement means is integrally configured with the displacement means, and includes corresponding changing means for changing the arrangement of the electric wiring displacement means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. The gaming machine H6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement of the electrical wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the corresponding changing means.

<Flower path of sphere through electric chew>
A game area and a flow-down means for causing the game ball discharged from the game area to flow down are provided, and the flow-down means includes a section configured so that the game ball discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. Game machine I0 to play.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the base plate constituting the gaming area is composed of plywood (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot visually recognize the gaming ball. Therefore, the player tends to lose sight of the game ball, and if he / she does not pay attention to the discharge timing, he / she may suddenly get the impression that the game ball has disappeared from the game area.

In addition, even if attention is paid to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning opening and the out opening are often arranged close to each other, and even though the ball actually entered the out opening, the winning opening is used. It may be mistaken for a ball that has entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility of distrust that the prize balls are not paid out. That is, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the gaming ball from the gaming area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, since the flow-down means is configured to include a section in which the game ball discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, the player visually observes the game ball flowing down in the section. This makes it possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. Thereby, the discharge of the game ball from the game area can be improved.

The discharge of the game ball from the game area means the whole mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through the prize ball opening, or may be discharged through the out port without the prize ball.

In the game machine I0, a game ball that has flowed down the game area is arranged so as to be able to pass through, and a profit-giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball is provided. The means are arranged above the profit-giving means and on the downstream side of the first component, which is configured to be able to guide the game ball toward the side approaching the profit-giving means, and the profit. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a second component that is configured to be able to guide the gaming ball to a side away from the profit-giving means on the upper side of the granting means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0, by visually recognizing the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down means, the player can grasp how the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area, and at the same time, the player can grasp it. It is possible to prevent the game ball from approaching the lower profit-giving means. As a result, the game ball that has already been discharged from the game area and the game ball that is still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit-giving means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. You can try to do it.

The predetermined profit is not limited in any way. For example, the prize ball may be paid out, a lottery of symbols such as the first symbol and the second symbol may be used, or other profits may be used.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1, the attention means formed inside the gaming area and the frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means are provided, and the flow-down means has the frame in front view. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to flow down to the inward side of the means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flow-down means allows the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player paying attention to the means of interest. As a result, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the means of interest, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has been discharged from the game area.

The means of interest is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means in which a pattern is variablely displayed, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

In the game machine I2, the flow-down means is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, the period during which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player paying attention to the means of interest can be extended.

<Ingenuity around the board design and light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with light emitting means and a means to be arranged provided on the front side of at least a part of the predetermined substrate in a predetermined directional view, the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized in the predetermined directional view. The gaming machine J0 is characterized in that the light emitted from the light emitting means is arranged so as to be smaller than the visible area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illuminated substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged on the back side of a base plate having a gaming area on the front surface, and the plate surface of the illuminated substrate and the plate surface of the base plate There are gaming machines in which the LEDs are arranged substantially in parallel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the area of the illuminated substrate that can be visually recognized in the front view is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate is irradiated with the LED light, the visibility is illuminated. There is a possibility that the decorative substrate may enter and the decorative member and the illuminated substrate may be visually recognized as overlapping in the front-rear direction.

Only the configurations necessary for functions such as circuits and resistors are arranged on the surface of the illuminated substrate, and the design is not usually high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the illuminated substrate are visually recognized overlapping with each other in the front-rear direction, the appearance is poor and there is a possibility that the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the effect of the predetermined substrate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, since the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate visually recognized in the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light, at least the predetermined substrate is predetermined. It is possible to form an area in which only light can be visually recognized without overlapping with the substrate. Thereby, the effect of the predetermined substrate can be improved.

The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited in any way. For example, the visible area may be reduced by partially hiding it, or the visible area may not be visible by being totally shielded.

The optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be oriented in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. It may be something that can be done.

The light transmission of the arrangement means is not limited in any way. For example, the light transmission may be configured to be good, the light transmission may be configured to be low, or the degree of light transmission may be changed for each portion.

In the gaming machine J0, the placed means is provided on both sides of the predetermined substrate and includes a plurality of direction changing means for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, and is provided between the plurality of direction changing means. In addition, a low-transmittance means having a low light transmittance as compared with the direction-changing means is arranged, and in a predetermined directional view, at least a part of the predetermined substrate is arranged inside the low-transmitt means. The gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. As a result, the visible range of the predetermined substrate can be narrowed.

The direction changing means is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving device, a game area or a flow path through which a game ball flows down, or a case member or a decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

In the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion forming a shape of a predetermined pattern or figure.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the low-transparency means can be mixed with the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The shape of a predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone such as a window frame, or it may be a bone that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and the outer peripheral portion of rotation. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, the title logo).

A gaming machine J3, wherein in any of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the predetermined substrate is arranged with the end surface of the plate facing in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction can be minimized.

The gaming machine J3 includes a display means for executing a display effect that can be visually recognized in a predetermined direction, and a gaming area arranged in front of the display means. The predetermined board includes the display area of the display means and the display area. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary in a predetermined directional view with a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined substrate at the boundary, light is emitted from the back surface of the gaming area to the front side, and unlike the case where the light effect is performed as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined substrate is used. It is possible to perform an effect of irradiating light on the game area or an effect of irradiating light only on the game area side.

In the game machine J4, the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a game board constituting the game area on the front side.

According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on the game board, the light emitting means is arranged as compared with the case where the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case where the movable accessory or the like is arranged. The degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electrical wiring that supplies electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the back case along the back of the game board, the back case side can be visually recognized from the window of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see the back of the game board without looking around in a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the player from seeing the electrical wiring.

Further, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the back case, the arrangement space of the predetermined board is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but the method of arranging the predetermined board on the back surface of the game board is used. If there is, a predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate can be improved.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of accessories at the time of shipment>
A displacement means and a limiting means configured to be able to limit the displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the limiting means includes a first state that can act on the displacement means and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. The gaming machine K1 is configured to be state-changeable, and is configured to suppress the movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is downwardly displaced from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fixing and releasing the arrangement of the displacement means.

That is, while the gaming machine is configured to be able to operate normally after it is installed, the movable accessory can be fixed even in situations where a large vibration or external force can be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipment. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a measure to fix the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the cushioning material is suppressed in the range where the movable accessory is displaced to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, in the case of a configuration in which the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be released by changing the state of the limiting means, so that the arrangement and release of the displacement means can be improved.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is pulled out, since the limiting means is not pulled out, it is difficult to continue the game if the state is easily changed by an external force that may occur during the game. On the other hand, by configuring the limiting means to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect during the game.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to be capable of changing a state between the first state and the second state when the power is off.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from becoming difficult in the power failure state and the recovery work from the power failure state.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes an urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is such that the operating portion is displaced by a predetermined amount from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operation unit is configured to change state in accordance with the above, and the operating unit can be displaced from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the urging force of the urging means, and in the second state, the operation unit is displaced from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a distance away from the ground.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operation unit is arranged at a separated position away from the reference position in the second state, it is given to the gaming machine after installation such as opening and closing the door. It is possible to prevent the limiting means from being displaced by a predetermined amount required for the state change of the limiting means due to the external force that can be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the limiting means from changing the state from the second state.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating portion of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means constituting the displaceable area.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit is arranged outside the area forming means, so that even if the displacement means is displaced due to the operation of the operating means. It is possible to prevent the displacement means from coming into contact with the operator.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, an urging means for urging the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting means has a predetermined amount of the operating portion from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The limiting means is configured to change state with displacement, the limiting means includes a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the operating unit in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is the operation in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to secure a displacement allowable width (posture change width) of a portion.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the displacement of the operating means is configured to be possible in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent the operation unit from being displaced in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation unit from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing its state due to an unintended external force generated by opening and closing the door.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating portion includes an engaging portion configured to be engageable with the guiding means, the urging means is arranged at the center of the operating portion, and the engaging portion is the operation. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the center of the unit.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K5, in the first state of the limiting means, even if an external force of unknown direction is applied to the limiting means, the operating portion is displaced with the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change from occurring by merely performing (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to an external force such as opening / closing the door, vibration at the time of shipment, or the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the limiting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means configured to be rotatable by the support shafts on the left and right position sides, and the engaging portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support shafts. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the clerk of the gaming hall opens the front door. The operation can be facilitated when the control means is operated. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width becomes large (opposite the support shaft), so that the operating position of the limiting means can be set to the front side.

In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area forming means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, the limiting means are arranged on the support shaft side to prevent an operator who works with the front door open from accidentally touching the limiting means. can do.

In addition, since the load applied to the limiting means when opening and closing the front door can be reduced as compared with the case where it is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft, the limiting means is in a state due to the impact caused by opening and closing the front door. It can be prevented from changing.

A gaming machine K9 in any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, wherein in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide the displacement of the limiting means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guiding accuracy when the limiting means acts on the displacement means with the displacement guiding accuracy of the limiting means alone lowered. Can be improved.

The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that, when any of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is energized in the first state, the gaming machine K10 is provided with a preventive notification means for notifying the continuation of the energized state.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify the state of the limiting means to be switched from the first state.

The mode of notification is not limited in any way. For example, an error display may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device for notification, a notification sound may be output from a speaker for notification, or a predetermined lighting means may be illuminated (or maintained in an extinguished state). You may notify by.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object includes an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, and the accommodating body is formed with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means. The gaming machine L0 characterized by the fact that.

A gaming machine including a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent tampering with the control board.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the control board is provided with the operating means, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time and effort.

According to the gaming machine L0, the operating body is provided with an operating means that is arranged on the object and is operably formed, and an opening is formed in the housing body at a position corresponding to the operating means. Can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the housing when operating the operating means. Therefore, the labor can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covered parts A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating body. M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating body. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from the opening into the inside of the housing.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displaces the operator, and the facing portion is at least in a range excluding the displacement locus of the operator on the first surface of the operating means. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is disposed so as to face a part thereof.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the facing portion is arranged so as to face at least a part of the first surface of the operator except for the displacement locus of the operator. , While suppressing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator being hindered, the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, so that foreign matter such as a wire can flow from the opening to the inside of the housing. It can be suppressed from being inserted.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which a base end is fixed and one end is free.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, so that the shape is simplified and the moldability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that a protruding portion is provided so as to project from the facing portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, a protrusion is provided on the facing portion, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be increased and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

The protrusion may be formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

In the gaming machine M4, the protruding portion is projected from a surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M4, the protruding portion is projected from the surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, so that the facing portion and the operating means first. The gap between the surface and the surface can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing through such a gap.

In the gaming machine M5, the protruding portion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means. By eliminating the gap between them, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

Further, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, when the operator is inserted into the operating means, even if the opposed portion is pushed in the insertion direction by the operator, the opposed portion in the insertion direction. Can be suppressed from being deformed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side of the facing portion from being damaged.

Since the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, the elastic deformation of the facing portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusions are in contact with each other. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of adhesion and suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire).

A gaming machine M7, wherein in any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by inserting and displaces the operator, and the facing portion is in contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator laterally or carelessly opens and closes the member on which the housing is arranged. When the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operating means (the portion connected to the object) becomes large. Further, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operating means becomes excessive, the operating means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operating means (the portion connected to the object) is large. Become. In these cases, the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. The operator (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) can be brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion to suppress tilting or excessive displacement of the operator. As a result, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the housing is provided with a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means. The gaming machine M9.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that a gap between the operating means and the covering portion is provided. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

Here, when the operating means is operated by inserting and displacementing the operator, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly prepares the operator). When the operator is operated laterally or the member on which the housing is arranged is inadvertently opened and closed and the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also tilted and operated. The load on the root of the means (the part connected to the object) increases. In this case, the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

The gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the outer shape of the operating means on the base end side opposite to the one end side is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M9, the outer shape on the base end side opposite to one end side of the operating means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering portion, so that the base end side of the operating means The gap between the and the covering can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the covering portion or the other of the operating means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the coverings or operating means comprises a bulging formed bulge, and the other of the coverings or operating means. Since the receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M11, the gaming machine M12 is characterized in that the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction. Excessive displacement (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M12, the housing is provided with an erection wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erection tip abuts on the object.

According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M1 to M12, the accommodating body includes a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means. The gaming machine M14.

According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M13, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the path for entering the inside of the housing can be blocked. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and a surface for connecting the electronic components to the circuit of the control board by solder is a side on which the operating means is arranged. Is a gaming machine M15 characterized in that it is set on the opposite surface.

According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which the electronic components are mounted, and the surface for connecting the electronic components to the circuit of the control board by soldering is the operating means. Since it is set on the surface opposite to the side on which It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the erecting wall can be reliably functioned as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts, and foreign matter such as a wire can be suppressed from being inserted into the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erection wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced.

According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the erection wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced, so that the erection wall is brought into contact with the object. It is possible to increase the surface pressure at the vertical tip to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted between the object and the vertical tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M16, the erection tip of the erection wall is characterized in that the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M16, the erection tip of the erection wall has a tapered surface formed on the surface on the operating means side, so that the thickness dimension of the erection tip is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing while improving the moldability. That is, by using a tapered surface, the shape change can be made gentle and the fluidity of the resin in the molding die can be ensured. On the other hand, when the erection tip of the erection wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to pass between the erection wall and the object. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the accommodating body is formed with an outer surface on one side from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region. A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is projected from two regions.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the housing is one from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion is projected from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, the region covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the region that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and the region that abuts on the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing and the prevention of the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing body, and the opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing body, and an opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, when the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire directly into the opening, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the housing to reach the opening. The method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the accommodating body, the tip of the foreign substance such as the wire is brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion, and further. Can stop the progress of. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that regulates the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
The gaming machine L0 is characterized in that the operating means is operated by inserting and displaces the operating element, and the housing body is formed so as to be in contact with the operating means or the outer surface of the operating element. Game machine N1 to play.

Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator laterally or carelessly opens and closes the member on which the housing is arranged. , When the operator collided with another member is pressed laterally), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, the displaced (tilted) operating means may be damaged (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L0, the accommodating body is formed so as to be in contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operator. It can be received and the displacement of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the housing is provided with an erection wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object.

Here, if the housing body receives the displaced (tilted) operating means, the housing body may be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the accommodating body is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the tip of the erection abuts on the object. Can serve as a support and suppress deformation of the housing. As a result, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

At the same time, the support of the erecting wall suppresses the deformation of the housing, so that the tilting of the operating means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the upright wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the erection wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the erection wall can be tilted in any direction of the operating means. As a support, deformation of the housing can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

In addition, the erecting wall can block the route for entering the inside of the housing. That is, even if a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N3, the erection wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the accommodating body on which the erection wall is erected.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N3, the erecting wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the accommodating body on which the erecting wall is erected, so that the rigidity of the accommodating body is increased. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the erection wall by utilizing the above, and it is possible to increase the rigidity of the entire housing by connecting the inner surfaces to each other. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) of the standing wall that suppresses the deformation of the housing body when the operating means is tilted. As a result, damage to the housing can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N5, wherein in any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the accommodating body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the housing body includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Therefore, the tilt of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body includes a ridge projecting from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape, and one end of the ridge is said. A gaming machine N6 characterized in that it is connected to a covering portion.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body is provided with a ridge projecting from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge can function as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means and the damage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

Further, since the covering portion is projected from the outer surface of the housing, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the region covered by the covering portion on the operating means (the region that suppresses the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and the region that abuts on the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the housing and the prevention of the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N6, the housing is provided with a display unit formed on the outer surface thereof and displaying predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end side of the ridge.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6, the accommodating body includes a display unit formed on the outer surface thereof and displaying predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end side of the ridge. Therefore, the ridge can also function as an instruction line for pointing to the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the operating means is operated by inserting an operator into the first surface and displacement, and the accommodating means. The body is provided with an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed so that an edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the accommodating body, and the accommodating body is an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating body. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing.

Further, since the facing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operator inserted into the operating means, the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) is placed on the edge of the facing portion. It is possible to prevent the operator from tilting or excessive displacement by bringing it into contact with the portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is arranged so as to face at least a part of a range excluding the displacement locus of the operator on the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is arranged in at least a part of the first surface of the operator except for the displacement locus of the operator. Foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening into the inside of the housing by the amount that the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator. Can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to increase the area of the facing portion that comes into contact with the displaced operator so that excessive displacement of the operator (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be easily suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to the first position, and the position where one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. The gaming machine N10 is characterized in that the child and the facing portion are in contact with each other.

In the game machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is the first position. The gaming machine N11 is characterized in that the operator displaced at two positions and the facing portion are in contact with each other.

According to the game machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effect of the game machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operator can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion. Since the position to be moved is the position where the operator displaced to the first position or the second position and the facing portion come into contact with each other, the operator displaced to the first position or the second position hits the facing portion. It is possible to effectively prevent the facing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other by using a ridge.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 (operating wall portion A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the accommodating body has an outer surface formed on one side from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. The gaming machine O1 characterized in that

Here, since the operating means can be operated through the opening, it is not necessary to open the housing when operating the operating means. Therefore, the labor can be suppressed. However, there is a risk of fraudulent insertion of foreign matter such as wire through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the housing has an outer surface formed on one side from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the second region is formed. Since the opening is formed in, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the housing, and a step (connecting surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This makes it possible to increase the distance to the opening and make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraud.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first region and the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region. O2.

Here, the housing (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface in consideration of heat dissipation from the object (control board). On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operating means, the operability deteriorates. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily secure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the housing. .. However, when operating the operating means, the hands of the operator (operator) interfere with the step (connecting surface) between the first region and the second region, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, there is a risk that the operability when operating the operating means may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first region and the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, so that the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the space connected to the second region can be expanded by the amount of the downward inclination, and the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the game machine O2, the second region is formed as a region having a substantially rectangular front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to one direction, and the operating means is operated. The gaming machine O3 is operated by inserting and displaces the child, and the posture of the operator when it is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is set to a posture along the other direction. ..

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the second region is a region having a substantially rectangular front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to one direction. The operating means is operated by inserting and displacement of the operator, and the posture of the operator when it is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is set to be a posture along the other direction. A space can be secured on the side where the gripping surfaces face each other with the surface for gripping the child directed in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the operator is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the operator from interfering with the housing. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is from the first region to the second. A gaming machine O4 characterized in that it is tilted downward toward an area.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the opening is arranged on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is the second. Since it is tilted downward from the first region to the second region, it is possible to prevent a finger different from the gripped finger from interfering with the housing when the operator is gripped and displaced. For example, when the operator is grasped by the index finger and the thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region are displayed. It can be secured as a space for moving the little finger side, and interference between the little finger side and the housing can be suppressed. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O4, the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, so that the connecting surface (first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction is used for operation. The means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress interference with other members during manufacturing and prevent damage to the operating means. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening, and to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from the opening into the inside of the housing.

Further, by forming the connection surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded by that amount, that is, in order to cope with heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the housing can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connecting surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and the connecting surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. The gaming machine O6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connecting surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and a connecting surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the lateral direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped and operated (insertion into the operating means, withdrawal from the operating means, or displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator), the gripped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing the fingers different from the above. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the other connecting surfaces are the first. The gaming machine O7, which is substantially orthogonal to the region and the second region.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is tilted downward from the first region to the second region, and the like. Since the connection surface of the above is substantially orthogonal to the first region and the second region, the housing body for dealing with heat dissipation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of inclining the connection surface downward. The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the volume of the internal space of the housing by inclining the connecting surface downward.

In the game machine O4 or O5, a base body on which the housing body is arranged and a rotation axis that rotatably supports the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is the axial direction of the rotation axis. It is characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal and its lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is arranged on a side farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Game machine O8 to play.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effect of the game machine O4 or O5, a base body on which the accommodating body is arranged and a rotation shaft that rotatably supports the base body are provided, and the length in the second region is long. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotation axis, the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when operating the operating means in the space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, it is possible to secure a space for allowing the operator (operator)'s hand to access the operating means by the amount of the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface. As a result, operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, comprising a display device arranged in a gaming area and an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, relating to the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

A gaming machine including a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, a display device arranged in the game area and an operating means arranged in the object and formed to be operable are provided, and information on the operation of the operating means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operating state of the operating means based on the display of the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information related to the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine P1, the housing is formed so as to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the accommodating body is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, the operation can be performed while checking the display (information), so that the operability can be improved and the operation error can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that fraud can be suppressed.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the accommodating body can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the accommodating body is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time. P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, the housing can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the housing is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operating means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, improvement of operability and suppression of operation mistakes can be achieved more reliably.

In the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported by an axis, and the operating means is arranged on a side farther from the center of the housing from the position where the housing is supported.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3, the accommodating body is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operating means is arranged on the side farther from the axially supported position than the center of the accommodating body. In a state where the housing is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the housing is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be visually recognized at the same time, the operating means is located farther from the outer edge of the game machine main body. Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operating means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality of the operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is farther from the axially supported position than the first operating means. The gaming machine P5, which is characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the operating means are composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is more frequently operated than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the position where it is supported by the shaft, the operating means (first operating means) having a high operation frequency can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, when operating the frequently operated operating means (first operating means), it is possible to prevent the fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, the gaming machine includes an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, and one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that the operability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the object.

A gaming machine including a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in whether or not the operating means can be operated. That is, if the operation is allowed regardless of the connection state of one or more electrical connection lines to the object, the operating means may be easily operated illegally, while the connection of one or more electrical connection lines. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, the workability of the work due to the operation of the operating means may be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q1 is provided with an operating means arranged on the object and formed to be operable, and one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since the operability of the operating means is changed according to the state, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

In the game machine Q1, the housing is formed so as to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the accommodating body can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that fraud can be suppressed. In this case, when the housing is displaced, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, so that the operationability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

The gaming machine Q1 or Q2 is characterized in that the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connecting line among the electrical connecting lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, even if the other electrical connection lines are disconnected (pulled out) from the object, the operating means By allowing the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the accommodating body is formed to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the accommodating body (that is, arrange it in an easy-to-operate manner) is attached to the accommodating body. After the displacement, for example, an extension wire is interposed between the object and the other electrical connection wire to allow the operation of the operating means, and the other electrical connection wire released (pulled out) is released. You can avoid the trouble of reconnecting to the object.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connecting lines is released from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections). Since the operation of the operating means is prohibited (unless the wire is connected to the object), it is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated illegally.

In the configuration in which the accommodating body is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the accommodating body (that is, arrange it in an easy-to-operate manner) is connected to the accommodating body. After displacement, for example, by inserting an extension wire between the object and another electrical connection line, and reconnecting the released (pulled out) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation is performed. Since the operation of the means can be allowed, the work by the operation of the operating means can be performed.

<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body for accommodating an object, the accommodating machine is provided with an operating means arranged on the object and operably formed, and the accommodating body is formed displaceably and is arranged at the time of a game. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operating means can be easily operated rather than a position.

A gaming machine including a substrate box (accommodating body) for accommodating a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the gaming machine R1, the operating body is provided with an operating means arranged on the object and formed so as to be operable, and the housing body is formed so as to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than the position arranged at the time of the game. Since it can be displaced to a position, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the housing is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the housing is displaced by rotation about the shaft-supported portion as a rotation center.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the accommodating body is rotatably pivotally supported and displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion, so that the accommodating body is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine R3, wherein in the gaming machine R1 or R2, another member faces the operating means at a position where the accommodating body is arranged at the time of the game.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1 or R2, at the position where the housing is arranged during the game, another member is faced with the operating means, so that the operating means is illegally operated. Can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displaceting the operator, and in the state where the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the other member, whereby the operator is said to be in contact with the other member. The gaming machine R4, characterized in that the accommodating body cannot be displaced to a position where it is arranged during the game.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displace the operator, and when the operator is inserted, the operator hits another member. By being in contact with the container, it is impossible to displace the housing to the position where it is arranged during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from forgetting to remove it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being used illegally.

<There is a part of one guide path that is located above the other guide path>
In a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. The route constructing means can form a first guide path and a second guide path different from the first guide path as the guide path, and the first guide path is from the second guide path. The gaming machine XA1 is characterized by having an upper side arrangement portion which is also arranged on the upper side.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. A game that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the guide path on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. There is a machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the ball that has fallen from the guide path is directed toward the out port, and the player who keeps firing the ball and the player who shoots or stops the ball are used. There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference in game efficiency may occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, even if the gaming ball falls from the first guide path, if the gaming ball falls from the upper arrangement portion, the gaming ball is rescued. 2 Can be put on the guide route. Since the rescued game ball will be guided to a predetermined entry area, the game depends on the method of the game, as compared with the configuration in which many balls that have fallen from the guide path head toward the out port as spilled balls. Changes in efficiency can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine XA1, the ball entry area includes a first ball entry area and a second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area, and the first guide path to the first ball entry area. The second guide path is configured to be able to guide the game ball, the second guide path is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the second entry area, and the second guide path is arranged above the first guide path. XA2 is a gaming machine characterized by having an upper side arrangement portion.

According to the game machine XA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine XA1, even if the game ball falls from the second guide path, if the game ball falls from the upper arrangement portion of the second guide path, , By rescuing the game ball, it can be put on the first guide route. That is, it is possible to exert the effect of suppressing the change in the game efficiency not only when the game ball falls from the first guide path but also when the game ball falls from the second guide path.

In the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the gaming machine XA3 is configured such that the first guide path and the second guide path intersect in a predetermined directional view.

According to the gaming machine XA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the upper side arrangement portion of one guide path can be arranged above (directly above) the other guide path.

The intersection position is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the center of the first guide route and the center of the second guide route may intersect. In this case, the ease of salvation is equal on the left and right.

For example, it may intersect below the center of the first guide path and below the center of the second guide path. In this case, the distance from the intersection position to the first and second ball entry areas is shortened, which has the advantage that the period during which the game ball flows down the lower side of the opponent's path can be shortened, and the ball can be placed above the intersection position. There is an advantage that the number of game balls can be increased.

For example, it may intersect above the center of the first guide path and above the center of the second guide path.

For example, it may intersect below the center of the first guide path and above the center of the second guide path. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to save the game ball when the ball falls from the first guide path side to the second guide path side as compared with the opposite case.

In this case, the movable member constituting the first guide path is composed of a wing member that is rotationally displaced upward so as to be rescued, so that the game ball falling from the second guide path can be easily rescued. Is also good.

In any of the gaming machines XA1 to XA3, the first path forming means for forming the first guide path and the second path forming means for forming the second guide path are provided, and the first route forming means is the second. The gaming machine XA4 is provided with a rescue portion that projects via a lower side than the route forming means.

It should be noted that the first route constructing means may be able to exert the same effect even if it does not pass below the second route constructing means. For example, even when projecting above the second path forming means, if the vertical difference is less than the radius of the game ball, the first path forming means is submerged below the center of the game ball. It is possible to make it easier to put the game ball on the first path forming means.

Further, in the explanation of sneaking below the center of the game ball, it is sufficient that at least the point at which the contact with the game ball starts is below the center of the ball. That is, for example, even when a portion other than the point where the ball starts to come into contact with the game ball is arranged above the center of the ball, the game ball is pushed upward after the contact with the game ball to push the game ball upward. It can be mounted on the first route constructing means.

In the game machine XA4, the game machine XA5 is characterized in that the rescue portion constitutes a lower flow path of the first guide path.

According to the gaming machine XA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XA4, it is possible to rescue the gaming ball on the verge of entering the first ball entry area.

In any of the gaming machines XA3 to XA5, the gaming machine XA6 is characterized in that the inclination of the first guide path and the inclination of the second guide path are opposite to each other.

According to the gaming machine XA6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XA3 to XA5, the vertical width in which the first guide path and the second guide path are arranged can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines XA3 to XA6, it is arranged in the first guide path or the second guide path on the lower side (disadvantageous side) than the intersection position of the first guide path and the second guide path. The gaming machine XA7 is characterized in that the number of gaming balls is one.

According to the gaming machine XA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XA3 to XA6, it is possible to easily avoid the generation of a spilling ball.

The gaming machine XA8 is characterized in that a deceleration means for decelerating the gaming ball is provided above the intersection position (advantageous side) and below the intersection position.

According to the gaming machine XA8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XA7, by decelerating the gaming ball by the decelerating means, it is possible to adjust the interval between the gaming balls before and after passing through the decelerating means.

Further, since the position of the game ball can be notified to the player by changing the speed of the game ball, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved. That is, it is possible to easily grasp whether the game ball is arranged on the advantageous side or the disadvantage side of the intersection position depending on the flow speed of the game ball.

<Guide route construction means to get a feeling of getting out of the ball>
A game area in which the game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state constituting a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area. In a gaming machine including a path-constructing means that can be switched between the second states that do not form the guide path, the route-configuring means is used by the time the game ball that has reached the guide path enters the ball entry area. The gaming machine XB1 is characterized in that such a period can be changed by a plurality of types.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the large winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port. A game that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the guide path on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. There is a machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the flow path to the operating member is almost the same, the gaming balls are spaced apart in the normal launching mode (the mode in which the gaming balls continue to be launched at the specified intervals). It is easy to reach, and the game ball is guided to the detection port so as to travel along the upper surface of the operating member (acting member 100), so that the flow speed of the game ball can be easily suppressed. It was unlikely that the situation would pass through. Therefore, there is a problem that it is easy to make a gap in the payout and it is difficult to give the player a feeling of getting out of the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, since the path forming means is configured so that the period until the game ball passes through the entry area can be changed, the interval at which the gaming ball reaches the path forming means is equal. Even if it is an interval, the interval between the game balls can be changed by the route forming means. Therefore, by shortening the interval between the two specific game balls, the game balls continuously pass through the entry area. Can be caused. As a result, even when the game is played in the above-mentioned normal firing mode, it is possible to intentionally generate a state in which the game balls are paid out at short intervals, so that the player can feel the ball coming out.

Various aspects are exemplified as the means for changing the period. For example, the ball entry area in which the game ball is guided may be switched in the middle, or the game ball may be configured to reach different positions in the guide path of the ball entry area.

In the gaming machine XB1, a plurality of flow paths to the guide path are configured so that the distance between one flow path and the ball entry area and the distance between the other flow paths and the ball entry area are different. The gaming machine XB2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB1, even when the gaming balls are launched at equal intervals, it is possible to easily shift the timing of arrival of the gaming balls in the entry area. As a result, the distance between the game balls entering the entry area can be changed.

In the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that the entry region includes a first entry region and a second entry region.

According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines XB1 or XB2, the entering ball areas guided by the path forming means are changed or switched, so that the gaming balls entering the entering area are used. The interval between can be changed.

In the gaming machine XB3, the path forming means can change the state between the first guiding state for guiding the game ball to the first entering area and the second guiding state for guiding the game ball to the second entering area. The gaming machine XB4, which comprises a state changing means configured in.

According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3, it is possible to easily change the distance between the gaming balls entering the ball entry region by changing the state of the state changing means.

The mode of the state changing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be electrically controlled or may be changed in state by contact with a sphere (pendulum member or seesaw-shaped member).

In the gaming machine XB4, the state changing means is electrically controlled, and the gaming machine XB5 is configured to be configured to be able to shorten the entry interval of the gaming ball into the entry region in a predetermined period after the state change.

According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB4, it is possible to easily generate continuous ball entry in a predetermined period after the state change. As a result, it is possible to cause the payout of prize balls by entering the ball entry area, and it is possible to suppress over-winning as compared with the case where the entry interval in a predetermined period before the state change is shortened. Can be done.

In any of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the guide path can guide the game ball to the first entry area and the first guide path configured to guide the game ball to the second entry area. It is provided with a second guide path to be configured, and a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball in the advantageous side range in which the arranged game ball can reach the second guide path in the first guide path. XB6, a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine XB6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the gaming balls are decelerated by the deceleration means on the first guide path, and the interval between the gaming balls is narrowed. When the pachinko ball reaches the guide path, the interval of entry into the second entry area can be narrowed.

<Two boards act as opening and closing boards>
In a gaming machine provided with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. The path forming means reduces the gap between the first and second building means that are displaceably configured to form the guiding path and between the first building means and the second building means. A gaming machine XC1 comprising: a gap reducing means to be configured.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a pair of movable members that are opened and closed by rotating around a rotation axis extending to the front side of the game board form a guide path for guiding the game ball toward the same detection port. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-29531).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a gap is provided between the movable members in order to prevent the gaming ball from being pinched. However, due to this gap, the movable member on one side is arranged when the gaming ball rolls. There is a problem that there is a possibility of adverse effects such as slippage or the game ball being caught in the gap.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XC1, the gap between the first constituent means and the second constituent means is reduced by the gap reducing means, so that the first constituent means or the second constituent means is reduced when the gaming ball rolls. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the pachinko balls are misaligned or the game ball is caught in the gap.

The mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable and may be arranged so as to face each other so as to be in contact with each other in the displacement direction. In this case, the gap can be filled in the contact state. Further, for example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable, arranged to face each other on the side orthogonal to the displacement direction, and configured so that the interval is gradually narrowed (the interval has disappeared). After that, it may be slid). In this case, the load received by the first and second component means can be reduced.

The mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, when the first constituent means and the second constituent means form the same linear guide path, the means may be configured to narrow the gap generated in a part of the straight line, or the first constituent means constitutes. When the guide path and the guide path formed by the second constituent means are different (for example, when they are not on the same straight line), the means may be configured to narrow the interval between the different guide paths.

The displacement directions of the first constituent means and the second constituent means are not limited in any way. For example, they may be parallel to each other or non-parallel to each other.

In the gaming machine XC1, the gap reducing means is arranged in a partition member that partitions the guide path. The gaming machine XC2.

According to the gaming machine XC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XC1, the gap reducing means can be easily arranged. The mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a fixed part or a moving part.

Further, when the gap reducing means is a fixed portion, for example, it may be arranged on a design member arranged on the front side of the guide path, or may be arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the design member. It may be arranged on the member.

In the gaming machines XC1 or XC2, the gap reducing means suppresses the displacement of the first component means or the second component means in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first component means or the second component means. The gaming machine XC3, which is characterized by being configured in.

According to the gaming machine XC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XC1 or XC2, the clearance reducing means improves the stability of the arrangement of the first or second constituent means in the direction intersecting the displacement direction. Can be done. The mode of intersection of the displacement directions is not limited at all, and any direction may be non-parallel to the displacement direction of the first component means or the second component means.

In any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC3, the gap reducing means uses the first component means or the second component means in at least a part of the first component means or the second component means while it is stopped or displaced. A gaming machine XC4 characterized by being configured to support.

According to the gaming machine XC4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC3, the gap reducing means can also be used as a member to support the first constituent means or the second constituent means, so that the number of members is large. It is possible to improve the functionality and reduce the space for arranging the members.

In any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC5, the gaming machine XC6 is characterized in that the gap reducing means is integrally formed with the first constituent means or the second constituent means.

According to the gaming machine XC6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC5, the gap reducing means can be displaced by displacing the first constituent means or the second constituent means, so that the gap reducing means can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to avoid reducing the degree of freedom in designing the guide route.

In any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC6, the gaming machine XC7 is characterized in that the displacement direction of the first constituent means and the displacement direction of the second constituent means are non-parallel.

According to the gaming machine XC7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC6, the gap after the displacement is non-parallel in the displacement direction as compared with the gap before the displacement of the first and second constituent means. It can be narrowed by using the displacement.

The mode in which the displacement mode is slanted means a diagonal direction with respect to the front-back and left-right directions as the displacement direction of the usual path constructing means, but is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement directions of both the first and second component means may be configured obliquely, or one of the first component means or the second component means may be configured diagonally.

In the former case, the purpose is to exclude the case where the displacement directions of both the first and second component means are obliquely configured and the displacement directions are parallel. That is, it is required that the displacement direction of the first component means and the displacement direction of the second component means are relatively oblique (non-parallel). This non-parallel does not have to be parallel, and the relative angle in the displacement direction may be 90 degrees.

The direction of the diagonal displacement of the path forming means is not limited at all, but for example, when the path is displaced on the side where the guide path disappears, the game ball rides on the upper surface by being configured to be displaced in the direction against gravity. Due to the frictional resistance with, the effect of rubbing the game ball can be expected. As a result, the efficiency of entering the game ball into the entry region can be improved.

Further, in the first component means or the second component means, it is not necessary that the displacement directions are non-parallel to each other during the displacement. That is, for example, it may be composed of both a section in which the displacement directions are parallel and a section in which the displacement directions are not parallel.

<Auxiliary means that constitutes a guide path together with variable means>
In a gaming machine provided with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. The gaming machine XD1 is characterized in that the path forming means includes a displaceable variable means and an auxiliary means for assisting the guide path.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine configured so that a game ball is guided along the upper surface of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a (variable means) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159997). reference). Originally, the design of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a should be free-form, but in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to withstand the weight of the gaming ball and the load due to the impact only by its own rigidity, the opening / closing member 30a , 31a needs to be designed to be thick, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the opening / closing members 30a and 31a is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XD1, since the guiding path is composed of not only the variable means but also the variable means and the auxiliary means, it is possible to eliminate the need to receive the load from the gaming ball only by the variable means. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the variable means, for example, the variable means can be formed with a thin wall.

Further, as another effect of forming the variable means with a thin wall, the weight of the variable means can be reduced, so that the displacement speed of the variable means can be improved and the drive means for driving the variable means can be downsized. ..

The gaming machine XD1 is characterized in that the gaming machine XD1 includes a collision suppressing means configured to suppress a collision of a game ball with the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine XD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XD1, damage to the auxiliary means can be prevented. The mode of the collision suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, by forming a pocket-shaped portion above the auxiliary means so that the ball falling above the auxiliary means is discharged from the game area through the pocket-shaped portion, the ball may be configured. A roof-like portion may be formed to prevent the fall of the roof.

The gaming machine XD3, wherein in the gaming machine XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to guide the displacement of the variable means.

According to the gaming machine XD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means can be used not only as a means for forming a guide path for the game ball but also as a means for guiding the displacement of the variable means. ..

The variable means and the auxiliary means may be configured as separate bodies or integrally. In the case of being integrally formed, for example, the variable means may be a rolling surface constituent portion, and the auxiliary means may be a forming portion that is integrally displaced with the rolling surface constituent portion.

In the gaming machine XD3, the auxiliary means is configured to suppress the displacement of the variable means in a direction non-parallel to the displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine XD4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XD3, the arrangement of the variable means after displacement can be stabilized by the auxiliary means.

A gaming machine XD5, wherein in the gaming machine XD3 or XD4, the auxiliary means is configured to be interlockable with the variable means.

According to the gaming machine XD5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XD3 or XD4, the degree of freedom in setting the action of the auxiliary means can be improved as compared with the case where the auxiliary means is fixedly arranged.

For example, by arranging the variable means at a position where the auxiliary means closes the ball entry area while avoiding it from the game area, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the route forming means in the game area in the closed state of the ball entry area. can. As a result, the range of the game ball flowing down in the game area in the closed state of the ball entry area can be expanded, and the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

Further, for example, when a fixed ridge is arranged from the width direction of the guide path as an auxiliary means to cause a deceleration action of the game ball, a plurality of guide paths are formed and deceleration is performed only in a specific guide path. Even if an attempt is made to cause an action, it may be difficult when a plurality of guide paths are densely arranged. On the other hand, by configuring the auxiliary means to interlock with the variable means, it is possible to easily cause a deceleration action on a specific guide path.

A gaming machine XD6 in any of the gaming machines XD1 to XD5, wherein the auxiliary means is configured to be able to change the flow direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine XD6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XD1 to XD5, the flow path of the gaming ball in the guiding path can be set independently (separately) from the arrangement of the variable means.

In the gaming machine XD6, the auxiliary means is characterized in that the changing mode of the flow direction of the gaming ball changes due to the arrangement of the variable means being different.

According to the gaming machine XD7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XD6, a plurality of types of changes in the flow mode of the gaming ball can be caused by the same auxiliary means. The cause of the change in the action of the auxiliary means on the game ball due to the different arrangement of the variable means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be caused by the fact that the space between the game ball and the auxiliary means is blocked due to the different arrangement of the variable means so that the game ball does not reach the auxiliary means, or the arrangement of the variable means is different. Therefore, the flow state of the game ball when it comes into contact with the auxiliary means may differ depending on whether it is in a rolling state or a falling state.

<Guidance from the middle position of the guidance route>
In a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. A predetermined ball entry area is provided in which a game ball deviating from the guide path is arranged so that the ball can enter, and the ball entry area is at least a part of the game ball deviating from the guide path from an intermediate position of the guide path. The gaming machine XE1 is characterized in that the ball can be entered.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are arranged above the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 that guides the game ball to the entering area. There is a machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). In this case, since the target position by firing the game ball can be fixed at the same position, there is an advantage that the game is easy for the player to understand. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since a plurality of winning openings (ball-entry areas) are arranged one above the other and the lower winning opening is hidden by the upper winning opening, the upper winning opening is hidden. There is a high possibility that the ball that deviates from the mouth also deviates from the winning opening on the lower side, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XE1, since the gaming ball deviating from the guide path is configured so as to easily enter the entry area, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine XE1, at least a part of the ball entry region is arranged at a height between the lower end position and the upper end position of the path forming means.

According to the gaming machine XE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XE1, by arranging the ball entry area at a height position inside the vertical width of the path forming means, the vertical distance between the path forming means and the ball entering area is provided. Can be shortened, so that the degree to which the game ball deviates to the left and right of the entry area can be reduced.

In addition, even when a plurality of ball entry areas are arranged so as to overlap each other vertically, the degree of increase in the vertical width can be reduced, and the plurality of ball entry areas can be freely arranged in a limited game area. The degree can be improved.

In the gaming machines XE1 or XE2, the path forming means constitutes a second guiding path in which the gaming ball is guided to the entering area, and the gaming ball deviating from the second guiding path enters the second entering area. A gaming machine XE3 characterized in that it is configured to be ball-capable.

According to the gaming machine XE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XE1 or XE2, the route forming means includes a second guide path for guiding the game ball to the entry area and a route for guiding the game ball to the second entry area. And can be configured, and a game ball deviating from one path can be placed on the other path. As a result, the attention of the route-constructing means can be improved as compared with the case where the route-constructing means guides the game ball to a single ball entry area.

In the gaming machine XE3, the guide path and the second guide path are configured to intersect at a predetermined position, and the downward inclination direction of the guide path and the downward inclination direction of the second guide path are opposite to each other. The gaming machine XE4 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine XE4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XE3, by arranging the other guiding path upward on the side where one guiding path is arranged downward with a predetermined position as a boundary, the guiding path can be arranged. The vertical width required for placement can be suppressed. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the guide path, the second guide path, the (first) entry area, and the second entry area.

In the gaming machine XE1, the gaming machine XE5 is characterized in that the ball entry region is arranged at a position in the vertical direction of the path forming means.

According to the gaming machine XE5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XE1, it is possible to make it easier for the gaming ball deviating from the guiding path or the entering area to reach the entering area or the guiding path.

The arrangement of the ball entry area is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry region may be arranged on the upper side or the lower side of the route forming means.

Further, the mode of the ball entry region is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry area may be configured as a starting opening, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a special winning opening, or a special winning opening. It may be configured as an outlet (out port).

In any of the gaming machines XE1 to XE5, a control means is provided, and the path forming means can switch the state between the first state forming the guide path and the second state forming the second guide path. The gaming machine XE6 is configured, wherein the control means is configured to be able to execute control for switching between the first state and the second state based on a predetermined pattern.

According to the gaming machine XE6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XE1 to XE5, the gaming ball deviating from the (first) entering area is second-entered by selecting a pattern for switching the state of the path forming means. It is possible to configure a case where it is easy to guide to the area and a case where it is difficult to guide the game ball deviating from the (first) entry area to the second entry area.

<Displacement directions of multiple opening / closing plates arranged in the flow path face each other>
A game area in which the game ball flows down, a predetermined entry area in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state constituting a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the entry area. In a gaming machine including a path constructing means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guide path, the ball entry area includes a first ball entry area and a second ball entry area, and the path. The constituent means include a first path forming means that is displaceably configured to form a first guide path that is configured to guide the game ball to the first entry region, and the second entry region of the game ball. A second path forming means configured to be displaceable so as to form a second guiding path configured to be guided to the first path is provided, and a displacement direction of the first path forming means and a displacement direction of the second path forming means. A gaming machine XF1 characterized in that and are in a direction of approaching each other.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the opening / closing members 30a and 31a (path forming means) are configured to be displaced to the same side with each other (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-15997). .. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is expected that the gaming ball that deviates from one opening / closing member and flows down (flows down to the right side of the opening / closing member) also deviates from the other opening / closing member. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of attracting the attention of the players.

That is, if it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball is saved by the next opening / closing member 30a when the game ball continuously flows down the game area without being saved by the opening / closing member 31a on the upstream side, the vertical width of the game area is wide. It is easy to maintain the player's motivation to play by showing the flowing game ball to the player by using the whole, but in the above-mentioned game machine, when the opening / closing member 31a on the upstream side deviates, the opening / closing member 30a below the opening / closing member 30a. It makes the player feel that the possibility of being saved is low, and it is difficult to guide the player's line of sight to the downstream side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XF1, the opening displacement direction of the first path forming means faces the opposite side of the opening displacement direction of the second path forming means, so that the gaming ball deviates from the path forming means on the upstream side. Is easy to go to the route constructing means on the downstream side. As a result, the game ball deviating from the route forming means on the upstream side can be easily rescued (easily picked up) on the downstream side, so that the player can easily relieve the game ball deviating from the path forming means on the upstream side. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the ball may be picked up by other route-constructing means, and it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the game ball.

In the gaming machine XF1, one of the first guide path and the second guide path is arranged above the other path portion.

According to the gaming machine XF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XF1, it is possible to easily prevent (easily save) the spilling of the gaming ball by utilizing the vertical difference.

In the gaming machine XF1 or XF2, the gaming machine XF3 is characterized in that the first path forming means and the second path forming means are configured to intersect with each other in a predetermined directional view.

According to the gaming machine XF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XF1 or XF2, by setting the displacement direction along a predetermined direction, one route forming means is divided into the other path forming means at the intersection position. It is possible to eliminate the need for configuration. Therefore, both route-building means can be formed undivided.

In any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF3, the first path forming means is configured to be arranged on the same side with respect to the second path forming means before and after the displacement. ..

According to the gaming machine XF4, in any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF3, since the first path forming means does not pass through the second path forming means before and after the displacement, both path forming means are formed in a non-divided manner. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, the first path forming means is arranged on the same side with respect to the second path forming means in a predetermined first direction, and a predetermined first path intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine XF5 is arranged on the opposite side of the second path forming means in two directions.

According to the gaming machine XF5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, the first path forming means and the second path forming means can be configured in a non-divided manner, and the player can be provided with. Therefore, the first path forming means can be visually recognized as being displaced after passing through the second path forming means. Thereby, the unexpectedness of the displacement can be enhanced.

A gaming machine XF6 in any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF5, wherein the first path forming means or the second path forming means is configured to be displaceable along the width direction of the guide path.

According to the gaming machine XF6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF5, the load applied to the gaming ball by the path forming means at the time of displacement is compared with the case where the displacement is performed along the direction perpendicular to the width of the guide path. The degree can be easily reduced, and the influence of the displacement of the path forming means on the game ball can be minimized. For example, when the path forming means is displaced diagonally downward, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down diagonally downward following the displacement.

<Points about the action part that affects the flow of the sphere>
In a gaming machine provided with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. It is provided with an action portion configured to be able to act by abutting on the game ball flowing down the guide path, and the degree of action on the game ball increases in accordance with the displacement of the game ball in the guide path. The gaming machine XG1 characterized by being configured as such.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine configured to slow down the flow speed of a ball by providing a rib on the game area side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-016095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that the ball flowing down the rib forming range is similarly decelerated regardless of the situation, which hinders the game.

For example, when a variable winning device is arranged on the downstream side of the rib, if the variable winning device is in a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player), the flow of the ball is delayed until the variable winning device is opened. As you may want, if the variable winning device is in the open state (a state that is advantageous to the player), the delay in the flow of the ball may be disadvantageous to the player. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the design of the game area because the action of the rib on the game ball may give a disadvantage to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XG1, the degree of action of the acting portion exemplified by the rib is configured to increase in accordance with the displacement of the gaming ball. As a result, it is possible to easily connect the behavior of the game ball with the increase / decrease in the profit given to the player, so that the attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the game machine XG1, the action unit is configured to be arranged differently with respect to the guide path, and the degree thereof increases as the displacement of the game ball increases.

According to the gaming machine XG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine XG1, the action on the gaming ball can be gradually changed by gradually changing the arrangement of the acting portion.

In the gaming machine XG1 or XG2, the action of the acting unit on the gaming ball is a deceleration of the flow-down speed of the gaming machine XG3.

According to the gaming machine XG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XG1 or XG2, the gaming ball can be easily retained at a predetermined position. Thereby, even in the game mode in which the game balls are launched at regular intervals, it is possible to easily improve the attention power to the predetermined position.

In a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. It is provided with an action unit that is configured to be able to act by contacting the game ball flowing down the guide path, so that the action on the game ball differs depending on the arrangement of the game ball in the guide path. A gaming machine XG4 characterized by being configured.

In any of the gaming machines XG1 to XG4, a predetermined ball entry area and another ball entry area are provided, and an opening / closing displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to open / close the predetermined ball entry area is provided. Is different from the first action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the open state of the predetermined entry area and the second action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the closed state of the predetermined entry area. A gaming machine XG5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine XG5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XG1 to XG4, the action unit is configured to change in response to the switching of the state of the opening / closing displacement means. Even when the placement space of the pachinko ball is limited, the degree of freedom in designing the flow-down mode of the game ball can be improved.

The relationship between the first action and the second action is not limited in any way. For example, when a load is applied to the game ball, the direction of the load may change, or the magnitude of the load may change.

Further, the relationship between the first action and the second action may be specified as an action on the flow mode of the game ball. For example, the first action of delaying the arrival of the game ball in the entry area and the second action of accelerating the arrival of the game ball in the entry area may be contradictory.

The gaming machine XG6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XG4 or XG5, the change in the action caused by the acting portion is caused by a difference in the arrangement of the gaming ball with respect to the path forming means.

According to the gaming machine XG6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XG4 or XG5, the action of the acting part is configured to be generated by the arrangement relationship of the gaming ball with respect to the path forming means. It is not necessary to make it movable.

It should be noted that the specification of the mode of the arrangement relationship of the game ball with respect to the route forming means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be specified by the arrangement interval of the game balls from the predetermined portion of the route forming means, or it may be specified whether the game balls are in contact with the route forming means or not yet in contact with the path forming means during the fall.

In any of the gaming machines XG4 to XG6, the guide path includes a first section and a second section arranged away from the ball entry region with respect to the first section, and the first section and the said section. The gaming machine XG7 is configured to change the degree of action of the acting unit on the gaming ball in the second section.

According to the gaming machine XG7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XG4 to XG6, even if the gaming balls are launched at regular intervals, the intervals between the gaming balls can be narrowed or separated in the guide path. By setting the first section and the second section, it is possible to set a place on the guide path where the game balls are likely to accumulate.

The method of changing the degree of deceleration is not limited in any way. For example, the game ball may be decelerated by forming a projecting portion that projects toward the guide path and bringing it into contact with the game ball. In this case, the degree of deceleration can be changed by the protrusion length of the protrusion and the density of the protrusions arranged in the predetermined section.

Further, in this case, the degree of deceleration can be changed depending on which height position of the game ball the protruding portion abuts on. For example, when the projecting portion hits above the center of the game ball, a load in the vertical direction is also generated in addition to the load in the projecting direction. In this case, a load is generated in the direction of pressing the rolling game ball, and the deceleration action tends to be large. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the deceleration action depending on the protrusions having the same arrangement interval of the protrusions but having different contact points with the game balls.

The gaming machine XG7 is characterized in that the action on the gaming ball in the first section is set smaller than the action on the gaming ball flowing down the second section.

According to the gaming machine XG8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XG7, the flow speed of the gaming balls in the section near the entry area is increased, so that the gaming balls are continuously entered into the entry area. It can be easily avoided.

In any of the gaming machines XG5 to XG8, the predetermined ball entry area and the second ball entry area are provided, and the guide path includes a first guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the predetermined ball entry area and the said guide path. A second guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the second entry area is provided, and the first guide path and the second guide path are configured to intersect at a predetermined position, and can be generated by misplacement. The flow speed of the game ball flowing down the downstream section arranged on the downstream side is higher than that of the game ball flowing down the upstream side section arranged on the upstream side with respect to the predetermined position. The gaming machine XG9, which is characterized by being configured in.

According to the gaming machine XG9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XG5 to XG8, the first guide path and the second guide are prevented by avoiding the situation where the game balls are accumulated on the downstream side of the intersection position as the predetermined position. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game ball falls from the downstream side of the intersection position when switching the generation with the route. As a result, the generation of spilling spheres can be suppressed.

The boundary between the upstream section and the downstream section is not limited to the intersection position. For example, even when a predetermined position is set on the upstream side of the intersection position, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating on the downstream side of the intersection position. Further, for example, even when a predetermined position is set on the downstream side of the intersection position, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating between the predetermined position and the ball entry area, so that the predetermined position is not set. It is possible to reduce the number of spilling spheres generated as compared with.

In the gaming machine XG9, when the gaming ball flows down along a predetermined straight line toward the entry region, the time required for the gaming ball to pass through the downstream section is such that the gaming ball passes through the upstream section. The gaming machine XG10 is characterized in that it is shorter than the time required to flow down by the diameter.

According to the gaming machine XG10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XG9, it is configured so that the gaming ball that flows down first does not enter the downstream side section while the gaming ball that flows down first passes through the downstream side section. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality of gaming balls from accumulating in the downstream section from the setting of the time required for the flow.

In the game machine XG9 or XG10, the action unit is configured so that the degree of action on the game ball is maximized at the intersection position.

According to the gaming machine XG11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XG9 or XG10, the flow speed of the gaming ball at the point where the gaming ball enters from the upstream side section (spill prevention advantageous section) to the downstream side section (spill prevention disadvantageous section). By reducing the maximum width, the change in the flow mode of the game ball can be maximized, and the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines XG9 to XG11, the acting unit is configured to be able to act on the gaming ball flowing down in the first guide path, but does not act on or is different from the gaming ball flowing down in the second guide path. The gaming machine XG12 comprising an action selection unit configured to act in a mode.

According to the gaming machine XG12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XG9 to XG11, the acting portion can be designed on the premise of a specific path, so that the design of the acting portion can be facilitated. The design of the working part is not limited in any way. For example, the action of the action part on the game ball can be arbitrarily set by designing the arrangement of the action part in the direction intersecting the guide path, the formation length, the formation length of the action part on the guide path side, and the like. Can be done.

In the gaming machine XG12, the action unit is configured to be able to act on the game ball before reaching the path-constructing means, and the action is configured to be different from the action that occurs on the game ball after reaching the path-building means. The gaming machine XG13 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine XG13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XG12, the acting portion can cause some action on the gaming ball regardless of the state of the path forming means, so that the significance of the arrangement of the acting portion is Can be enhanced.

<Relationship between the arrangement interval of a pair of drive devices and the arrangement interval of a pair of opening / closing plates>
A game area in which the game ball flows down, a predetermined entry area in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state constituting a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the entry area. In a gaming machine provided with a route-constructing means that can be switched between a second state that does not form the guide route, the route-constructing means is a second route that is different from the first-route-constructing means and the first-route-constructing means. The first path constructing means is provided with the constituent means, and is compared with the arrangement interval between the first driving means for driving the first path constructing means and the second driving means for driving the second path constructing means. The gaming machine XH1 is configured so that the arrangement interval between the second path forming means and the second path forming means is narrowed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of opening / closing members 30a and 31a can be opened and closed independently by a plurality of different driving means (corresponding to solenoids) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). (See 159997). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a plurality of driving means are similarly arranged on the opening / closing members 30a and 31a, and the arrangement interval of the plurality of driving means is set to be the same as the arrangement interval of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a. Will be done. In this case, there is a problem that the size and arrangement of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a may be limited by the size of the driving means. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the means for constructing the flow path to the entry area is limited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XH1, the arrangement interval between the first path forming means and the second path forming means is configured to be narrower than the arrangement interval between the first driving means and the second driving means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design between the first route constructing means and the second route constructing means.

The mode of narrowing the arrangement interval is not limited at all. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159997, the arrangement of the driving means with respect to the opening / closing members 30a and 31a is different for each of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a, thereby improving the design freedom of the size and arrangement of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a. Can be made to.

In the gaming machine XH1, at least one of the first path forming means or the second path forming means is configured to be displaced close to the other second path forming means or the first path forming means by driving. Characteristic gaming machine XH2.

According to the gaming machine XH2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XH1, the range required for the displacement of the first path forming means and the second path forming means can be kept narrow.

The gaming machine XH3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XH1 or XH2, the first path forming means and the second path forming means are configured to intersect in a predetermined directional view.

According to the gaming machine XH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XH1 or XH2, the crossing range can be shared by both the first path forming means and the second path forming means. Thereby, the range required for the arrangement of the first route forming means and the second route forming means can be narrowed.

The gaming machine XH3 is characterized in that the gaming machine XH3 is provided with suppressing means configured to be able to suppress the positional deviation of the first path forming means and the second path forming means at the intersecting positions.

According to the gaming machine XH4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XH3, at a position where one of the first path forming means or the second path forming means tends to interfere with the displacement of the other, the first path forming means and the first path forming means and the second path forming means are likely to interfere with the displacement of the other. By suppressing the displacement of the second path forming means, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the first path forming means and the second path forming means from being disturbed.

The gaming machine XH5, characterized in that, in the gaming machine XH3 or XH4, the intersecting positions are arranged outside the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine XH5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XH3 or XH4, the range required for arranging the first path forming means and the second path forming means on the outside (for example, the back side) of the gaming area can be narrowed. can.

In any of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, the first driving means is arranged on one side of the path forming means, and the second driving means is arranged on the other side of the path forming means. Pachinko machine XH6.

According to the gaming machine XH6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged in reverse with respect to the path forming means to obtain the first driving means. And the second driving means can be spaced apart from each other.

<Points that do not require short opening to prevent erroneous V>
A game area in which the game ball flows down, a predetermined entry area in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state constituting a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the entry area. In a gaming machine provided with a route constructing means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guide route, a profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player when the game ball enters the ball, and the profit-giving means. A profit switching means for switching between a first state in which the game ball can be guided and a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means is provided, and the route forming means is maintained in the first state. The gaming machine XI1 characterized in that the profit switching means can be switched to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for when the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XI1, the case where the ball can pass through the profit-giving means and the case where the ball cannot pass through the profit-giving means are switched while the route forming means is maintained in the first state. Therefore, the route-constructing means does not block the ball from entering the ball-entry area. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the entry area.

The gaming machine XI1 is characterized in that the first state of the route forming means is configured to prevent the ball from entering the profit-giving means.

According to the gaming machine XI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XI1, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the profit-giving means by the route forming means.

The game machine XI3 is characterized in that, in the game machine XI1 or XI2, a game ball can be inserted into the profit-giving means in the second state of the route-building means.

According to the gaming machine XI3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XI1 or XI2, it is possible to enhance the profit obtained by the player from the gaming ball flowing down in the second state of the path forming means.

A gaming machine XI4, wherein in any of the gaming machines XI1 to XI3, the profit-giving means is configured to be dispositionable on the upstream side of the ball entry region.

According to the gaming machine XI4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XI1 to XI3, the state of the route forming means and the execution of entering the ball into the profit-giving means can be made non-corresponding.

In the gaming machine XI4, the profit switching means is set to the first state in the first state of the route forming means, and the ball is prevented from entering the ball entry region in the first state of the profit switching means. The gaming machine XI5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine XI5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XI4, it is possible to configure the ball to enter the profit-giving means while preventing the ball from entering the ball-entry area. Thereby, for example, it is possible to configure a round game in which the player can obtain the profit associated with the entry into the profit-giving means while the payout of the prize ball accompanying the entry into the entry area is extremely small.

<Configure to detect defects or fraud without waiting for the game ball to enter>
In a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. A gaming machine XJ1 including a detecting means capable of detecting the state of the route forming means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that determines an illegal winning at the timing of the winning and executes an error notification when it is determined that the winning is illegal (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-000562). See paragraph 0333). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, an error notification is not performed unless a prize is won, and in a fraudulent preparation stage (for example, a stage in which a member (corresponding to a route forming means) for opening and closing the winning opening is illegally displaced). Since fraud cannot be found, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of keeping the game area normal.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XJ1, since the state of the path forming means can be detected by the detecting means, fraud can be detected without waiting for the gaming ball to enter the winning opening. Can be kept normal.

The gaming machine XJ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine XJ1 includes a comparison means configured so that a detection pattern relating to a gaming area can be compared with a predetermined reference pattern.

According to the gaming machine XJ2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XJ1, it can be compared with a predetermined reference pattern and the comparison result can be used for notification. From the difference with the pattern, it is possible to determine what kind of abnormality has occurred.

Examples of the detection pattern include a detection pattern by detecting a game ball entering the winning opening, a pattern of state switching timing of the route constructing means, and the like.

The gaming machine XJ1 or XJ2 includes a predetermined winning opening in which the gaming ball is guided by the path forming means in the first state, and the detecting means is unable to enter the gaming ball into the predetermined winning opening. The gaming machine XJ3 is configured so that the state of the path forming means can be detected in the state.

According to the gaming machine XJ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XJ1 or XJ2, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from entering the winning opening before the gaming area returns to the normal state. This makes it easier to prevent unfair profits from occurring.

In any of the gaming machines XJ1 to XJ3, the detecting means is also used as a detecting means for quality confirmation purposes.

According to the gaming machine XJ4, the number of parts can be reduced by using the detection means for other purposes in any of the gaming machines XJ1 to XJ3.

<Structure for advance identification and early detection of fraud or defects>
In a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a route forming means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. The gaming machine XK1 is provided with a determination means configured to be able to determine whether the path configuration means can switch the state before shifting to a predetermined advantageous state.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that execute error notification when it is determined that a prize before the start of operation of the opening / closing plate (corresponding to a route configuration means) or a prize after the end of operation corresponds to an illegal prize. (See, for example, JP-A-2017-000562, paragraph 0333). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the opening / closing plate itself has a problem (for example, if it is damaged and cannot be closed), the notification is not given unless a prize is won, so that it is not malicious. There is a problem that it may make the winning player feel uncomfortable, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of early detection of defects.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XK1, since the determination means is configured to be able to deal with the defect of the route forming means before the predetermined advantageous state is started, the defect can be detected at an early stage. , It is possible to provide a player with a comfortable game.

The predetermined advantageous state is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, since it corresponds to a state that is advantageous to the normal state, the predetermined advantageous state includes a time saving, a probability change, a big hit game, and the like.

The gaming machine XK2 is characterized in that the path forming means is switched between the first state and the second state before shifting to the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine XK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XK1, the defect can be easily noticed by actually operating the path forming means before shifting to a predetermined advantageous state.

The game machine XK3 is characterized in that the game machine XK1 or XK2 includes a repair means configured to be able to repair the state of the route forming means based on the determination by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine XK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines XK1 or XK2, the state of the path constructing means can be restored by the repairing means to return to the normal state at an early stage.

The gaming machine XK4 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK3, the path forming means is set to be operable in a plurality of operating modes as an operating mode in which the determining means can be determined.

According to the gaming machine XK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XK1 to XK3, the determining means can determine a plurality of operating modes. The cause can be easily investigated.

In any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK4, the predetermined advantageous state is configured in a plurality of stages, and is characterized in that the susceptibility to determination by the determination means changes according to the stages. Pachinko machine XK5.

According to the gaming machine XK5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK4, the determination means is determined at an appropriate frequency in response to the advantageous state of each stage, thereby causing a defect in the route forming means. Can be found properly.

In any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK5, the determining means includes a detecting means, and the detecting means is also used as a detecting means for quality confirmation purposes.

According to the gaming machine XK6, in any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK5, the number of parts can be reduced by using the detection means for other purposes.

In any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK6, the gaming machine XK3 is included, and the ball entering area is provided so that the gaming ball can enter the ball. The gaming machine XK7, which is characterized by switching to the side that obstructs the entry of the ball.

According to the gaming machine XK7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK6, the state of the path forming means is switched by the repair means, so that illegal entry into the ball entry area can be prevented.

In addition, various modes are exemplified as the mode of obstructing the entry of the ball. For example, it may be a mode in which the arrival at the ball entry area is delayed, or a mode in which at least a part of the game balls are discharged from the game area on the upstream side so that the game balls do not reach the ball entry area. , The path to the entry area may be closed to prevent the game ball from reaching the entry area.

<Structure in which multiple members are involved in opening and closing a predetermined path through which a game ball can pass>
A first state in which a predetermined area through which the game ball can pass and a passage path leading to the predetermined area are opened so that the game ball can pass through, and a first state in which the passage path is closed so that the game ball cannot pass through. In a gaming machine including an opening / closing means that can be switched between two states and a prevention means that can configure a guidance prevention state that prevents the game ball from being guided to the predetermined area, the opening / closing means is predetermined in the first state. When arranged at the position, the prevention means corresponds to either the guidance prevention state or the passable state that enables the game ball to pass through the predetermined area according to the displacement mode of the opening / closing means. XL1 is a gaming machine characterized by being configurable.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a first opening / closing plate (corresponding to an opening / closing means) and a second opening / closing plate (corresponding to a preventive means) open / close a large winning opening (corresponding to a predetermined area) (for example). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-220731). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is no description about switching the open / closed state of the second opening / closing plate according to the displacement mode of the first opening / closing plate in the state where the first opening / closing plate is open. (1) There is a problem that the countermeasures against the case where the opening / closing plate is forcibly opened are not sufficient, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of normalizing the flow of the game ball to the predetermined area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XL1, when the opening / closing means is arranged at a predetermined position as the first state, whether the passing prevention state or the passable state is configured is determined by the displacement mode of the opening / closing means. Since it can be configured correspondingly, it is determined whether the displacement mode is normal or incorrect, and if it is incorrect, the passage prevention state is configured to normalize the passage of the game ball to the predetermined area. be able to.

The mode of the predetermined region is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening such that one game ball can pass through, a path, a range in which a plurality of balls can be arranged at the same time, or an upper surface of a plate on which a game ball can ride.

The gaming machine XL2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XL1, the prevention means is configured to be interlockable with the opening / closing means in a plurality of types of operation modes.

According to the gaming machine XL2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XL1, the preventive means can be used for a plurality of purposes.

The gaming machine XL3 is characterized in that the gaming machine XL2 includes a switching means configured to be able to switch the operation mode between the opening / closing means and the prevention means.

According to the gaming machine XL3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XL2, the correspondence between the opening / closing means and the preventing means can be arbitrarily changed by the switching means.

The mode of the switching means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the means may be switched depending on the direction of transmission of the driving force to the switching means, or may be a means provided with a unique driving force generating device and the switching is performed by the driving force generated from the driving force generating device.

Further, the operation mode that can be switched by the switching means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the opening / closing means and the preventing means may be switched between a mode in which they operate integrally (or a mode in which they follow a predetermined time delay and finally catch up) and a mode in which they operate separately. Further, for example, the operation relationship can be switched (for example, the displacement in the same direction and the displacement in the reverse direction can be switched, or the operation speed can be switched) while maintaining the state in which the opening / closing means and the prevention means are operated separately. It may be something.

In any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL3, a driving means capable of generating a driving force for changing the state of the opening / closing means is provided, and the prevention means is the state of the opening / closing means regardless of the driving force of the driving means. XL4, which constitutes the flow-down prevention state when is changed.

According to the gaming machine XL4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL3, even if an abnormal situation occurs in which the opening / closing means is opened regardless of the driving means, the gaming ball does not reach the predetermined area. It is possible to prevent the player from gaining unexpected profits.

In any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL4, the preventing means can be arranged on the predetermined region side or the opposite side of the predetermined region with respect to the opening / closing means.

According to the gaming machine XL5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XL1 to XL4, the degree of freedom in arranging the preventive means can be improved. Further, depending on which position on the passing path, the position where the game ball can pass can be arbitrarily set in the passing prevention state of the preventing means, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game playability can be improved. Can be done.

It should be noted that the preventive means does not need to be fixedly arranged, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be arranged on the upstream side of the opening / closing means, it may be arranged on the downstream side of the opening / closing means, or it may be arranged and exchanged between the upstream side and the downstream side of the opening / closing means (for example, from the downstream side of the opening / closing means). It may be configured to prevent the passage of the game ball by displacing it on the upstream side). That is, regardless of the arrangement, the configuration may be such that the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area as a result.

In any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL5, a driving means capable of generating a driving force for changing the state of the opening / closing means and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the opening / closing means are provided. The gaming machine XL6 is characterized in that the operation mode of the opening / closing means and the prevention means can be switched by changing the state of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine XL6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XL1 to XL5, the changeability of the state of the transmission means is directly linked to the ease of switching the operation mode between the opening / closing means and the prevention means. It is possible to facilitate the design of the transmission means after setting the desired degree as the ease of switching the modes.

As a result, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force required for the operation of the path forming means can also be used for switching the operation mode between the opening / closing means and the prevention means. The mode of changing the state of the transmission means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be deformed or not, the motion relationship of each configuration may be changed when the transmission means has a plurality of configurations, the motion path (relative or absolute) may be changed, or the posture may be changed (relative). Target, absolute) is also acceptable.

In any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL6, the prevention means is configured to be interlockable with the opening / closing means in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the interlocking is configured so as to be difficult to be released even when a load from the gaming area is generated. The gaming machine XL7, which is characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine XL7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL6, the load generated in the gaming area where the gaming area flows down is transmitted to the opening / closing means or the preventing means, so that the interlocking is released. It can be easily prevented from occurring.

The mode of the load generated in the game area is not limited at all. For example, it may be a load generated by the collision of a game ball (for example, an impact force), or a load transmitted through a thread or a thin metal wire that has entered the game area.
<Concept of the invention using the distribution members C170 to C3170 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member having at least a part arranged in the passage path of the ball and displaceable by the weight of the ball, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the said The displacement member was displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the first sphere was guided to the first passage, and the displacement member was displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. In the state, the second sphere following the first sphere is guided to the second passage, and the displacement member is arranged at the predetermined position in a state where the weight of the sphere is not applied. The gaming machine CA1 characterized by.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a distribution member that operates by the weight of the gaming ball and distributes the gaming ball into a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148189). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, regardless of the state of the game ball that has arrived, only the first passage and the second passage are alternately distributed in the order of arrival, so that the player is made to pay attention to such a distribution operation. There was a problem that it could not be done and the interest of the game was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine CA1, when the first sphere passing through the passing path reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, and the first sphere is the first. In a state where the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first sphere, the second sphere following the first sphere is guided to the second passage, and the displacement member is the weight of the sphere. Is placed in a predetermined position when is not actuated. Therefore, when the second sphere is connected to the first sphere at intervals of a predetermined amount or less, the first sphere is guided to the first passage. In addition, the displacement member displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere can guide the second sphere to the second passage, while the first sphere has a predetermined amount of the second sphere. In the case of being connected at intervals exceeding the above, the first sphere is guided to the first passage, and the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position before the second sphere arrives, so that the second sphere is second. The ball can also be guided to the first passage. In this way, the passage to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of balls (the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball), so that the player can pay attention to the state of the balls and improve the interest of the game. can do.

The second sphere that follows the first sphere means a sphere that follows the first sphere at intervals smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second sphere may roll or flow down in a state of being in contact with the first sphere.

The gaming machine CA1 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA1, the displacement member is displaced to the predetermined position by the weight of the displacement member. Can be simplified. Further, since the displacement to the displacement member can be made slower than the case of using the urging spring, the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position before guiding the second ball to the second passage. Can be suppressed. Further, a third ball that follows the second ball can also be provided with the possibility of being guided to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA2, the displacement member functions as a main body portion that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body portion and displaces the main body portion to the predetermined position. The gaming machine CA3 is provided with a weight portion, and at least a part of the weight portion is visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine CA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA2, as a main body portion that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body portion and displaces the main body portion to a predetermined position. Since it is provided with a functioning weight portion and at least a part of the weight portion is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight portion. can. Further, the weight portion can be made to serve both as a weight for displacing the main body portion and as a portion for recognizing the guiding direction of the sphere, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.

According to the gaming machine CA4, in any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, so that the first ball is the first. The weight of the sphere can be applied to the displacement member while rolling on one surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere (that is, a state in which the second sphere can be guided to the second passage).

The gaming machine CA4 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member rolls the second ball guided to the second passage. The gaming machine CA5 is provided with a second surface to be provided, and the second surface is arranged at a position where the second surface overlaps the axis in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine CA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA4, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is vertical with the shaft. Since the displacement members are arranged at overlapping positions in the direction, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second sphere rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball, which follows the second ball, can also be guided to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member includes a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is made longer than the second surface. The gaming machine CA6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine CA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member includes a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is the second surface. Since it is made longer than the surface, it is possible to easily form a state in which the first sphere rolls on the first surface while the second sphere rolls on the second surface. That is, by letting the weight of the first sphere act on the displacement member while the second sphere rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second sphere that rolls on the second surface. It is possible to suppress displacement toward a predetermined position. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball, which follows the second ball, can also be guided to the second passage.

In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the base member and the base member include a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. The gaming machine CA7 includes a second surface on which the ball of the ball rolls, and the first surface is extended in a direction away from the axis.

According to the gaming machine CA7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the displacement member includes a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface. Is extended in a direction away from the axis, so that the weight of the first sphere can be effectively applied to the displacement member as the first sphere rolls toward the first passage. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second sphere that rolls on the second surface. Therefore, the second sphere can be rolled stably. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball, which follows the second ball, can also be guided to the second passage.

In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the base member and the base member include a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. The gaming machine CA8 includes a second surface on which the ball of the ball rolls, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is arranged with the shaft interposed therebetween.

According to the gaming machine CA8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the base member and the shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member are provided, and the displacement member is a second. A second surface on which the second sphere guided to the passage rolls is provided, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface are arranged with a shaft in between, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member is increased. Can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the base member and the base member include a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. The gaming machine CA9 includes a second surface on which the ball of the ball rolls, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is arranged on the same side with respect to the axis.

According to the gaming machine CA9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the base member and the shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member are provided, and the displacement member is a second. The first sphere has a second surface on which the second sphere guided to the passage rolls, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface are arranged on the same side with respect to the axis. Even if it is discharged from the first surface, the weight of the second sphere can be used to make the posture of the displacement member a posture for guiding the second sphere to the second passage. As a result, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement members can be increased accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, an upstream surface on which the ball rolls toward the first surface is provided, and the first surface is the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface. A gaming machine CA10 characterized by reversing.

According to the gaming machine CA10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, an upstream surface in which the first ball rolls toward the first surface is provided, and the first surface rolls from the upstream surface. Since the rolling direction of the first sphere is reversed, it is possible to secure the time required for the first sphere to stay on the first surface by the amount of time required for the reversal. Therefore, by letting the weight of the first sphere act on the displacement member while the second sphere rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second sphere that rolls on the second surface. It is possible to suppress displacement toward a predetermined position. Therefore, the second sphere can be rolled stably. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball, which follows the second ball, can also be guided to the second passage. Further, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement members can be increased accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and a ball arranged on the base member and rolling toward the first surface. The gaming machine CA11 is provided with an upstream surface, and the shaft is arranged on the upstream surface in a posture orthogonal to a direction in which the ball rolls and a vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine CA11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the shaft is arranged in a posture orthogonal to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction, so that the base member It is possible to reduce the size of the unit in which the displacement member is arranged. In particular, by arranging the base member along the width direction of the gaming machine in the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface, the width direction of the gaming machine is effectively utilized to secure a space for arranging the displacement member. It can be done easily.

The gaming machine CA12 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10 is provided with a base member, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be slidable.

According to the gaming machine CA12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the displacement member is slidably and displaceably arranged on the base member, so that, for example, the displacement member can be rotatably supported on the base member. The displacement member can be miniaturized as compared with the case where the displacement member is used, and the space for arranging other members in the base member can be secured accordingly.

In any of the game machines CA1 to CA12, a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and a ball arranged on the base member and rolling toward the first surface. The displacement member includes an upstream surface, and the second sphere, which is guided to the second passage in a state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, rolls. When the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere and has a second surface, the upstream end of the second surface is located below the downstream end of the upstream surface in the vertical direction. The gaming machine CA13 characterized by this.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the displacement member may jump up due to the impact at the time of the displacement, and the jumping up of the displacement member causes the displacement member to jump up from the downstream end of the upstream surface. However, if the upstream end of the second surface is located above, there is a risk that the second sphere cannot be rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second ball collides with the upstream end (upstream end of the second surface) of the displacement member that has jumped up, the displacement member is further flipped up by the impact (the displacement member is pushed up by the second ball), and the second ball is pushed up. There is a risk that the second ball will flow into the passage (first surface) on which the first ball should roll.

On the other hand, according to the game machine CA13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines CA1 to CA12, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement member is displaced from the downstream end of the upstream surface. Since the upstream end of the second surface is located downward in the vertical direction, when the displacement member bounces off due to the impact when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the upstream end of the upstream surface is more than the downstream end. It is also possible to prevent the upstream end of the second surface from being located upward. Therefore, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

The gaming machine CA14 is characterized in that the upstream end of the second surface of the gaming machine CA13 is inclined downward toward the upstream surface.

According to the game machine CA14, in addition to the effect of the game machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface, so that when the first ball is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end thereof is inclined downward. When the displacement member bounces (jumps up) due to an impact and the second sphere collides with the upstream end (upstream end of the second surface) of the bounced displacement member, the force acting on the displacement member from the second sphere is applied. It can act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, the displacement member includes an upstream surface on which the ball rolls toward the first surface, and the displacement member rolls the first ball guided to the first passage. A first surface is provided, the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first sphere rolled from the upstream surface, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. At this time, the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is separated from the upstream surface by the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first sphere at the inverted position of the first surface. The gaming machine CA15 characterized by being said to be.

According to the gaming machine CA15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the first surface is in the inverted position. Since the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is located at a position separated from the upstream surface by the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first sphere, the second sphere is erroneously flowed into the first surface ( It can be suppressed (accepted). That is, the second sphere is brought into contact with the first sphere to keep the second sphere away from the first surface, and the weight of the first sphere causes the displacement member to be displaced from a predetermined position on the upstream surface side. At the end, the second sphere can be pushed away from the first surface.

In the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member is positioned at a position where the rolling direction of the first surface is reversed until the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by a predetermined position or more due to the weight of the first ball. A gaming machine CA16 characterized by fastening.

According to the gaming machine CA16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by a predetermined position or more due to the weight of the first ball. Since the first ball is fastened to the position, it is possible to more reliably prevent the second ball from being erroneously flowed (accepted) into the first surface. That is, the second sphere is brought into contact with the first sphere to keep the second sphere away from the first surface, and the weight of the first sphere causes the displacement member to be displaced from a predetermined position on the upstream surface side. The operation of pushing the second sphere away from the first surface at the end can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, an inflow portion, a reciprocating surface in which the ball inflowing from the inflow portion rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and an outflow portion for causing the ball to flow out from the reciprocating surface are provided. The gaming machine CA17, wherein the portion is located on the upstream side of the displacement member in the passing path.

According to the gaming machine CA17, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, the inflow portion, the reciprocating surface in which the ball flowing in from the inflowing portion rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and the ball from the reciprocating surface. Since the outflow portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement member in the passage path, the first sphere and the second sphere are connected at intervals of a predetermined amount or less, and these first spheres are provided. It is possible to easily reach the displacement member in a state where the sphere and the second sphere are connected at intervals of a predetermined amount or less. That is, even if the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere when flowing in from the inflow portion is larger than a predetermined amount, the reciprocating surface is reciprocally displaced to and the first sphere. The distance from the second sphere can be reduced (the distance can be set to a predetermined amount or less).

In the gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension through which one ball can pass.

According to the gaming machine CA18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to the width dimension through which one ball can pass. It is possible to prevent the displaced first sphere and the second sphere from passing each other. Therefore, when the first sphere and the second sphere are reciprocally displaced on the reciprocating surface, the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere can be easily narrowed (the distance can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less). ..

The gaming machine CA19 is characterized in that the reciprocating surface is ascended and inclined toward each of the one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is arranged at the lowermost part of the reciprocating surface.

According to the gaming machine CA19, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is ascended and inclined toward each of the one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is arranged at the lowermost part of the reciprocating surface, so that the reciprocating surface is reciprocated. The first sphere and the second sphere can be discharged from the outflow portion in a state where the inertia that is reciprocally displaced on the surface is weakened. That is, it is possible to maintain a state in which the first sphere and the second sphere are connected at intervals of a predetermined amount or less to facilitate outflow.

The gaming machine CA20 is characterized in that the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine CA20, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above, so that when the first sphere and the second sphere are reciprocally displaced on the reciprocating surface, , The distance between the first sphere and the second sphere can be easily closed (the distance can be easily set to a predetermined amount or less).

The gaming machine CA21 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20 includes an attracting member that is formed so that the attractive force of a magnet can act on the sphere and is arranged in a posture in which at least the lower surface is inclined downward.

According to the gaming machine CA21, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, the gaming machine CA21 includes a suction member formed so that the suction force of the magnet can act on the sphere and arranged at least in a posture in which the lower surface is tilted downward. Therefore, it is possible to form a passage path for the ball by the suction member and improve the fun of the game. That is, when the sphere is attracted to the downwardly inclined lower surface of the suction member, the sphere can be slid by its own weight and displaced along the lower surface of the suction member. In this case, depending on the state of the sphere (the relationship between the inertial force acting on the sphere and the suction force), the sphere may fall from the lower surface of the suction member (that is, the sphere reaches the end of the passage path (lower surface of the suction member). It can be in an unstable state with the possibility of being unreachable). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine CA21 is characterized in that the suction member includes a bottom surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material and a magnet for applying a magnetic force to the bottom surface forming member.

According to the gaming machine CA22, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA21, the suction member includes a bottom surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material and a magnet for applying a magnetic force to the bottom surface forming member, so that it is a sphere. By forming the surface on which the magnet slides on the lower surface of the lower surface forming member, it is possible to easily adjust the suction force and optimize the frictional force, and to reliably form the passage path of the sphere with a simple structure.

The gaming machine CA23, characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage.

According to the gaming machine CA23, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage, so that the interest of the game can be improved. That is, the second sphere can be guided by the displacement member to reach the second passage when the second sphere is connected to the first sphere at intervals of a predetermined amount or less and reaches the displacement member. Only in case, the possibility is relatively low. The second sphere, which has reached through such a low probability, can pass safely by displacing the instability that may fall (the possibility that it cannot reach the end of the lower surface of the suction member). Can be expected from the player to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine CA23 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member rolls the first ball guided to the first passage. The first surface and the second surface on which the second sphere guided to the second passage rolls are provided, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface sandwich the shaft. A gaming machine CA24 characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the game machine CA24, in addition to the effect of the game machine CA23, the base member and the shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member are provided, and the displacement member is guided to the first passage. A first surface on which the first sphere rolls and a second surface on which the second sphere guided to the second passage rolls are provided, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is provided. Since the displacement member is arranged across the shaft, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), so that the position of the second surface is displaced upward. Can be made to. Therefore, the second sphere that rolls on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the suction member.

In the gaming machine CA24, the gaming machine CA25 is characterized in that the second surface is arranged at a position where the second surface overlaps the axis in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine CA25, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA24, the second surface is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the axis in the vertical direction, so that the second surface is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. It is possible to prevent the member from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward). Therefore, the second sphere that rolls on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the suction member.

In the gaming machine CA24 or CA25, the gaming machine CA26 is characterized in that the first surface is made longer than the second surface.

According to the gaming machine CA26, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA24 or CA25, the first surface is made longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, at the same time, the first surface is first. It is possible to easily form a state in which the ball of the ball rolls on the first surface. That is, by letting the weight of the first sphere act on the displacement member while the second sphere rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second sphere that rolls on the second surface. It is possible to suppress the displacement toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward). Therefore, the second sphere that rolls on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the suction member.
<Concept of the invention using the dish members C120, C2120, C4120 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a ball passage, the passage is communicated with a first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction and a second passage that allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction. CB1 is a gaming machine characterized by having a passageway.

Here, a gaming machine provided with a passage member (stage) capable of reciprocating a ball is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198607). However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is not sufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CB1, the passage is communicated with the first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction and the first passage, and the ball is passed along the left-right direction. Since it is equipped with a passageway, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CB1, when the first ball and the second ball following the first ball pass through the second passage, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is set. The gaming machine CB2 is characterized in that the passages to which the first ball and the second ball are guided are changed accordingly.

According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CB1, when the first ball and the second ball following the first ball pass through the second passage, those first balls are used. Since the passage to which the first sphere and the second sphere are guided is changed according to the distance between the sphere and the second sphere, the sphere is guided to a predetermined passage (that is, the first sphere). It is possible to make the player expect that the distance between the ball and the second ball be a predetermined distance) and enhance the interest of the game.

In this case, where the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first passage, the first sphere and the second sphere pass the sphere along the left-right direction. Since the ball is flowed down from the first passage to the second passage, the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is less than or equal to a predetermined amount, from the passage guided when the distance exceeds a predetermined amount. At least the second ball is guided to the advantageous passage,
The first passage is characterized in that the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first sphere and the second sphere. Game machine CB3 to play.

According to the game machine CB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is less than or equal to a predetermined amount, the distance is a predetermined amount. At least the second sphere is guided to a passage that is more advantageous than the passage that is guided when the distance exceeds the above, and the first passage is the first of them by reciprocating the first sphere and the second sphere. Since the distance between the sphere and the second sphere can be reduced, the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere when passing through the second passage can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less. As a result, the player can be expected to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

A gaming machine CB4 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3 includes a gaming board having an opening at the center, and the second passage is arranged at the opening of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine CB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, a gaming board having an open center is provided, and the second passage is arranged in the opening of the gaming board. Therefore, the space in the front-rear direction can be effectively used. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the total length of the second passage.
<Concept of the invention using the magnetic portions C2400, c5400, and c6400 (passage portion CRt2004) as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member having at least a part arranged in the passage path of the ball and displaceable by the weight of the ball, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the said In a state where the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, a second sphere that follows the first sphere. CC1 is a gaming machine CC1 characterized in that the ball passes through a portion of the displacement member that is lifted upward and is guided to a passage different from that of the first ball.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a distribution member that operates by the weight of the gaming ball and distributes the gaming ball into a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148189). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, since the ball only flows downward in the weight direction, there is a problem that the interest of the game is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine CC1, when the first sphere passing through the passing path reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, and the displacement member is the first sphere. In the state of being displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the second sphere following the first sphere passes through the portion lifted above the displacement member and is guided to a passage different from the first sphere. , It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CC1, the passage through which the second sphere is guided through the portion lifted above the displacement member is formed by a magnetic portion capable of attracting the sphere by magnetic force. CC2.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC1, the passage through which the second sphere is guided through the portion lifted above the displacement member is formed by a magnetic portion capable of attracting the sphere by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to form a mode in which the ball is dropped in the middle of the passage. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CC2, the gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that the magnetic portion is located above a portion lifted above the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC2, the magnetic portion is located above the portion lifted above the displacement member, so that the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. If this is not the case, even if the second sphere passes through the portion to be lifted upward, a mode in which the second sphere is not attracted to the magnetic portion can be reliably formed.

In the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported by a shaft, and a portion on which the weight of the first sphere is applied and a portion lifted upward are located with the rotation shaft interposed therebetween. The gaming machine CC4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine CC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported by the shaft, and the portion on which the weight of the first ball is acted on the rotating shaft and above. Since the part to be lifted up is located, when the second ball passes through the part to be lifted upward, the weight of the first ball is used to lift the part through which the second ball passes upward. It can be easily maintained in a state of being.

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, In any of XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI5, XJ1 to XJ4, XK1 to XK7, XL1 to XL7, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, and CC1 to CC4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, In any of XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI5, XJ1 to XJ4, XK1 to XK7, XL1 to XL7, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, and CC1 to CC4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

From game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, In any of XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI5, XJ1 to XJ4, XK1 to XK7, XL1 to XL7, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, and CC1 to CC4, the gaming machine fuses a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being a slingshot. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
There is a gaming machine configured to slow down the flow velocity of a ball (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-016095).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the design of the gaming area. The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the design of the gaming area.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a gaming area in which the gaming ball flows down, a first state that constitutes a guiding path capable of guiding the gaming ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guiding path. A gaming machine including a path constructing means that can be switched between Is configured to increase in response to the displacement of the gaming ball in the guide path.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. The action unit is configured to be arranged differently with respect to the guide path, and the degree thereof increases as the displacement of the gaming ball increases. do.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the action of the acting unit on the gaming ball is a deceleration of the flow speed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the design of the gaming area can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the action on the gaming ball can be gradually changed by gradually changing the arrangement of the action unit. ..
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the gaming ball can be easily retained in a predetermined position.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board (part of area construction means)
18 hinges (part of support shaft)
19 hinges (part of support shaft)
65a Specified winning opening (part of profit-giving means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of the means of interest, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 ball flow unit (part of flow means)
152 1st receiving flow path (1st component, 2nd component)
153 Second receiving flow path member (second component)
154 ridges (part of deceleration means)
161 light guide plate (part of the means of interest)
166 Horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 Decorative means (placed means)
171a Horizontal groove (low transmission means)
171b Reflective shape part (direction changing means)
180 Displacement regulation device (restriction means)
181 contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of guiding means)
183 Operation member (operation unit)
183f engaging part
184 coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 compartment members (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-shaped means)
312 Curved plate part (1st guide part)
314 Lower part of back compartment (2nd guide)
315 Deformed penetration (open part)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of placement means)
362 shaft part (regulation part)
410 Linear moving member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protrusion (second contact part)
414 ridge part (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 buffer member (second contact part)
430 contact member (part of displacement means, first member, regulatory means)
432 protruding part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 groove forming part (second transmission part, discrimination involvement means)
446 Transmission protrusion (first transmission part, contact part)
470 transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 lid member (part of action means, contact means, advancing / retreating means)
482 overhang (representative tip)
489a First contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 rear case (part of area construction means)
630 Lower arm member (part of the means of action)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 directing member (displacement means)
730 rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b 1st guided protrusion (1st loaded portion)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded portion)
760 shielding design member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 horizontal slide member (part of displacement means)
870 long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a wall (part of stopping means)
886 Guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylindrical protrusion (part of stopping means)
DK2 electrical wiring
DK2b lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of the flow-down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generating means, urging means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame
12 Inner frame (base body)
18 hinges (rotating shaft)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 board box (accommodation)
A110 main controller (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 switch device (operating means)
A122 operation unit (operator)
A123b protrusion (first surface)
A130 key device (operating means)
A133b protrusion (reception part)
A133c end (first surface)
A140 key (operator)
A200, A3200 box cover (containment body)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposite part)
A211 1st ridge (ridge)
A212 2nd ridge (ridge)
A220 1st connection wall (connection surface)
A230 2nd connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 3rd connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 opening
A260 opening
A270, A2270 Cover
A271 Peripheral wall part (covering part)
A271a base (cover)
A271b protrusion (bulging part)
A272, A2272 End face wall part (covering part, facing part)
A272a Annulus (opposite part)
A272b square part (opposing part)
A2273 ridge (protrusion)
A280, A290 standing wall
A280a, A290a tapered surface
A281, A291 1st standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 2nd standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 3rd standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (containment body)
A410, A4410 rotating shaft
110 Main controller (control means)
B1000 variable winning means (part of route construction means, part of state change means)
B1140 projecting part (deceleration means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1200 lining member (part of partition member)
B1211 protruding part (deceleration means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1212 Extended support part (gap reduction means, part of auxiliary means)
B1230 1st detection sensor (part of the ball entry area, 1st ball entry area)
B1250 2nd detection sensor (part of the ball entry area, 2nd ball entry area)
B1260 ball guide receiving part (conflict suppressing means)
B1300 1st guide plate (part of path forming means, part of state changing means, 1st (path) forming means, part of variable means, part of opening / closing displacement means)
B1310 Information Department (Saving Department)
B1311 Rolling surface (part of the guide path)
B1313 Sliding part (gap reduction means)
B1323 Sliding part (gap reduction means)
B1500 Second guide plate (a part of a route forming means, a part of a state changing means, a second (path) forming means, a part of a variable means)
B1510 Information Department (Saving Department)
B1511 Rolling surface (part of the guide path)
B1513 Sliding part (gap reduction means)
B1523 sliding part (gap reduction means)
B2300 opening / closing plate (part of path forming means, first path forming means, part of opening / closing displacement means)
B2500 opening / closing rod (part of the route constructing means, the second route constructing means)
B4260 ball guidance receiver (part of the ball entry area)
B4360 front protrusion (part of auxiliary means)
B9140 Protruding part (part of the working part)
BKL1 left tilt locus (part of the guide route, second guide route)
BKL2 right-sloping locus (part of the guide route, first guide route)
BL1 left side flow path (part of the flow path)
BL2 right side flow path (part of the flow path)
BL21 Left-handed flow path (part of the flow path)
BL22 Right-handed flow path (part of the flow path)
B22300 1st guide plate (part of route construction means)
B22,500 2nd guide plate (part of route construction means)
B23300 1st guide plate (part of opening / closing means, part of prevention means)
B23340 Transmission hole (part of transmission means)
B23430 rotating member (part of transmission means)
B23500 2nd guide plate (part of prevention means, part of opening / closing means)
B23800 switching device (part of switching means)
B24720 transmission rotating body (part of repair means)
B25110 drive solenoid (part of drive means)
B25640 Transmission member (part of transmission means)
B25700 switching device (part of switching means)
B1001 1st specified winning opening (a part of a predetermined winning opening, a part of a ball entry area, a part of a predetermined area)
B1002 2nd specified winning opening (a part of the predetermined winning opening, a part of the ball entry area, a part of the predetermined area)
B1410 1st solenoid (part of repair means, part of drive means)
B1610 2nd solenoid (part of repair means, part of drive means)
110 Main controller (part of comparison means, part of determination means)
640 2nd winning opening (part of the designated area)
B640a Electric accessory (part of opening / closing means, part of prevention means)
BSC221 1st detection sensor (part of detection means, part of determination means)
BSC222 2nd detection sensor (part of detection means, part of determination means)
C13 game board
C60 base plate (game board)
C60a opening
C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom surface (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a outflow surface (outflow part)
C123a, C4123a Notch (inflow)
C130, C2130 back member (base member)
C140, C2140 1st intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 bottom surface (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 passage (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 receiving part (first side)
C172b, C2172b bottom surface (first surface)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 axis
C190 decorative member (weight part)
C192 axis
C2300 magnet (adsorption member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (adsorption member, bottom surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in inlet (inflow part)
CRt2 2nd passage (1st passage)
CRt3 3rd passage (2nd passage)
CRt4 4th passage (1st passage)
CRt5 5th passage (2nd passage)
CRt2001 1st passage (1st passage)
CRt2002 2nd passage (2nd passage)
CRt2003 3rd passage (1st passage)
CRt2004 4th passage (2nd passage)
CRt2005 5th passage (2nd passage)
CB1 sphere (first sphere)
CB2 sphere (second sphere)

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
8 1 Third symbol display device ( notification means)
113 Audio lamp board (control means)
115 Power supply unit (power supply means)
12 Inner frame ( predetermined frame member)
226 Audio output device (notification means)
A 100, A2100, A310 0 substrate box (container)
A110 Main controller ( contained object )
A 120 switch device (operating means)
A251 guide wall (forming part)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine equipped with an accommodating body that accommodates an object to be accommodated and is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to a predetermined frame member.
An operating means disposed on the object to be contained and configured to be operable,
Information regarding the operation of the operating means can be notified toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the notification means arranged on the front side of the gaming machine.
A control means connected to the object to be contained by the first electrical connection line and controlling the notification means, and a control means.
A power supply means connected to the object to be contained by a second electrical connection line, and
A forming portion formed corresponding to the arrangement position of the operating means is provided.
The first electrical connection line, the second electrical connection line, and one or more other electrical connection lines are connected to the contained object.
At least the first electrical connection line and the second electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines are connected to the contained object, and at least one other electrical connection line is disconnected. In this state, information about the operation of the operating means can be notified.
The first electrical connection line and the second electrical connection line are connected to the object to be contained from the back side of the gaming machine.
The operating means is configured to be operable on the operating direction side of the operating means with respect to the end of the forming portion on the side opposite to the operating direction of the operating means.
The housing body can be displaced relative to the predetermined frame member to a position where the operating means does not overlap with the predetermined frame member in the front view of the gaming machine.
The notification means can notify information about the game in a state where the first electrical connection line, the second electrical connection line, and the other electrical connection line are connected to the contained object. gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to. The housing body is a game machine according to claim 1, wherein at least a part and wherein Rukoto is composed of a light transmitting material.

Images